This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?
Basics of Fluid Mechanics
Genick Bar–Meir, Ph. D. 2729 West Jarvis Ave Chicago, IL 606451335 email:barmeir at gmail.com
Copyright © 2010, 2009, 2008, 2007, and 2006 by Genick BarMeir See the ﬁle copying.fdl or copyright.tex for copying conditions. Version (0.3.0.3 December 5, 2010)
‘We are like dwarfs sitting on the shoulders of giants”
from The Metalogicon by John in 1159
CONTENTS
Nomenclature GNU Free Documentation License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . 2. VERBATIM COPYING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. COPYING IN QUANTITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. MODIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . 7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS . . . 8. TRANSLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. TERMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE . . . . . . . ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents How to contribute to this book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Credits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steven from artofproblemsolving.com . . . . . . . . . . . Dan H. Olson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Richard Hackbarth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . John Herbolenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eliezer BarMeir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Henry Schoumertate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your name here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typo corrections and other ”minor” contributions . . . . . Version 0.1.8 August 6, 2008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 189 size 2.6M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Version 0.1 April 22, 2008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvii xxv xxvi xxvii xxvii xxviii xxx xxx xxxi xxxi xxxi xxxi xxxii xxxiii xxxiii xxxiii xxxiv xxxiv xxxiv xxxiv xxxiv xxxiv xxxv xlv xlv xlv
iii
iv
CONTENTS pages 151 size 1.3M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open Channel Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xlv li li 1 1 3 5 6 9 9 10 11 12 21 22 23 30 34 43 43 51 51 53 53 54 54 54 55 57 61 62 63 63 64 67 67 67 69 69 73 77
1 Introduction to Fluid Mechanics 1.1 What is Fluid Mechanics? . . . . . 1.2 Brief History . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Kinds of Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 Shear Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.2 Non–Newtonian Fluids . . 1.5.3 Kinematic Viscosity . . . . 1.5.4 Estimation of The Viscosity 1.6 Fluid Properties . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.1 Fluid Density . . . . . . . 1.6.2 Bulk Modulus . . . . . . . 1.7 Surface Tension . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.1 Wetting of Surfaces . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 Review of Thermodynamics 2.1 Basic Deﬁnitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Review of Mechanics 3.1 Kinematics of of Point Body . . . . . 3.2 Center of Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1 Actual Center of Mass . . . . 3.2.2 Aproximate Center of Area . . 3.3 Moment of Inertia . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.1 Moment of Inertia for Mass . . 3.3.2 Moment of Inertia for Area . . 3.3.3 Examples of Moment of Inertia 3.3.4 Product of Inertia . . . . . . . 3.3.5 Principal Axes of Inertia . . . . 3.4 Newton’s Laws of Motion . . . . . . . 3.5 Angular Momentum and Torque . . . 3.5.1 Tables of geometries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Fluids Statics 4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 The Hydrostatic Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Pressure and Density in a Gravitational Field . . 4.3.1 Constant Density in Gravitational Field . 4.3.2 Pressure Measurement . . . . . . . . . 4.3.3 Varying Density in a Gravity Field . . .
CONTENTS 4.3.4 The Pressure Eﬀects Due To Temperature Variations 4.3.5 Gravity Variations Eﬀects on Pressure and Density . 4.3.6 Liquid Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluid in a Accelerated System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1 Fluid in a Linearly Accelerated System . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 Angular Acceleration Systems: Constant Density . . 4.4.3 Fluid Statics in Geological System . . . . . . . . . . Fluid Forces on Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 Fluid Forces on Straight Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 Forces on Curved Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Buoyancy and Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1 Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.2 Surface Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rayleigh–Taylor Instability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
v 81 85 87 88 88 90 92 95 95 104 111 120 132 133
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
I
Integral Analysis
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
139
141 141 142 143 145 145 152 154 160 163 169 169 169 170 171 171 172 176 179 180 187 188 191
5 Mass Conservation 5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Control Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 Continuity Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.1 Non Deformable Control Volume . . . . . 5.3.2 Constant Density Fluids . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 Reynolds Transport Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 Examples For Mass Conservation . . . . . . . . . 5.6 The Details Picture – Velocity Area Relationship 5.7 More Examples for Mass Conservation . . . . . .
6 Momentum Conservation 6.1 Momentum Governing Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1 Introduction to Continuous . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.2 External Forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.3 Momentum Governing Equation . . . . . . . . . 6.1.4 Momentum Equation in Acceleration System . . 6.1.5 Momentum For Steady State and Uniform Flow . 6.2 Momentum Equation Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.1 Momentum for Unsteady State and Uniform Flow 6.2.2 Momentum Application to Unsteady State . . . . 6.3 Conservation Moment Of Momentum . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 More Examples on Momentum Conservation . . . . . . . 6.4.1 Qualitative Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow . . . . . . . . . 193 193 205 206 207 207 209 209 210 210 212
7 Energy Conservation 7.1 The First Law of Thermodynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 Limitation of Integral Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Approximation of Energy Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.1 Energy Equation in Steady State . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.2 Energy Equation in Frictionless Flow and Steady State . 7.4 Energy Equation in Accelerated System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.1 Energy in Linear Acceleration Coordinate . . . . . . . . 7.4.2 Linear Accelerated System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.3 Energy Equation in Rotating Coordinate System . . . . . 7.4.4 Energy Equation in Accelerated Coordinate with Uniform
II
Diﬀerential Analysis
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
213
215 215 216 219 221 226 226 227 228 232 242 242 246 256 261 261 261 262 263 264 265 269 270 273 274 276 277 278 280
8 Diﬀerential Analysis 8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 Mass Conservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.1 Mass Conservation Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.2 Simpliﬁed Continuity Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 Conservation of General Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.1 Generalization of Mathematical Approach for Derivations 8.3.2 Examples of Generalized of Quantities . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 Momentum Conservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 Derivations of the Momentum Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6 Boundary Conditions and Driving Forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.1 Boundary Conditions Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 Examples for Diﬀerential Equation (NavierStokes) . . . . . . . 8.7.1 Interfacial Instability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Multi–Phase Flow 9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 What to Expect From This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4 Kind of MultiPhase Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5 Classiﬁcation of LiquidLiquid Flow Regimes . . . . . . . . . 9.5.1 Co–Current Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6 Multi–Phase Flow Variables Deﬁnitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.1 Multi–Phase Averaged Variables Deﬁnitions . . . . . 9.7 Homogeneous Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7.1 Pressure Loss Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7.2 Lockhart Martinelli Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8 Solid–Liquid Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8.1 Solid Particles with Heavier Density ρS > ρL . . . . 9.8.2 Solid With Lighter Density ρS < ρ and With Gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTENTS 9.9 Counter–Current Flow . . . . . . . 9.9.1 Horizontal Counter–Current 9.9.2 Flooding and Reversal Flow 9.10 Multi–Phase Conclusion . . . . . . . . . Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vii 281 283 284 291 293 293 294 296 298 304 304 305 307 310 312 315 317 319 319 320 321
A Mathematics For Fluid Mechanics A.1 Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.1 Vector Algebra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1.2 Diﬀerential Operators of Vectors . . . . . . . . A.1.3 Diﬀerentiation of the Vector Operations . . . . A.2 Ordinary Diﬀerential Equations (ODE) . . . . . . . . . A.2.1 First Order Diﬀerential Equations . . . . . . . . A.2.2 Variables Separation or Segregation . . . . . . A.2.3 Non–Linear Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2.4 Second Order Diﬀerential Equations . . . . . . A.2.5 Non–Linear Second Order Equations . . . . . . A.2.6 Third Order Diﬀerential Equation . . . . . . . A.2.7 Forth and Higher Order ODE . . . . . . . . . . A.2.8 A general Form of the Homogeneous Equation A.3 Partial Diﬀerential Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3.1 Firstorder equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.4 Trigonometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index 323 Subjects Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Authors Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
viii CONTENTS .
. . . . . . . . . . . Schematics to describe the shear stress in ﬂuid mechanics The deformation of ﬂuid due to shear stress . . The schematic that explains the summation of moment . . . . Description of the extinguish nozzle . . . . . . .20 1. . . . The diﬀerence of power ﬂuids. . . . . .5 1. . . . . . . . Nitrogen and Argon viscosity. . . . .4 Diagram to explain ﬂuid mechanics branches .1 1. .3 1. . .21 1. . . . . Description of how the center of mass is calculated . . . Water viscosity as a function temperature. . . .14 1. . Capilary rise between two plates . . .3 3. . . .2 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surface tension control volume analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glass tube inserted into mercury . .9 1. . . . . . . . .11 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two liquid layers under pressure . . . . . . . . . Air viscosity as a function of the temperature. . .15 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of liquid surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .LIST OF FIGURES 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thin body center of mass/area schematic. Description of wetting and non–wetting ﬂuids. . Liquid metals viscosity as a function of the temperature . . . . . Reduced viscosity as function of the reduced temperature Reduced viscosity as function of the reduced temperature Rotating disc in a steady state . . . . . . . . . . .10 1. . . . .8 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . of inertia. .1 3.4 1. The raising height as a function of the radii .22 3. . . . . . .6 1. .16 1. . . . . Forces in Contact angle . . . . . . . . . . . Density as a function of the size of sample. . . .18 1. . . . The shear stress as a function of the shear rate. . . . . . .19 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . The raising height as a function of the radius . ix . . . . . . . 2 6 6 7 9 10 10 11 12 15 17 18 21 25 30 31 33 34 34 36 39 39 52 53 54 55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 1. . .12 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circular shape Dam . . . . . . . . . . The general forces acting on a non symmetrical straight area . . . . Schematic to explain the angular angle . . . . .moment of inertia and center of area Triangle for example 3. The general forces acting on non symmetrical straight area . . . . .28 4. . . . . . . .3 4. . . . . . . . . The eﬀective gravity is for accelerated cart .2 4.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two adjoin layers for stability analysis .6 3. . . 56 57 57 58 58 59 59 60 62 67 70 70 71 72 74 75 76 77 80 83 85 88 89 90 90 91 92 95 96 97 99 100 103 104 105 106 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moment on arc element around Point “O” .1 4. .4 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The varying gravity eﬀects on density and pressure . . . . . . . . . . The diﬀerence between the slop and the direction angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic of sensitive measurement device . . . . . . . . .29 4. . .24 4. . . . . .5 4. . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure lines in a static constant density ﬂuid . Cylinder with an element for calculation moment of inertia . . . Inverted manometer . .26 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A cart slide on inclined plane . . . . . . . Area above the dam arc calculation for the center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 3. . . . . . .5 3. .23 4. .12 3. Product of inertia for triangle . . . . . . . . Hydrostatic pressure under a compressible liquid phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 4. . .15 4. . . . . Moment of inertia for rectangular . . Forces diagram of cart sliding on inclined plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tank and the eﬀects diﬀerent liquids . . .11 4. . . . . . Inclined manometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 4. . .7 3. . Schematic of gas measurement utilizing the “U” tube .34 LIST OF FIGURES The schematic to explain the summation of moment of inertia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 4. . . Rectangular area under pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of a ﬂuid element in accelerated system. . . . . . . . A schematic to explain the atmospheric pressure measurement The eﬀective gravity is for accelerated cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of rectangular in x–y plane. . Earth layers not to scale . . . . . . . . . . .8 3. . The general forces acting on submerged area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 . . . . . . .13 4. . . .31 4. . . . . . A square element for the calculations of inertia. The eﬀects of multi layers density on static forces . . . . . . . . . . The ratio of the moment of inertia 2D to 3D. . .11 3. . . . . . . Schematic angular angle to explain example 4. .27 4. . . . . . . . . . . .13 4. . Description of parabola . . . . . .20 4. . . .32 4. . . . . . .7 4. . . . . . .x 3. . . . Schematic of Immersed Cylinder . . . . . . . The forces on curved area . Schematic of submerged area . . . . . . . . . Polynomial shape dam description . . . . . .12 4. .33 4. . . . . . . Area above the dam arc subtract triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 4. . . . . . . .9 3. .9 4. .25 4. . .30 4. . . The ﬂoating forces on Immersed Cylinder . . . Schematic of Net Force on ﬂoating body . . . . .17 4. .8 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Schematic of a thin wall ﬂoating body . . . . . Control volume usage to calculate local averaged velocity Control volume and system in the motion . .1 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measurement of GM of ﬂoating body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 4. . . . . . . . . .5 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 4. . . . .9 5. . . . . . .50 5. . . . . . . . Schematic of ﬂoating cubic . . . . . . . . .12 6. . . . Cubic body dimensions for stability analysis . . . The work on the control volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three liquids layers under rotation . . xi 113 121 121 122 125 125 126 127 128 130 131 133 134 135 136 137 141 142 143 144 147 150 155 160 161 162 163 164 170 173 175 177 178 179 182 183 187 189 192 The explaination for the direction relative to surface . . . . . Flow out of un symmetrical tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Height of the liquid for example 5. . . . . . Velocity for a circular shape . . . . . . . . . Nozzle schematic for forces calculations . . . .3 5. Schematics of ﬂow in a pipe with varying density . . . . . . A new control volume to ﬁnd the velocity in discharge tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . A heavy needle is ﬂoating on a liquid. . . . .45 4. . . . .35 4.1 7. . . . . . . .4 . . . . . Stability analysis of ﬂoating body . . . . . . . . .6 6.36 4. . . . . . . Description of depression to explain the Rayleigh–Taylor instability Description of depression to explain the instability . . . . . . . The eﬀects of liquid movement on the GM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The maximum height reverse as a function of density ratio . . . . . .43 4. . .10 6. . . . . . . . Stability of two triangles put tougher . . . . . . . . . . .6 5. . . . . 197 . . . . . 194 Discharge from a Large Container . . . . . . Schematic of a tank seating on wheels . . Control volume and system in motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 5. .8 6.4 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 6. . . . . . . . . . . . Stability of cubic body inﬁnity long . .4 5. . . . . . . . . . .11 5. . . . . . . . . . .LIST OF FIGURES 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 4. .14 . . . .8 5. . . . . . . Filling of the bucket and choices of the control volumes . . . . . .41 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 6. . . . . . .47 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematics of area impinged by a jet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 4. . . . . . . . . . . .2 5. . . .37 4. . . . . . Propeller schematic to explain the change of momentum . . . . . . . Schematic of ﬂoating bodies . 196 Kinetic Energy and Averaged Velocity . . . . . Schematics of velocities at the interface . .2 7. . . . . . . Toy Sled pushed by the liquid jet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 6. . . . . . . . . The cross section of the interface for max liquid. . . .49 4.40 4. . . . . . . . . . . Boat for example 5. . . . . . Circular cross section for ﬁnding Ux . . . .46 4. . . . Boundary Layer control mass . . . .11 7. . . . . . .42 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 5.1 6. A rocket with a moving control volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 5. . . . . . Calculations of GM for abrupt shape body . . . . . . Piston control volume . The impeller of the centrifugal pump and the velocities diagram Nozzle schematics water rocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 6. . . . . .
. . . . 293 A. . . . . . . . . . . . .4 8. . . A ﬂow map to explain the horizontal counter–current ﬂow. . . . . . .xii 7.2 The right hand rule . . . . . Diagram to analysis the shear stress tensor . . . . . . .5 8. . . . . Stress diagram on a tetrahedron shape . . Deformations of diﬀerent rectangles . . . . . . . .1 9. . . . . . . . . . . . 300 . . . . . . . Liquid ﬂow due to gravity . . . . . . . . (b) Deformations of the straight angle triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 9. . . . . . . . . Plug ﬂow in horizontal tubes with the liquids ﬂow is faster. . Mass ﬂow due to temperature diﬀerence . . .2 8. . . . 206 The mass balance on the inﬁnitesimal control volume . . General forces diagram to calculated the in a two dimension geometry. . . . . . . . . .8 8. . . . . . . . . . .10 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–Dimensional free surface . . . . The shear stress at diﬀerent surfaces . . . . . Mass ﬂow in coating process . . . . . . . . Modiﬁed Mandhane map for ﬂow regime in horizontal tubes. . .9 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control volume at t and t + dt under continuous angle deformation Shear stress at two coordinates in 45◦ orientations . 294 A. . . . . . . The terminal velocity that left the solid particles. . . . . . . . . .1 8. . . . . . . . . .8 9. . .9 9. . . . . . . . . . A dimensional vertical ﬂow map low gravity against gravity. . .12 9. . . . Counter–current ﬂow in a can.3 Cylindrical Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . .10 LIST OF FIGURES Flow in an oscillating manometer . . . . . . .6 9. . . . . . . . . . . . Mass ﬂow due to temperature diﬀerence . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 8. . . . .15 8. . . One dimensional ﬂow with shear between plates . . Flow in kerosene lamp . . . .7 8. . . . Gas and liquid in Flow in verstical tube against the gravity. . . . . . . .4 8. . . . . . . Flow of Liquid between concentric cylinders .13 8. . . . . . . .3 9. . . . . . .6 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 218 220 221 229 230 232 234 235 237 237 237 238 243 245 246 246 248 249 252 254 256 263 265 266 266 267 268 269 279 280 281 282 282 283 284 284 290 8. . . Kind of Stratiﬁed ﬂow in horizontal tubes.1 Vector in Cartesian coordinates system . . . . . . . .17 8. . . A diagram to explain the ﬂood in a two dimension geometry. . .19 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 9. . . . .11 9. . . . Flow between two plates top moving . . . Flow driven by surface tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 9.11 8. . . . . . .2 9. . . . . .14 8. . .3 8. . . . .15 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linear strain of the element . . . . The mass conservation in cylindrical coordinates . . . . . . . . The control volume in pipe ﬂow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Counter–ﬂow in vertical tubes map. . . . . . . A. . . . . . . . . .16 Diﬀerent ﬁelds of multi phase ﬂow. Flood in vertical pipe. . . . . . . . Image of countercurrent ﬂow in liquid–gas/solid–gas conﬁgurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (a) Deformations of the isosceles triangular .12 8.4 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The ﬂow patterns in solidliquid ﬂow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stratiﬁed ﬂow in horizontal tubes when the liquids ﬂow is very slow. . . . . .7 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 8. . . . .
.LIST OF FIGURES A. xiii 301 302 303 321 . . . . Parabolic coordinates by user WillowW using Blender The tringle angles sides . . . . . . . . . The general Orthogonal with unit vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Spherical Coordinate System . .6 A. . .4 A. . . . .5 A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiv LIST OF FIGURES .
. . .2 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The surface tension for selected materials. . . . . . . . . Viscosity of selected liquids . . .1 3. .1 Orthogonal coordinates systems (under construction please ignore) . .3 1. . . . . . . . Moments of Inertia full shape. . . . . . . . .7 2. . . . . .6 1. . Bulk modulus for selected materials . . . . . . .5 1. . . . . . . . . . Viscosity of selected gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 xv . . . . . . . . . . Properties at the critical stage . . . . . 13 13 14 15 23 35 41 42 48 65 66 Properties of Various Ideal Gases [300K] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 1. . . . . . . . . . . . continue . . . xlii Sutherland’s equation coeﬃcients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The contact angle for air/water with selected materials. . . .7 1.LIST OF TABLES 1 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moment of inertia for various plane surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 3. . . . . . . . . . A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Books Under Potto Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 1. . . .
xvi LIST OF TABLES .
page 47 Internal energy.38). page 12 External forces by non–ﬂuids means. page 187 viscosity at input temperature T.22).NOMENCLATURE ¯ R τ Universal gas constant. page 43 M µ µ0 F ext U Ξ A a Bf c. page 104 The acceleration of object or system. see equation (1.43).v. see equation (4. see equation (6.3). page 277 The area of surface.136). see equation (6. page 44 xvii . see equation (2.26). see equation (4. page 170 Units length. see equation (6. page 44 Internal Energy per unit mass.1). see equation (6. see equation (2. see equation (2.1). see equation (9.23). page 169 Martinelli parameter. Ti0 . page 45 subscribe for control volume. see equation (2.7). page 12 reference viscosity at reference temperature. see equation (2.. page 47 Speciﬁc volume heat. page 142 Speciﬁc pressure heat. page 47 The shear stress Tenser. see equation (1.17). Cp Cv EU Eu Angular Momentum.0).0). page 67 Body force.17).6). see equation (2.11). see equation (5.9). see equation (2. page 171 The velocity taken with the direction.
page 46 the ratio of the speciﬁc heats.18).4).24). page 47 Fluid thermal conductivity. see equation (2. page 12 velocity . page 46 Speciﬁc enthalpy.3). see equation (2.2). page 44 the coordinate in z direction.40). see equation (7. see equation (3.xviii Ei G gG H h k kT L System energy at state i. see equation (1. see equation (2.14).1.67). page 194 Angular momentum.17).27). page 48 Entropy of the system. page 64 reference temperature in degrees Kelvin.17).0). see equation (4.6).17).2).6).13). see equation (1.104). see equation (2.18). see equation (2. see equation (2. see equation (2. page 12 input temperature in degrees Kelvin. page 46 Suth is Sutherland’s constant and it is presented in the Table 1. page 142 . page 44 The energy transfered to the system between state 1 and state 2.0). page 67 Enthalpy. page 86 general Body force. see equation (2. page 44 The work done by the system between state 1 and state 2.42). see equation (4. page 97 q Q12 R S Suth Tτ Ti0 Tin U w W12 z says Energy per unit mass. see equation (3. page 69 Subscribe says. see equation (1. page 44 The gravitation constant. see equation (5.2). page 44 Speciﬁc gas constant. see equation (4. see equation (2. page 44 Work per unit mass. page 63 LIST OF TABLES Patmos Atmospheric Pressure. see equation (2. page 12 Torque. see equation (2. see equation (4.
artofproblemsolving. 2010 (3.2 Nov 19.3. Version 0.0.The Book Change Log Version 0. additional examples in mass conservation chapter. Improve English in several chapters.3 Dec 5.3 M 358 pages) Build the chapter log ﬁle for latex (macro) process Steven from www. Addition of several examples with respect speed of sound with variation density under bulk modulus.3.3 M 362 pages) Further improved the script for the chapter log ﬁle for latex (macro) process. xix .3 M 378 pages) Add additional discussion about bulk modulus of geological system. Version 0.3. Addition of several examples. 2010 (3. 2010 (3. This addition was to go the compressible book and will migrate to there when the book will brought up to code.1 Nov 12.0.0.com. Brought the mass conservation chapter to code. Add discussion change of bulk modulus of mixture.
2. Add example. Improve English in several chapters. Correct the ideal gas relationship typo thanks to Michal Zadrozny. Add to the appendix the diﬀerentiation of vector operations.3 M 354 pages) Change the emphasis equations to new style in Static chapter. Version 0.0. 2010 (3. . Minimal discussion of converting integral equation to diﬀerential equations. Add discussion about inclined manometer Improve many ﬁgures and equations in Static chapter. Add several examples on surface tension. Improve English in static and mostly in diﬀerential analysis chapter.9 Sep 20.1 Oct 11.9. Minor correction to to the wording in page 11 viscosity density issue (thanks to Prashant Balan). 2010 (3. Add example to dif chap on concentric cylinders poiseuille ﬂow. change to the new empheq format and improve cylinder ﬁgure.2. Add example of falling liquid gravity as driving force in presence of shear stress.3.0 Oct 24. Version 0. Version 0.3 M 344 pages) Change the emphasis equations to new style in Thermo chapter. Improve the emphasis macro for the important equation and useful equation. 2010 (3.3 M 338 pages) Initial release of the diﬀerential equations chapter. Improvement of properties chapter.xx LIST OF TABLES Add discussion change of density on buck modulus calculations as example as integral equation.
9 Dec 01.artofproblemsolving.4 March 01.9 M 280 pages) add example to Mechanical Chapter and some spelling corrected. Add Reynold’s Transform explanation.6 M 219 pages) The mass conservation chapter was released.artofproblemsolving. Add example on angular rotation to statics chapter.1.8 M 241 pages) The momentum conservation chapter was released.2. Add the macro to improve emphases equation thanks to Steven from www. Add example about the the third component of the velocity.com.com.3 Jan 01.artofproblemsolving. Add the macro protect to insert ﬁgure in lower right corner thanks to Steven from www. Thanks to Eliezer BarMeir Version 0.LIST OF TABLES xxi Version 0. Corrections to Static Chapter. English corrections.9 M 280 pages) The energy conservation chapter was released. Additions to the mathematical appendix on vector algebra.6 March 10. Some additions to mass conservation chapter on averaged velocity. English corrections. Version 0. Some additions to momentum conservation chapter.2. 2010 (2. 2010 (2.com.2. . Thanks to Eliezer BarMeir Version 0. 2009 (2. Add the macro ekes to equations in examples thanks to Steven from www. Additions to the mathematical appendix on variables separation in second order ode equations. 2010 (2.
Improve the dwarﬁng macro to allow ﬂexibility with sub title.6 M 183 pages) Fixing some long titles issues. Add an example to mechanics chapter. Version 0.8. English corrections. Two open questions were released.1.5 Nov 01.1. Version 0. 2008 (2. Correcting the gas properties tables (thanks to Heru and Micheal) Move the gas tables to common area to all the books.4 M 189 pages) Add the chapter on introduction to muli–phase ﬂow Again additional improvement to the index (thanks to Irene).1. Add the ﬁrst draft of the temperaturevelocity diagram to the Therm’s chapter. Thanks to Eliezer BarMeir Version 0. Improve the doChap scrip to break up the book to chapters. 2009 (2. Version 0. Add the Rayleigh–Taylor instability. 2009 (2. .5 M 197 pages) Continue ﬁxing the long titles issues.8. Add some examples to static chapter.xxii LIST OF TABLES Add the open question concept.1 Sep 17.5 M 203 pages) First true draft for the mass conservation.8 Aug 6.1.8a July 5. 2009 (2.
4 M 149 pages) Add the introduction. Version 0. Fix very minor issues (English) in the static chapter. Remove the multiphase chapter (it is not for public consumption yet).5a Jun 11.1 M 111 pages) Major English corrections for the three chapters.1. 2008 Version 0.6 Jun 30. 2008 (1.3 M 151 pages) Fix the English in the introduction chapter.4 M 155 pages) Add the constant table list for the introduction chapter.5 Jun 5. (thanks to Tousher). The static chapter was released (the most extensive and detailed chapter). 2008 The Thermodynamics chapter was released.1. Fix minor issues (English) in the introduction chapter.LIST OF TABLES xxiii Version 0.1. Minor corrections for all three chapters. 2008 (1. viscosity and other properties of ﬂuid. Add the product of inertia to mechanics chapter. .1a April 23. Version 0.1 May 8. 2008 (1.1a April 23. Version 0. 2008 (1. Improve the Index (thanks to Irene). Version 0. The mechanics chapter was released.1.
xxiv LIST OF TABLES .
you are required to furnish the author with two (2) copies of the printed book. The change of the license is to prevent from situations that the author has to buy his own book.2002 Free Software Foundation. MA 021101301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document. textbook. Boston. Secondarily. ”If you print more than 200 copies. Preamble The purpose of this License is to make a manual. The Potto Project License doesn’t long apply to this document and associated docoments.Notice of Copyright For This Document: This document is published under modiﬁed FDL. 51 Franklin St.2. either commercially or noncommercially. with or without modifying it. Fifth Floor. or other functional and useful document ”free” in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the eﬀective freedom to copy and redistribute it. GNU Free Documentation License The modiﬁcation is that under section 3 “copying in quantity” should be add in the end.2001. November 2002 Copyright ©2000. this License preserves for the author and xxv . but changing it is not allowed.” Version 1. Inc.
which is a copyleft license designed for free software. to use that work under the conditions stated herein. as being those of Invariant Sections. The ”Document”. unlimited in duration. Any member of the public is a licensee. as FrontCover Texts or BackCover Texts. while not being considered responsible for modiﬁcations made by others. because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. and is addressed as ”you”. modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law. 1. refers to any such manual or work. ethical or political position regarding them. below. We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software. (Thus. or with modiﬁcations and/or translated into another language. If a section does not ﬁt the above deﬁnition of Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant.xxvi LIST OF TABLES publisher a way to get credit for their work. This License is a kind of ”copyleft”. or of legal. that is suitable for revising the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for . that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference. A ”Transparent” copy of the Document means a machinereadable copy. A FrontCover Text may be at most 5 words. royaltyfree license.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters. A ”Modiﬁed Version” of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it. You accept the license if you copy. and a BackCover Text may be at most 25 words. regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. represented in a format whose speciﬁcation is available to the general public. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS This License applies to any manual or other work. either copied verbatim. The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections. Such a notice grants a worldwide. A ”Secondary Section” is a named appendix or a frontmatter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document’s overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics. The ”Cover Texts” are certain short passages of text that are listed. in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. The ”Invariant Sections” are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated. in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. philosophical. But this License is not limited to software manuals. commercial. It complements the GNU General Public License. it can be used for any textual work. in any medium. If the Document does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none. which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. and you may publicly display copies. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such. but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has no eﬀect on the meaning of this License. COPYING IN QUANTITY . However. 3. ”Title Page” means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work’s title. SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available. (Here XYZ stands for a speciﬁc section name mentioned below. under the same conditions stated above.GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE xxvii images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor. you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. for a printed book. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3. A copy that is not ”Transparent” is called ”Opaque”. VERBATIM COPYING You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium. PostScript or PDF designed for human modiﬁcation. XCF and JPG. ”Dedications”. LaTeX input format.) To ”Preserve the Title” of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a section ”Entitled XYZ” according to this deﬁnition. either commercially or noncommercially. These Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this License. Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup. Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors. The ”Title Page” means. plus such following pages as are needed to hold. preceding the beginning of the body of the text. ”Endorsements”. legibly. and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A section ”Entitled XYZ” means a named subunit of the Document whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following text that translates XYZ in another language. and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies. and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which states that this License applies to the Document. has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modiﬁcation by readers is not Transparent. PostScript or PDF produced by some word processors for output purposes only. An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text. You may also lend copies. Examples of transparent image formats include PNG. the material this License requires to appear in the title page. the title page itself. the copyright notices. or absence of markup. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent ﬁle format whose markup. such as ”Acknowledgements”. and the machinegenerated HTML. provided that this License. Texinfo input format. and standardconforming simple HTML. SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD. 2. or ”History”.
and the Document’s license notice requires Cover Texts. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. In addition. . if there were any. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the Modiﬁed Version. with the Modiﬁed Version ﬁlling the role of the Document. when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity. if any) a title distinct from that of the Document. be listed in the History section of the Document). unless they release you from this requirement. and from those of previous versions (which should. or state in or with each Opaque copy a computernetwork location from which the general networkusing public has access to download using publicstandard network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. you must take reasonably prudent steps. free of added material. Copying with changes limited to the covers. B. C. you must do these things in the Modiﬁed Version: A. and BackCover Texts on the back cover. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers. as the publisher. If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100. It is requested. List on the Title Page. all these Cover Texts: FrontCover Texts on the front cover. you must either include a machinereadable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy. numbering more than 100. that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies. clearly and legibly. to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public. MODIFICATIONS You may copy and distribute a Modiﬁed Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above. but not required. one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modiﬁcations in the Modiﬁed Version. thus licensing distribution and modiﬁcation of the Modiﬁed Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. you must enclose the copies in covers that carry. to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document. and continue the rest onto adjacent pages.xxviii LIST OF TABLES If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have printed covers) of the Document. 4. You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission. You may add other material on the covers in addition. you should put the ﬁrst ones listed (as many as ﬁt reasonably) on the actual cover. as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions. If you use the latter option. together with at least ﬁve of the principal authors of the Document (all of its principal authors. can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects. provided that you release the Modiﬁed Version under precisely this License. if it has fewer than ﬁve). as authors. If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to ﬁt legibly.
To do this. Include an unaltered copy of this License. Preserve the network location. given in the Document for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document. I. . Preserve the section Entitled ”History”. year. You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself. J. a license notice giving the public permission to use the Modiﬁed Version under the terms of this License. L. G. add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modiﬁed Version’s license notice. H. Preserve its Title. F. and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. O. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles. in the form shown in the Addendum below. or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers. then add an item describing the Modiﬁed Version as stated in the previous sentence. If the Modiﬁed Version includes new frontmatter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document. and publisher of the Modiﬁed Version as given on the Title Page. new authors. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document’s license notice. Include. you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. K. Preserve the Title of the section. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modiﬁcations adjacent to the other copyright notices. M. immediately after the copyright notices. if any. and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page. authors. xxix E. Delete any section Entitled ”Endorsements”. Such a section may not be included in the Modiﬁed Version. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled ”Endorsements” or to conﬂict in title with any Invariant Section. For any section Entitled ”Acknowledgements” or ”Dedications”. N.GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE D. create one stating the title. unaltered in their text and in their titles. and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein. and add to it an item stating at least the title. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document. These may be placed in the ”History” section. If there is no section Entitled ”History” in the Document. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document. year.
You must delete all sections Entitled ”Endorsements”. provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but diﬀerent contents. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work. under the terms deﬁned in section 4 above for modiﬁed versions. You may add a passage of up to ﬁve words as a FrontCover Text. to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modiﬁed Version. and a passage of up to 25 words as a BackCover Text. 5.xxx LIST OF TABLES You may add a section Entitled ”Endorsements”. you may not add another. If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover. provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modiﬁed Version by various parties–for example. forming one section Entitled ”History”. previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of. You may extract a single document from such a collection. likewise combine any sections Entitled ”Acknowledgements”. and any sections Entitled ”Dedications”. you must combine any sections Entitled ”History” in the various original documents. or else a unique number. COMBINING DOCUMENTS You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License. and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers. and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License. . on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one. 6. provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document. provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents. but you may replace the old one. in parentheses. and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy. Only one passage of FrontCover Text and one of BackCover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice. and distribute it individually under this License. unmodiﬁed. the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known. In the combination. make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it. The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modiﬁed Version. and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document. statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative deﬁnition of a standard. The combined work need only contain one copy of this License.
or distribute the Document except as expressly provided for under this License. sublicense. modify. or the electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. and all the license notices in the Document. sublicense or distribute the Document is void. If the Document speciﬁes that a particular numbered version of this License ”or any later . ”Dedications”. Any other attempt to copy. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original version of this License or a notice or disclaimer. this License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative works of the Document. the Document’s Cover Texts may be placed on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders. 10. Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. or rights. is called an ”aggregate” if the copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. 9. If a section in the Document is Entitled ”Acknowledgements”. modify. but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections.org/copyleft/. revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. the original version will prevail.GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE xxxi 7. TERMINATION You may not copy. However. in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium. You may include a translation of this License. If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works. When the Document is included in an aggregate. the requirement (section 4) to Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual title. TRANSLATION Translation is considered a kind of modiﬁcation. but may diﬀer in detail to address new problems or concerns. and any Warranty Disclaimers.gnu. See http://www. Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate. 8. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version. provided that you also include the original English version of this License and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers. or ”History”. and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. parties who have received copies. then if the Document is less than one half of the entire aggregate. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE The Free Software Foundation may publish new.
2 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation.” line with this: with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES. and no BackCover Texts. with no Invariant Sections. include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page: Copyright ©YEAR YOUR NAME. merge those two alternatives to suit the situation.Texts. . you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ”GNU Free Documentation License”. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License. distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License. replace the ”with. If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code.xxxii LIST OF TABLES version” applies to it. ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents To use this License in a document you have written.. you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that speciﬁed version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. with the FrontCover Texts being LIST. or some other combination of the three. Permission is granted to copy. Version 1. we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license. to permit their use in free software. no FrontCover Texts.. such as the GNU General Public License. FrontCover Texts and BackCover Texts. and with the BackCover Texts being LIST. If you have Invariant Sections. If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts.
date. Please understand that when I classify a contribution as ”minor. and resources to make this a better book! Date(s) of contribution(s): 1999 to present Nature of contribution: Original author. I am indebted to all those who have given freely of their own knowledge. Dec. Any and all contributions are gratefully accepted. Major contributions are listed by individual name with some detail on the nature of the contribution(s).CONTRIBUTOR LIST How to contribute to this book As a copylefted work.” it is in no way inferior to the eﬀort or value of a ”major” contribution.com Steven from artofproblemsolving. contact info. 2009 xxxiii . Contact at: barmeir at gmail. etc. etc. This is a copyrighted work: it is not in the public domain! If you wish to cite portions of this book in a work of your own. Minor contributions (typo corrections. this book is open to revisions and expansions by any interested parties. just smaller in the sense of less text changed. Credits All entries have been arranged in alphabetical order of surname (hopefully. The only ”catch” is that credit must be given where credit is due.) are listed by name only for reasons of brevity.com Date(s) of contribution(s): June 2005. time. you must follow the same guidelines as for any other GDL copyrighted work.
xxxiv LIST OF TABLES Nature of contribution: LaTeX formatting. John Herbolenes Date(s) of contribution(s): August 2009 Nature of contribution: Provide some example for the static chapter. Nature of contribution: In 2009 creating the exEq macro to have diﬀerent counter for example. Richard Hackbarth Date(s) of contribution(s): April 2008 Nature of contribution: Some discussions about chapter on mechanics and correction of English. Your name here Date(s) of contribution(s): Month and year of contribution Nature of contribution: Insert text here. Dan H. Contact at: my email@provider. Eliezer BarMeir Date(s) of contribution(s): Nov 2009. Henry Schoumertate Date(s) of contribution(s): Nov 2009 Nature of contribution: Discussion on the mathematics of Reynolds Transforms. Nature of contribution: Correct many English mistakes Momentum. Olson Date(s) of contribution(s): April 2008 Nature of contribution: Some discussions about chapter on mechanics and correction of English.net . Dec 2009 Nature of contribution: Correct many English mistakes Mass. help on building the useful equation and important equation macros. describing how you contributed to the book.
January 2008. Corretion to equation (2. Gupta.CREDITS xxxv Typo corrections and other ”minor” contributions R. Tousher Yang April 2008.38) by Michal Zadrozny. help with the original img macro and other ( LaTeX issues). (Nov 2010) Corretion to wording in viscosity density Prashant Balan. review of statics and thermo chapters. (Nov 2010) .
xxxvi LIST OF TABLES .
BarMeir developed models that explained several manufacturing processes such the rapid evacuation of gas from containers. this author’s views had changed and the virtue of the practical part of any model becomes the essential part of his ideas. All the models have practical applicability. Much of his time has been spend doing research in the ﬁeld of heat and mass transfer (related to renewal energy issues) and this includes ﬂuid mechanics related to manufacturing processes and design.D. he spends time writing books (there are already three very popular books) and softwares for the POTTO project (see Potto Prologue). books and software. Bar– 1 Where the mathematicians were able only to prove that the solution exists. the critical piston velocity in a partially ﬁlled chamber (related to hydraulic jump). in Mechanical Engineering from University of Minnesota and a Master in Fluid Mechanics from Tel Aviv University. the author’s models were used in numerical works. The author enjoys to encourage his students to understand the material beyond the basic requirements of exams. R. BarMeir was the last student of the late Dr. application of supply and demand to rapid change power system and etc. and Canada. Now. In the area of compressible ﬂow. it was commonly believed and taught that there is only weak and strong shock and it is continue by Prandtl–Meyer function.G. and the CICYT and the European Commission provides 1FD972333 grants for minor aspects of that models. Moreover.About This Author Genick BarMeir holds a Ph. For example. Spain. Currently. Dr. the Spanish Comision Interministerial provides grants TAP970489 and PB980007. These models are based on analytical solution to a family of equations1 . In his early part of his professional life. BarMeir was mainly interested in elegant models whether they have or not a practical applicability. in GM.E. He developed models for Mass Transfer in high concentration that became a building blocks for many other models. British industry. xxxvii . Eckert. These models have been extended by several research groups (needless to say with large research grants). As the change in the view occurred.
A past project of his was building a four stories house. BarMeir demonstrated that common Prandtl–Meyer explanation violates the conservation of mass and therefor the turn must be around a ﬁnite radius. In his book “Basics of Fluid Mechanics”. he often feels clueless about computers and programing. All the previous models for the ﬂooding phenomenon did not have a physical explanation to the dryness. The common explanation to Prandtl–Meyer function shows that ﬂow can turn in a sharp corner. BarMeir demonstrated that ﬂuids must have wavy surface when the materials ﬂow together. While he is known to look like he knows about many things. The author’s explanations on missing diameter and other issues in fanno ﬂow and ““naughty professor’s question”” are used in the industry. He described and categorized the ﬁlling and evacuating of chamber by compressible ﬂuid in which he also found analytical solutions to cases where the working ﬂuid was ideal gas. the author just know to learn quickly. The author lives with his wife and three children. . Engineers have constructed design that based on this conclusion. practically from scratch. The author spent years working on the sea (ships) as a engine sea oﬃcer but now the author prefers to remain on solid ground. He built a model to explain the ﬂooding problem (two phase ﬂow) based on the physics. He also build analytical solution to several moving shock cases.xxxviii LIST OF TABLES Meir discovered the analytical solution for oblique shock and showed that there is a quiet buﬀer between the oblique shock and Prandtl–Meyer. While he writes his programs and does other computer chores. He also constructed and explained many new categories for two ﬂow regimes.
judges simply manufacture facts to make the little guy lose and pay for the defense of his work. xxxix . like an open source. As R. There is always someone who can add to the book. It has become very clear to the author and founder of the POTTO Project that this situation must be stopped. The wikipedia is an excellent collection of articles which are written by various individuals. It is apparent that writing textbooks especially for college students as a cooperation.harvard. said instead of whining about arrogance and incorrectness. the corrupted court system defends the “big” guys and on the other hand.edu/openlaw/eldredvashcroft for more information) copyrights practically remain indeﬁnitely with the holder (not the creator). The Potto Project has far greater goals than simply correcting an abusive Judicial system or simply exposing abusive judges.wikipedia.Prologue For The POTTO Project This books series was born out of frustrations in two respects. The ﬁrst issue is the enormous price of college textbooks. one of this author’s sages. Hence. 3 In some sense one can view the encyclopedia Wikipedia as an open content project (see http://en. Kook.law. is a new idea3 . The writing of a technical book is really a collection of information and practice. This project is to increase wisdom and humility. one should increase wisdom. As individuals we have to obey the law. However. The study of technical material isn’t only done by having to memorize the material. It is unacceptable that the price of the college books will be over $150 per book (over 10 hours of work for an average student in The United States). the creation of the POTTO Project. The second issue that prompted the writing of this book is the fact that we as the public have to deal with a corrupted judicial system. On one hand. Ashcroﬀ (see http://cyber. particularly the copyright law with the “inﬁnite2 ” time with the copyright holders.org/wiki/Main Page). Writing a book in the technical ﬁeld is not the same as writing a novel. punishes the small “entrepreneur” who tries to defend his or her work. but also by coming to understand and be able to solve 2 After the last decision of the Supreme Court in the case of Eldred v. when applied to “small” individuals who are not able to hire a large legal ﬁrm.
The author has not found any technique that is more useful for this purpose than practicing the solving of problems and exercises. the undersigned believes that personal intentions are appropriate and are the author’s/organizer’s private aﬀair. The book’s contributor’s names could be written by their sections. Why would someone volunteer to be an author or organizer of such a book? This is the ﬁrst question the undersigned was asked. One component is to come to know and socialize with many in the profession. in the course of their teaching they have found that the textbook they were using contains sections that can be improved or that are not as good as their own notes. The collective material is much richer than any single person can create by himself. Thus. To reach this possibility the collective book idea was created/adapted. For others the social part is as simple as a desire to reduce the price of college textbooks. When an insect which is blind can be so powerful by networking. then that contributor will be the copyright holder of that speciﬁc section (even within question/answer sections). Whatever the reasons. The desire to be an author of a well–known book (at least in his/her profession) will convince some to put forth the eﬀort. this method is expected to accelerate the creation of these high quality books. For some contributors/authors. The answer varies from individual to individual. One can be successful when one solves as many problems as possible.uk/bugclub/raiders. Nigel R. In a way. It is not just for experts to contribute. the collective power of their networking creates an extremely powerful intelligence to carry out this attack4 . If a contributor of a section in such a book can be easily identiﬁed. the reason is the pure fun of writing and organizing educational material. The following example explains this point: The army ant is a kind of carnivorous ant that lives and hunts in the tropics.” American Scientist. While a single ant is not intelligent enough to attack and hunt large prey. For some authors. While one can be as creative as possible.html) . the popularity of the books should be one of the incentives for potential contributors. It is hoped that because of the open nature of these books. they now have an opportunity to put their notes to use for others. Experience has shown that in explaining to others any given subject. In these cases. These books are written in a similar manner to the open source software 4 see also in Franks. ”Army Ants: A Collective Intelligence. one also begins to better understand the material. 77:139.. hunting animals that are even up to a hundred kilograms in weight.ex. contributing to these books will help one to understand the material better.ac. The student’s contributions can be done by adding a question and perhaps the solution. there are always others who can see new aspects of or add to the material. For others. the books on compressible ﬂow and die casting became the most popular books in their respective area. but also students who happened to be doing their homework. For example.xl LIST OF TABLES related problems. so can we in creating textbooks by this powerful tool. The social function can have at least two components. they will become the most popular books and the most read books in their respected ﬁeld. especially for family members or relatives and those students lacking funds. The secret of the ants’ power lies in their collective intelligence. the writing of or contributing to this kind of books will serve as a social function. Thus. 1989 (see for information http://www.
The book on compressible ﬂow is also used by “young engineers and scientists” in NASA according to Dr. better discussions or better explanations are all welcome to these books. The books are used in more than 165 diﬀerent countries around the world. These books should be considered more as a project than to ﬁt the traditional deﬁnition of “plain” books. Potto has auxiliary materials such as the gas dynamics tables (the largest compressible ﬂow tables collection in the world). these works will have a version number because they are alive and continuously evolving. Unlike a regular book. The undersigned of this document intends to be the organizer/author/coordinator of the projects in the following areas: 5 Data are not copyrighted.CREDITS xli process. Nevertheless. graphs and etc. These books are intended to be “continuous” in the sense that there will be someone who will maintain and improve the books with time (the organizer(s)). Someone has to write the skeleton and hopefully others will add “ﬂesh and skin. For example. the traditional role of author will be replaced by an organizer who will be the one to compile the book.” In this process. Thus. some errors are possible and expected. The organizer of the book in some instances will be the main author of the work. other books contain data5 which can be typeset in A LTEX. many algorithms for calculating Fanno ﬂow parameters which are not found in any other book. the contributions to books can be done by many who are not experts. Thus. Potto books on compressible ﬂow and ﬂuid mechanics are used as the main textbook or as a reference book in several universities around the world.000 copies a month. Farassat. NASA Langley Research Center. contributions can be made from any part of the world by those who wish to translate the book. . Additionally. It is hoped that the books will be errorfree. In the last 5 years three textbooks have been constructed which are available for download. etc. Gas Dynamics Calculator (PottoGDC). But more than that. These data (tables. This may merely be the person who decides what will go into the book and what will not (gate keeper). Every month people from about 110 diﬀerent countries download these books. These books contain innovative ideas which make some chapters the best in the world. In addition. The combined number downloads of these books is over half a million (December 2009) or in a rate of 20. while in other cases only the gate keeper.) can be redone by anyone who has the time to do it. It is also hoped that others will contribute to the question and answer sections in the book. the chapters on Fanno ﬂow and Oblique shock contain many original ideas such as the full analytical solution to the oblique shock. chapters or sections can be added after the skeleton has been written. Even if not complete.
in Gamma Stage is when all the chapters are written and some of the chapters are in a mature form. The mature stage of a chapter is when all or nearly all the sections are in a mature stage and have a mature bibliography as well as numerous examples for every section. and all of the examples and data (tables. The idea that a book can be created as a project has mushroomed from the open source software concept. ﬁgures. a process in which books .) are already presented.1. But such a thing is hard to deﬁne and should be enough for this stage.4. other deﬁnitions give merely a hint on the status. etc. in Beta Stage is when all or almost all of the chapters have been written and are at least in a draft stage.3 0.0.2 0.1 0.1 0.0 Based on Eckert Availability for Public Download Mechanics Open Channel Flow Statics Strength of Material Thermodynamics Two/Multi ﬂow phases NSY NSY early alpha NSY early alpha NSY ﬁrst chapter 0. traditionally books have been improved by the same author(s). However.0. and special cases. advanced topics.0. Books under development in Potto project.0. While some terms are deﬁned in a relatively clear fashion.0 0.0.0 0.xlii Table 1.0. and the Advanced Stage is when all of the basic material is written and all that is left are aspects that are active. LIST OF TABLES Project Name Compressible Flow Die Casting Dynamics Fluid Mechanics Heat Transfer Progress beta alpha NSY alpha NSY Remarks Version 0.01 TelAviv’notes 0.0.0. but it has roots in the way science progresses.0 0.8.0 NSY = Not Started Yet The meaning of the progress is as: The Alpha Stage is when some of the chapters are already in a rough draft. The mature stage of a section is when all of the topics in the section are written.0.0 0.
only LTEX. There are book(s) that have continued after their author passed away. many of whom volunteered to help.. and Microsoft Word software. These chores can be done independently from each other and by more than one individual. who passed way some years ago. A new version is created every several years. which include the actual writing of the text. Word processors. the Boundary Layer Theory originated6 by Hermann Schlichting but continues to this day. and writing the A LTEX macros7 which will put the text into an attractive format. and perhaps troﬀ. But more A than that. have the ability to produce the quality that one expects for A these writings. .CREDITS xliii have a new version every a few years. Abiword. are the only ones which have a cross platform ability to produce macros and a uniform feel and quality. any text that is produced by Microsoft and kept in “Microsoft” format are against the spirit of this project In that they force spending money on Microsoft software. writing examples. such as OpenOﬃce. 7 One can only expect that open source and readable format will be used for this project. are not appropriate for these projects. The text processes. projects such as the Linux Documentation project demonstrated that books can be written as the cooperative eﬀort of many individuals. because of the open nature of this project. pieces of material and data can be used by diﬀerent books. especially LTEX. Again. However. Schlichting. i. Further. 6 Originally authored by Dr. Writing a textbook is comprised of many aspects. creating diagrams and ﬁgures.e.
xliv LIST OF TABLES .
and civil engineering. chemical engineering. in this version. Now. it was proven that this wavy interface is created due to the need to satisfy the continuous velocity and shear stress at the interface and not a disturbance. The introduction to multi–phase is another example to this quality. aerospace engineering. While it is a hard work to discover and develop and bring this information to the students. One can only admire the wonderful advances done by the xlv . 2008 pages 189 size 2. Even in this early development stage. 2008 pages 151 size 1. This author was bothered by this explanation. it is very satisfying for the author. and electrical engineering. In fact. This issue is related to renewal energy of extracting energy from brine solution (think about the Dead Sea.1 April 22. the common material is presented and hopefully can be used by all. it is also related to disciplines like industrial engineering. number of downloads per month is about 5000 copies.1. This explanation (on the wavy interface) demonstrates this characteristic of Potto project books.Prologue For This Book Version 0. The common explanation to the wave existence was that there is always a disturbance which causes instability. Version 0. While the emphasis is somewhat diﬀerent in this book. so much energy).6M When this author was an undergraduate student.8 August 6. Potto project books are characterized by high quality which marked by presentation of the new developments and clear explanations. he spend time to study the wave phenomenon at the interface of open channel ﬂow. The number of downloads of this book results from this quality.3M The topic of ﬂuid mechanics is common to several disciplines: mechanical engineering.
xlvi
LIST OF TABLES
previous geniuses who work in this ﬁeld. In this book it is hoped to insert, what and when a certain model is suitable than other models. One of the diﬀerence in this book is the insertion of the introduction to multiphase ﬂow. Clearly, multiphase is an advance topic. However, some minimal familiarity can be helpful for many engineers who have to deal with non pure single phase ﬂuid. This book is the third book in the series of POTTO project books. POTTO project books are open content textbooks so everyone are welcome to joint in. The topic of ﬂuid mechanics was chosen just to ﬁll the introduction chapter to compressible ﬂow. During the writing it became apparent that it should be a book in its own right. In writing the chapter on ﬂuid statics, there was a realization that it is the best chapter written on this topic. It is hoped that the other chapters will be as good this one. This book is written in the spirit of my adviser and mentor E.R.G. Eckert. Eckert, aside from his research activity, wrote the book that brought a revolution in the education of the heat transfer. Up to Egret’s book, the study of heat transfer was without any dimensional analysis. He wrote his book because he realized that the dimensional analysis utilized by him and his adviser (for the post doc), Ernst Schmidt, and their colleagues, must be taught in engineering classes. His book met strong criticism in which some called to “burn” his book. Today, however, there is no known place in world that does not teach according to Eckert’s doctrine. It is assumed that the same kind of individual(s) who criticized Eckert’s work will criticize this work. Indeed, the previous book, on compressible ﬂow, met its opposition. For example, anonymous Wikipedia user name EMBaero claimed that the material in the book is plagiarizing, he just doesn’t know from where and what. Maybe that was the reason that he felt that is okay to plagiarize the book on Wikipedia. These criticisms will not change the future or the success of the ideas in this work. As a wise person says “don’t tell me that it is wrong, show me what is wrong”; this is the only reply. With all the above, it must be emphasized that this book is not expected to revolutionize the ﬁeld but change some of the way things are taught. The book is organized into several chapters which, as a traditional textbook, deals with a basic introduction to the ﬂuid properties and concepts (under construction). The second chapter deals with Thermodynamics. The third book chapter is a review of mechanics. The next topic is statics. When the Static Chapter was written, this author did not realize that so many new ideas will be inserted into this topic. As traditional texts in this ﬁeld, ideal ﬂow will be presented with the issues of added mass and added forces (under construction). The classic issue of turbulence (and stability) will be presented. An introduction to multi–phase ﬂow, not a traditional topic, will be presented next (again under construction). The next two chapters will deals with open channel ﬂow and gas dynamics. At this stage, dimensional analysis will be present (again under construction).
How This Book Was Written
This book started because I needed an introduction to the compressible ﬂow book. After a while it seems that is easier to write a whole book than the two original planned chapters. In writing this book, it was assumed that introductory book on ﬂuid mechanics should not contained many new ideas but should be modern in the material presentation. There are numerous books on ﬂuid mechanics but none of which is open content. The approach adapted in this book is practical, and more hands–on approach. This statement really meant that the book is intent to be used by students to solve their exams and also used by practitioners when they search for solutions for practical problems. So, issue of proofs so and so are here only either to explain a point or have a solution of exams. Otherwise, this book avoids this kind of issues. The structure of Hansen, Streeter and Wylie, and Shames books were adapted and used as a scaﬀolding for this book. This author was inﬂuenced by Streeter and Wylie book which was his undergrad textbooks. The chapters are not written in order. The ﬁrst 4 chapters were written ﬁrst because they were supposed to be modiﬁed and used as ﬂuid mechanics introduction in “Fundamentals of Compressible Flow.” Later, multi–phase ﬂow chapter was written. The presentation of some of the chapters is slightly diﬀerent from other books because the usability of the computers. The book does not provide the old style graphical solution methods yet provides the graphical explanation of things. Of course, this book was written on Linux (Micro$oftLess book). This book was written using the vim editor for editing (sorry never was able to be comfortable with emacs). The graphics were done by TGIF, the best graphic program that this author experienced so far. The ﬁgures were done by gle. The spell checking was done by ispell, and hope to ﬁnd a way to use gaspell, a program that currently cannot be used on new Linux systems. The ﬁgure in cover page was created by Genick BarMeir, and is copyleft by him.
xlvii
xlviii
LIST OF TABLES
Preface
"In the beginning, the POTTO project was and void; and emptiness was upon the face and files. And the Fingers of the Author the face of the keyboard. And the Author there be words, and there were words." 8 . without form, of the bits moved upon said, Let
This book, Basics of Fluid Mechanics, describes the fundamentals of ﬂuid mechanics phenomena for engineers and others. This book is designed to replace all introductory textbook(s) or instructor’s notes for the ﬂuid mechanics in undergraduate classes for engineering/science students but also for technical peoples. It is hoped that the book could be used as a reference book for people who have at least some basics knowledge of science areas such as calculus, physics, etc. The structure of this book is such that many of the chapters could be usable independently. For example, if you need information about, say, statics’ equations, you can read just chapter (4). I hope this makes the book easier to use as a reference manual. However, this manuscript is ﬁrst and foremost a textbook, and secondly a reference manual only as a lucky coincidence. I have tried to describe why the theories are the way they are, rather than just listing “seven easy steps” for each task. This means that a lot of information is presented which is not necessary for everyone. These explanations have been marked as such and can be skipped.9 Reading everything will, naturally, increase your understanding of the many aspects of ﬂuid mechanics. This book is written and maintained on a volunteer basis. Like all volunteer work, there is a limit on how much eﬀort I was able to put into the book and its organization. Moreover, due to the fact that English is my third language and time limitations, the explanations are not as good as if I had a few years to perfect them. Nevertheless, I believe professionals working in many engineering ﬁelds will beneﬁt from this information. This book contains many worked examples, which can be very useful for many. I have left some issues which have unsatisfactory explanations in the book, marked with a Mata mark. I hope to improve or to add to these areas in the near future.
the power and glory of the mighty God. This book is only to explain his power. the present, the book is not well organized. You have to remember that this book is a work in progress.
9 At 8 To
xlix
l
LIST OF TABLES
Furthermore, I hope that many others will participate of this project and will contribute to this book (even small contributions such as providing examples or editing mistakes are needed). I have tried to make this text of the highest quality possible and am interested in your comments and ideas on how to make it better. Incorrect language, errors, ideas for new areas to cover, rewritten sections, more fundamental material, more mathematics (or less mathematics); I am interested in it all. I am particularly interested in the best arrangement of the book. If you want to be involved in the editing, graphic design, or proofreading, please drop me a line. You may contact me via Email at “barmeir@gmail.com”. Naturally, this book contains material that never was published before (sorry cannot avoid it). This material never went through a close content review. While close content peer review and publication in a professional publication is excellent idea in theory. In practice, this process leaves a large room to blockage of novel ideas and plagiarism. If you would like be “peer reviews” or critic to my new ideas please send me your comment(s). Even reaction/comments from individuals like David Marshall10 . Several people have helped me with this book, directly or indirectly. I would like to especially thank to my adviser, Dr. E. R. G. Eckert, whose work was the inspiration for this book. I also would like to thank to Jannie McRotien (Open Channel Flow chapter) and Tousher Yang for their advices, ideas, and assistance. The symbol META was added to provide typographical conventions to blurb as needed. This is mostly for the author’s purposes and also for your amusement. There are also notes in the margin, but those are solely for the author’s purposes, ignore them please. They will be removed gradually as the version number advances. A I encourage anyone with a penchant for writing, editing, graphic ability, LTEX knowledge, and material knowledge and a desire to provide open content textbooks and to improve them to join me in this project. If you have Internet email access, you can contact me at “barmeir@gmail.com”.
10 Dr. Marshall wrote to this author that the author should review other people work before he write any thing new (well, literature review is always good, isn’t it?). Over ten individuals wrote me about this letter. I am asking from everyone to assume that his reaction was innocent one. While his comment looks like unpleasant reaction, it brought or cause the expansion of the explanation for the oblique shock. However, other email that imply that someone will take care of this author aren’t appreciated.
To Do List and Road Map
This book isn’t complete and probably never will be completed. There will always new problems to add or to polish the explanations or include more new materials. Also issues that associated with the book like the software has to be improved. It is hoped the A changes in TEX and LTEX related to this book in future will be minimal and minor. It is hoped that the style ﬁle will be converged to the ﬁnal form rapidly. Nevertheless, there are speciﬁc issues which are on the “table” and they are described herein. At this stage, many chapters are missing. Speciﬁc missing parts from every chapters are discussed below. These omissions, mistakes, approach problems are sometime appears in the book under the Meta simple like this
Meta
sample this part.
Meta End
You are always welcome to add a new material: problem, question, illustration or photo of experiment. Material can be further illuminate. Additional material can be provided to give a diﬀerent angle on the issue at hand.
Properties
The chapter isn’t in development stage yet.
Open Channel Flow
The chapter isn’t in the development stage yet. Some parts were taken from Fundamentals of Die Casting Design book and are in a process of improvement.
li
lii
LIST OF TABLES
CHAPTER 1 Introduction to Fluid Mechanics
1.1 What is Fluid Mechanics?
Fluid mechanics deals with the study of all ﬂuids under static and dynamic situations. Fluid mechanics is a branch of continuous mechanics which deals with a relationship between forces, motions, and statical conditions in continuous material. This study area deals with many and diversiﬁed problems such as surface tension, ﬂuid statics, ﬂow in enclose bodies, or ﬂow round bodies (solid or otherwise), ﬂow stability, etc. In fact, almost any action a person is doing involves some kind of a ﬂuid mechanics problem. Furthermore, the boundary between the solid mechanics and ﬂuid mechanics is some kind of gray shed and not a sharp distinction (see Figure 1.1 for the complex relationships between the diﬀerent branches which only part of it should be drawn in the same time.). For example, glass appears as a solid material, but a closer look reveals that the glass is a liquid with a large viscosity. A proof of the glass “liquidity” is the change of the glass thickness in high windows in European Churches after hundred years. The bottom part of the glass is thicker than the top part. Materials like sand (some call it quick sand) and grains should be treated as liquids. It is known that these materials have the ability to drown people. Even material such as aluminum just below the mushy zone also behaves as a liquid similarly to butter. After it was established that the boundaries of ﬂuid mechanics aren’t sharp, the discussion in this book is limited to simple and (mostly) Newtonian (sometimes power ﬂuids) ﬂuids which will be deﬁned later. The ﬂuid mechanics study involve many ﬁelds that have no clear boundary between them. Researchers distinguish between orderly ﬂow and chaotic ﬂow as the laminar ﬂow and the turbulent ﬂow. The ﬂuid mechanics can also be distinguish between a single phase ﬂow and multiphase ﬂow (ﬂow made more than one phase or single distinguishable material). The last boundary (as all the boundaries in ﬂuid mechanics)
1
Then the dimensional analysis will be used explain why in certain cases one distinguish area/principle is more relevant than the other and some eﬀects can be neglected. Or.2 CHAPTER 1. It is this author’s personal experience that the knowledge and ability to know in what area the situation lay is one of the main problems. isn’t sharp because ﬂuid can go through a phase change (condensation or evaporation) in the middle or during the ﬂow and switch from a single phase ﬂow to a multi phase ﬂow. After it was made clear that the boundaries of ﬂuid mechanics aren’t sharp. air with dust particle). 1. the study must make arbitrary boundaries between ﬁelds. engineers in software company (EKK Inc. when a general model is need because more parameters are eﬀecting the situation. http://ekkinc. Moreover.1. For example.com/HTML ) analyzed a ﬂow of a complete still liquid assuming a . INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS Continuous Mechanics Solid Mechanics something between Fluid Mechanics Fluid Statics Fluid Dynamics Boundaries problems Multi phase flow Internal Flow Laminar Flow Stability problems Turbulent Flow Fig. Diagram to explain part of relationships of ﬂuid mechanics branches. ﬂow with two phases (or materials) can be treated as a single phase (for example.
Yet. At some point. chapters on open channel ﬂow (as a sub class of the multiphase ﬂow) and compressible ﬂow (with the latest developments) are provided. This discrepancy between theory and practice is called the “D’Alembert paradox” and serves to demonstrate the limitations of theory alone in solving ﬂuid problems. These two approaches have justiﬁcations and positive points. Reviewing many books on ﬂuid mechanics made it clear. turbulence.) on the principles of buoyancy. 1. and D’Alembert. The ﬁrst approach introduces the ﬂuid kinematic and then the basic governing equations. For example. After his initial work.” For example the concept of ideal liquid that leads to motion with no resistance. At that stage theory and experiments had some discrepancy.2 Brief History The need to have some understanding of ﬂuid mechanics started with the need to obtain water supply.C. conﬂicts with the reality. Before dealing with the boundaries. This fact was acknowledged by D’Alembert who stated that. to be followed by stability. boundary layer and internal and external ﬂow . Thus. There were no calculations even with the great need for water supply and transportation. The ideal ﬂow (frictionless ﬂow) should be expanded compared to the regular treatment. one of the main goals of this book is to explain what model should be applied. BRIEF HISTORY 3 complex turbulent ﬂow model. Such absurd analysis are common among engineers who do not know which model can be applied.1. This book attempts to ﬁnd a hybrid approach in which the kinematic is presented ﬁrst (aside to standard initial four chapters) follow by Integral analysis and continued by Diﬀerential analysis. almost all knowledge of the ancients can be summarized as application of instincts. Torricelli. the knowledge of ﬂuid mechanics (hydraulic) increasingly gained speed by the contributions of Galileo. there isn’t a clear winner. This book is unique in providing chapter on multiphase ﬂow. with the exception Archimedes (250 B. people realized that water can be used to move things and provide power. For example. larger tunnels built for a larger water supply. He also made several attempts to study the ﬂight (birds) and developed some concepts on the origin of the forces. two diﬀerent of school of thoughts were created: the ﬁrst be . These two approaches pose a dilemma to anyone who writes an introductory book for the ﬂuid mechanics. Bernoulli family. There are two main approaches of presenting an introduction of ﬂuid mechanics materials. and continue with Empirical Analysis. a large population created a need to solve waste (sewage) and some basic understanding was created. Later. the simpliﬁed private cases must be explained. Newton. Euler. The ﬁrst progress in ﬂuid mechanics was made by Leonardo Da Vinci (14521519) who built the ﬁrst chambered canal lock near Milan. Naturally. As in thermodynamics.2. etc. The second approach deals with the Integral Analysis to be followed with Diﬀerential Analysis. “The theory of ﬂuids must necessarily be based upon experiment. aqueducts were constructed. people realized that wells have to be dug and crude pumping devices need to be constructed. When cities increased to a larger size. These aqueducts reached their greatest size and grandeur in those of the City of Rome and China.
and many others. the demand for vigorous scientiﬁc knowledge that can be applied to various liquids as opposed to formula for every ﬂuid was created by the expansion of many industries. considerable contribution were made by Euler. Chezy. and Manning. This problem led to two consequences. Dupuit. Dubuat. von Karman. and Blasius and several other individuals as Nikuradse. which describes the ﬂow (or even Euler equations). Fabre. creating a matching between the two school of thoughts: experimental and theoretical. people cannot relinquish control. Examples of such work are Hermann von Helmholtz’s concept of vortexes (1858). INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS lieved that the solution will come from theoretical aspect alone. d’Aubisson. Thus. transformed the ﬂuid mechanics to modern science that we have known today. Hagen. Weisbach. and the second believed that solution is the pure practical (experimental) aspect of ﬂuid mechanics. at the same time proposed many correlations to many ﬂuid mechanics problems. and Kelvin. and the KuttaJoukowski circulation theory of lift (1906). However. were considered unsolvable during the mid nineteen century because of the high complexity. the development of dimensional analysis by Rayleigh. Meyer. after World War Two. The NavierStokes equations. Rose. At the end of the twenty century. Gas Dynamics. resistance by Darcy. This demand coupled with new several novel concepts like the theoretical and experimental researches of Reynolds. Taylor. mainly in pipes and open channels area. there are many . Coulomb. As results it created today “strange” names: Hydrodynamics. Therefore. Bhuckingham. Hydraulics. Today many problems can be analyzed by using the numerical tools and provide reasonable results. The introduction of the computers during the 60s and much more powerful personal computer has changed the ﬁeld. The obvious happened without theoretical guidance. Prandtl and his students Blasius. This concept leads to mathematical basis for many approximations. were Brahms. But.4 CHAPTER 1. While the understanding of the fundamentals did not change much. Ganguillet. There are many open source programs that can analyze many ﬂuid mechanics situations. the empirical formulas generated by ﬁtting curves to experimental data (even sometime merely presenting the results in tabular form) resulting in formulas that the relationship between the physics and properties made very little sense. Rankine. On the theoretical side. the way how it was calculated changed. Helmhoitz. Lanchester’s concept of circulatory ﬂow (1894). Thus. The experimentalists. These programs in many cases can capture all the appropriate parameters and adequately provide a reasonable description of the physics. Fanning. many call Prandtl as the father of modern ﬂuid mechanics. Perhaps the most radical concept that eﬀects the ﬂuid mechanics is of Prandtl’s idea of boundary layer which is a combination of the modeling and dimensional analysis that leads to modern ﬂuid mechanics. Bossut. and Aeronautics. La Grange. as in thermodynamics. In the middle of the nineteen century. for example. Kirchhoﬀ. Stanton. and Froude’s idea of the use of models change the science of the ﬂuid mechanics. Theoreticians tried to simplify the equations and arrive at approximated solutions representing speciﬁc cases. Rayleigh. ﬁrst Navier in the molecular level and later Stokes from continuous point of view succeeded in creating governing equations for real ﬂuid motion. and Poisseuille. On the “experimental” side.
the change of water pressure by 1000% only change the volume by less than 1 percent. Thus. Thus. The main diﬀerence between the liquids and gases state is that gas will occupy the whole volume while liquids has an almost ﬁx volume. The second quantity discussed here is the area. the pressure will not aﬀect the volume. The pressure component in the area . This diﬀerence can be. For example. sharp even though in reality this diﬀerence isn’t sharp. no shear stress is applied.g it has a direction. Inc). e. the discussion on the mathematical meaning will be presented (later version). any change in pressure directly aﬀects the volume. It is evident from this discussion that when a liquid is at rest. no weather prediction program can produce good engineering quality results (where the snow will fall within 50 kilometers accuracy. For example.3. the emphasis is on the physics. EKK. This quantity was discussed in physics class but here it has an additional meaning. The traditional quantity. The study of this kind of material called rheology and it will (almost) not be discussed in this book. Building a car with this accuracy is a disaster). then the change of volume is at best 5%. There are several quantities that have to be addressed in this discussion. In gaseous phase. it behaves like solid and under others it behaves like liquid (see Figure 1. 1. In this book. The ﬂuid is mainly divided into two categories: liquids and gases. KINDS OF FLUIDS 5 other cases that numerical analysis cannot provide any meaningful result (trends). these programs are as good as the input provided. This test creates a new material group that shows dual behaviors. so at this stage the tensor will have to be broken into its components. In the best scenario. one in the area direction and two perpendicular to the area. and it is referred to the direction of the area. if the change of pressure is signiﬁcantly less than that. This is a result of division of a vector by a vector and it is referred to as tensor. The area is measured in [m2 ]. The ﬁrst is force which was reviewed in physics.1). For the discussion here. The direction of area is perpendicular to the area. for most practical purposes considered. under certain limits. Hence. The diﬀerence between a gas phase to a liquid phase above the critical point are practically minor. It is also said that liquid cannot return to their original state after the deformation. So.1. The gas ﬁlls the volume and liquid cannot. assuming turbulent ﬂow for still ﬂow simply provides erroneous results (see for example. the pressure has three components. Gas has no free interface/surface (since it does ﬁll the entire volume). This diﬀerentiation leads to three groups of materials: solids and liquids. which is force per area has a new meaning. Area of three–dimensional object has no single direction. a change in the volume by more 5% will required tens of thousands percent change of the pressure.3 Kinds of Fluids Some diﬀerentiate ﬂuid from solid by the reaction to shear stress. these kinds of areas should be addressed inﬁnitesimally and locally. Later. The unit used to measure is [N]. It is a known fact said that the ﬂuid continuously and permanently deformed under shear stress while solid exhibits a ﬁnite deformation which does not change with time. It must be remember that force is a vector. But below the critical point.
the shear stress is h β considered as the ratio of the force acting on y area in the direction of the forces perpendicular x to area. Diﬀerent from solid. 1. Density as a function of ρ= ∆m ∆V −→ε ∆V lim the size of sample. The density can be changed and it is a function of time and space (location) but must have a continues property.2. h) (1. In this discussion. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS direction is called pressure (great way to confuse. h is the distance between the plates. Thus. isn’t it?). . In solid mechanics. F. here it will be treated as a separate issue. The upper plate velocity generally will be U = f (A. From solid mechanics study. The units used for the pressure components is [N/m2 ]. the principles of statistical mechanics must be utilized.3). U0x F However.2) Where A is the area. It referred to density that is independent of the sampling size.2 for point where the green lines converge to constant density). the density is deﬁned as Fig. the F denotes the force. (1.4 Shear Stress ∆ℓ The shear stress is part of the pressure tensor.6 CHAPTER 1. it did not reach/reduced to the size where the atoms or molecular statistical calculations are signiﬁcant (see Figure 1. the velocity of the plate increases also. It doesn’t mean ǫ that a sharp and abrupt change in the density cannot occur. Schematics to describe the shear short distance of two plates as shown in Figure stress in ﬂuid mechanics. After certain sample size. then. The density is a property which requires that ρ liquid to be continuous. The other two components are referred as the shear stresses.3. Consider moving the plate with a zero lubricant (h ∼ 0) (results in large force) or a large amount of lubricant (smaller force). 1. Figure 1. When this assumption is broken.1) It must be noted that ε is chosen so that the continuous assumption is not broken. Consider liquid that undergoes a shear stress between a Fig. (1. it was shown that when the force per area increases. thus the small distance analysis is applicable. the aim is to develop diﬀerential equation.2 shows the density as log ℓ a function of the sample size. Experiments show that the increase of height will increase the velocity up to a certain range. the density remains constant. that is. ﬂuid cannot pull directly but through a solid surface. 1.
1.8) From equation (1. In steady state.6) Where µ is called the absolute viscosity or dynamic viscosity which will be discussed later in this chapter in great length.4 it can be noticed that for a small angle.9) with equation (1. then it can be written for small a angel that dU δβ = δt dy (1. the distance the t0 < t1 < t2 < t3 upper plate moves after small amount of time.5) From equations (1. The deformation of ﬂuid due to shear geometry stress as progression of time.8) it follows that U =h δβ δt (1.9) Combining equation (1. SHEAR STRESS For cases where the dependency is linear. the regular approximation provides Fig.11) . the following can be written U∝ Equations (1.10) If the velocity proﬁle is linear between the plate (it will be shown later that it is consistent with derivations of velocity).5) it follows that ratio of the velocity to height is proportional to shear stress.4.4) and (1. Hence. d = U δt = h δβ (1.1.3) can be rearranged to be U F ∝ h A Shear stress was deﬁned as τxy = F A hF A 7 (1.4.3) (1.6) yields τxy = µ δβ δt (1. δt is d = U δt (1.7) From Figure 1. applying the coeﬃcient to obtain a new equality as τxy = µ U h (1.4) (1.
when the outer cylinder remains stationary. This approximation is appropriate for many other ﬂuids but only within some ranges.2[m] and 0.6)) F = 1 × 1. the notation of τxy is easier to understand and visualize.5 A µU ∼ = 53.1 [m].1: A space of 1 [cm] width between two large plane surfaces is ﬁlled with glycerin.5 m/sec. the following can be written (see equation (1. In fact. The units of shear stress are the same as ﬂux per time as following F kg m 1 mU ˙ = 2 m2 A sec A kg m 1 sec sec m2 Thus. Assume steady state conditions. water etc. Calculate the force that is required to drag a very thin plate of 1 [m2 ] at a speed of 0.069 × 0.8 CHAPTER 1. Solution .1[m] diameters with height of 0. These cohesion and interactions hamper the ﬂux in y–direction.2: Castor oil at 25◦ C ﬁlls the space between two concentric cylinders of 0. It can be assumed that the plates remains in equidistant from each other and steady state is achieved instantly. For this kind of substance τxy = µ dU dy (1. the viscosity is the resistance to the ﬂow (ﬂux) or the movement. Many ﬂuids fall into this category such as air. which is exhibited by all ﬂuids.12) Newtonian ﬂuids are ﬂuids which the ratio is constant.9) can be interpreted as momentum in the x direction transferred into the y direction. Example 1.45[N ] h 0. Solution Assuming Newtonian ﬂow. Equation (1. this interpretation is more suitable to explain the molecular mechanism of the viscosity. is due to the existence of cohesion and interaction between ﬂuid molecules. The units of absolute viscosity are [N sec/m2 ]. Thus. Some referred to shear stress as viscous ﬂux of x–momentum in the y–direction. Calculate the torque required to rotate the inner cylinder at 12 rpm.10) referred to as Newtonian ﬂuid. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS Materials which obey equation (1. The property of viscosity.01 End Solution Example 1.
temperature variation has an opposite eﬀect on the viscosities of liqτ0 uids and gases. thus. However. ri = A µU ro − ri µ 2 π 2 0.1 General S Bi imp ng le ha m Viscosity varies widely with temperature. liquid viscosities decrease as temperature increases.5. Since these forces decrease rapidly with increases of temperature. The diﬀerent of power ﬂuids families. This molecular activity is known to increase with temperature.5. exchange of momentum between layers brought as a result of molecular movement normal to the general direction of ﬂow. In liquids.1 × 12/60 = 0. This reasoning is a result of the considerations of the kinetic theory. tic pl do ne Ne ic eu ct ei pe ps R re ho wt on ia n rP hi as lip po ff di la ta nt .4 ¡ M= ∼ . the momentum exchange due to molecular movement is small compared to the cohesive forces between the molecules. 1. the molecules are more dx compact and cohesion is more dominate. the viscosity of gases will increase with temperature. and it resists the ﬂow. the moment can be calculated as the force times the distance as ri 2 π ri h M =F In this case ro − ri = h thus.4 π ri Where rps is revolution per second.986 0. in gases. This theory indicates that gas viscosities vary directly with the square root of temperature.1). Thus. VISCOSITY The velocity is rps 9 ˙ U = r θ = 2 π ri rps = 2 × π × 0. In gases. ic op molecules are sparse and cohetr o ix th sion is negligible. The diﬀerence is due to their fundamentally different mechanism creating visτ cosity characteristics.0078[N m] h ¡ End Solution 1. the Fig.5 Viscosity 1. Thus. the viscosity is primarily dependent on the magnitude of these cohesive forces.13 h 0. while in the dU liquids.1.5. The same way as in example (1.
This class of materials can be approximated by a single polynomial term that is a = bxn . Figure 1. Not all the materials obey this relationship. 1. The lines in the above diagrams are only to show constant pressure lines. Nitrogen (left) and Argon (right) viscosity as a function of the temperature and pressure after Lemmon and Jacobsen.6 demonstrates that viscosity increases slightly with pressure.2 Non–Newtonian Fluids In equation (1. viscosity τ =K dU dx n−1 dU dx (1. both materials are only a function of the temperature. The shear stress as a function and it can be written as of the shear rate. It must be stress that the viscosity in the dome is meaningless. the relationship between the velocity and the shear stress was assumed to be linear. The viscosity coeﬃcient is . 1.13) The new coeﬃcients (n. On the liquid side below the critical point.6.13) are constant. This relationship is referred to as power relationship Fig.5. Oils have the greatest increase of viscosity with pressure which is a good thing for many engineering purposes.5). but this variation is negligible for most engineering problems. the coeﬃcient depends on the velocity gradient. Well above the critical point. K) in equation (1. From the physical point of view. the pressure has minor eﬀect on the viscosity. There is no such a thing of viscosity at 30% liquid. When n = 1 equation represent Newtonian ﬂuid and K becomes the familiar µ. There is a large class of materials which shows a nonlinear relationship with velocity for any shear stress. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS Fig. 1.7. It simply depends on the structure of the ﬂow as will be discussed in the chapter on multi phase ﬂow.10 CHAPTER 1.
Ferraris. VISCOSITY 11 always positive. this kind of ﬁgures isn’t used in regular engineering practice.00002 The kinematic viscosity is another way to look at the viscosity.0004 0.e06 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Temperature [◦ C ] May 1.of the temperature.0002 5.0028 0.e05 0. The reason for this new deﬁnition is that some experimental data are given in this form. 2008 ν= µ ρ (1. The Newtonian part of the model has to be replaced by power liquid.5. However. Materials Science of Concrete VI.1. When n.0018 0. For example. [m2 /sec]. The increase of the absolute viscosity with the temperature is enough to overcome the increase of density and thus.002 0.13) are referred to as purely viscous ﬂuids. Many ﬂuids satisfy the above equation.0016 0.001 sec µ[ Nm2 ] 1.8. The above equation shows that the dimensions of ν to be square meter per second. S. Air viscosity as a function the name “kinematic” viscosity. which are acceleration units (a combination of kinematic terms). Martys. de Larrard and N.5. When n is below one.0014 0. 1. is above one.000025 0. 1. Skalny. F.14) dUx =0 dy if τyx  < τ0 (1. The general relationship for simple Bingham ﬂow is τxy = −µ ± τ0 if τyx  > τ0 (1. eds. the “liquid side” is like Newtonian ﬂuid for large shear stress.15) There are materials that simple Bingham model does not provide dequate explanation and a more sophisticate model is required.16) The gas density decreases with the temperature. Mindess and J.0012 0.003 0. 1 C.0024 0.0006 0.0008 0.0026 0. The kinematic viscosity embraces both the viscosity and density properties of a ﬂuid. However. the ﬂuid is pseudoplastic.0022 0. Fluids that show increase in the viscosity (with increase of the shear) referred to as thixotropic and those that show decrease are called reopectic ﬂuids (see Figure 1. These results also explained better using the new deﬁnition. the kinematic viscosity also increase with the temperature for many materials..000015 0.5). Materials which behave up to a certain shear stress as a solid and above it as a liquid are referred as Bingham liquids. the liquid is dilettante.7. for most practical purposes. This fact explains Fig. 215241 (2001) m ν[ sec ] 2 . In the simple case. The kinematic vis.3 Kinematic Viscosity Air absolute & kinematic viscosity Atmospheric Pressure 0. The liquids which satisfy equation (1. cosity is deﬁned as 0. according to Ferraris at el1 concrete behaves as shown in Figure 1.
1. For isothermal ﬂow.001 0.555 Ti0 + Suth µ = µ0 0. provides reasonable results2 for the range of −40◦ C to 1600◦ C m ν[ sec ] 2 µ[ N sec ] m2 0. End Solution Liquid Metals 2 This author is ambivalent about statement. The variations of air and water as a function of the temperature at atmospheric pressure are plotted in Figures 1.51 10−5 N sec m2 The viscosity increases almost by 40%.07 + 120 µ = 0. Water viscosity as a func1.00001827 × × 0.710−5 . the viscosity can be considered constant in many cases.555 × 524.07 3 2 ∼ 2. Sutherland’s equation is used and according to the literature.1 Example 1.12 CHAPTER 1.9.3: Calculate the viscosity of air at 800K based on Sutherland’s equation. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS 1. .8 and Fig.0015 The absolute viscosity of many ﬂuids relatively doesn’t change with the pressure but very sensitive to temperature.555 × 800 + 120 800 524. 2008 0.4 Estimation of The Viscosity Water absolute and kinematic viscosity Atmospheric Pressure 0.0005 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Temperature [◦ C ] May 1.9.17) viscosity at input temperature T reference viscosity at reference temperature. T T0 3 2 (1. Some common materials (pure and mixture) tion temperature. The observed viscosity is about ∼ 3.002 0. Use the data provide in Table 1.1. Solution Applying the constants from Suthelnd’s table provides 0. Ti0 input temperature in degrees Kelvin reference temperature in degrees Kelvin Suth is Sutherland’s constant and it is presented in the Table 1. have expressions that provide an estimate.5.555 Tin + Suth Where µ µ0 Tin Ti0 Suth . For many gases.
07 527.0001254 Table 1. Substance formula i − C4 H10 CH4 CO2 O2 Hg Temperature T [◦ C] 23 20 20 20 380 Viscosity [ N sec ] m2 0.0001781 0. Viscosity of selected gases.93 540.00001720 0.0000146 0.99 526. VISCOSITY 13 coeﬃcients chemical formula Material ammonia standard air carbon dioxide carbon monoxide hydrogen nitrogen oxygen sulfur dioxide CO2 CO H2 N2 O2 SO2 N H3 Sutherland 370 120 240 118 72 111 127 416 TiO [K] 527.5.1.57 µ0 (N sec/m2 ) 0.67 524. The list for Sutherland’s equation coeﬃcients for selected materials. .0002018 0.67 518.0000654 oxygen mercury vapor Table 1.2.00001827 0.0000109 0.00000982 0.1.0000076 0.67 528.00001480 0.0000203 0.0000876 0.05 528.
098 0.3. Viscosity of selected liquids.150.084 0.069 Olive Oil Castor Oil Clucuse Corn Oil SAE 30 SAE 50 SAE 70 Ketchup Ketchup Benzene Firm glass Glycerol Table 1.000647 0.072 0. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS Substance formula (C2 H5 )O C6 H6 Br2 C2 H5 OH Hg H2 SO4 Temperature T [◦ C] 20 20 26 20 25 25 25 25 25 20 ∼ 25◦ C ∼ 25◦ C ∼ 20◦ C ∼ 25◦ C ∼ 20◦ C 20 Viscosity [ N sec ] m2 0.14 CHAPTER 1.001194 0.200 0.54 1.000946 0.05 0.6 0.001547 0.000245 0. .986 520 0.01915 0.000652 ∼ 1 × 107 1.
∼ 1[bar]. for practical purpose.54 15. In Figure 1.003 20. The second way.Fig. this graph also shows the trends. many aluminum alloys are behaving as a Newtonian liquid until the ﬁrst solidiﬁcation appears (assuming steady state thermodynamics properties).S.3 28.7685 36.944 131.47 2. 2008 The General Viscosity Graphs In case “ordinary” ﬂuids where information is limit.4.9696 2.04 Tc [K] 33.5 151 289. Tr . The lower pressure is.4 or similar information.4 49.5 1.256425 48.07 16. if one point is well documented.064 [MPa] µc [ N sec ] m2 3.2 154. Furthermore.289945 27.0 21.C. Furthermore.4 190. Vol. 1.0 15. cation (mushy zone).10.97 44. other points can be estimated.40685 22. In this graph. Government Printing Oﬃce. Hougen et al suggested to use graph similar to compressibility chart.) sec µ[ Nm2 ] 1. Liquid metals viscosity as a function of the temperature. Even when there is a solidiﬁ.5 2. Figure 1.6 26.7 647.636 58.1.8 132 304. the metal behavior can be estimated as a Newtonian material (further reading can be done in this author’s book “Fundamentals of Die Casting Design”).26 44.11 the relative viscosity µr = µ/µc is plotted as a function of relative temperature.5. Washington D.3 19.83865 46. 258.00 30.183 39. The simplest way is by obtaining the data from Table 1. Atomic Energy Commission AECD3646 U.358525 48.016 4. The properties at the critical stage and their values of selected materials. µc is the viscosity at critical condition and µ is the viscosity at any given condition. VISCOSITY chemical component H2 He Ne Ar Xe Air “mix” CO2 O2 C 2 H6 CH4 Water Molecular Weight 2.0 Li Na K Hg Pb Liquid metal can be considered as a Newtonian ﬂuid for many applications.865925 50.01 32.3 5.0 0. May 1995 p. Liquid Metal viscosity 2.8823 73.4 305.10 exhibits several liquid metals (from The Reactor Handbook.9 15 Table 1. 19.0 18. The lines of constant relative pressure.5 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 Temperature [◦ C ] May 1. The critical pressure can be evaluated in the following three ways.096 K Pc [Bar] 12. then the critical . Pr = P/Pc are drawn. if the information is available and is close enough to the critical point.
INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS given µc = µ µr ﬁgure 1.41 154. Or ˜ √ µc = M Pc 2/3 Tc −1/6 (1.11 (1. Example 1. only the mixture of low density gases is discussed for analytical expression.20) Calculate the reduced pressure and the reduced temperature and from the Figure 1.6[N sec/m2 ] The observed value is 24[N sec/m2 ]3 .2 = 21.35[Bar] Tc = 154.2 and the predicted viscosity is T able µ = µc µ µc = 18 × 1. End Solution Viscosity of Mixtures In general the viscosity of liquid mixture has to be evaluated experimentally. Physical Chemistry Japan Vol.15 ∼ 2. 26 No. there isn’t silver bullet to estimate the viscosity. is by utilizing the following approximation µc = M Tc vc 2/3 ˜ (1. Solution The critical condition of oxygen are Pc = 50. For most 3 Kyama.35 373. . 2 1956. Makita.4 µc = 18 value of the reduced temperature is Tr ∼ The value of the reduced pressure is Pr ∼ 20 ∼ 0.11 obtain the reduced viscosity.18) The third way. Even for homogeneous mixture. Rev.11 it can be obtained µr ∼ 1. when none is available.4: Estimate the viscosity of oxygen.19) Where vc is the critical molecular volume and M is molecular weight.4 50.16 viscosity is obtained as CHAPTER 1. In this book.4 N sec m2 The From Figure 1. O2 at 100◦ C and 20[Bar].
. 2008 Fig. and µi is the viscosity of component i.2 Pr=0.5 Pr=1 Pr=2 Pr=3 Pr=5 Pr=25 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 5 2 2 3 T Tc 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 Reduced Temperature May 27.1. VISCOSITY 17 Reduced Viscosity 2 10 liquid 5 dense gas Reduced Viscosity µ µc 2 twophase region 1 critical point Pr=LD Pr=0. xi is the mole fraction of component i. 1.5. n µmix = i=1 xi µi n j=1 xi Φij 2 (1. The dimensionless parameter Φij is equal to one when i = j.21) where Φi j is deﬁned as 1 Φij = √ 8 Mi 1+ Mj 1+ µi µj 4 Mj Mi (1. Reduced viscosity as function of the reduced temperature. The mixture viscosity is highly nonlinear function of the fractions of the components. The subscript i should be used for the j index. cases.11.22) Here. n is the number of the chemical components in the mixture. the following Wilke’s correlation for gas at low density provides a result in a reasonable range.
INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS 5 Tr=0. Mole Fraction. µ 0.0000203 0. Reduced viscosity as function of the reduced temperature.4 Tr=1.18 6 CHAPTER 1. x 0. Example 1.2 Tr=1.5: Calculate the viscosity of a mixture (air) made of 20% oxygen. 1.00001754 .6 Tr=2 Tr=3 µ µ0 4 Reduced viscosity 3 2 1 1 10 2 5 1 2 5 10 2 P Reduced Pressure [ Pc ] June 2.2 0.8 Tr=1 Tr=1. M 32.1 Tr=1. Solution The following table summarize the known details i 1 2 Component O2 N2 Molecular Weight. 28. O2 and 80% nitrogen N2 for the temperature of 20◦ C.8 Viscosity.12. 2008 Fig.
the viscosity is dominated by a liquid with high viscosity and at high shear stress to be dominated by a liquid with the low viscosity liquid. m2 m2 and τs = 0.00001754 N sec + ∼ 0.2 × 1. Reiner and Phillippoﬀ suggested the following formula 1 µ0 − µ∞ τ xy dUx µ + 2 = ∞ (1.8 × 1.0000203 0.996 + 0. For gases with very long molecular structure or complexity structure these formulas cannot be applied. To estimate the viscosity of the mixture with n component Hougen and Watson’s method for pseudocritial properties is adapted.23) provides reasonable value only up to 2 m τ = 0.0000182 .0215 N sec . End Solution In very low pressure. µ0 = 0.0 1.8 × 1.0 1. For some mixtures of two liquids it was observed that at a low shear stress.25) . the viscosity is only a function of the temperature with a “simple” molecular structure.12 can be used for a crude estimate of dense gases mixture.0000181 0.0 m2 N sec m2 The observed value is ∼ 0.2 × 0.001 kN .24) n Tc mix = i=1 xi Tc i (1.0 1.0 µi /µj 1.23) τxy dy 1 + τs Where the term µ∞ is the experimental value at high shear stress.5.0 19 µmix ∼ 0. It this method the following is deﬁned as n Pc mix = i=1 xi Pc i (1.8 × 0.1.0024 0. m2 Figure 1. The term µ0 is the experimental viscosity at shear stress approaching zero.0 + 0.996 1. This equation (1.2 × 0.86 1. in theory.00105 N sec . The higher viscosity is more dominate at low shear stress.875 1. The term τs is the characteristic shear stress of the mixture.143 0.157 . An example for values for this formula. VISCOSITY i 1 2 j 1 2 1 2 Mi /Mj 1. for Molten Sulfur at temperature 120◦ C are µ∞ = 0.0 Φij 1.0000073 kN .0024 0.
It is given that a moment of 1 [N × m] is required to maintain an angular velocity of 31.1 × 1[rad/second] = 0. dU ∼ 0. The viscosity of the oil is 3 × 10−5 [m2 /sec]. The surface is covered with oil ﬁlm. What is the speed of the block at steady state? Assuming a linear velocity proﬁle in the oil and that the whole oil is under steady state. The shear stress calculations can be estimated as a linear between the two concentric cylinders. The velocity at the inner cylinders surface is Ui = r ω = 0.4 revolution per second.1 [m] rotates concentrically within a ﬁxed cylinder of 0.VI. Estimate the liquid viscosity used between the cylinders.0 [kN] with a side surfaces area of 0. The velocity gradient may be assumed to be linear. The oil force a distance between the block and the inclined surface of 1 × 10−6 [m] thick.c) Example 1.1[m/s] (1.2 [m].a) .1 The used moment is dU M =µ = 100 ×2 × 0.101 − 0.2 = dr End Solution dU dr (1. hence.1 × π × 0.101 [m] radius and the cylinders length is 0.20 and CHAPTER 1.VII.VI.7: A square block weighing 1. Solution The shear stress at the surface is estimated for steady state by τ =µ U dU = 3 × 10−5 × = 30 U dx 1 × 10−6 (1.a) The velocity at the outer cylinder surface is zero.1 [m2 ] slides down an incline surface with an angle of 20◦ C.VI. Control volume around the inner cylinder shows that moment is a function of the area and shear stress.b) = 100sec−1 = dr 0.1 − 0 (1.6: An inside cylinder with a radius of 0. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS n µc mix = i=1 xi µc i (1.26) Example 1. Solution The moment or the torque is transmitted through the liquid to the outer cylinder.
1 × 30.c) End Solution 1. In addition the diﬀerential area also increases and is a function of r.13. A discussion of viscosity and surface tension should be part of this section but because special importance these topics have a separate sections. The gap is given and equal to δ and the rotation speed is ω. In this cases the shear stress is a function of the radius.VIII.8: Develop an expression for estimate of the torque required to rotate a disc in a narrow gap.6 Fluid Properties The ﬂuids have many properties which are similar to solid.b) The results of the integration is F = π µ ω R4 δ (1. The edge eﬀects can be neglected. FLUID PROPERTIES The total ﬁction force is then f = τ A = 0.6. Solution δ Fig. Rotating disc in a steady state. r and expression has to be developed for it.VIII.1. The shear stress can be assumed to be linear.b) (1.c) End Solution Example 1.a) T = 0 2 r τ dA = 2 0 2µr ωr 2 π r dr δ (1. . U = 3 U The gravity force that act against the friction is equal to the friction hence Fg = m g sin 20◦ = 3 U =⇒ U = m g sin 20◦ = 3 21 (1. The shear stress can be estimated as U ωr τ ∼µ =µ = δ δ This shear stress can be integrated for the entire area as R R (1.VII. The rest of the properties lumped into this section.VII.VIII. 1.
As approximation the relationship between the pressure and density in the liquid phase as ρ2 = ρ1 1 E = P2 − P1 E − ∆P 1− E (1.1 Fluid Density The density is a property that is simple to analyzed and understand. Solution The expansion of the steel tank will be due to two contributions: one from the thermal Expansion and two pressure increase in the tank. For this example.22 CHAPTER 1.IX.15 109 (N/m2 ) The water mass in the tank remain constant m1 = m2 −→ ρ1 V1 = ρ2 V2 . Examples to described usage of property are provided.c) E − ∆P E (1. The tank volume change under the assumptions the tank walls remain straight is thermal expansion V2 = V1 (1 + α∆ T ) 3 (1.IX.15 109 = End Solution 3 (1.9: A steel tank ﬁlled with water undergoes heating from 27◦ C to 127◦ C.IX.IX.6. E (1 + α∆ T ) − E = P2 − P1 =⇒ P2 ∼ P1 + (3 α + · · · )E P1 = 3 × 8 10−6 × 100 × 2.a) (1 + α∆ T ) = 3 (1. Example 1. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS 1.b) where E denotes the modulus of elasticity for the water 2.a) The more accurate calculations require looking into the steam tables.IX. it is assumed that the expansion due to pressure increase is negligible. The change of density is reversed of the change of volume. The initial pressure can be assumed to atmospheric.IX. ρ2 V1 E = = ρ1 V2 E − ∆P or using equation (1.d) or expanding the cubical equation and neglecting high power terms of α. State your assumptions.e) . Due to the change temperature the tank (the steel) undergoes linear expansion of 8 10−6 per ◦ C.
5.6.096 K Pc 57. FLUID PROPERTIES 23 1. The bulk modulus is deﬁned as BT = −v ∂P ∂v (1.5 0.28) T The bulk modulus for several liquids is presented in Table 1.49 [MPa] 6.3 [Mpa] nf 7. Most (theoretical) studies are obtained by uniformly changing the unit cells in global energy variations especially for isotropic systems ( where the molecules has a structure with cubic symmetries).32 1.00 [MPa] Est 78.09 1. The bulk modulus for selected material with the critical temperature and pressure na −→ not available and nf −→ not found (exist but was not found in the literature).4 K 514 K nf 850 K 1750 K Est 513 nf nf nf na na 591.10 1.74 [MPa] 4.49 0.064 [MPa] In the literature.52 26. liquids have a property that describes the volume change as results of pressure change for constant temperature. Table 1.34 1.8 [Bar] 48 [Bar] 4.27) T Using the identity of v = 1/ρ transfers equation (1.109 [MPa] na 22.1.034.28 2.5 [Bar] nf nf nf na na 4.5 2.97 2.5.152.3 4.2 Bulk Modulus Similar to solids (hook’s law).79 K na 647. additional expansions for similar parameters are deﬁned.20 1. The .174 Tc 593K 508 K 562 K 556.27) into BT = ρ ∂P ∂ρ (1.62 1.80 1. chemical component Acetic Acid Acetone Benzene Carbon Tetrachloride Ethyl Alcohol Gasoline Glycerol Mercury Methyl Alcohol Nitrobenzene Olive Oil Paraﬃn Oil SAE 30 Oil Seawater Toluene Turpentine Water Bulk Modulus 109 N m 2.5 [Bar] 172.60 1.228.6. Bulk modulus is usually obtained from experimental or theoretical or semi theoretical (theory with experimental work) to ﬁt energy–volume data. It can be noted that this property is not the result of the equation of state but related to it.06 1.
v) The full pressure derivative is dP = ∂P ∂T dT + v (1. These deﬁnitions are related to each other.29) P This parameter indicates the change of volume due to temperature change when the pressure is constant.24 CHAPTER 1.35) sometimes is used in measurement of the bulk modulus.32) is 0= ∂P ∂T dT + v ∂P ∂v dv T (1.34) indicates that relationship for these three coeﬃcients is βT = − βv βP (1.33) follows that ∂P ∂T ∂P ∂v dv dT =− P =const v (1. dP = 0.32) On constant pressure lines.35) The last equation (1. Another deﬁnition is referred as coeﬃcient of tension and it is deﬁned as βv = 1 P ∂P ∂T (1. the temperature increase results in reduction of the bulk of modulus because the molecular are further away.34) T Equation (1. The increase of the pressure increases the bulk modulus due to the molecules increase of the rejecting forces between each other when they are closer. In contrast. and therefore equation (1. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS thermal expansion is deﬁned as βP = 1 v ∂v ∂T (1.30) v This parameter indicates the change of the pressure due to the change of temperature (where v = constant).33) From equation (1. . This relationship is obtained by the observation that the pressure as a function of the temperature and speciﬁc volume as P = f (T.31) ∂P ∂v dv T (1.
The new pressure is P1 . Two liquid layers under pressure. Solution The volume change in a liquid is BT ∼ = Hence the change for the any liquid is ∆h = ∆P h ∆P = A BT /V BT (1.10: Calculate the modulus of liquid elasticity that reduced 0.01 = 2.00035 End Solution Example 1. Assume the temperature to be 20◦ C.035 per cent of its volume by applying a pressure of 5[Bar]. State your assumptions.11: Calculate the pressure needed to apply on water to reduce its volume by 1 per cent. Estimate the change of the heights of the liquids depicted in the Figure 1.714[Bar] ∂v ∆v 0. Solution Using the deﬁnition for the bulk modulus βT = −v v 5 ∂P ∼ ∆P = ∼ 14285. Initially the pressure in the tank is P0 . .6. The area of the tank is A and liquid A height is h1 and liquid B height is h2 . The liquids are compressed due to the pressure increases.XII.a) air (or gas) Oil (liquid 1) h1 Water (liquid 2) h2 Fig.XII. FLUID PROPERTIES 25 Example 1.14.14.1. 1.15 109 .15 107 [N/m2 ] = 215[Bar] v End Solution Example 1.12: Two layers of two diﬀerent liquids are contained in a very solid tank.b) ∆P ∆V /V (1. Solution Using the deﬁnition for the bulk modulus ∆P ∼ βT ∆v ∼ 2.
e) to 1− 4 Under g BT x ρ(x)dx = 0 ρ0 ρ(x) (1. Solution For the the ﬁrst method the density is BT ∼ = ∆P ∆P =⇒ ∆V = V ∆V /V BT (1.XIII. In some place the ocean deep is many kilometers (the deepest places is more than 10 kilometers).d) ρ(x)dx 0 (1.e) is an integral equation which is discussed in the appendix4 .XIII.XIII.c) yields m ρ(x) = x g ρ(x)dx 0 V −V BT Equation can be rearranged to be m ρ(x) = x g ρ(x)dx V 1− BT 0 =⇒ ρ(x) = ρ0 g 1− BT x (1.a) The density at the surface is ρ = m/V and the density at point x from the surface the density is m m ρ(x) = =⇒ ρ(x) = ∆P V − ∆V (1.XIII.XIII.26 CHAPTER 1.c) Combining equation (1.c) End Solution Example 1.XIII.XIII.XIII.XIII.e) Equation (1.b) with equation (1. For this example. ∆h1+2 = ∆P h1 h2 + BT 1 BT 2 (1. . It is convenient to change further equation (1.XII.XIII. calculate the density change in the bottom of 10 kilometers using two methods. In the second method assume that the density is a function of the pressure.13: The hydrostatic pressure was neglected in example 1.b) V −V BT In the Chapter on static it will be shown that the change pressure is x ∆P = g 0 ρ(x)dx (1. In one method assume that the density is remain constant until the bottom.12. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS The total change when the hydrostatic pressure is ignored.f) construction .
XIII.j) The integration constant can be found by the fact that the density at the x = 0 is ρ0 ρ0 = Hence the solution is ρ = ρ0 ρ0 BT 2 g ρ 0 x + BT (1.f) can be converted to diﬀerential equation when the two sides under diﬀerentiation g ρ0 d ρ(x) ρ(x) + =0 BT ρ(x)2 dx or g ρ(x)3 d ρ(x) + =0 BT ρ0 dx ρ0 BT =x+c 2 g ρ2 ρ0 BT 2 g (x + c) (1.XIV.g) (1.XIII.XIII. the density at the bottom using equation (1. That is the density is function of the depth.1.6.XIII. .h) The solution is (1.14: Water in deep sea undergoes compresion due to hydrostic pressure. For the purpose of this excerss.XIII.XIII.l) BT ρ0 BT =⇒ c = 2 g (c) 2 g ρ0 (1.a) Calculate the time it take for a sound wave to propogate from the surface to a depth D penpendicular the surface.XIII.m) BT − g ρ0 x 1− g ρ0 x BT End Solution Advance material can be skipped Example 1.XIII.i) or rearranged as ρ= (1. it was shown in “Fundamentals of Compressible Flow” by this author that the speed of sound is c= BT ρ (1. Assume that no variation of the temperatuere.XIII.k) In the “constant” density approach. FLUID PROPERTIES 27 The integral equation (1. For constant bulk modulus. the salinity can be complity ignored.e) is ρ0 BT ρ0 =⇒ ρ= g (1.
d) is t= √ ρ0 2 BT − 2 BT − D (1. x.b) The time the sound travel a small intervel distance.XIV. However. When more than one liquid are exposed to pressure the value of these two (or more liquids) can have to be added .e) The time to travel according to the standard procedure is √ D ρ0 D = √ t= BT BT ρ0 The ratio between the corrected estimated to the standard caclulation is √ √ √ ρ0 2 B T − 2 B T − D √ correction ratio = D ρ0 √ BT End Solution (1.g) 1.f) (1.2.6. The speed of sound at any depth point.1 Bulk Modulus of Mixtures In the discussion above it was assumed that the liquid is pure. dx is dτ = dx BT − g ρ0 x ρ0 (1.XIV.XIV.d) BT − g ρ 0 x 0 ρ0 The solution of equation (1.XIV. In this short section a discussion about the bulk modulus averaged is presented. is c= BT = ρ0 B T BT − g ρ0 x BT − g ρ0 x ρ0 (1.c) The time takes for the sound the travel the whole distance is the integration of inﬁnitesimal time D dx t= (1.XIV. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS The equation for the sound speed is taken here as correct for very local point.XIV.28 Solution CHAPTER 1.XIV. the desnitsy is diﬀerent for evry point since the density varies and the desnity is a function of the depth.
40) Rearranging equation (1. in special mixture. the total change is ∂V = ∂V1 + ∂V2 + · · · ∂Vi ∼ ∆V1 + ∆V2 + · · · ∆Vi = Substituting equation (1. Thus. The deﬁnition of the bulk modulus is given by equation (1.37) results in ∂V = V1 ∂P V2 ∂P Vi ∂P ∼ V1 ∆P V2 ∆P Vi ∆P + + ··· + + + ··· + = BT 1 BT 2 BT i BT 1 BT 2 BT i (1.41) suggested an averaged new bulk modulus BT mix = (1.36) The total change is compromised by the change of individual liquids or phases if two materials are present.39) can be written as ∂V = V ∂P x2 xi x1 + + ··· + BT 1 BT 2 BT i ∼ V ∆P = x1 x2 xi + + ··· + BT 1 BT 2 BT i (1.43) End Advance material .39) Where x1 . FLUID PROPERTIES 29 in special way. using this identity and the fact that the pressure is change for all the phase uniformly equation (1.42) In that case the equation for mixture can be written as v (1.1. Even in some cases of emulsion (a suspension of small globules of one liquid in a second liquid with which the ﬁrst will not mix) the total change is the summation of the individuals change.38) (1.6. V = x1 V + x1 V + · · · + xi V (1.27) or (1. Hence.36) into equation (1.28) and can be written (where the partial derivative can looks as delta ∆ as ∂V = V ∂P ∼ V ∆P = BT BT (1. In case the total change isn’t.41) Equation (1. x2 and xi are the fraction volume such as xi = Vi /V . another approach with taking into account the energyvolume is needed.37) Under the main assumption in this model the total volume is comprised of the individual volume hence.40) yields v ∂P ∼ ∆P = =v ∂v ∆v 1 x1 x2 xi + + ··· + BT 1 BT 2 BT i 1 x1 x2 xi + + ··· + BT 1 BT 2 BT i ∂P = BT mix ∂v (1.
The surface tension is force per length and is measured by [N/m] and is acting to stretch the surface. it can be noticed that d i ∼ 2 Ri dβi . the surface tension forces are puling the surface upward. Thus. Thus. dℓ2 The pressure on one side is Pi and the pressure on the other side is Po . Furthermore. the horizontal forces R2 dℓ1 cancel each other because symx metry. This explanation is wrong since it is in conﬂict with Newton’s second law (see example ?). In many (physics. Surface tension is also responsible for the creation of the drops and bubbles.45) is reduced to ∆P = σ 1 R (1. There is a common misconception for the source of the surface tension. This erroneous explanation can be traced to Adam’s book but earlier source may be found. The forces in Fig.15.44) For a very small area. the equation (1. The second with two equal radii. and ﬂuid mechanics) books explained that the surface tension is a result from unbalance molecular cohesive forces.30 CHAPTER 1. The relationship between the surface tension and the pres2dβ1 sure on the two sides of the sury face is based on geometry. Surface tension control volume analysis describing principals radii. the vertical direction reads (Pi − Po ) d 1 d 2 = ∆Pd 1 d 2 = 2 σd 1 sin β1 + 2 σd 2 sin β2 (1.45) predicts that pressure diﬀerence increase with inverse of the radius. In the vertical direction. The ﬁrst case is for an inﬁnite long cylinder for which the equation (1. Con2dβ2 sider a small element of surface. It also responsible for the breakage of a liquid jet into other medium/phase to many drops (atomization). When the surface tension R1 is constant. surface tension. Surface tension results from a sharp change in the density between two adjoined phases or materials. There are two extreme cases: one) radius of inﬁnite and radius of ﬁnite size.46) . the pressure diﬀerence has to balance the surface tension.45) Equation (1. the angles are very small and thus (sin β ∼ β).7 Surface Tension The surface tension manifested itself by a rise or depression of the liquid at the free surface edge. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS 1.44) can be simpliﬁed as ∆P = σ 1 1 + R1 R2 (1. 1.
c) b & g ρ h π r2 = σ 2 π r + & W ∼0 (1.16.47) Where R is the radius of the sphere. [N/m] Solution The mercury as free body that several forces act on it.025[m] contact angle is the same for the inside and outside part of the tube.1.5 Fig. if the inside and the outside diameters are considerable diﬀerent the results is F = σ2 π sin 55◦ C (Do − Do ) (1.15: A glass tube is inserted into bath of mercury.02[m] and 55◦ the outer diameter is 0. Glass tube inserted into mercury. Estimate the force due to the surface P = ρhg tension (tube is depicted in Figure 0. A soap bubble is made of two layers.XV.b) The balance of the forces on the meniscus show under the magniﬁed glass are A b & P π r2 = σ 2 π r + & W or ∼0 (1.02[m] σ 1.a) This force is upward and the horizontal force almost canceled.48) Example 1.45) is reduced to ∆P = 2σ R (1. As55◦ sume that the surface tension for this combination of material is 0.16).7. Estimate the depression size. thus the pressure inside the bubble is ∆P = 4σ R (1.021[m]. It was observed that contact angle between the glass and mercury is 55◦ C. SURFACE TENSION 31 Other extreme is for a sphere for which the main radii are the same and equation (1.d) . F = σ2 π cos 55◦ C (Di + Do ) (1.XV. The inner diameter is 0. It can be assume that the h 0. However. 1.XV. inner and outer.XV.
The relationship between pressure diﬀerence and the radius is described by equation (1. r. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS 2σ gρr h= (1. the temperature must remain constant due to heat transfer.50) Where. which contains n bubbles with equal radii. Assume that the liquid bulk modulus is inﬁnity.XV. It can be noticed that the work is negative.e) End Solution Example 1. that is the work is done on the system.17: . End Solution Example 1. Hence the work is ∆P rf dv rf r0 w= r0 2σ 4 π r2 dr = 8 π σ r rdr = 4 π σ rf 2 − r0 2 (1. The work for n bubbles is then 4 π σ n rf 2 − r0 2 . The work is rf w= r0 ∆P (v)dv (1.49) The minimum work will be for a reversible process. Solution The work is due to the change of the bubbles volume. Calculate the minimum work required to increase the pressure in tank by ∆P . r0 is the radius at the initial stage and rf is the radius at the ﬁnal stage. It is worth noting that for very slow process.16: A Tank ﬁlled with liquid.32 Or after simpliﬁcation CHAPTER 1.47) for reversible process. The reversible process requires very slow compression.
Capilary rise between two plates. SURFACE TENSION Calcualte the rise of liquid between two dimentional parallel plates shown in Figure 1.b) (1.51) (1. Thus.001 × 9. The balance between gravity and surface tension is σ 2 π (ri cos θi + ro cos θo ) = ρ g h π(ro )2 − π(ri )2 Which can be simpliﬁed as h= 2 σ (ri cos θi + ro cos θo ) ρ g ((ro )2 − (ri )2 ) (1. the contol volume is taken just above the liquid and the air part is neglected.17. Solution The diﬀerence lie in the fact that “missing”cylinder add additional force and reduce the amount of liquid that has to raise. Notice that previously a rise for circular tube was developed which diﬀerent from simple one dimensional case. The net forces in the vertical direction (positive upwords) per unit length are 2σ cos 0◦ = g h ρ =⇒ h = Inserting the values into equation (1. Solution In Figure 1. The vertical forces acting on the body are the gravity.1.7.05 = 0.XVIII.52) Example 1. 1. The question when the curveture should be ansered in the Dimentional analysis and for simpliﬁcation this eﬀect is neglected. It can be noted that the pressure and above are the same with the exception of the curveture on the upper part.8 × ×1000 End Solution 2σ ρg (1.XVIII.a) .05[N/m]. the pressure above and below and surface tension.51) resutls in h= 2 × 0. 33 ℓ h Fig.001[m].17.18: Develop expression for rise of the liquid due to surface tension in concentric cylinders. Cumpute the value for sufrace tension of 0. the density 1000[kg/m3 ] and distance between the plates of 0. The distance between the two plates is and the and surface tension is σ.17 exhibits the liquid under the current study. Assume that the contact angle is 0circ (the maximum possible force).
It must be noted that the solid boundary isn’t straight. Description of wetting and ular phenomenon.18. The contact angle is determined by NonWetting whether the surface tension between the gas Wetting fluid solid (gs) is larger or smaller then the surface fluid tension of liquid solid (ls) and the local geometry. . equation (1. 1.53) For β = π/2 =⇒ tan β = ∞. In Figure 1.54) into equation (1. liquid. forces diagram is shown when control volume is chosen so that the masses of the solid.34 CHAPTER 1. thus depend on the locale non–wetting ﬂuids.7. The gas solid surface tension is diﬀerent from the liquid solid surface tension and hence violating equation (1.c) ρ g (ro − ri ) End Solution 1. The surface tension occurs between gas phase (G) to liquid phase (L) and also occurs between the solid (S) and the liquid phases as well as between the gas phase and Fig. This contact point occurs due to free surface S L reaching a solid boundary. 1. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS The maximum is obtained when cos θi = cos θo = 1. structure of the surface and it provides the balance for these local structures. the solid phase.Fig. For example. Thus. Forces in Contact angle. thus. the solid reaction force must be zero.b) can be simpliﬁed 2σ h= (1.53).XVIII.55) (1. conG sider the point where three phases became in contact. The surface tension forces must be balanced.53) yields σgs − σls = Fsolid tan β (1. Regardless to the magnitude of the surface tensions (except to zero) the forces cannot be balanced for the description of straight lines.18.1 Wetting of Surfaces To explain the source of the contact angle. forces balanced along the line of solid boundary is σgs − σls − σlg cos β = 0 and in the tangent direction to the solid line the forces balance is Fsolid = σlg sin β substituting equation (1. Thus.19. and gas can be ignored.XVIII. a contact angle is created to balance it.54) (1. The surface tension is a molec.
Y. Vol. Aladev O..83 π/4.2 π/4 π/3 π/2 Source [1] [2] [1] [3] [4] [5] [4] [4] [4] [7] [8] 1 R. M. pages 14651470.517. I.N.19).7. If the angle of the contact between three materials is larger than 90◦ then it is nonwetting. Siegel. J.74 π/4. No 12.” AIChE Journal Volume 10 Issue 4.T.7 π/4. This fact is the reason that no reliable data can be provided with the exception to pure substances and perfect geometries. Table 1. The contact angle for air. ”The determination of forced convection surface– boiling heat transfer. The angle is determined by properties of the liquid. In fact there are commercial sprays that are intent to change the surface from wetting to non wetting. For example. Heat Transfer. .6. V. the wetness of ﬂuids is a function of the solid as well.1. And a small change on the solid surface can change the wetting condition to non–wetting.. Keshock (1975) “Eﬀects of reduced gravity on nucleate boiling bubble dynamics in saturated water. and Ostrovsky.I. however. the water is changed to be wetting (for example 3M selling product to “change” water to non–wetting).74 to π/3.. 1117 1(7) In Russian. (1958) “wlijanii smatchivaemosti na teploobmen pri kipenii.I. ASME. (1966) “On the mechanism of boiling heat transfer”. chemical component Steel Steel. 3 Tolubinsky. E. if the angle is below than 90◦ the material is wetting the surface (see Figure 1.76 to π/3. distilled water with selected materials to demonstrate the inconsistency.” Injenerno Fizitcheskij Jurnal.83 π/3. and Rohsenow W. International Journal of Heat and Mass Transfer. So.Nickel Nickel Nickel ChromeNickel Steel Silver Zink Bronze Copper Copper Copper Contact Angle π/3. water is described in many books as a wetting ﬂuid. E.7 π/6 to π/4. On the other hand. This statement is correct in most cases. 9.372. Pages 509 . G. SURFACE TENSION 35 The connection of the three phases–materials–mediums creates two situations which are categorized as wetting or non–wetting. when solid surface is made or cotted with certain materials.4 π/3. There is a common deﬁnition of wetting the surface.5 π/3. gas medium and the solid surface. 4 Arefeva E. 1975 2 Bergles A. vol 1 pp 365 .
Description of liquid surface. A. K.57) can be derived either by forcing a circle at three points at (x. 124. is ˙ 1 + h(x) R(x) = ¨ h(x) 2 3/2 (1.36 CHAPTER 1. Heat Transfer 115. F. 56..20 describes the raising of the liquid as results of the surface tension. The pressure.. and Dhir. .46) and using the pressure diﬀerence yields 0 0 0 g h(x). C. and Dhir. 7 Gaetner. 659669 To explain the contour of the surface.. K. (1939) “Approximate theory of heat transfer by developed nucleate boiling” In Sussian Izvestiya An SSSR .. W. V. x+dx. on the gas side. 8 Wang. Symp. and Westwater.20.” Chem. In Figure 1. and the contact angle consider simple “wetting” liquid contacting a solid material in two– dimensional shape as depicted in Figure 1. is the atmospheric pressure. R..57) ˙ Where h is the derivative of h with respect to x. No 1. N. (1960) “Population of Active Sites in Nucleate Boiling Heat Transfer. G. 1. ρ = σ R(x) (1.. Ser.” ASME Journal of Heat Transfer. “Eﬀect of Surface Wettability on Active Nucleation Site Density During Pool Boiling of Water on a Vertical Surface. papes 717 728. (1993). the Figure 1. R. This problem is a two dimensional problem and equation (1. To solve the shape of the liquid surface. J. V. and x+2dx) and thus ﬁnding the the diameter or by geometrical analysis of triangles build on points x and x+dx (perpendicular to the tangent at these points). (2002) “Onset of Nucleate Boiling and Active Nucleation Site Density during Subcooled Flow Boiling. The pressure just below the surface is −g h(x) ρ (this pressure diﬀerence will be explained in more details in Chapter 4). H.20).56) The radius of any continuous function.. Equation (1. Eng.20. Warrier. Appalling equation (1.” J.. the P h pressure diﬀerence between the two sides of P P free surface has to be balanced by the surface tension. 6 Basu. Energetika I transport. Vol. pp. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS 5 Labuntsov D. Prog. The surface tension reduces the pressure in the liquid above the liquid line (the dotted line in Fig. h = h(x).46) is applicable to it.
63) At inﬁnity.60) dh (1. 1− h2 = 2 Lp 1 ˙ 1 + h2 1/2 (1.56) yields g h(x) ρ = σ ˙ 1 + h(x) ¨ h(x) Equation (1.61) The constant Lp σ/ρ g is referred to as Laplace’s capillarity constant.62) becomes h2 + constant = − 2 Lp 1 ˙ 1 + h2 1/2 (1.61) into ¨ ˙ identities h 1 h dh = Lp ξdξ (1 + ξ 2 ) 3/2 (1. The units of this ˙ constant are meter squared.64) . h = ξ = dξ transforms equation (1.60) transforms into gρ h dh = σ ¨ h ˙ 1 + h2 3/2 3/2 (1.62) After the integration equation (1.58) is ghρ = ¨ σh ˙ 1 + h2 Integrating equation (1. constant = −1 .58) is non–linear diﬀerential equation for height and can be written as 1D Surface Due to Surface Tension ghρ σ dh 1+ dx 2 3/2 2 3/2 37 (1. An try) and the derivative at hx alternative presentation of equation (1. the height and the derivative of the height must by zero so constant + 0 = −1/1 and hence.57) into equation (1.58) − d2 h =0 dx2 (1. Using dummy variable and the ˙ = ξ and hence.59) ˙ With the boundary conditions that specify either the derivative h(x = r) = 0 (symme˙ = β or heights in two points or other combinations. SURFACE TENSION Substituting equation (1.7.1. The diﬀerential dh is h.
Equation (1. Shamefully.7. 5 This p equation has an analytical solution which is x = Lp 4 − (h/Lp)2 − Lp acosh(2 Lp/h) + constant where Lp is the Laplace constant.1.69) The constant is determined by the boundary condition at x = 0.68) Equation (1. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS Equation (1. Furthermore. It can be shown that the height that the liquid raised in a tube due to the surface tension is h= 2 σ cos β g ∆ρ r (1.67) = dx −1 (1. . 1. This equation is studied extensively in classes on surface tension.65) Squaring both sides and moving the one to the right side yields ˙ h2 = 1 2 1 − 2h Lp −1 (1. otherwise it will not be there.70) Where ∆ρ is the diﬀerence of liquid density to the gas density and r is the radius of tube.1 Capillarity The capillary forces referred to the fact that surface tension causes liquid to rise or penetrate into area (volume). this author doesn’t know how to show it in a two lines derivations. This book is introductory.64) can be rearranged to be ˙ 1 + h2 1/2 = 1 2 1 − 2h Lp 2 (1.66) The last stage of the separation is taking the square root of both sides to be dh ˙ h= = dx or dh 1 2 1 − 2h Lp 2 1 2 1 − 2h Lp 2 −1 (1.68) can be integrated to yield dh = x + constant 2 1 −1 2 1 − 2h Lp  (1.38 CHAPTER 1. For example if h(x − 0) = h0 then constant = h0 . therefore this discussion on surface tension equation will be limited. this equation describes the dimensionless parameter that aﬀects this phenomenon and this parameter will be studied in Chapter ?.64) is a ﬁrst order diﬀerential equation that can be solved by variables separation5 .
4 0.59) approaches the strait line (the liquid line) strong gravity eﬀect.22.2 0.0 0.2 1. The maximum that the contact angle can be obtained in equation (1. In that case equation (1.21 as blue line. Furthermore. The measurements of the height of distilled water and mercury are presented in Figure 1. 1. SURFACE TENSION h 39 But this simplistic equation is unusable and Theory useless unless the contact angle (assuming that the contact angel is constant or a repressive average can be found or provided or can be measured) is given. For large radii equation (1.3 0.1.59) proved better results because the curve approaches hemispherical sphere (small gravity eﬀect).71) Figure 1. The discussion above was referred to “wetting” contact angle. However. On the other hand.21. high height which indicates a negative pressure. equation (1.7 Radii [cm] May 29.4 2. The conclusion of this discussion are shown in Figure 1. For a small tube radius. the gravity is working against the surface tension and reducing the range and quality of the predictions of equation (1.0 0. there are information about the contact angle.Fig.7.7.0 Distilled water [23 C] Mercury [25 C] Equation 0.8 2. The surface tension of a selected material is given in Table 1.21. actual However. The height based on equation (1. The surface tension depends on the two materials or mediums that it separates. The raising height as a tremely small radii equation (1. The actual height is shown in the red line.6 0.2 1.1 2. .22 exhibits the height as a function of Capilary Height the radius of the tube.9 1.71) is shown in Figure 1. function of the radii.5 1. in reality there is no readily information for 0 R contact angle6 and therefore this equation is useful to show the treads. Equation (1. h is similar to equation (1. This angle is obtained when a Fig. The experimental results of these materials are with agreement with the discussion above. The liquid at a certain pressure will be vaporized and will breakdown the model upon this equation was constructed.71) indicates that the function of the radius. that information conﬂict each other and no real information is available see Table 1. 2008 6 Actually. 1. The depression of the liquid occurs in a “negative” contact angle similarly to “wetting. for ex. The raising height as a perfect half a sphere shape exist of the liquid surface.6. the small scale indicates that the simplistic and continuous approach is not appropriate and a diﬀerent model is needed. In conclusion. 1. The actual dimension for many liquids (even water) is about 15 [mm].8 Height [cm] 0.71) with a minus sign.71) provides reasonable results only in a certain range.70) becomes working range hmax = 2σ g ∆ρ r { 0. the surface tension issue is important only in case where the radius is very small and gravity is negligible.70) when β = 0 and thus cos β = 1.6 (1.71).” The depression height.22. However.
the maximum Force is obtained when β = 0 and thus cos β = 1.19: Calculate the diameter of a water droplet to attain pressure diﬀerence of 1000[N/m2 ].912 10−4 [m] ∆P 1000 End Solution Example 1. the pressure diﬀerence between the inside and outside droplet is 1[kPa].04 × 0. Estimate the surface tension? Solution . However.40 CHAPTER 1.02 cm. Solution The pressure inside the droplet is given by equation (1. Solution using equation ∆P = 2σ 2 × 0.47). Neglect the weight of the ring.0728 ∼ ∼ 728.20: Calculate the pressure diﬀerence between a droplet of water at 20◦ C when the droplet has a diameter of 0.21: Calculate the maximum force necessary to lift a thin wire ring of 0.0728 = ∼ 2. End Solution Example 1.0002 End Solution Example 1.0366[N ] In this value the gravity is not accounted for. Therefore.0[N/m2 ] r 0.22: A small liquid drop is surrounded with the air and has a diameter of 0.001 [m].0728 ∼ . Solution F = 2(2 π r σ) cos β The actual force is unknown since the contact angle is unknown. D = 2R = 22σ 4 × 0.04[m] diameter from a water surface at 20◦ C. F = 4 π r σ = 4 × π × 0. You can assume that temperature is 20◦ C. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS Example 1.
10 22.0832 0.0 mN m T 20◦ C 22◦ C 25◦ C −269◦ C −247◦ C  correction mN mK n/a 0.95 34.95 36.1160 0.10 29.067 . chemical component Acetic Acid Acetone Aniline Benzene Benzylalcohol Benzylbenzoate Bromobenzene Bromobenzene Bromoform Butyronitrile Carbon disulﬁd Quinoline Chloro benzene Chloroform Cyclohexane Cyclohexanol Cyclopentanol Carbon Tetrachloride Carbon disulﬁd Chlorobutane Ethyl Alcohol Ethanol Ethylbenzene Ethylbromide Ethylene glycol Formamide Gasoline Glycerol Helium Mercury Methanol Methyl naphthalene Methyl Alcohol Neon Nitrobenzene Olive Oil Surface Tension 27.1118 n/a n/a 0.048.50 28. The surface tension for selected materials at temperature 20◦ C when not mentioned.1484 0.70 26.30 43.20 24.1177 0.1191 0.20 ∼ 21 64.1094 0.50 36.1484 0.6 5.0 0.1117 n/a 0.1.40 32.2049 0.0 22.12 33.50 41.7.50 24.1037 0.90 43.20 43.70 38.1211 0.70 58.30 23.8 32.6 25.0920 0. SURFACE TENSION To be continue End Solution 41 Table 1.0842 n/a 0.0773 0.1160 0.0966 0.1063 0.12 425465.1295 0.1291 0.3 22.1011 n/a 0.4 28.88 39.15 43.60 27.1308 0.00 45.0598 n/a 0.1066 0.7.1120 0.20 47.1159 0.1085 0.60 22.10 32.0890 0.
10 28.60 n/a 5469 28.0902 0.1372 0. INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICS Table 1.1100 n/a n/a 0.85 11.91 14.1514 0.1172 0.50 23.1101 0.1189 n/a 0.7.0972 0.4 27 72.42 CHAPTER 1.0935 0. The surface tension for selected materials (continue) chemical component Perﬂuoroheptane Perﬂuorohexane Perﬂuorooctane Phenylisothiocyanate Propanol Pyridine Pyrrol SAE 30 Oil Seawater Toluene Turpentine Water oXylene mXylene Surface Tension mN m T 25◦ C  correction mN mK 12.00 41.1104 .90 0.0777 0.70 38.00 36.80 30.
Work In mechanics. 2. In this deﬁnition. a review of several deﬁnitions of common thermodynamics terms is presented. The ﬁrst issue that must be addressed.1) This deﬁnition can be expanded to include two issues. the work was deﬁned as mechanical work = F•d = P dV (2. So. that work done on the surroundings by the system boundaries similarly is positive. This introduction is provided to bring the student back to current place with the material. the mass can be assumed constant even though the true conservation law applied to the combination of mass energy (see Einstein’s law). it is assumed that the system speed is signiﬁcantly lower than that of the speed of light. 43 . Two. In fact for almost all engineering purpose this law is reduced to two separate laws of mass conservation and energy conservation.CHAPTER 2 Review of Thermodynamics In this chapter. System This term will be used in this book and it is deﬁned as a continuous (at least partially) ﬁxed quantity of matter. there is a transfer of energy so that its eﬀect can cause work. The dimensions of this material can be changed.1 Basic Deﬁnitions The following basic deﬁnitions are common to thermodynamics and will be used in this book. It must be noted that electrical current is a work while heat transfer isn’t.
Since all the systems can be calculated in a non accelerating systems. Q12 − W12 = E2 − E1 (2. etc. REVIEW OF THERMODYNAMICS Our system can receive energy. The statement describing the law is the following. m is the mass and the z is the vertical height from a datum.3) Interesting results of equation (2. For example for pure/homogeneous and simple gases it depends on two properties like temperature and pressure. For such body force. The “new” internal energy. A common body force is the gravity.3) is that the way the work is done and/or intermediate states are irrelevant to ﬁnal results. Eu . potential energy (gravity). the potential energy is mgz where g is the gravity force (acceleration). work. chemical potential. From the ﬁrst law it directly implies that for process without heat transfer (adiabatic process) the following is true W12 = E1 − E2 (2.2) The system energy is a state property.5) where q is the energy per unit mass and w is the work per unit mass.4) Thus the energy equation can be written as Total Energy Equation mU1 mU2 2 + mgz1 + EU 1 + Q = + mgz2 + EU 2 + W 2 2 For the unit mass of the system equation (2. .E.44 CHAPTER 2. Thermodynamics First Law This law refers to conservation of energy in a non accelerating system. The internal energy is the energy that depends on the other properties of the system. and electrical energy. The internal energy is denoted in this book as EU and it will be treated as a state property. etc as long the mass remain constant the deﬁnition is not broken. = mU 2 2 (2. is the internal energy per unit mass.6) 2 (2. the conservation is applied to all systems. The kinetic energy is K. The potential energy of the system is depended on the body force. There are several deﬁnitions/separations of the kind of works and they include kinetic energy.5) is transformed into Spesiﬁc Energy Equation U1 2 U2 2 + gz1 + Eu 1 + q = + gz2 + Eu 2 + w 2 2 (2.
Hence. Thermodynamics Second Law There are several deﬁnitions of the second law. δQ =0 T (2. the integral is independent of the path.1.13) .7) In the same manner. These states are independent of the path the system goes through.8) For the case were the body force.11) The integration symbol with the circle represent integral of cycle (therefor circle) in with system return to the same condition. Thus diﬀerentiating the energy equation with respect to time yields the rate of change energy equation. choosing any point in time will make it correct.9) (2. is constant with time like in the case of gravity equation (2. it is referred as a reversible process and the inequality change to equality.12) The last integral can go though several states.9) reduced to Time Dependent Energy Equation D EU DU Dz ˙ ˙ Q−W = + mU + mg Dt Dt Dt (2. The most common mathematical form is Clausius inequality which state that δQ ≥0 T (2. BASIC DEFINITIONS 45 Since the above equations are true between arbitrary points. The rate of change of the energy transfer is DQ ˙ =Q Dt (2. If there is no lost. Bf .2. the work change rate transfered through the boundaries of the system is DW ˙ =W Dt Since the system is with a ﬁxed mass. the rate energy equation is DU D Bf z D EU ˙ ˙ + mU +m Q−W = Dt Dt Dt (2. D/Dt is used instead of the common notation because it referred to system property derivative. No matter which deﬁnition is used to describe the second law it will end in a mathematical form.10) The time derivative operator. This observation leads to the deﬁnition of entropy and designated as S and the derivative of entropy is ds ≡ δQ T rev (2.
20) (2.19) (2.16) (2. REVIEW OF THERMODYNAMICS Performing integration between two states results in 2 S2 − S1 = 1 δQ = T rev 2 dS 1 (2. For reversible process equation (2. it still remail valid for all situations.10) results in T dS = d EU + P dV (2.14) One of the conclusions that can be drawn from this analysis is for reversible and adiabatic process dS = 0. The equation (2.17) (2. Thus. H = EU + P V The speciﬁc enthalpy is enthalpy per unit mass and denoted as. isn’t correct.15) (2.21) ρ .18) For isentropic process.12) can be written as δQ = T dS and the work that the system is doing on the surroundings is δW = P dV Substituting equations (2.17) is reduced to dH = V dP . the enthalpy of the system.17) in mass unit is dP T ds = du + P dv = dh − (2.17) yields (one form of) Gibbs Equation T dS = dH − V dP (2. Enthalpy It is a common practice to deﬁne a new property. It can be noted that there is a possibility that a process can be irreversible and the right amount of heat transfer to have zero change entropy change. equation (2.18) the (2.16) into (2. h. it can be shown that it is valid for reversible and irreversible processes. which is the combination of already deﬁned properties. Furthermore. the entropy remains constant and referred to as isentropic process. Or in a diﬀerential form as dH = dEU + dP V + P dV Combining equations (2.15) Even though the derivation of the above equations were done assuming that there is no change of kinetic or potential energy. the reverse conclusion that zero change of entropy leads to reversible process. the process in which it is reversible and adiabatic.46 CHAPTER 2. Thus.
2.” This constant to match the standard units results in ¯ R = 8. The ratio the speciﬁc heat of gases is larger than one. This approximation less strong for liquid but not by that much and in most cases it applied to the calculations. and speciﬁc volume deﬁne the equation of state for gases.” allows the calculation of a “universal gas constant. k. and it is deﬁned as P = ρRT (2. Commonly the diﬀerence for solid is ignored and both are assumed to be the same and therefore referred as C.26) . that ”all gases at the same pressures and temperatures have the same number of molecules per unit of volume. pressure. The ﬁrst change of the internal energy and it is deﬁned as the following Spesiﬁc Volume Heat Cv ≡ ∂Eu ∂T (2. The simplest equation of state referred to as ideal gas. the ratio of the speciﬁc heats is almost 1 and therefore the diﬀerence between them is almost zero. Equation of state Equation of state is a relation between state variables. Spesiﬁc Heats Ratio Cp k≡ Cv (2.3145 kj kmol K (2.22) And since the change of the enthalpy involve some kind of work is deﬁned as Spesiﬁc Pressure Heat Cp ≡ ∂h ∂T (2. Normally the relationship of temperature.24) For solid. 47 Speciﬁc Heats The change of internal energy and enthalpy requires new deﬁnitions.25) Application of Avogadro’s law. BASIC DEFINITIONS when the density enters through the relationship of ρ = 1/v.23) The ratio between the speciﬁc pressure heat and the speciﬁc volume heat is called the ratio of the speciﬁc heat and it is denoted as.1.
7113 0.013 114.015 R kj KgK CP kj KgK Cv kj KgK k Air Argon Butane Carbon Dioxide Carbon Monoxide Ethane Ethylene Helium Hydrogen Methane Neon Nitrogen Octane Oxygen Propane Steam 0.1156 10.28700 0.5734 0.04 20.393 1.7662 1.667 1.4909 1.948 58.7448 1. Table 2.2091 2.28) .4108 1.124 44.7164 0.18855 0.6529 0.48152 1.29683 0.299 1.18892 0.0035 0.41195 0.29680 0.5203 1.016 16.51835 0.400 1.667 1.400 1. the speciﬁc gas can be calculate as R= ¯ R M (2.07 28.27650 0.14304 0.9216 1.183 28.07703 4.1.4897 1.289 1.29637 2.0413 1.0416 1.1926 14.999 44.400 1.327 From equation (2.01 28.0299 1.3122 1.6385 0.1.07279 0.2518 3.5482 5.25983 0.6794 1.12418 0.01 30.667 1.409 1.237 1. REVIEW OF THERMODYNAMICS Thus.7354 0.003 2.7165 0.186 1.044 1.970 39.091 1.6618 1.126 1.7445 1.6179 0.25) of state for perfect gas it follows d(P v) = RdT For perfect gas dh = dEu + d(P v) = dEu + d(RT ) = f (T ) (only) (2.054 4.48 CHAPTER 2. Properties of Various Ideal Gases [300K] Gas Chemical Formula Ar C4 H10 CO2 CO C 2 H6 C 2 H4 He H2 CH4 Ne N2 C8 H18 O2 C 3 H8 H2 O Molecular Weight 28.2537 1.29) (2.20813 0.8723 0.8418 1.0849 1.097 18.230 31.27) The speciﬁc constants for select gas at 300K is provided in table 2.
35) transformed into k T2 P2 s2 − s1 = ln − ln R k − 1 T1 P1 For isentropic process. The entropy for ideal gas can be simpliﬁed as the following 2 s2 − s1 = 1 dh dP − T ρT (2.667. ∆s = 0.1. k value ranges from unity to about 1.37) There are several famous identities that results from equation (2.35) Or using speciﬁc heat ratio equation (2.33) The speciﬁc heat ratio.32) (2. of Classical thermodynamics.38) . The ratio of the speciﬁc heats can be expressed in several forms as Cv to Spesiﬁc Heats Ratio Cv = R k−1 (2.30) Utilizing equation (2.31) Cp to Spesiﬁc Heats Ratio Cp = kR k−1 (2.1).” The values of several gases can be approximated as ideal gas and are provided in Table (2. BASIC DEFINITIONS From the deﬁnition of enthalpy it follows that d(P v) = dh − dEu 49 (2.2.36) (2.34) Using the identities developed so far one can ﬁnd that 2 s2 − s1 = 1 Cp dT − T 2 1 R dP T2 P2 = Cp ln − R ln P T1 P1 (2.30) and dividing by dT yields Cp − Cv = R This relationship is valid only for ideal/perfect gases.37) as Ideal Gas Isontropic Relationships T2 = T1 P2 P1 k−1 k = V1 V2 k−1 (2.28) and subsisting into equation (2. the following is obtained T2 ln = ln T1 P2 P1 k−1 k (2. These values depend on the molecular degrees of freedom (more explanation can be obtained in Van Wylen “F.
39) . This correction factor referred as the compressibility factor and deﬁned as Z deviation from the Ideal Gas Model PV Z= RT (2. REVIEW OF THERMODYNAMICS The ideal gas model is a simpliﬁed version of the real behavior of real gas.50 CHAPTER 2. The real gas has a correction factor to account for the deviations from the ideal gas model.
It also can be noticed that this derivative is present derivation of any victory. These concepts and deﬁnitions will be used in this book and a review is needed. This chapter provides a review of important deﬁnitions and concepts from Mechanics (statics and dynamics). The acceleration is the derivative of the velocity “regular acceleration” angular acceleration centrifugal acceleration Coriolis acceleration a= dU = dt d2R dt2 + R× R dω dt +ω × R × ω +2 dR dt ×ω R (3.1 Kinematics of of Point Body A point body is location at time. t in a location. change in R direction change in perpendicular to R U = dR = dt dR dt + R ω ×R (3.CHAPTER 3 Review of Mechanics This author would like to express his gratitude to Dan Olsen (former Minneapolis city Engineer) and his friend Richard Hackbarth. R .1: A water jet is supposed be used to extinguish the ﬁre in a building as depicted in Figure 51 .1) Notice that ω can have three dimensional components. The velocity is derivative of the change of the location and using the chain role (for the direction and one for the magnitude) results. 3.2) Example 3.
dow. What is the angle that jet has to be aimed.I.d) results in tan θ = 1 b + a 2 (3.a) becomes √ ag −g a 0= + U cos θ =⇒ U = U cos θ cos θ Substituting (3. U sin θ U cos θ θ Solution The initial velocity is unknown and denoted as U which two components. t and three equations. Description of the extinguish locity so that the jet reach the winnozzle aimed at the building window. Calculate what is the veFig. Isolating t from (3.I.52 CHAPTER 3.a). The velocity at x is Ux = U cos θ and the velocity in y direction is Uy = U sin θ. Assume that gravity is g and the distance of the nozzle from the building is a and height of the window from the nozzle is b. REVIEW OF MECHANICS 3.I.I.I.11 . and time.c) These nonlinear equations (3.c) can be solved explicitly.I. There there are three unknowns.c) b= and equation (3.d) End Solution 1 While the simple example does not provide exact use of the above equation it provides experience of going over the motions of kinematics. To simplify the calculations.I. .I.1. it b proposed to calculate the velocity a of the point particle to toward the window.I. The equation for the x coordinate is a = U cos θ t (3. at what angle the jet has to be shot so that velocity will be horizontal at the window.e) −g a2 + a tan θ 2 U 2 cos2 θ (3.a) and substituting into equations (3. 3.I. U .b) and (3. (3.I.b) and (3.f) (3.I.a) The distance for y equation for coordinate (zero is at the window) is 0=− g t2 + U sin θ t − b 2 (3.I.e) into (3.I. For given velocity. θ.I.b) The velocity for the y coordinate at the window is zero u(t) = 0 = −g t + U sin θ (3.
CENTER OF MASS 53 3. It is convenient to use the Cartesian system to explain this concept. rho) as a function of the location.Fig. 3.3) z Here. x. This concept is derived from the fact that a body has a center of mass/gravity which interacts with other bodies and that this force acts on the center (equivalent force). fashion the center of mass can be deﬁned in the other directions as following xi of Center Mass 1 xi = ¯ xi ρ(xi )dV m V (3. the body will not rotate. if a body will be held by one point it will be enough to hold the body in the direction of the center of mass. It can be noticed that center of mass in the x–direction isn’t aﬀected by the distribu. 3.2. . even for solid and uniform density the line density is a function of the geometry. etc. In same is calculated. The density “normally” deﬁned as mass per volume. ρ(xi ) is the line density as function of xi . y or z. Suppose that the body has a distribution of the mass (density. center of area (two–dimensional body with equal distribution mass). The density. ﬁrst. moment of inertia. In x coordinate. In other words.1 Actual Center of Mass In many engineering problems.3. The center of mass doesn’t depend on the coordinate system and on the way it is calculated. center of the mass and two. Here. if the body isn’t be held through the center of mass. Note.2. the x mass. Thus. then a moment in additional to force is required (to prevent the body for rotating). m is the total mass of the object.2. Also. the center of mass is required to make the calculations. It turns out that this concept is very useful in calculating rotations. the the line density is referred to density mass per unit length in the x direction.2 Center of Mass The center of mass is divided into two sections. the dV element has ﬁnite dimendV sions in y–z plane and inﬁnitesimal dimension in x direction see Figure 3.2.4) where xi is the direction of either. the center will be deﬁned as 1 x= ¯ m dm y x ρ(x)dV V (3. Description of how the center of mass tion in the y nor by z directions. The physical meaning of the center of mass is that if a straight line force acts on the body in away through the center of gravity.
3 which has density.3. 3. the body was a three dimensional shape.6) when the integral now over only the area as oppose over the volume. 3. Thus equation (3. REVIEW OF MECHANICS 3. There are cases where the body can be approximated as a twodimensional shape because the body is with a thin with uniform density. Finding the centroid location should be done in the most convenient coordinate system since the location is coordinate independent. t.8) .2.1 Moment of Inertia for Mass The moment of inertia turns out to be an essential part for the calculations of rotating bodies. are constant and can be canceled.54 CHAPTER 3.7) can be transformed into Irr m = ρ r2 dV V (3. Consider a uniform thin body with constant thickness shown in Figure 3. 3.2 Aproximate Center of Area t dA Y In the previous case. Moment of inertia of mass is deﬁned as Moment of Inertia Irr m = ρr2 dm m (3.5) can be transferred into Aproxiate xi of Center Mass xi = ¯ 1 A xi dA A (3. schematic. ρ and the thickness. Thin body center of mass/area The density. equation (3. it turns out that the moment of inertia has much wider applicability.7) If the density is constant then equation (3.3. Thus. ρ.5) Fig. the moment of inertia is divided into moment of inertia of mass and area.3) can be transferred into 1 x= ¯ tA ρ V dm z x x ρ t dA V (3. Furthermore.3 Moment of Inertia As it was divided for the body center of mass.
equation (3.13) y’ C z Thus.3. t and uniform density the following can be written moment of inertia for area Ixx m = r2 dm = ρ t m A r2 dA (3.14) ∆y x z’ ∆x x’ In the same fashion for other two coordinates as Iyy = A x2 + z 2 dA Fig. rk = Im m (y 2 + z 2 ) dm (x2 + z 2 ) dm V (x2 + y 2 ) dm V V (3.3.12) x= y2 + z2 (3.10) 3. Some people deﬁne the radius of gyration as an equivalent concepts for the center of mass concept and which means if all the mass were to locate in the one point/distance and to obtain the same of moment of inertia. 3.12) can be written as Ixx = A y +z 2 2 dA (3. but dependent on the location of axis of rotation relative to the body. The schematic that explains the sum (3.3.4.3. .1 Moment of Inertia for Area General Discussion For body with thickness. MOMENT OF INERTIA 55 The moment of inertia is independent of the coordinate system used for the calculation.15) mation of moment of inertia.11) The moment of inertia about axis is x can be deﬁned as Moment of Inertia Ixx m Ixx = r2 dA = ρt A where r is distance of dA from the axis x and t is the thickness.2 3.9) The body has a diﬀerent moment of inertia for every coordinate/axis and they are Ixx = Iyy = Izz = V V V rx 2 dm = ry 2 dm = rz 2 dm = (3. Any point distance can be calculated from axis x as y (3.2.
21) x If the same areas are similar thus n Fig.2.2 The Parallel Axis Theorem The moment of inertial can be calculated for any axis.5 and therefore.17) equation (3.22) . The second therm is zero because it integral of center about center thus is zero. 3. The moment of inertia for axis x is Ix x = A r dA = A 2 y 2 +z 2 dA = A (y + ∆y) + (z + ∆z) 2 2 dA (3. Let Ixx the moment of inertia about axis xx which is at the center of mass/area. REVIEW OF MECHANICS Izz = A x2 + y 2 dA (3.3. the relationship between the moment of inertia at xx and parallel axis x x is Parallel Axis Equation Ix x = Ixx + r2 A z (3.18) The ﬁrst term in equation (3. The schematic to explain the summation of moment of inertia.20) The moment of inertia of several areas is the sum of moment inertia of each area see Figure 3. n 2 1 y Ixx = i=1 Ixx i (3. The knowledge about one axis can help calculating the moment of inertia for a parallel axis.17) can be expended as Ixx =0 Ix x = A y 2 + z 2 dA + 2 A (y ∆y + z ∆z) dA + A (∆y) + (∆z) 2 2 dA (3. The third term is a new term and can be written as constant r2 2 A 2 A 2 2 (∆y) + (∆z) A dA = (∆y) + (∆z) dA = r2 A (3.5.19) Hence.16) 3.18) on the right hand side is the moment of inertia about axis x and the second them is zero.56 CHAPTER 3. Ixx = i=1 Ixxi = n Ixxi (3.
The material is with an uniform density and homogeneous.6 as Irr = ρ V r dm = ρ 0 2 r0 dV r h 2 π r dr = ρ h 2 π 2 r0 4 1 1 = ρhπr0 4 = m r0 2 4 2 2 The radius of gyration is rk = 1 2 mr0 2 r0 =√ m 2 End Solution Example 3. . Description of rectangular in x–y plane for calculation of moment of inertia.2: Calculate the moment of inertia for the mass of the cylinder about center axis which height of h and radius. For example.3 Examples of Moment of Inertia Example 3.7 around x coordinate. as shown in Figure 3. Solution The moment of inertia is calculated utilizing equation (3. Cylinder with an element for calculaof the tion moment of inertia.22) is very useful in the calculation of the moment of inertia utilizing the moment of inertia of known bodies. End Solution Fig.3: Calculate the moment of inertia of the rectangular shape shown in Figure 3. Solution The element can be calculated using cylindrical coordinate.3. the moment of inertial of half a circle is half of whole circle for axis a the center of circle. 3.3.3. r0 .6. The moment of inertia can then move the center of area.6. Fig. Here the convenient element is a shell of thickness dr which shown in Figure 3. MOMENT OF INERTIA h 57 Equation (3.14) as following 0 y z b dx a x Ixx = A 2 2 y +z dA = 0 a dA z 2 bdz = a b 3 3 This value will be used in later examples. 3. dr r 3.7.
2 This . Ixx m = ρ −t/2 b a3 a b t 2 + a3 b + z 2 b a dz = ρ t 12 12 (3. consider a simple shape to see the eﬀects of this assumption.26) indicates that ratio approaches one when thickness ratio is approaches zero.58 CHAPTER 3. x can be done as following Ixx b a3 12 (3. 2008 t a End Solution ratio is a dimensionless number that commonly has no special name. b has no eﬀect on the error. February 28. Calculate the moment of inertia about the center of mass of a square shape with a thickness. REVIEW OF MECHANICS Example 3.9. A square element for the calculations of inertia of twodimensional to three– dimensional deviations. The results are present in Figure 3. This author suggests to call this ratio as the B number.8. Ixx m (t → 0) → 1.4: To study the assumption of zero thickness.26) = 2 = 3 t2 Ixx m t ba + ba 1 + a2 Ixx Ixxm It can be noticed right away that equation (3. The ratio of the moment of inertia of ditionally it can be noticed that the ratio twodimensional to three–dimensional. 3.24) to write as t/2 Fig. a2 /t2 is the only contributor to the error2 . Ad.23) dz dIx x m b a3 = ρdy + z2 12 2 r r A 2 ba A a b (3. t compare the results to a square shape with zero thickness.9.Fig.24) The total moment of inertia can be obtained by integration of equation (3. Solution The moment of inertia of transverse slice about y (see Figure mech:ﬁg:squareEll) is Ixx t dIxx m = ρ dy The transformation into from local axis x to center axis. 3.25) Comparison with the thin body results in Ixx ρ t b a3 1 (3. I can be noticed that the error is signiﬁcant very fast even for small values of t/a while the with of the box.
3.11.6: Calculate the center of area and moment of inertia for the parabola.c) Example 3.3.V. y = αx2 .b) Results in Izz = Or a 2 a b3 + 2 a3 b = A 3 End Solution (2a)2 + (2b)2 12 (3. MOMENT OF INERTIA Example 3.10 is a r2 d Izz dy = y 2 + x2 dy dx = −a 2 3 a y 2 + a3 dy 3 (3. b/α. 3. Hint. Hint. Parabola for calculations of moment of inertia.5: Calculate the rectangular moment of Inertia for the rotation trough center in zz axis (axis of rotation is out of the page). why?) is b Izz = −b 2 3 a y 2 + a3 dy 3 4ab (3. Rectangular Moment of inertia.10. Solution dx dy y r x 59 2b 2a Fig. Use this area to calculate moment of inertia.V.11. depicted in Figure 3.a) The second integration ( no need to use (3.V. 3. Solution For y = b the value of x = Fig. calculate the area ﬁrst. There are several ways to approach the calculation (diﬀerent inﬁnitesimal area). The moment of inertia for a long element with a distance y shown in Figure 3. First the area inside the parabola calculated as √ b/α dA/2 A=2 0 2(3 α − 1) (b − αξ )dξ = 3 2 b α 3 2 . construct a small element and build longer build out of the small one. Using this method calculate the entire rectangular.20).
6).27) can be done in two steps ﬁrst calculate the moment of inertia in this coordinate system and then move the coordinate system to center.7: Calculate the moment of inertia of strait angle triangle about its y axis as shown in the Figure on the right. . What is the moment inertia when a −→ 0. Triangle for example 3.14) and doing the integration from 0 to maximum y provides dA b Ix Utilizing equation (3. Utilizing equation (3. What is the moment when a symmetrical triangle is attached on left. α ξ 2 + b−αξ the element area is used before and therefore 2 √ 1 xc = A 0 xc b/α (b − αξ 2 ) αξ + 2 2 dA (b − αξ 2 )dξ = 3αb 15 α − 5 (3. What is the moment when a symmetrical triangle is attached on bottom.60 CHAPTER 3. Solution The right edge line equation can be calculated as x y = 1− h a Y h dy X a Fig. REVIEW OF MECHANICS The center of area can be calculated utilizing equation (3.7. The center of every 2 element is at. Assume that base is a and the height is h. 3.27) The moment of inertia of the area about the center can be found using in equation (3.20) x =4 0 ξ2 ξ 2 b7/2 dξ = √ α 7 α Ix x A (∆x=xc )2 Ixx = Ix x − A ∆x2 = 4 b7/2 3 α − 1 √ − 3 7 α √ b α 3 2 3αb 15 α − 5 2 or after working the details results in Ixx = b 20 b3 − 14 b2 √ 35 α End Solution Example 3. What is the moment inertia when h −→ 0.12.
the product of inertia for x and y axises is Ixy = A x ydA (3. The calculation of the product of inertia isn’t diﬀerent much for the calculation of the moment of inertia.3.3.4 Product of Inertia In addition to the moment of inertia.3)) y 3 h a 1− dy a3 h h = 3 4 0 For two triangles attached to each other the moment of inertia will be sum as The rest is under construction. Here only the product of the area is deﬁned and discussed. the product of inertia is commonly used. Ix y = A x y dA = A (x + ∆x) (y + ∆y)dA (3.28) For example.30) results in 0 0 Ixy ∆y A x dA x ∆ydA + ∆x A y dA ∆x ydA + ∆x ∆y A Ix y = A x ydA + A ∆x ∆ydA A (3.29) Product of inertia can be positive or negative value as oppose the moment of inertia.30) expanding equation (3. Transfer of Axis Theorem Same as for moment of inertia there is also similar theorem. MOMENT OF INERTIA or x y = 1− a h 61 Now using the moment of inertia of rectangle on the side (y) coordinate (see example (3. End Solution a3 h 2 3. The product of inertia deﬁned as Ix i x j = xi xj dA A (3. The units of the product of inertia are the same as for moment of inertia.3.31) A .
62 The ﬁnal form is Ix y CHAPTER 3.3. Example 3. The total product of inertia is ∆x ∆y A b ′ y y x a ′ x Ix y =0+ a 3 b 3 ab 2 = a2 b2 18 Fig. .8: Calculate the product of inertia of straight edge triangle.5 Principal Axes of Inertia The inertia matrix or inertia tensor is Ixx −Iyx −Izx −Ixy Iyy −Izy −Ixz −Iyz Izz (3.35) referred as principle system. REVIEW OF MECHANICS = Ixy + ∆x ∆y A (3.34) In linear algebra it was shown that for some angle equation (3.34) can be transform into Ix x 0 0 0 Iy y 0 0 0 Iz z (3. Solution The equation of the line is a y = x+a b The product of inertia at the center is zero.33) Symmetrical area has zero product of inertia because integration of odd function (asymmmertial function) left part cancel the right part.35) System which creates equation (3.32) There are several relationships should be mentioned Ixy = Iyx (3. 3. Product of inertia for triangle.13. End Solution 3.
it can be treated as the regular derivative. the derivative can be taken out of the integral and the alternative form can be written as F= D Dt D2 Dt2 ρ U dV V (3.38) The velocity.5 Angular Momentum and Torque The angular momentum of body. This law apply to any body and any body can “broken” into many small bodies which connected to each other.41) . ˙ 3.39) where r is the location of the particles from the origin. Angular.36) F= Dt It can be noted that D replaces the traditional d since the additional meaning which be added. which can expressed in mathematical form as D (m U ) (3. thus. The external forces are typically divided into two categories: body forces and surface forces. 2 (Ur × ω). r × ω.4 Newton’s Laws of Motion These laws can be summarized in two statements one.4. The surface forces are forces that act on the surface of the body (pressure. Coriolis. Yet.40) The angular momentum of the entire system is calculated by integration (summation) of all the particles in the system as Ls = m r × U dm (3.37) Dt V The external forces are equal to internal forces the forces between the “small” bodies are cancel each other. The same as in the dynamic class. dm. stresses). Two. The radial velocity is denoted as Ur . Since the derivative with respect to time is independent of the volume. the system acceleration called the internal forces. U is a derivative of the location with respect to time. NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION 63 3. The body forces are forces that act from a distance like magnetic ﬁeld or gravity. These small “bodies” when became small enough equation (3.36) can be transformed to a continuous form as D (ρ U ) F= dV (3. Yet this examination provides a tool to study what happened in the ﬂuid during operation of the forces. F= ρ rdV V (3.3. for every action by body A on Body B there is opposite reaction by body B on body A. is deﬁned as L = r × Udm (3. The acceleration is divided into three categories: Centrifugal. ω×(r × ω).
44) To understand these equations a bit better.45) u v 0 Utilizing equation (3.48) In the same way the component in y and z can be obtained. .40) provides ˆ ˆ k i j ˆ ˆ L = r × U = x y 0 = (x v − y u)k (3.46) Since the torque is a derivative with respect to the time of the angular momentum it is also can be written as xFx − yFy = D [(xv − yu) dm] Dt (3. in the same fashion. it can be proved utilizing vector mechanics) that Tτ = D D Dr D2 r (r × U) = (r × )= Dt Dt Dt Dt2 (3. The force can be written. as F = Fxˆ + Fy ˆ Utilizing equation i j. consider a particle moving in x–y plane.64 CHAPTER 3. 3. in analogous to the momentum change of time which is the force. REVIEW OF MECHANICS The change with time of angular momentum is called torque.1 Tables of geometries Th following tables present several moment of inertias of commonly used geometries. The torque of entire system is Tτ s = D DL = Dt Dt (r × Udm) m (3. A force is acting on the particle in the same plane (x–y) plane.42) to calculate the torque as ˆ ˆ k i j ˆ ˆ Tτ = r × F = x y 0 = (x Fx − y Fy )k Fx Fy 0 (3.42) where Tτ is the torque. Tτ = DL D = (r × Udm) Dt Dt (3.5.47) The torque is a vector and the various components can be represented as Tτ x = ˆ • i D Dt r × U dm m (3.43) m It can be noticed (well. The velocity can be written as U = uˆ + vˆ and the location from the origin can be written as r = xˆ + yˆ i j i j. (3.
2 2 ab ab3 12 XX Triangle b b/3 a a 3 ab 3 ab3 36 XX Circle a=b b b/2 b 2 π b2 4 πb4 64 a Ellipse XX a>b b b/2 b b 2 2 π ab 4 Ab2 64 a y = αx2 Parabola a XX b xc 3αb 15 α−5 6α−2 3 × 3 b 2 α √ b (20 b3 −14 b2 ) √ 35 α . Moments of Inertia for various plane surfaces about their center of gravity (full shapes) Shape Name Picture description xc . ANGULAR MOMENTUM AND TORQUE 65 Table 3.1.3. yc A Ixx XX Rectangle b b/2 a b a .5.
Moment of inertia for various plane surfaces about their center of gravity Shape Name Picture description r xc . yc A Ixx Quadrant of Circle XX 4r 3π 4r 3π π r2 4 4 π r 4 ( 16 − 9π ) r Ellipsoidal Quadrant XX b 4b 3π 4b 3π πab 4 π 4 a b3 ( 16 − 9π ) a Half of Elliptic XX b 4b 3π 4b 3π πab 4 π 4 a b3 ( 16 − 9π ) a Circular Sector XX α α 0 2α r2 r4 4 (α− 1 sin 2α) 2 r XX Circular Sector α α 2 r sin α 3 α 2 r sin α 3 α Ix 2α r2 r4 4 x = r (α+ 1 sin 2α) 2 . REVIEW OF MECHANICS Table 3.2.66 CHAPTER 3.
4. The system is in a body force ﬁeld. where n is the steepest 67 .g. the student will be exposed to stability analysis probably for the ﬁrst time.1) can be reduced and simpliﬁed for the case of no acceleration. Furthermore. In these derivations. y. a = 0.1 Introduction The simplest situation that can occur in the study of ﬂuid is when the ﬂuid is at rest or quasi rest. Fig. z). The changes of the second derivative pressure are not signiﬁcant compared to the ﬁrst derivative (∂P/∂n × d >> ∂ 2 P/∂n2 ). 4. that pressure can increase and later decrease. gG (x. several assumptions must be made. dy. There is no requirement that the pressure has to be a monotonous function e. a as shown in Figure 4. This topic was introduced to most students in previous study of rigid body.2 The Hydrostatic Equation A ﬂuid element with dimensions of DC. and dz is motionless in the accelerated system.1. here this topic will be more vigorously examined. Later. The combination of an acceleration and the body force results in eﬀective body force which is gG − a = geﬀ y P P+ ∂P dy dxdz ∂y P+ dy ∂P dz dxdy ∂z P+ ∂P dx dydz ∂x dz dx z P x (4. the methods discussed here will be expanded to more complicated dynamics situations. The ﬁrst assumption is that the change in the pressure is a continuous function. with acceleration. However.1) erated system under body forces.CHAPTER 4 Fluids Statics 4.1. Description of a ﬂuid element in accel Equation (4.
was a two–dimensional height (that is only a function of x and y) then the gradient is the steepest ascent of the height (to the valley).68 CHAPTER 4. the eﬀective gravity force is utilized in case where the gravity is the only body force and in an accelerated system. This mathematical statement simply requires that the pressure can deviate in such a way that the average on inﬁnitesimal area can be found and expressed as only one direction. The second point is that the gradient is a vector (that is. FLUIDS STATICS direction of the pressure derivative and d is the inﬁnitesimal length. As before. the calculations of the three directions result in the total net pressure force as F =− surface ∂P ˆ ∂P ˆ ∂P ˆ i+ j+ k ∂x ∂y ∂y (4. P . the utilizing the above derivations one can obtain −gradP dx dy dz + ρ geﬀ dx dy dz = 0 or Pressure Gradient gradP = P = ρ geﬀ (4. the dot product results in in · gradP = in · P = ∂P ∂n (4. If the pressure. if the coordinates were to “rotate/transform” to a new system which has a diﬀerent orientation. as a scalar function (there no reference to the shear stress in part of the pressure) the gradient is a vector. the dot product of the following is i · gradP = i · P = ∂P ∂x (4. The body (element) is in rest and therefore the net force is zero F= total surface F+ body F (4.3) The term in the parentheses in equation (4. This mathematical operation has a geometrical interpretation.3) referred to in the literature as the pressure gradient (see for more explanation in the Mathematics Appendix). The net pressure force on the faces in the x direction results in dF = − ∂P ∂x dydx ˆ i (4. For example.7) . Even though. now. it has a direction).2) In the same fashion.5) where in is the unit vector in the n direction and ∂/∂n is a derivative in that direction. the pressure is treated.4) In general.8) (4.6) Hence.
11) and therefore P (x. This equation can be integrated and therefore solved. For this reason sometime there will be a deviation from the above statement.3 Pressure and Density in a Gravitational Field In this section. if at point z0 the pressure is P0 then the equation (4.8) as the Fluid Static Equation. PRESSURE AND DENSITY IN A GRAVITATIONAL FIELD 69 Some refer to equation (4. First.13) The integration constant is determined from the initial conditions or another point.1 Constant Density in Gravitational Field The simplest case is when the density.12) can be absorbed by the integration of equation (4. ρ.14) 1 This situation were the tradition is appropriated. These equations are ∂P ∂P = =0 ∂x ∂y and Pressure Change ∂P = −ρ g ∂z Equations (4.9) Utilizing equation (4. For example.9) and substituting it into equation (4.8) results into three simple partial diﬀerential equations. y) = constant (4. The eﬀective body force is ˆ geﬀ = −g k (4.3.10) can be integrated to yield P (x. T (in a way no function of the location) are constant. a discussion on a simple condition and will continue in more challenging situations. However. z) = −ρgz + constant (4. the z coordinate is used as the (negative) direction of the gravity1 .3. There are ﬁelds where x or y are designed to the direction of the gravity and opposite direction.11) (4.4. there are several physical implications to this equation which should be discussed and are presented here. Traditionally. and temperature. P .13) becomes P (z) − P0 = −ρg(z − z0 ) (4. 4. a discussion on the pressure and the density in various conditions is presented. it will be used. .12) (4. pressure. 4. y.10) and constant in equation (4.
2.70 CHAPTER 4. 4. A schematic to explain the measure to deﬁne h as the dependent of the ﬂuid of the atmospheric pressure. Example 4. that is h ≡ −(z − z0 ) so equation (4.3. If the air mass at chamber A is 1 Kg while the mass at chamber B is unknown. It is evident from equation (4. The reason that a a solid boundary doesn’t break the continuity of the pressure lines is because there is always a path to some of the planes.13) that the pressure depends only on z and/or the constant pressure lines are in the plane of x and y. 4.15) is deﬁned as piezometric pressure.2 describes the constant ρgh pressure lines in the container under the gravity body force.4 are in equilibration.14) becomes Pressure relationship P (h) − P0 = ρgh (4.15) In the literature. FLUIDS STATICS Constant Pressure Lines Fig. The diﬀerence in the . The pressure lines are continuous even in area where there is a discontinuous ﬂuid. Figure 4. It is convenient to reverse the direction of z to get rid of the negative sign and Fig. the right hand side of the equation (4. Pressure lines in a static ﬂuid with a constant density.1: Two chambers tank depicted in Figure 4.
a) (4.2: . 4. The total Fig.I. PRESSURE AND DENSITY IN A GRAVITATIONAL FIELD 71 liquid heights between the two chambers is 2[m]. the chamber are at the same temperature of 27◦ C.I.e) RT P B VB (4.b) h2 ρ g mA VA RT RT 1 = − = h2 ρ g =⇒ 1 − mB VB mA VA m B VB RT mA VA In equation the only unknown is the ratio of mB /mA since everything else is known.d) combining equations (4. Calculate the air mass in chamber B.a).3. (4. Assume that for accelerated cart. Example 4. You can assume ideal gas for the air h1 and the water is incompressible substance with density of 1000[kg/m2 ].I.c) The pressure diﬀerence between the liquid interface is estimated negligible the air density as PA − PB = ∆P = h2 ρ g (4.b) results in (4.4.f) The following question is a very nice qualitative question of understanding this concept.I.4.I. The eﬀective gravity is height of the tank is 4[m]. The liquid in the two chambers is water. The area of each chamber is h3 h2 1[m2 ]. Denoting X = mB /mA results in h 2 ρ g m A VA 1 =1− =⇒ X = X RT End Solution 1 h2 ρ g mA VA 1− RT (4.I. Solution The equation of state for the chamber A is RT PA VA The equation of state for the second chamber is mA = mB = The water volume is Vtotal = h1 A + (h1 + h2 )A = (2 h1 + h2 ) A (4.I.I.
16) End Solution Example 4. For the case. The way the interpretation of an automobile fuel gage is proportional to the pressure at the bottom of the fuel tank. 4. hH − hL h1 + h2 = − h2 h2 or hH − hL = h1 1− ρ1 ρ2 (4. the lighter liquid is on the top the heavier liquid the the top tube is the same as the surface. Part of the tank height is ﬁlled with the water at the bottom (due to the larger density). The pressure at the bottom is P = Patmos + g (ρ1 h1 + ρ2 h2 ) (4.d) ρ1 h 1 + ρ2 h 2 h 2 ρ2 = h1 h2 1− ρ1 ρ2 (4.b) h2 h2 hr 21 ρ2 It can be noticed that hH = h1 + h − 2 hence.II.II. The diﬀerence is hH − hL hH ρ1 h 1 + ρ2 h 2 = − (4. the lower tube will raise only to (notice that g is canceled) hL = ρ1 h1 + ρ2 h2 ρ2 (4.5. The water also can change measurement of fuel gage. Which piezometric tube will be higher? why? and how much higher? What is the pressure at the bottom of the tank? Solution CHAPTER 4.a) Since ρ1 > ρ1 the mathematics dictate that the height of the second is lower.c) The only way the hL to be higher of hH is if the heavy liquid is on the top if the stability allow it.II. FLUIDS STATICS h1 hL h2 hH Fig. .72 A tank with opening at the top to the atmosphere contains two immiscible liquids one heavy and one light as depicted in Figure 4.5 (the light liquid is on the top of the heavy liquid). Tank and the eﬀects different liquids. Calculate the error for a give ratio between the fuel density to the water.3: The eﬀect of the water in the car tank is more than the possibility that water freeze in fuel lines. However. The common instinct is to ﬁnd that the lower tube will contain the higher liquids.II.
Solution The pressure is uniform or constant plane perpendicular to the gravity.15) can be utilized and it can be noticed that pressure at point a is Pa = ρ g h + Pvapor (4. The high of the Mercury is 0. Hence.85[kg/m3 ].1 Pressure Measurement Measuring the Atmospheric Pressure One of the application of this concept is the idea of measuring the atmospheric pressure.d) 4. The description of the height is given in Figure 4. Hence.III.III.a) But when water is present the pressure will be the same at Pf ull = (ρw x + φ ρf ) g htotal and if the two are equal at $ $ htotal ¡ ρf $$ g = (ρw x + φ ρf ) g $$ ¡ htotal (4.c) (4. The liquid is ﬁlling the tube and is brought into a steady state.2. The atmospheric pressure at point a is the same as the pressure on the right hand side of the tube. Using liquid with a very low vapor pressure like mercury.82[m/sec]. Consider a situation described in Figure 4.000179264[kPa]. will result in a device that can measure the pressure without additional information (the temperature).4. Equation (4. φ= ρf − x ρ w ρf End Solution (4.III.76 [m] and the gravity acceleration is 9.b) where φ in this case the ratio of the full height (on the fake) to the total height. The mercury density is 13545.2 4. Assume that the mercury vapor pressure is 0. PRESSURE AND DENSITY IN A GRAVITATIONAL FIELD Solution 73 The ratio of the fuel density to water density is ς = ρf /ρw and the ratio of the total height to the water height is x = hw /htotal Thus the pressure at the bottom when the tank is full with only fuel Pf ull = ρf htotal g (4. Example 4.3. The pressure above the liquid on the right side is the vapor pressure. knowing any point on this plane provides the pressure anywhere on the plane.3.3.17) .3.3.4: Calculate the atmospheric pressure at 20◦ C.III.
Thus.000001793[Bar] which is insigniﬁcant compared to the total measurement as can be observed from the above example. Pa = 13545. Solution The question is to ﬁnd the equilibrium point where two liquids balance each other.76 ∼ 101095. Schematic of gas measurement liquid densities is α = ρ1 /ρ2 . If the width of the U tube is equal or larger than total length of the two liquids then the whole liquid will be in bottom part. The width of the utilizing the “U” tube. FLUIDS STATICS The density of the mercury is given along with the gravity and therefore. The partial pressure of mercury is in the range of the 0.82 × 0. 4.01[Bar] The vapor pressure is about 1 × 10−4 percent of the total results. The ratio of the Fig.6. Gas The pressure. the ratio between two sides will be as ρ1 h1 = ρ2 h2 → h2 = α h1 The mass conservation results in Ha + Hb = L + h 1 + h 2 Thus two equations and two unknowns provide the solution which is h1 = Ha + Hb − L 1+α When Ha > L and ρa (Ha − L) ≥ ρb (or the opposite) the liquid a will be on the two sides of the U tube. L. The additional equation is the mass conservation as Ha = h 2 + L + h 3 2 This example was requested by several students who found their instructor solution unsatisfactory. End Solution The main reason the mercury is used because of its large density and the fact that it is in a liquid phase in most of the measurement range. h .39[P a] ∼ 1. When in this case h1 is equal to Hb .85 × 9.5: A liquid2 a in amount Ha and a liquid b in amount Hb in to an U tube. the balance is h1 ρb + h2 ρa = h3 ρa where h1 is the height of liquid b where h2 is the height of “extra” liquid a and same side as liquid b and where h3 is the height of liquid b on the other side. P valve 2 1 Example 4. U tube is L. Locate the liquids surfaces.74 CHAPTER 4. For smaller width. The third reason is the low vapor (partial) pressure of the mercury.
the gas is prevented from escaping and its pressure can be measured with a min.2.3. This device is based on the following mathematical explanation. 4. The gas density is signiﬁcantly lower than the liquid density and therefore can be neglected.18) Since the atmospheric pressure was measured previously (the technique was shown in the previous section) the pressure of the chamber can be measured. If the pressure diﬀerences between P1 and P2 is small this instrument can “magniﬁed” height.7 shows a typical and simple schematic of such an instrument.2 Pressure Measurement The idea describes the atmoh1 P1 P2 A1 A1 spheric measurement that can be ρ1 ρ1 extended to measure the pressure of the gas chambers.2. Figure 4. It can be noticed that h1 can be positive or negative or zero and it depends on the ratio that .4. engineers invented more sensitive measuring device. Consider a chamber ﬁlled with gas needed to ρ1 be measured (see Figure 4. This device is build around the fact that the height is a function of the densities diﬀerence. imal interference to the gas (some gas enters to the tube). the density of one side was neglected (the gas side) compared to other side (liquid).3 Magniﬁed Pressure Measurement For situations where the pressure diﬀerence is very small. The pressure at point “1” is P1 = Patmos + ρg h (4. h1 and provide “better” accuracy reading. the pressure balance (only diﬀerences) is P1 + g ρ1 (h1 + h2 ) = P2 + g h2 ρ2 (4.19) It can be noticed that the “missing height” is canceled between the two sides.3. Schematic of sensitive measurement device. One A2 h2 ρ2 technique is to attached “U” tube ρ2 to the chamber and measure the ρ2 pressure. thus the height become large. This technique utilizes the opposite range. PRESSURE AND DENSITY IN A GRAVITATIONAL FIELD The solution is h2 = (Ha − L) ρa − Hb ρb 2 ρa End Solution 75 4. In steady state.7. The densities of the two sides are very close to each other.Fig. 4. This way.6). In the previous technique.3.
then equation (4.21) A1 Liquid volumes do not necessarily have to be equal.24) as “magniﬁcation factor” since it replace the regular density.19) becomes −h1 A1 = h2 A2 −→ h1 = − P1 − P2 = g h2 ρ2 − ρ1 1 − or the height is h2 = P1 − P2 g (ρ2 − ρ1 ) + ρ1 A2 A1 P1 − P2 g (ρ2 − ρ1 ) (4. But this ratio can be inserted easily into the derivations. This method is an attempt to increase the accuracy by “extending” length visible of the tube. the volume ratio.25) If there is a insigniﬁcant change in volume (the area ratio between tube and inclined leg is signiﬁcant). Here. Thus.8. With the equation for height (4. caused air entrapment especially in rapid change of the pressure or height. A2 /A1 << 1.18) is then Poutside P1 dy θ dℓ P1 − Poutside = ρ g d Fig. The densities of the liquids are chosen to be much heavier than the measured gas density. in writing equation (4. Additional parameter.21) equation (4.23) becomes h2 = (4. In this method. Additionally. For example. it provides the relationship between h1 and h2 .21). the tube leg is inclined relatively to gravity (depicted in Figure 4.76 CHAPTER 4.20) If the light liquid volume in the two containers is known. The equation (4. it can be observed that h1 is relatively small because A1 >> A2 .8). 4. this ratio equals to one and it simplify the equation (4.24) Some refer to the density diﬀerence shown in equation (4. . The pressure diﬀerence can be expressed as P1 − P2 = g [ρ2 h2 − ρ1 (h1 + h2 )] (4.19) the gas density was neglected. Due to surface tension. will be introduced when the volumes ratio isn’t equal. Inclined manometer. FLUIDS STATICS two containers ﬁlled with the light density liquid. The densities of the liquid are chosen so that they are close to each other but not equal. 3 This author’s personal experience while working in a ship that use this manometer which is signiﬁcantly inaccurate (ﬁrst thing to be replaced on the ship). if the volumes in two containers are equal then h2 A2 (4.23) A2 A1 (4.22) For the small value of the area ratio. The calculations as results of this additional parameter does not cause a signiﬁcant complications. ρ2 . a location can be calibrated on the inclined leg as zero3 . (4. Inclined Manometer One of the old methods of pressure measurement is the inclined manometer.
These relationships will be used to ﬁnd the functionality between pressure.27) Fig.3.4. liquids and other.9). density and location.3 Varying Density in a Gravity Field There are several cases that will be discussed here which are categorized as gases.27) becomes P2 − P1 = (ρ1 − ρ) g h (4. Thus equation (4. 4. The equation of state for liquid can be approximated or replaced by utilizing the bulk modulus.26) 1 a b 2 (4.1 Gas Phase under Hydrostatic Pressure Ideal Gas under Hydrostatic Pressure The gas density vary gradually with the pressure.30) . the ideal gas model can be employed to describe the density.26) leads to P2 − P1 = ρ2 (b + h) g − ρ1 a g − ρ h g (4. PRESSURE AND DENSITY IN A GRAVITATIONAL FIELD Inverted Utube manometer The diﬀerence in the pressure of two diﬀerent liquids is measured by this manometer.28) As in the previous “magniﬁed” manometer if the density diﬀerence is very small the height become very sensitive to the change of pressure. For the similar density of ρ1 = ρ2 and for a = b equation (4. As ﬁrst approximation.3.3. it can be written as the pressure on left is equal to pressure on the right legs (see Figure 4.9. the equation of state is simply the ideal gas model or the ideal gas with the compressibility factor (sometime referred to as real gas). right leg left leg 77 Z Z h P2 − ρ2 (b + h) g = P1 − ρ1 a − ρ h) g Rearranging equation (4. 4.29) Separating the variables and changing the partial derivatives to full derivative (just a notation for this case) results in g dz dP =− P RT (4.3. The pressure line are the same for both legs on line ZZ. 4. This idea is similar to “magniﬁed” manometer but in reversed.11) becomes gP ∂P =− ∂z RT (4. Schematic of inverted manometer. Thus. In the gas phase.
32) can be expanded to show the diﬀerence to standard assumption of constant pressure as − h ρ0 g P0 P (z − z0 ) g (z − z0 ) g + + ··· =1− P0 RT 6RT Or in a simpliﬁed form where the transformation of h = (z − z0 ) to be correction factor h2 P ρ0 g h − + ··· =1+ 6 P0 P0 2 (4. For a large range of P/Pc and T /Tc . FLUIDS STATICS Equation (4.34) is useful in mathematical derivations but should be ignored for practical use4 .33) (4.78 CHAPTER 4. Z enter the equation as h/Z and not just h. The modiﬁed equation is P = P0 Or in a series form which is P (z − z0 ) g (z − z0 ) g =1− + + ··· P0 Z RT 6Z RT 2 e „ − g (z−zo ) Z RT « (4. The compressibility is deﬁned in equation (2. In general. These deviations have a limited practical purpose.31) to the following P = P0 e − g(z−zo ) RT (4.39). they are presented here for students who need to answer questions on this issue. a numerical integration must be carried out.32) Here the pressure ratio is related to the height exponentially. the ﬁrst approximation should be noticed that the compressibility factor.35) (4. the relationship is very complicated and in some ranges Z cannot be assumed constant. the value of the compressibility factor. However. . 4 These derivations are left for a mathematical mind person. In these cases.33).31) It is convenient to rearrange equation (4.32) and (4.34) Equation (4. Another point that is worth discussing is the relationship of Z to other gas properties. Real Gas under Hydrostatic Pressure The mathematical derivations for ideal gas can be reused as a foundation for the real gas model (P = ZρRT ). Z.30) can be integrated from point “0” to any point to yield ln P g =− (z − z0 ) P0 RT „ « (4. Equation (4.36) Without going through the mathematics. can be assumed constant and therefore can be swallowed into equations (4.
37) The variables for equation (4.3.40) is the counterpart for the equation of state of ideal gas for the liquid phase.41) can be integrated to yield BT g ρ0 e P −P0 BT (4.40) Equation (4. If at z = 0 the pressure is P0 and the density is ρ0 then the constant is Constant = BT g ρ0 (4.43) .42) It can be noted that BT has units of pressure and therefore the ratio in front of the exponent in equation (4. PRESSURE AND DENSITY IN A GRAVITATIONAL FIELD 4. The integration constant. only one hydrostatic equation depends on density equation. The simplest approach is to assume that the bulk modulus is constant (or has some representative average).3. with units of length.4. For these cases.41) e P −P0 BT = z + Constant (4. there are two diﬀerential equations that needed to be solved.37) should be separated and then the integration can be carried out as P ρ dP = P0 ρ0 BT dρ ρ (4.38) The integration of equation (4.42) has units of length. So. can be evaluated at any speciﬁc point.38) yields P − P0 = BT ln ρ ρ0 (4.39) can be represented in a more convenient form as Density variation ρ = ρ0 e P −P0 BT (4. Fortunately.28).2 Liquid Phase Under Hydrostatic Pressure 79 The bulk modulus was deﬁned in equation (1.40) in equation (4. here. The governing diﬀerential density equation (see equation (1. Utilizing equation (4.28)) is ρ = BT ∂ρ ∂P (4. the diﬀerential equation for density should be solved ﬁrst.3.39) Equation (4.11) transformed into ∂P = −gρ0 ∂z Equation (4.
47) is reduced to the standard equation when the normalized pressure ratio. the solution is presented as P BT = ln P0 P0 g ρ0 z +1 +1 BT (4.10.13 ratio of the density was expressed by equations (1.45) Fig. FLUIDS STATICS e P −P0 BT P −P0 BT −1 =z (4.47) BT P − P0 BT P − P0 + + ··· 2 BT 6 BT It can be noticed that equation (4.45) is presented for historical reasons and in order to compare the constant density assumption. Additionally. BT /g ρ0 .10. Sometimes.44) and is plotted in Figure 4. The exponent can be expanded as piezometric corrections 2 3 = z g ρ0 (4.80 This constant. please pass this information to this author. Hydrostatic pressure when there is compressibility in the liquid phase. 2008 P −P0 BT Or in a dimensionless form Density in Liquids g ρ0 z BT e −1 z g ρ0 = BT (4. pressure (P − P0 ) + Example 4. The solution is a reverse function (that is not P = f (z) but z = f (P)) it is a monotonous function which is easy to solve for any numerical value (that is only one z corresponds to any Pressure).l) while here the ratio is expressed by diﬀerent equations.6: 5 This author is not aware of the “equation of state” solution or the integral solution.” The method described in the Example 1. it can be observed that the correction is on the left hand side and not as the “traditional” correction on the piezometric pressure side. The diﬀerence between the two equations is the fact that Example 1. . However.46) An approximation of equation (4. The solution becomes BT g ρ0 CHAPTER 4. The solution is presented in equation (4. In Example 1.13 is more general which provided a simple solution5 . the integral equation uses the fact that the pressure is function of location. The equation of state suggests that ∂P = g ρ0 f (P ) dz while the integral equation is ∆P = g ρ dz where no assumption is made on the relationship between the pressure and density. P/BT is small (<< 1). is a typical length of the problem.XIII. If you know of any of these solutions or similar. 4.13 use the integral equation without using any “equation of state.44) March 11. Additional discussion will be presented in the dimensionless issues chapter (currently under construction). The comparison between the two methods will be presented.
A bit more complicate case is when the gas is a function of the pressure and another parameter.53) 6 A colleague asked this author to insert this explanation for his students. Air can be a function of the temperature ﬁeld and the pressure. Using these deﬁnitions results in dP g dξ = P RCx ξ (4.).3. just ignore it.3. Here.4.49) where the Constant is the integration constant which can be obtained by utilizing the initial condition. Hence.4 4.50) Separating the variables in equation (4. it is commonly assumed that the temperature is a linear function of the height.50) with (4. please.4.52) Deﬁning a new variable6 as ξ = (T0 − Cx h) for which ξ0 = T0 − Cx h0 and d/dξ = −Cx d/dh. PRESSURE AND DENSITY IN A GRAVITATIONAL FIELD 81 4.3.1 The Pressure Eﬀects Due To Temperature Variations The Basic Analysis There are situations when the main change of the density results from other eﬀects. For h = 0. the temperature–distance function can be written as T = Constant − Cx h (4. when the temperature ﬁeld is not uniform.48) where h here referred to height or distance. For example.51) (4.11) results in ∂P gP =− ∂h R (T0 − Cx h) (4. a simple case is examined for which the temperature is a linear function of the height as dT = −Cx dh (4. . the temperature is T0 and using it leads to Temp variations T = T0 − Cx h Combining equation (4. the density is aﬀected and thus the pressure is a location function (for example. If you feel that it is too simple. For the atmosphere.51) and changing the formal ∂ to the informal d to obtain dP g dh =− P R (T0 − Cx h) (4. the temperature in the atmostphere is assumed to be a linear with the height under certain conditions.
56) shows that the ﬁrst two terms are the standard terms (negative sign is as expected i.57) shows that the correction factor (lapse coeﬃcient). Cx .82 CHAPTER 4. h.55) represents only the pressure ratio. T0 R 2 T0 2 R2 (4. FLUIDS STATICS After the integration of equation (4.57) Equation (4.50).56) Equation (4. For engineering purposes. The correction factor occurs only at the third term which is important for larger heights.R. The ﬁrst approximation for a small distance. (4. . it is sometimes important to obtain the density ratio. Eckert who was the pioneer of the dimensional analysis in heat transfer and was kind to show me some of his ideas. I am grateful to my adviser E.57) are not properly represented without the characteristic height. However.e..55) is a monotonous function which decreases with height because the term in the brackets is less than one. this kind of analysis will be presented in the dimensional analysis chapter7 . It can be recalled that the following expansions are g h ρ0 P0 correction factor P Cx = lim 1 − h h−>0 P0 T0 g R Cx =1− R g C x − g 2 h2 gh − − .55) can be approximated by two approaches/ideas. inﬂuences at only large values of height. The simplest assumption to combine these 7 These concepts are very essential in all the thermo–ﬂuid science. This situation is roughly representing the pressure in the atmosphere and results in a temperature decrease.56) and (4. Equation (4.55) It can be noticed that equation (4.G. and the second approximation for a small temperature gradient. This relationship can be obtained from combining equations (4. It has to be noted that these equations (4.55) and (4... Equation (4. It can be observed that Cx has a “double role” which can change the pressure ratio.54) Or in a more convenient form as Pressure in Atmosphere P = P0 g T0 − Cx h ( R Cx ) T0 (4. It has to be inserted to make the physical signiﬁcance clearer. The second approximation for small Cx is P Cx = lim h 1− Cx −>0 P0 T0 g R Cx = e gh −RT 0 − g h2 Cx 2 T0 2 R e gh −RT 0 − .52) and reusing (the reverse deﬁnitions) the variables transformed the result into ln P g T0 − Cx h = ln P0 R Cx T0 (4. It is worth to point out that the above statement has a qualitative meaning when additional parameter is added.. negative direction).
That is. A weak wind or other disturbances can make the unstable system to move to a new condition. In reality. Suppose that h for some reason. the body forces that acting on the slab are equal to zero. The second issue that occurs during the “expansion” is the shock (in the reverse case [h + dh] → h). to layer at height h + dh (see Figure 4.58) Advance material can be skipped 4. The buoyancy forces are proportional to the ratio of the density of the slab to surrounding layer density. PRESSURE AND DENSITY IN A GRAVITATIONAL FIELD equations is by assuming the ideal gas model.2 The Stability Analysis It is interesting to study whether h + dh this solution (4. equation (2.25). the free expansion is not far way from the actual process. the stability question is whether the slab density from layer h.3. Thus.4. . Under equilibrium. Two adjoin layers for stability analysis. two main possibilities one: the slab could return to the original layer or two: stay at the new layer (or even move further.55) is stable and if so under what conditions. the surroundings “pressure” forces (buoyancy forces) are equal to gravity forces.4. 4. ρ (h) undergoing a free expansion is higher or lower than the density of the layer h + dh. The whole system falls apart and does not stay if the analysis predicts unstable conditions. That is. The two forces that act on the slab are the gravity force and the surroundings pressure (buoyant forces). The reason that the free expansion is chosen to explain the process that the slab undergoes when it moves from layer h to layer h + dh is because it is the simplest. Whether these forces are toward the original layer or not. a small slab of material moves from a layer at height. the pressure process is about thousands times faster than the thermal process. Clearly. The term ρ (h) is slab from layer h that had undergone the free expansion. The thermal process is in the range of [cm/sec] while the speed of sound is about 300 [m/sec]. The ﬁrst case is referred to as the stable condition and the second case referred to as the unstable condition. h. This question is determined by the net forces acting on the slab.11) What could happen? There are Fig. The two processes that occurred here are thermal and the change of pressure (at the speed of sound). higher heights). the slab is in equilibrium with its surroundings before the movement (not necessarily stable). However.11.3. If ρ (h) > ρ(h + dh) then the situation is stable. to yield P P0 T0 T g R Cx 83 ρ P T0 = = ρ0 P0 T 1− Cx h ( T0 ) 1+ Cx h T (4. this shock is insigniﬁcant (check book on Fundamentals of Compressible Flow Mechanics by this author on the French problem).
to keep the inequality for a small dh only the ﬁrst term need to be compared as g ρ Cx gρ > − Pk P T (4. under the above discussion and simpliﬁcations. no signiﬁcant heat transfer occurs in the short period of time).. FLUIDS STATICS The slab density at layer h+dh can be obtained using equation (4.62) transformed into ρ (h + dh) = ρ(h) 1− ρ gdh P 1/k (4.61) Again using the ideal gas model for equation (4.62) Expanding equation (4. The pressure ratio is given by equation (4. From a mathematical point of view.59) and then it is expanded in taylor series as ρ(h + dh) = ρ(h) g Cx dh ( R Cx ) Cx dh 1− 1+ T0 T ∼1− g ρ Cx − P T dh + · · · (4.60) When the symbol denotes the slab that moves from layer h to layer h + dh. can be assumed to be adiabatic (that is. The process.58) as following ρ(h + dh) P T0 = = ρ(h) P0 T 1− g Cx dh ( R Cx ) Cx dh 1+ T0 T (4.64) The comparison of the right hand terms of equations (4.65) .63) provides the conditions to determine the stability. Pk 2 P 2 k2 (4.62) in Taylor series results in 1− ρ gdh P 1/k =1− g 2 ρ2 k − g 2 ρ2 dh2 g ρ dh − − .55) but can be approximated by equation (4.84 CHAPTER 4.25)) ρ (h + dh) = ρ(h) P (h + dh) P (h) 1/k (4.59) The pressure and temperature change when the slab moves from layer at h to layer h + dh.63) The density at layer h + dh can be obtained from (4. The little slab undergoes isentropic expansion as following for which (see equation (2..56) and thus ρ (h + dh) = ρ(h) 1− gdh T (h) R 1/k (4.64) and (4.
Equation (4. it is said that situation is neutral.11) has two r P b ρb terms on the right hand side. it was explained that the gravity is a function of the distance from the center of the plant/body. the unstable situation is continuously unstable. while the gravity force source in liquid can be the liquid itself.5. Thus. 4. around this value additional analysis is needed 8 .1 Ideal Gas in Varying Gravity In physics.66) The analysis shows that the maximum amount depends on the gravity and gas properties.5 Gravity Variations Eﬀects on Pressure and Density Until now the study focus on the change of density and pressure of the ﬂuid. r → ∞ the pressure is about zero. The varying gravity eﬀects Thus. One of the common question this author has been asked is about the forces of continuation. It should be noted that this value should be changed a bit since the k should be replaced by polytropic expansion n. What is the source of the force(s) that make this situation when unstable continue to be unstable? Supposed that the situation became unstable and the layers have been exchanged.3. Thus. ρ and the body force. .12. This assumption must be deviated when the distance from the body source is signiﬁcantly change. it transformed to Cx (k − 1) g ρ > T kP k−1 g Cx < k R (4.65) and using the ideal gas identity. When lapse rate Cx is equal to the right hand side of the inequality. At ﬁrst glance. 4. The body force was assumed rb g ∝ r2 until now to be constant.4. Again. the density. issues. one has to bear in mind that this analysis only provides a range and isn’t exact. 4. The gravity force is reversely proportional to r2 . would the situation become stable now? One has to remember that temperature gradient forces continuous heat transfer which the source temperature change after the movement to the new layer.3. The source of the gravity force in gas is another body. g. the body force is independent of the ﬂuid. Fig. equation (4. Assuming that the pressure is aﬀected by this gravity/body force. However.11) can be used 8 The same issue of the ﬂoating ice. See example for the ﬂoating ice in cup. The issues of magnetohydrodynamics are too advance for undergraduate student and therefore. the discussion is separated into two diﬀerent on density and pressure.will not be introduced here. The gravity force can be assumed that for inﬁnity.3. PRESSURE AND DENSITY IN A GRAVITATIONAL FIELD 85 After rearrangement of the inequality (4.
70) Equation (4.. numerical integration is a possible solution.68) is transformed into P Pb dP G =− P Z RT r rb dr r2 (4. equation (4.73) Equation (4.2 Real Gas in Varying Gravity The regular assumption of constant compressibility. is employed.72) With the same process as before for ideal gas case.. 4.70) can be expanded in Taylor series as standard correction f actor ρ P 2 2 G R T + G2 rb (r − rb ) G (r − rb ) (4.86 CHAPTER 4.68) where the subscript b denotes the conditions at the body surface.67) where G denotes the general gravity constant. one can obtain P ρ = = ρb Pb e G r−r −Z RT r r b b (4.3. The integration of equation (4. ρb Pb 2 RT 2 rb (R T ) Notice that G isn’t our beloved and familiar g and also that G rb /RT is a dimensionless number (later in dimensionless chapter about it and its meaning). equation (4. Z. It has to remember when this assumption isn’t accurate enough. This equation conﬁrms that the density in outer space is zero ρ(∞) = 0.70) demonstrates that the pressure is reduced with the distance.70) demonstrates that the pressure is reduced with the distance. FLUIDS STATICS (semi one directional situation) when r is used as direction and thus ∂P G = −ρ 2 ∂r r (4. Thus.5.71) = = 1− − + . This equation conﬁrms .68) results in ln Or in a simpliﬁed form as ρ P = = ρb Pb P G =− Pb RT 1 1 − rb r (4. It can be observed that for r → rb the pressure is approaching P → Pb . The regular method of separation is employed to obtain P Pb dP G =− P RT r rb dr r2 (4. It can be noticed that for r → rb the pressure is approaching P → Pb . As before.69) e G r−r − RT r r b b (4.
78) . As before Taylor series for equation (4. PRESSURE AND DENSITY IN A GRAVITATIONAL FIELD 87 that the density in outer space is zero ρ(∞) = 0... 4. Derivations of the ﬂuid static in spherical coordinates are Pressure Spherical Coordinates 1 d r2 dP + 4 π Gρ = 0 r2 dr ρ dr Or in a vector form as 1 P ρ (4.77) • + 4 π Gρ = 0 (4. 4.3.75) e P0 −P BT = Constant − BT g ρ0 r (4. If the liquid “equation of state” (4.000 [m]. there are situations where the spherical coordinates must be considered and used.4. it is left for the reader to apply according to problem.6 Liquid Phase While for most practical purposes.74) It can be noted that compressibility factor can act as increase or decrease of the ideal gas model depending on whether it is above one or below one.76) Since this author is not aware to which practical situation this solution should be applied. the Cartesian coordinates provides suﬃcient treatment to the problem.75) is e P −P0 BT G r2 (4. if applicable.70) is standard correction f actor ρ P 2 2 G Z R T + G2 rb (r − rb ) G (r − rb ) = = 1− − + .3.3.5. ρb Pb 2 Z RT 2 rb (Z R T ) (4.3 Liquid in Under Varying Gravity For comparison reason consider the deepest location in the ocean which is about 11.40) is used with the hydrostatic ﬂuid equation results in ∂P = −ρ0 ∂r which the solution of equation (4.
the linear acceleration have three components as opposed to the previous case of only one. The change of the acceleration from the right to left is .8) can be transformed into a diﬀerent coordinate system where the main coordinate is in the direction of the eﬀective gravity. The solution is obtained by ﬁnding the eﬀective angle body force. for the eﬀective gravity (4.79) where the magnitude of the eﬀective gravity is gef f  = g 2 + a2 (4. However.1 a 5 m sec g geﬀ Fig.1 Fluid in a Linearly Accelerated System ˆ gef f = a ˆ + g k i For example. When the acceleration is changing from the right to the left.4 Fluid in a Accelerated System Up to this stage.80) and the angle/direction can be obtained from tanβ = a g (4. FLUIDS STATICS 4. This question is one of the traditional question of the ﬂuid static and is straight forward. Example 4.88 CHAPTER 4. Consider the following example to illustrate the situation. what happened to the liquid surface? What is the relative angle of the liquid surface for a container in an accelerated system of a = 5[m/sec]? Solution 27. the previous method can be used and there is no need to solve new three (or two) diﬀerent equations.7: A tank ﬁlled with liquid is accelerated at a constant acceleration.81) Perhaps the best way to explain the linear acceleration is by examples. The eﬀective gravity is for accelerated cart. the previous derivations can be easily extended. 4. the constant pressure plane is perpendicular to the direction of the eﬀective gravity.13. As before. Generally the acceleration is divided into two categories: linear and angular and they will be discussed in this order. The eﬀective angle is obtained by adding vectors. 4. in a two dimensional system. Thus. In general. body forces were considered as onedimensional. Equation (4.4.
α < β. This angle/direction can be found using the following a 5 tan−1 β = tan−1 = ∼ 27. A cart slide on inclined plane. If there is a resistance. the liquid surface is parallel to the surface of the inclination surface. Thus. what will be the angle? What happen when the slope angle is straight (the cart is dropping straight down)? Solution (a) The angle can be found when the acceleration of the cart is found. is now tan α = net g − Fm g cosβ Fnet m (4. lar to the slope.14. The net body force depends on the mass of the liquid and the net acceleration is a=g− The angle of the surface.015[m/sec2 ] End Solution Example 4. the acceleration in the cart direction is determined from a = g sin β (4.Fig.01◦ g 9. 4. Calculate the shape of the surface.14.8: A cart partially ﬁlled with liquid and is sliding on an inclined plane as shown in Figure 4.84) (c) . If there is no resistance. FLUID IN A ACCELERATED SYSTEM 89 like subtracting vector (addition negative vector). In that case the eﬀective body moves closer to the gravity forces.4.81 The magnitude of the eﬀective acceleration is gef f  = 52 + 9. End Solution (b) In case of resistance force (either of friction due to the air or resistance in the wheels) reduces the acceleration of the cart.4.812 = 11.82) ) F (a β The eﬀective body force is acting perpendicu.83) (4.
Example 4. Expresses the relationship between the diﬀerent parameters of the problem. The center of rotation is a distance. The angle of the line depends on the radius as dz g =− 2 dr ω r (4. That eﬀective body force can be written as ˆ gef f = −g k + ω 2 r r ˆ The lines of constant pressure are not straight lines but lines of parabolic shape.86) can be integrated as ω 2 r2 z − z0 = 2g (4. FLUIDS STATICS ce fa th wi t ic fr n io r su α a β g sin β − Fnet m β g geﬀ 4. L from the “left” hand side.4. 4.17. Because the asymmetrical nature of the problem there is diﬀerence in the heights in the U tube arms of S as shown in Figure 4. So. The pressure is uniform in the tank and no pressure diﬀerence can be found. Forces diagram of cart sliding on inclined plane.88) P − P0 = ρg (z0 − z) + 2g To illustrate this point.90 In the case when the angle of the inclination turned to be straight (direct falling) the eﬀective body force is zero. Solution . CHAPTER 4. Notice that the integration constant was substituted by z0 . 4.9: A “U” tube with a length of (1 + x)L is rotating at angular velocity of ω. the ﬁrst case deals with a rotation in a perpendicular to the gravity.16.86) (4. example 4.15. the pressure at any point in the liquid is the same and equal to the atmospheric pressure.9 is provided. For simpliﬁcation reasons. The constant pressure will be along Angular Acceleration System ω 2 r2 (4.85) z r unit mass ω2 r g geﬀ center of circulation Equation (4.87) Fig.2 Angular Acceleration Systems: Constant Density Fig. Schematic to explain the angular angle.
End Solution Example 4.17 shows the inﬁnitesimal area used in these calculations. Thus.4. Notice that the curvature in the two sides are diﬀerent from each other. Schematic angular angle to explain example 4. 4.11: In the U tube in example 4. At what rotating nt . End Solution Example 4.10: Assume the diameter of the U tube is Rt .87) represent the pressure line. What will be the correction factor if the curvature in the liquid in the tube is taken in to account. How would you suggest to deﬁne the height in the tube? Solution In Figure 4. equation (4.4. The pressure at the interface at the two sides of the tube is same.17. FLUID IN A ACCELERATED SYSTEM Calculation of the correction factor dA Rotation center ns ta su re lin e 91 pr es S ω L co xL Fig.9. The distance of the inﬁnitesimal area from the rotation center is ?.9 is rotating with upper part height of . The volume above the lower point is ? which is only a function of the geometry. It is ﬁrst assumed the height is uniform at the tube (see for the open question on this assumption). The height of the inﬁnitesimal area is ?. Taking the “left” wing of U tube change in z direction zl − z0 The same can be said for the other side zr − z0 = ω 2 x2 L2 2g = change in r direction ω 2 L2 2g Thus subtracting the two equations above from each each other results in zr − zl = L ω 2 1 − x2 2g It can be noticed that this kind equipment can be used to ﬁnd the gravity.
and two layers in the liquid phase with a thin crust.18. 4.4. 9 The image was drawn by Shoshana BarMeir. It is common in geology to assume that the Earth is made of several layers. Two diﬀerent extremes can recognized in ﬂuids between the outer core to the crust. In geological system such as the Earth provide cases to be used for the ﬂuid static to estimating pressure. outer core. In one extreme is the equator which the rotation play the most signiﬁcant role. Earth layers not to scale. For the purpose of this book. inspired from image made by user Surachit . The assumption states that the Earth is made from the following layers: solid inner core. it will be used to do some estimates.92 CHAPTER 4. FLUIDS STATICS velocity liquid start to exit the U tube? If the rotation of U tube is exactly at the center. the interest is the calculate the pressure at bottom of the liquid phase. In reality. there might be an additional eﬀects which aﬀecting the situation but these eﬀects are not the concern of this discussion.9 explaination is provided to understand how to use the bulk modulus and the eﬀect of rotation. This Fig. what happen the rotation approach very large value? Advance material can be skipped 4.3 Fluid Statics in Geological System This author would like to express his gratitude to Ralph Menikoff for suggesting this topic. If this assumption is accepted.
FLUID IN A ACCELERATED SYSTEM 93 In the other extreme north–south does not play any eﬀect since the radius is relatively very small.89) Using equation to express the pressure diﬀerence (see Example 1.96) 1 1 − 2 ρ0 2 ρ =G 1 1 − R0 r (4.90) it is assumed that BT is a function of pressure and the pressure is a function of the location.92) is a relatively simple (Fredholm) integral equation.91) ρ(r) = r 1 1− g(r)ρ(r)dr B T R0 The governing equation can be written using the famous relation for the gravity as ρ0 1 =1− ρ(r) BT r R0 G ρ(r)dr r2 (4. the pressure at the bottom of the liquid layer can be estimated using the equation (4.XIII.93) ρ0 dρ = − ρ3 r R0 G dr r2 (4.j). The approximate deﬁnition of the bulk modulus is BT = ρ ∆P ρ ∆P =⇒ ∆ρ = ∆ρ BT (4.4. for simplicity the bulk modulus is assumed to be constant.4. ρ0 (4. The solution of this equation obtained by diﬀerentiation as ρ0 d ρ G + 2ρ = 0 ρ2 dr r Under variables separation the equation changes to ρ ρ0 (4.94) The solution of equation (4.28).90) In equation (4. r. In that case. If the bulk modulus is assumed constant (for simplicity) governing equation can be constructed starting with equation (1.95) .13 for details explanation) as ρ(r) = 1− R0 r ρ0 g(r)ρ(r) dr BT (r) (4. In this case it also can be noticed that g is a function of r.45) or in approximation of equation (1. Again. Thus. the bulk modulus can be written as a function of the radius.92) Equation (4. Hence.94) is ρ0 2 or ρ= 1 1 2G − 2 ρ0 ρ0 1 1 − R0 r (4.
this analysis gives some indication on the pressure and density in the core. End Advance material .99) Thus the approximated density ratio can be written as 1 ρ0 =1− ρ BT r ρ R0 G − ω r2 r2 dr (4. In real liquid.100) Taking derivative of the two sides results in − ρ0 1 = ρ3 BT G − ω r2 r2 dr = 0 (4. Thus.101) Integrating equation (4. The pressure diﬀerence is r ∆P = R0 ρ G − ω r2 r2 dr (4.R0 The integral can evaluated numerically or analytically as ρ0 log ∆P = − (2 ρ0 G + r) R0 − 2 r ρ0 G r ρ0 2 R0 2G dr r2 (4.98) The other issue that related to this topic is.92) has to include the rotation eﬀects. What is the pressure at the equator when the rotation is taken into account. The conclusion is that the pressure at the “equator” is substantially lower than the pressure in the north or the south “poles” of the solid core. The rotation aﬀects the density since the pressure changes. It can be noticed that the rotation acts in the opposite direction to the gravity.94 CHAPTER 4.102) ρ0 1 = 2 ρ2 BT −G ω r3 − r 3 (4. mathematical complications caused by the coupling creates additionally diﬃculty. In the range between the two extreme.102) Where the pressure is obtained by integration as previously was done. The integral in equation (4. Nevertheless. FLUIDS STATICS The pressure can be calculated since the density is found as r 1 G ∆P = 1 2G 1 1 BT − − 2 ρ0 ρ0 R 0 r .97) − ρ0 log (ρ0 ) G (4. The pressure diﬀerence is due to the large radius. the ﬂow is much more complicated because it is not stationary but have cells in which the liquid ﬂows around. the eﬀect of rotation is reduced because the radius is reduced.
103) The solution of the above integral is M = g ρ a sin β 3 b l2 + 3 b2 l + b3 3 . Calculate the minimum forces. P can be expressed as a function ξ as the following P = g ρ ( + ξ)sinβ The liquid total moment on the gate is b Fig. Solution The forces can be calculated by looking at the moment around point “O.1 Fluid Forces on Straight Surfaces A motivation is needed before going through the routine of derivations. Example 4.5. This section deals with these calculations. how the calculations can be simpliﬁed will be shown.5 Fluid Forces on Surfaces The forces that ﬂuids (at static conditions) extracts on surfaces are very important for engineering purposes.” The element of moment is a dξ for the width of the gate and is dF "0" β = 50◦ h AA ξ ℓ = 5[m] ξ AA a[m] dξ dM = P a dξ ( + ξ) dA F2 F1 b[m] The pressure. These calculations are divided into two categories.19. Rectangular area under pressure.12: Consider a rectangular shape gate as shown in Figure 4.5. FLUID FORCES ON SURFACES 95 4.4.19. Later. Initially. straight surfaces and curved surfaces. a simple case will be examined. M= 0 g ρ ( + ξ) sin β a dξ( + ξ) The integral can be simpliﬁed as b M = g a ρ sin β 0 ( + ξ)2 dξ (4. 4. F1 and F2 to maintain the gate in position. 4. Assuming that the atmospheric pressure can be ignored.
FLUIDS STATICS This value provides the moment that F1 and F2 should extract. These concepts have been introduced in Chapter 3. the force is h(ξ) 1 F = A P dA = (Patmos + ρgh)dA = A Patmos + ρg 0 (ξ + 0 ) sin β dA (4. which is b Ftotal = 0 g ρ ( + ξ) sin β a dξ The total force integration provides b Ftotal = g ρ a sin β 0 ( + ξ)dξ = g ρ a sin β 2 b + b2 2 The forces on the gate have to provide F1 + F2 = g ρ a sin β 2 b + b2 2 Additionally. These tabulated values can be used to solve this kind of problems.96 CHAPTER 4. The symmetry is around any axes parallel to axis x.20. First. The total force and moment that the liquid extracting on the area need to be calculated. 4.20.104) . Looking at the above calculations. the moment of forces around point “O” is F1 + F2 ( + b) = g ρ a sin β The solution of these equations is F1 = F2 = (3 + b) a b g ρ sin β 6 (3 + 2 b) a b g ρ sin β 6 End Solution "O" 3 b l 2 + 3 b2 l + b3 3 The above calculations are time consuming and engineers always try to make life simpler.Fig.103) and also a center of area. Schematic of submerged area to resented areas for which moment of inertia explain the center forces and moments. β ξ ξ ℓ0 dξ ℓ1 ξ Symmetrical Shapes Consider the two–dimensional symmetrical area that are under pressure as shown in Figure 4. it can be observed that there is a moment of area in equation (4. Additional equation is needed. and center of area have been tabulated in Chapter 3. It is the total force. Several rep.
110) Example 4.108) Fig.12 can be generalized to solve any two forces needed to balance the area/gate. the atmospheric pressure can include any additional liquid layer above layer “touching” area. is about the axis through point “O” into the page.106) and (4.4.5. Equations (4. Equation (4. FLUID FORCES ON SURFACES 97 In this case. The “atmospheric” pressure can be set to zero.109) can be written in more compact form as Total Moment in Inclined Surface My = Patmos xc A + g ρ sin βIx x (4.104) refer to starting point and ending points not to the start area and end area.110) can be combined the moment and .106) "O" y ξ0 β a F1 b My = ξ0 P (ξ)ξdA (4. The boundaries of the integral of equation (4.21 which has two forces that balance the body.107) ξ1 ξ1 ξ sin β F2 My = ξ0 (Patmos + g ρ h(ξ) )ξdA (4. 4. The general forces acting on submerged area.109) The moment of inertia. Consider the general symmetrical body shown in ﬁgure 4.104) can be further developed as Ftotal = A Patmos + ρ g sin β 0 xc A 1 (4.105) A+ 0 ξdA In a ﬁnal form as Total Force in Inclined Surface Ftotal = A [Patmos + ρ g sin β ( 0 + xc )] The moment of the liquid on the area around point “O” is ξ1 (4.21. The integral in equation (4. Ix x . Ix ξ1 Or separating the parts as xc A ξ1 x My = Patmos ξ0 ξdA +g ρ sin β ξ0 ξ 2 dA (4.
114) In the solution.22). This equation is for the additional moment around the x axis (see for explanation in Figure 4.118) y .110) and the total force is given by (4. In symmetrical area only two forces are required since the moment is one dimensional. FLUIDS STATICS force acting on the general area.111) (4.115) into Mx = A y (Patmos + ρ g ξ sin β) dA (4. Thus. additional equation is required. and the distance a or b can be positive or negative. Ix x ρ sin β (4. The moment around the x axis (which was arbitrary chosen) should be Mx = A y P dA (4.98 CHAPTER 4. The forces balance reads F1 + F2 = A [Patmos + ρ g sin β ( and moments balance reads F1 a + F2 b = Patmos xc A + g ρ sin βIx The solution of these equations is F1 = and F2 = Ix x x 0 + xc )] (4.117) The compact form can be written as Moment in Inclined Surface Mx = Patmos A yc + ρ g sin β Ix (4. The moment around the y axis is given by equation (4. the forces can be negative or positive.106).115) can be written as A yc Ix y Mx = Patmos A y dA +ρ g sin β A ξ y dA (4.112) ρ sin β − Patmos gb xc + 0 ρ sin β + g (b − a) Patmos g b A−. in non–symmetrical area there are two diﬀerent moments and therefor three forces are required. However.115) Substituting the components for the pressure transforms equation (4.116) The integral in equation (4. Additionally. the atmospheric pressure can contain either an additional liquid layer above the “touching” area or even atmospheric pressure simply can be set up to zero. If the “atmospheric pressure” can be zero or include additional layer of liquid.113) ρ sin β − ρ sin β − Patmos ga xc + 0 ρ sin β + Patmos g aA g (b − a) (4.
23.106). There are many combix nations of problems (e. the moment of ∆x2 2 1 A2 Ixx 2 = b[a−( 1− 36 0 )] + b[a−( 1 − 0 )] 3 + [a−( 1 − 0 )] 2 3 . 4.110) and (4. Triangle 1 can be calculated as the moment of inertia around its center which is 0 +2∗( 1 − 0 )/3. ξ (4.106). FLUID FORCES ON SURFACES 99 The product of inertia was presented y These equations in Chapter 3. (4. The moment of inertia of the triangle around x is made of two triangles (as shown in the Figure (4.5.121) The right hand side of these equations are given before in equations (4. Example 4.22.4.120) + F2 (a + 0) + F3 0 = Mx (4. Solution The three equations that needs to be solved are F1 + F2 + F3 = Ftotal The moment around x axis is F1 b = My The moment around y axis is F1 1 (4. (4.118).119) (4.110) and (4. Example to illustrate the Fig. The moment of inertia for triangle 1 about y is A1 ∆x1 2 0 2 Ixx 1 = b( 3 1− 0) 36 + 1 b( 1− 0) 3 0) + 2( 1− 0) 3 The height of the triangle 2 is a − ( inertia about its center is 3 − and its width b and thus. metrical straight area. moment of inertia about its center is Ixx = b( 1 − 0 )3 /36. The general forces acting on non symuse of these equations is provided.13: Calculate the forces which required to balance the triangular shape shown in the Figure 4. The height of triangle 1 is ( 1 − 0 ) and its width b and thus.23) for triangle 1 and 2). two forces and moment) but no general solution is provided.g.118) provide the base for solving any problem for straight area under pressure with uniy dA form density.
110) and equation (4.100 and the total moment of inertia Ixx = Ixx 1 + Ixx 2 The product of inertia of the triangle can be obtain by integration.123) .122) In the same way.1 Pressure Center In the literature. 4. pressure centers are commonly deﬁned. The deﬁnition is derived or obtained from equation (4. These deﬁnitions are mathematical in nature and has physical meaning of equivalent force that will act through this center. the pressure center in the x direction is xp = 1 F x P dA A (4.1. The pressure center is the distance that will create the moment with the hydrostatic force on point “O.” Thus. F2 ab 3 =− F3 ab 3 − 72 „„ « « 24 1 48 0 Patmos a −24 + a . The lower line of the b 0 triangle is y = ( 1 − b −a)x + 0 + a. 72 „„ « „ « « 15 12 12 2 a− a 1 + 0 27− a 1 + a 0 g ρ sin β „„ 24 a 72 « 48 1 +24 + a 72 End Solution 1 −14 a)− 0 « « 12 2 −27 + a 0 g ρ sin β = + « 0 Patmos 4.118). FLUIDS STATICS ℓ1 y b 1 ℓ0 F3 a F1 2 F2 x Fig. b ( ( 1 − 0 −a)x CHAPTER 4. The general forces acting on a non symmetrical straight area. It can be noticed that upper line of the triangle is y = ( 1 − 0 )x + 0 .23. the pressure center in the y direction is deﬁned as yp = 1 F y P dA A (4. 2 a b2 2 1 +2 a b 0 +a 2 + 0 +a Ixy = 0 b 1 − 0 )x + b 0 x y dx dy = b2 24 The solution of this set equations is A F1 = a b (g (6 3 „ (3 1 + 3 a) + 6 g „ 12 a 0) ρ sin β + 8 Patmos 24 1 .5.
5. if the variation of the density is within 10% and/or the accuracy of the calculation is minimal.1.125) and in the same fashion in y direction yp = Ixy + yc yc A (4. these limitations diminish the usefulness of pressure center deﬁnitions. In fact. If density can be represented by average density. 4.17) results in xp = Ixx + xc xc A (4. the reader can ﬁnd that direct calculations can sometimes simplify the problem. However.127) In cases where average density cannot be represented reasonably11 . It also means that the density can be a noncontinuous function. the following can be said Ftotal = A g ρ h dA = A1 g ρ1 h dA + A2 g ρ2 h dA + · · · + An g ρn h dA (4. it can be found by setting the atmospheric pressure and 0 to zero as following xp = Expanding Ix x g ρ sin β Ix x A ρ g sin β xc (4. the density was assumed to be constant.5.129) Ftotal = g sin β ρ1 ξ dA +ρ2 A1 A2 ξ dA + · · · + ρn An ξ dA 10 This statement also means that density is a monotonous function. the integral has be carried out.4. the reasonable average can be used. Why? Because of the buoyancy issue. but constant in segments.128) As before for single density.124) according to equation (3.2 Multiply Layers In the previous sections. 11 A qualitative discussion on what is reasonably is not presented here. . For non constant density the derivations aren’t “clean” but are similar. the following can be written x c A1 xc A2 1 2 xc n An (4. the force that is acting on the body is GeogologicalFtotal = A g ρ h dA ∼ ρ ¯ A g h dA (4.126) It has to emphasis that these deﬁnitions are useful only for case where the atmospheric pressure can be neglected or canceled and where 0 is zero. In cases where density is non–continuous. FLUID FORCES ON SURFACES 101 To show relationship between the pressure center and the other properties. Consider straight/ﬂat body that is under liquid with a varying density10 . Thus.
102 CHAPTER 4. . ρ2 = 800[kg/m3 ].24. The forces distances are a1 = 1.133) In the same fashion one can obtain the moment for x axis as Total Static Moment n Mx = Patmos yc Atotal + g sin β i=1 ρi I x y i (4. and b1 = 4. My under the same considerations as before is My = A g ρ ξ 2 sin β dA (4. The heights are: h1 = 1[m].131) After similar separation of the total integral. Also neglect all mass transfer phenomena that may occur. FLUIDS STATICS Or in a compact form and in addition considering the “atmospheric” pressure can be written as Total Static Force n Ftotal = Patmos Atotal + g sin β i=1 ρi xc i Ai (4.132) If the atmospheric pressure enters into the calculations one can ﬁnd that Total Static Moment n My = Patmos xc Atotal + g sin β i=1 ρi I x x i (4. ρi is the density of the layer i and Ai and xc i are geometrical properties of the area which is in contact with that layer. The densities are ρ1 = 500[kg/m3 ].75[m].134) To illustrate how to work with these equations the following example is provided.14: Consider the hypothetical Figure 4. and ρ4 = 1000[kg/m3 ]. Calculate the forces at points a1 and b1 . ρ3 = 850[kg/m3 ]. the atmospheric pressure can include all the layer(s) that do(es) not with the “contact” area.5[m]. h2 = 2[m]. The angle of inclination is is β = 45◦ .5[m]. one can ﬁnd that n My = g sin β i=1 ρi Ix x i (4. h3 = 3[m]. The atmospheric pressure can be entered into the calculation in the same way as before. Assume that the layers are stables without any movement between the liquids.and h4 = 4[m].130) where the density. a2 = 1. Moreover. The last layer is made of water with density of 1000[kg/m3 ]. The moment around axis y. Example 4.
which are (4.133) and (4. stead of using the regular atmo. spheric pressure the new “atmospheric” pressure can be used as ρ2 ρ3 ρ4 h3 h2 b2 b1 F2 F1 a1 ℓ The eﬀects of multi layers density on static Patmos = Patmos + ρ1 g h1 The distance for the center for each area is at the middle of each of the “small” rectangular.133) to be written for the moment around the point “O” as xc Atotal F1 a1 + F2 b1 = Patmos (b2 + a2 ) (b2 − a2 ) +g sin β ρi+1 Ix 2 i=1 3 x i The solution for the above equation is 2 b1 g sin β P3 i=1 F1 = ρi+1 xc i Ai −2 g sin β 2 b1 −2 a1 P3 i=1 ρi+1 Ix x i − (b2 2 −2 b1 b2 +2 a2 b1 −a2 2 ) 2 b1 −2 a1 Patmos .5.130). The geometries of each areas are „ xc 1 = xc 2 = xc 3 = h2 a2 + sin β 2 h2 +h3 2 sin β h3 +h4 2 sin β A1 = A2 = A3 = h2 sin β sin β sin β − a2 Ix x 1 = x 2 x 3 h2 sin β −a2 36 «3 + (xc 1 ) A1 + (xc 2 ) A2 + (xc 3 ) A3 2 2 2 (h3 − h2 ) (h4 − h3 ) Ix Ix = = (h3 −h2 )3 36 sin β (h4 −h3 )3 36 sin β After inserting the values.forces. the following equations are obtained Thus. 4. only two equations are needed.4. as it can be noticed that in.133) can be used by modifying it. FLUID FORCES ON SURFACES Solution ρ1 y "O" 103 β h1 a2 Since there are only two unh4 knowns.24.Fig. the ﬁrst equation is Atotal 3 F1 + F2 = Patmos (b2 − a2 ) +g sin β i=1 ρi+1 xc i Ai The second equation is (4. The solution method of this example is applied for cases with less layers (for example by setting the speciﬁc height difρ4 ference to be zero). Equation (4.
It is simpler to compute the terms separately. FLUIDS STATICS ρi+1 Ix x i F2 = −2 a1 g sin β 2 b1 −2 a1 P3 i=1 ρi+1 xc i Ai + (b2 2 +2 a1 b2 +a2 2 −2 a1 a2 ) 2 b1 −2 a1 Patmos The solution provided isn’t in the complete long form since it will makes things messy. the pressure is treated as a scalar function. So.535 A3 = 3.2 Forces on Curved Surfaces The pressure is acting on surfaces perpendicular to the direction of the surface (no shear forces assumption). [m4 ]) are: xc1 = 2. A mini source code for the calculations is provided in the the text source. is simply the integral of the area perpendicular to y as . outward as positive.9497 A1 = 2.5355 xc3 = 4.696 A2 = 3.2892 xc2 = 3.5.136) The result of the integral is a vector.135) z dAy dAx dA Here. The element force is d F = −P n dA ˆ (4. 4.535 Ix x 1 = 14. The forces on curved area.92[N ] End Solution 4.292 Ix x 3 = 86.215 Ix x 2 = 44. if the y component of the force is needed. for example. the conventional notation is used which is to denote the area. The intermediate results in SI units ([m]. dA.718 The ﬁnal answer is F1 = 304809. [m2 ].79[N ] and F2 = 958923. P n dA ˆ (4.104 2 g sin β P3 i=1 CHAPTER 4. At this stage. The total force on the area will be the integral of the unit force F=− A y dAz x Fig. only a dot product is needed as dFy = dF • ˆ j (4.137) From this analysis (equation (4.25.137)) it can be observed that the force in the direction of y.
However. “y z” is tan θzy = (4. the atmospheric pressure with it piezometric pressure is canceled by the upper part of the slot.138) The same can be said for the x direction. FLUID FORCES ON SURFACES 105 Fy = A P dAy (4. only the net force is the actual liquid in the slot which is acting on the body.141) and the angle in the other plane. Equation (4.142) body.15: . For example.140) only the liquid above the body affecting the body And the angle in “x z” plane is tan θxz = Fz Fx Fz Fy (4. The atmospheric pressure acts on the area with continuous lines.139) The force which acting on the z direction is the weight of the liquid above the projected area plus the atmospheric pressure. 4.139) implicitly means that the net force on the body is z direction is only the actual liquid above it. Inside the slot.26.26 shows a ﬂoating body with cut–out slot into it. Example 4.4. The force in the z direction is Fz = A h g ρdAz (4. Figure 4. Thus. Additional point that is worth mentioning is that the depth where the cut–out occur is insigniﬁcant (neglecting the change in the density). This force component can be combined with the other components in the other directions to be Ftotal = Fz 2 + Fx 2 + Fy 2 (4. Cut–Out Shapes Eﬀects There are bodies with a shape that the vertical direction (z direction) is “cut– out” aren’t continuous.5. Fig. Schematic of Net Force on ﬂoating The moment due to the curved surface require integration to obtain the value. for some geometries there are readily calculated center of mass and when combined with two other components provide the moment (force with direction line). There are no readily made expressions for these 3–dimensional geometries.
8[m/sec2 ] and width of the dam is b = 4[m]. The dam is made of an arc with the angle of θ0 = 45◦ and radius of r = 2[m]. direct and indirect. dAx Fx = A P r cos θ dθ (4. Compare the diﬀerent methods of computations.28) as Ax xc A△ = r2 sin θ cos θ Aarc = r θ r2 2 Fx = ρ g b r sin θ0 r sin θ0 ρgbr = sin2 θ 2 2 Notice that dAx (cos θ) and Ax (sin θ) are different. Area above the dam arc subtract triangle. The gravity is 9. 4. 4.28. . The atmospheric pressure does cancel itself (at least if the atmospheric pressure on both sides of the dam is the same. Calculations of forces on a circular shape dam. why? Fig. When the area Ax is b r dθ cos θ. The diﬀerential area that will be used is. The pressure is only a function of θ and it is P = Patmos + ρ g r sin θ The force that is acting on the x direction of the dam is Ax × P . You can assume that the liquid density is constant and equal to 1000 [kg/m3 ]. Solution The force in the x direction is CHAPTER 4. Ax (see Figure 4.27)).143) Note that the direction of the area is taken into account (sign). b r dθ where b is the width of the dam (into the page).).106 Calculate the force and the moment around point “O” that is acting on the dam (see Figure (4. The net force will be θ0 P dAx Fx = 0 ρ g r sin θ b r cos θ dθ results in The Fx = integration ρ g b r2 1 − cos2 (θ0 ) 2 Alternative way to do this calculation is by calculating the pressure at mid point and then multiply it by the projected area.27. FLUIDS STATICS δθ θ θ0 θ Y 4[m] x direction A θ Ax Ay Fig.
65174 ∼ 0. it is just a demonstration! .5. and substituting the proper values results in Aarc θ r2 2 yc yc Atriangle 4 r sin θ 2 cos θ 2 3θ 4 r sin yc r = 2 r cos θ sin θ r2 − 3θ 3 2 θ r2 r2 sin θ cos θ − 2 2 cos Aarc Atriangle θ 2 θ 2 θ 4 r sin 3θ θ 2 This value is the reverse value and it is yc r = 1.348[m] 12 Well.29.28) should be calculated as yc = yc Aarc − yc Atriangle A The center area above the dam requires to know the center area of the arc and triangle shapes. Some mathematics are required because the shift in the arc orientation. 4. V A θ r2 r2 sin θ0 cos θ0 0 − Fy = − b g ρ ∼ 22375. clearly the discussion earlier was right (not a good proof LOL12 ).65174[m] The result of the arc center from point “O” (above calculation area) is Fig.216[N ] 2 2 The center area ( purple area in Figure 4. FLUID FORCES ON SURFACES 107 The values to evaluate the last equation are provided in the question and simplify subsidize into it as Fx = 1000 × 9. yc = r − yc r = 2 − 1.1 and 3.0[N ] 2 Since the last two equations are identical (use the sinuous theorem to prove it sin2 θ + cos2 = 1).2. The force in the y direction is the area times width. Area above the dam arc calculation for the center.4.8 × 4 × 2 sin(45◦ ) = 19600.29) is at yc arc = 4 r sin2 3θ θ 2 All the other geometrical values are obtained from Tables 3. The arc center (see Figure 4.
31759[N × m] The center pressure for x area is Ixx b ¡ (r cos θ0 ) r cosθ0 Ixx 5 r cos θ0 36 = + xp = xc + = r cosθ0 xc A 2 9 b ¡ (r cos θ0 ) 2 xc 3 The moment due to hydrostatic pressure is Mh = xp Fx = 5 r cosθ0 Fx ∼ 15399. FLUIDS STATICS Mv = yc Fy ∼ 0. Moment on arc element around Point “O.5[N × m] For direct integration of the moment it is done as following θ0 O dF = P dA = 0 ρ g sin θ b r dθ θ θ/2 θ/2 π−θ 2 ℓ = 2 r sin and element moment is θ 2 θ 2 θ 2 π 2 dM = dF × = dF 2 r sin and the total moment is θ0 cos dF θ/2 M= 0 dM θ0 Fig.” or M= 0 ρ g sin θ b r 2 r sin θ 2 cos θ 2 dθ The solution of the last equation is M= g r ρ (2 θ0 − sin (2 θ0 )) 4 θ0 The vertical force can be obtained by Fv = 0 P dAv .21[N × m] 9 The total moment is the combination of the two and it is Mtotal = 23191. 4.348 × 22375.108 The moment is CHAPTER 4.2 ∼ 7792.30.
It is much simpler now to use the second method. The calculations are done per unit depth (into the page) and do not require the actual depth of the dam.calculate the moment around point “O” and the force created by the liquid per unit depth.5. It can be noticed that the diﬀerential area that is used here should be multiplied by the depth. Fv = End Solution To demonstrate this point further. In fact. 4. there are many programs or hand held devices that can carry numerical integration by inserting the function and the boundaries.4. From mathematics. The reason that a polynomial function was chosen is that almost all the continuous functions can be represented by a Taylor series.31).31 . FLUID FORCES ON SURFACES or θ0 P dAv 109 Fv = 0 ρ g r sin θ r dθ cos θ g r2 ρ 2 1 − cos (θ0 ) 2 Here. Polynomial shape dam description for the moment around point “O” and force calculations. Solution o y= b n i=1 ai x i dA dy y x dx Fig. The element force (see Figure 4.31) in this case is P h dA dF = (b − y) g ρ dx2 + dy 2 The size of the diﬀerential area is the square root of the dx2 and dy 2 (see Figure 4. Also calculate the horizontal and vertical forces. Example 4. this example provides for practical purposes of the general solution for curved surfaces. and the direct approach second.16: For the liquid shown in Figure 4. the traditional approach was presented ﬁrst.31. and thus. consider a more general case of a polynomial function. it can be shown that dx2 + dy 2 = dx 1+ dy dx 2 . The function of the dam shape is n y = i=1 ai xi and it is a monotonous function (this restriction can be relaxed somewhat).
expression of the distance and angle to point “O” are needed (see Figure 4.32. In this case. The derivative at x is and the derivative is dimensionless (a dimensionless number). only one term is provided and xb can be calculated as following xb = Notice that 6 6 b 2 b 2 is measured in meters. in this case describing the dam function is 1+ dy dx 2 n 2 dy dx ℓ dF b θ y = 1+ i=1 i a (i) x (i) i−1 x x The value of xb is where y = b and can be obtained by ﬁnding the ﬁrst and positive root of the equation of n 0= i=1 ai x − b i Fig. To evaluate the moment. The diﬀerence between the slop and the direction angle. 4.110 CHAPTER 4. consider the speciﬁc case of y = 2 x6 .32). The distance is = (b − 2 2 x6 ) + 6 b −x 2 2 . FLUIDS STATICS O y The right side can be evaluated for any given function. The number “2” is a dimensional number with dy = 12 x5 dx units of [1/m5 ]. For example. The distance between the point on the dam at x to the point “O” is (x) = (b − y)2 + (xb − x)2 The angle between the force and the distance to point “O” is θ(x) = tan−1 dy dx − tan−1 b−y xb − x The element moment in this case is dF 2 dM = (x) (b − y) g ρ 1+ dy dx cos θ(x) dx To make this example less abstract.
While the question of the stability was not scientiﬁcally examined in the past.4. If the reader wonders why such a class is taught in a high school. This author ﬁnd this method to be simpler for complicated geometries while the indirect method has advantage for very simple geometries. The total forces the liquid exacts on a body are considered as a buoyancy issue. Schematic of Immersed Cylinder. 150 years ago and more. While Archimedes did not know much about integrals. However. The horizontal force is Fh = b ρ g b ρ g b2 = 2 2 The vertical force per unit depth is the volume above the dam as √ 6 b Fv = 0 b − 2 x6 ρ g dx = ρ g 5 b6 7 7 In going over these calculations. Here.6. It was taught by people like these. ship builders who knew how to calculate GM but weren’t aware of scientiﬁc principles behind it. the calculations of the center of the area were not carried out. perhaps the name can explain it: Sea Oﬃcers High School. End Solution 4. more advance mathematics will be used. BUOYANCY AND STABILITY The angle can be expressed as θ = tan−1 12 x5 − tan The total moment is √ 6 b 111 b − 2 x6 −1 6 b 2 −x M= 0 (x) cos θ(x) b − 2 x6 g ρ 1 + 12 x5 dx This integral doesn’t have a analytical solution. ture the essence. for a given value b this integral can be evaluate.Fig. This omission saves considerable time. trying to ﬁnd the center of the area will double the work. because this material is presented in a diﬀerent era.33. To understand this issue. Archimedes princib ple is related to question of density and volume.6 Buoyancy and Stability h r One of the oldest known scientiﬁc rea search on ﬂuid mechanics relates to buoyancy due to question of money was carried by Archimedes. he was able to cap. consider a cubical and a cylindrical body that is immersed 0 0 13 This topic was the author’s high school name. 4. the ﬂoating vessels structure (more than 150 years ago) show some understanding13 . In fact. .
144) to F = ρg (4. This analysis can be generalized by noticing two things. (4. On the upper surface the pressure is ρg(h0 − a/2).34) is P dAvertical h0 dF = ρ g (h0 − r sin θ) sin θ r dθ 2π (4.148) is F = −π r2 ρ g 2π The ﬂoating forces on Immersed Cylinder. On the other hand.147) Rearranging equation (4. any shape is made of many small rectangles.148) Fig.145) V The force on the immersed body is equal to the weight of the displaced liquid. The force to hold the cylinder at the place must be made of integration of the pressure around the surface of the square and cylinder bodies. on the vertical direction. The force per area (see Figure 4. the total force is made of the sum of all the small rectangles which is the weight of the sum of all volume. However. For any two rectangle bodies. The force on every rectangular shape is made of its weight of the volume. those will cancel each other. On the lower surface the pressure is ρg(h0 + a/2). Thus even these bodies are in contact with each other. the horizontal forces are canceling each other. While the horizontal force is Fv = 0 (h0 − r sin θ) cos θ dθ = 0 (4. Another way to look at this point is by approximation. All the horizontal forces are canceled. 4.33. In illustration of this concept. h0 as shown in Figure 4.150) .33.144) represents a depth (into the page). the pressure on the two surfaces are diﬀerent. FLUIDS STATICS in liquid and center in a depth of. The forces on square geometry body are made only of vertical forces because the two sides cancel each other. The force due to the liquid pressure per unit depth (into the page) is F = ρg ((h0 − a/2) − (h0 + a/2)) b = −ρ g a b = −ρgV In this case the be (4.112 CHAPTER 4. Any body that has a projected area that has two sides. Thus. The solution of equation (4.34. Rearranging equation (4.146) transforms it to 2π F = rgρ 0 (h0 − r sin θ) sin θ dθ (4.146) r θ The total force will be the integral of the equation (4. consider the cylindrical shape in Figure 4.149) The negative sign indicate that the force acting upwards. the imaginary pressure make it so that they cancel each other.146) F = 0 ρ g (h0 − r sin θ) r dθ sin θ (4.
Assume that the wall thickness is small compared with the other dimensions (t << w and t << h). Express the maximum wall thickness. In the case where thickness is half the maximum. these examples are a must. ρs liquid density. h1 t w hin h Example 4. T1 for the body to ﬂoat. and density. shown in Figure 4.6.is ﬂoating in liquid with density.4. The body was inserted into liquid in a such a way that the air had remained in it. ﬂoating body. ρl . ρl . a length. the height. t.35 . Schematic of a thin wall function of the density of the wall. calculate the pressure inside the container. The second example of the speed of the ﬂoating bodies. Note that for the maximum thickness. Typical examples to explain the buoyancy are of the vessel with thin walls put upside down into liquid.35. as a Fig. You can provide that the angle or the depth. 4. Thus. Assume that ρl > ρw . BUOYANCY AND STABILITY 113 Example 4. ρw in liquid with denisty. The container diameter is w. Solution The air mass in the container is V ρair mair = π w2 h The mass of the container is Patmos RT A mcontainer = π w2 + 2 π w h t ρs The liquid amount enters into the cavity is such that the air pressure in the cavity equals to the pressure at the interface (in the cavity).18: A cylindrical body.17: To what depth will a long log with radius. ρl and the surroundings air temperature. r. Since there are no better examples. h1 has to be zero. the pressure at the interface from the air point of view (ideal gas model) should be mair R T1 Pin = hin π w2 V . the pressure at the interface can be written as Pin = ρl g hin On the other hand.
19: Calculate the minimum density an inﬁnitely long equilateral triangle (three equal sides) has to be so that the sharp end is in the water. Thus. hin = Example 4. the air.114 CHAPTER 4. When the ﬂoating is under vacuum condition. Archimedes theorem states that the force balance is at displaced weight liquid (of the same volume) should be the same as the container. it can be inserted into the above equation. When the gravity approaches zero (macro gravity) then hin = Patmos h 2 ρl g 2 h 3 ρl 2 g 2 5 h 4 ρl 3 g 3 +h− + − + ··· ρl g Patmos Patmos 2 Patmos 3 This “strange” result shows that bodies don’t ﬂoat in the normal sense. ρ π w2 h ρl g hin + Patmos = Pin = The last equation can be simpliﬁed into ρl g hin + Patmos = And the solution for hin is hin = − and Patmos + Patmos R T1 R T1 hin π w2 h Patmos hin 4 g h Patmos ρl + Patmos 2 2 g ρl 4 g h Patmos ρl + Patmos 2 − Patmos 2 g ρl The solution must be positive. FLUIDS STATICS Since the air mass didn’t change and it is known. so that the last solution is the only physical solution. net displayed water π w2 (h − hin ) g container = π w 2 + 2 π w h t ρs g + π w 2 h air Patmos R T1 g . the following height can be expanded into hin = h Patmos Patmos + + ··· g ρl 2 g ρl End Advance material which shows that the large quantity of liquid enters into the container as it is expected. Advance material can be skipped Extreme Cases The solution demonstrates that when h −→ 0 then hin −→ 0.
The equation of state is Pi = mair R Ti Vi The new unknown must provide additional equation which is Vi = π w2 hi Thickness Below The Maximum For the half thickness t = tmax the general solution for any given thickness below 2 maximum is presented.4. but the liquid displacement is still unknown. It is reasonable as the ﬁrst approximation to assume that the process is adiabatic and isentropic. The pressure at the interface (after long time) is ρl g hin + Patmos = which can be simpliﬁed to h Patmos hin + h1 The second equation is Archimedes’ equation. Thus. the temperature in the cavity immediately after the insertion is Ti = Tf Pi Pf The ﬁnal temperature and pressure were calculated previously. which is ρl g hin + Patmos = π w2 (h − hin − h1 ) = π w2 + 2 π w h) t ρs g + π w2 h End Solution atmos π w2 h PR T1 R T1 (hin + h1 ) π w2 Patmos R T1 g .6. The thickness is known. BUOYANCY AND STABILITY If air mass is neglected the maximum thickness is tmax = 2 g h w ρl + Patmos w − w 4 gh Patmos ρl + Patmos 2 (2 g w + 4 g h) ρl ρs 115 The condition to have physical value for the maximum thickness is 2 g h ρl + Patmos ≥ The full solution is tmax = − “ ” √ w R 4 gh Patmos ρl +Patmos 2 −2 g h w R ρl −Patmos w R T1 +2 g h Patmos w ρl (2 g w+4 g h) R ρl ρs T1 4 gh Patmos ρl + Patmos 2 In this analysis the air temperature in the container immediately after insertion in the liquid has diﬀerent value from the ﬁnal temperature.
Is the body volume important? Solution The net force is liquid weight body weight F = V g ρl − V g α ρl = V g ρl (1 − α) But on the other side the internal force is m F = m a = V αρl a Thus. Find equivalent cylinder that has the same diameter that has the same force. This idea can lead to experiment in “large gravity” because the acceleration can be magniﬁed and it is much more than the reverse of free falling. h0 and left at rest. the acceleration is a=g 1−α α If the object is left at rest (no movement) thus time will be (h = 1/2 a t2 ) t= If the object is very light (α −→ 0) then tmin = 2hα + g √ 2 g h α2 3 + 2g 3 2 hα g(1 − α) √ 2 g h α2 5 + 8g 5 √ 2 g h α2 + ··· 16 g 7 From the above equation.116 CHAPTER 4. where α is ratio between the body density to the liquid density and (0 < α < 1). Consider the force that acts on a half sphere. The body’s density is α ρl . FLUIDS STATICS Example 4. Solution The force act on the half sphere can be found by integrating the forces around the . End Solution Example 4. Calculate acceleration and time for a body to reach the surface.21: In some situations.20: A body is pushed into the liquid to a distance. it can be observed that only the density ratio is important. it is desired to ﬁnd equivalent of force of a certain shape to be replaced by another force of a “standard” shape.
BUOYANCY AND STABILITY sphere. In the same vein. In this case there are two diﬀerent liquid densities. the height is h π = r 4 End Solution 1 π 2 (ρL − ρS ) r3 4 Example 4. Solution In the discussion to this section.4. Suppose that the above layer is another liquid which has a bit lighter density. it was shown that net force is the body volume times the the density of the liquid. Where h is the height of the body and A is its cross section. it was assumed that above liquid is a gas with inconsequential density. Body with density between the two liquids. What will be the location of solid body if the liquid density varied parabolically. This force is balance according to above explanation by the two liquid as ρc ¨A = ¨h (α ρl + (1 − α)ρh ) h¨ A¨ . The net force down is the weight of the body ρc h A. The element force is dAx h 2 dA 117 dF = (ρL − ρS ) g r cos φ cos θ cos θ cos φ r dθ dφ The total force is then π π 0 Fx = 0 (ρL − ρS ) g cos2 φ cos2 θ r3 dθ dφ The result of the integration the force on sphere is Fs = The force on equivalent cylinder is Fc = π r2 (ρL − ρS ) h These forces have to be equivalent and thus $ ! £ (ρL $$ 3 π 2 $$− ρS ) r¡ $ = & $$− ρS ) h π r2 (ρL $$ 4 Thus. the body can be separated into two: one in ﬁrst liquid and one in the second liquid.6. There are situations where density is a function of the depth.22: In the introduction to this section. ρl < ρs < rhoh is ﬂoating between the two liquids. Develop the relationship between the densities of liquids and solid and the location of the solid cubical.
develop an equation for the depth of the sphere.XXIII. when x1 +h ρc h = x1 ρh − x h 2 (ρh − ρl ) dx After the integration the equation transferred into ρc h = (3 ρl − 3 ρh ) x12 + (3 h ρl − 3 h ρh ) x1 + h2 ρl + 2 h2 ρh 3h And the location where the lower point of the body (the physical).23: A hollow sphere is made of steel (ρs /ρw ∼ 7. The density as a function of x coordinate along h starting at point ρh is ρ(x) = ρh − x h 2 (ρh − ρl ) Thus the equilibration will be achieved. Thus. For the thickness below this critical value. if the body is smaller compare to the zone of variation. will be at √ 3 3 h2 ρl 2 + (4 ρc − 6 h2 ρh ) ρl + 3 h2 ρh 2 − 12 ρc ρh + 3 h ρl − 3 h ρh X1 = 6 ρh − 2 ρl For linear relationship the following results can be obtained. After rearrangement it became α= ρc − ρh ρl − ρh the second part deals with the case where the density varied parabolically. Solution The weight of displaced water has to be equal to the weight of the sphere ρs g ¡ 4 π R3 = ρw g ¡ 3 4 π R3 4 π (R − t) − 3 3 3 (4. FLUIDS STATICS Where α is the fraction that is in low liquid. x1 . End Solution Example 4.8) with a t wall thickness. the calculations can be carried out under the assumption of sharp change. they have to accounted for. x1 = h ρl + h ρh − 6 ρc 2 ρl − 2 ρh In many cases in reality the variations occur in small zone compare to the size of the body. What is the = thickness if the sphere is neutrally buoyant? Assume that the radius of the sphere is R. However. A is canceled on both sides.a) .118 CHAPTER 4.
6. Thus the Archimedes law is ρw 4 π R 3 − 3 R h 2 + h 3 ρs 4 π 3 t R 2 − 3 t 2 R + t 3 (4.e) When Vwater denotes the volume of the sphere in the water. The volume in the water is Vwater = 4 π R 3 − 3 R h 2 + h3 4 π R3 π h2 (3R − h) − = 3 3 3 (4. BUOYANCY AND STABILITY after simpliﬁcation equation (4.4.d) Where h is the sphere height above the water. For a given ratio of t/R. The depth that sphere will be located depends on the ratio of t/R which similar analysis to the above.g) ρs The solution of (4.b) Equation (4.XXIII.b) is third order polynomial equation which it’s solution (see the appendix) is t1 t2 t3 = = = √ 3 − 2i √ 3i 2 3 − 1 2 1 2 ρs 3 R − R3 ρw ρs 3 R − R3 ρw 1 3 +R 1 3 − +R (4. the weight displaced by the sphere has to be same as the sphere weight.XXIII.XXIII.XXIII.h) .XXIII.XXIII.XXIII. The volume of a sphere cap (segment) is given by Vcap = π h2 (3R − h) 3 (4.a) becomes ρs R 3 = 3 t R2 − 3 t2 R + t3 ρw 119 (4.XXIII. The last solution is the solution that was needed.XXIII.XXIII.g) is −f R (4 R3 2 + −f R (4 R3 2 − f R) fR − 2 R 2 3 h= − 1 3 R2 − f R) − fR − 2 R 2 3 1 3 (4.f) = 3 3 or ρw R 3 − 3 R h 2 + h3 = 3 t R 2 − 3 t2 R + t3 (4.c) R ρs −1+1 ρw The ﬁrst two solutions are imaginary thus not valid for the physical world.
a) d = f −1 ρ Va ρw (4.24 a general solution was provided. For example. Find the reverse function. πd Vw = Thus. assume that the body is of a solid material. other geometrical parameters) The Archimedes balance on the body is ρ Va = ρ w Vw (4. As it was shown in the previous example. These solutions are rejected. a wood wedge of wood with a ﬁx weight/load.b) (4. End Solution Example 4.XXV. the relationship between the depth and the displaced liquid volume of the sphere. For simplicity.25: In example 4.XXIV.XXV.24: One of the common questions in buoyancy is the weight with variable cross section and ﬁx load.120 Where −f R = R3 − CHAPTER 4. Here it is assumed that this relationship can be written as Vw = f (d.XXIV. the depth is d= 3 d √ 3 3 2 = π d3 9 (4.6.a) 9 π ρw ρ Va (4. f −1 for cone with 30◦ when the tip is in the bottom.1 Stability .XXIV.b) End Solution 4. Solution First the function has to built for d (depth). Solution It is assumed that the volume can be written as a function of the depth.e. wedge) will be located. FLUIDS STATICS ρw (3 t R2 − 3 t2 R + t3 ) There are two more solutions which ρs contains the imaginary component. The general question is at what the depth of the object (i.c) End Solution Example 4.
When tilting a larger amount than π/4 . 4. The center of the mass (gravity) is still in the old location since the body did not change. This analysis doesn’t violate the second law of thermodynamics. When the body is tilted at a small angle. If this arrangement is inserted into liquid and will Fig.36c. the original state is referred as the stable body and vice versa.36b). the balloon will be on the top and sphere on the bottom. the body is in situation like in 4. This B situation is similar to Figure 4. it is referred to as the neutral stable. Schematic of ﬂoating cubic. HowG ever the buoyant center is the middle of the volume under the water (see Figure 4.the body is unstable and any tilt from the original position creates moment that will further continue to move the body from its original position. β.37. for example) is inserted into water. the cubic results in returning to the original position.37). Schematic of ﬂoating bodies.6.36c . gravity center This arrangement has mass centroid Full close to the middle of the sphere. the body stability must be based on the diﬀerence between the body’s local positions rather than the “absolute” stability. The third state is when the couple forces do have zero moment. When the body is at the position shown in Figure 4. Part of the block ﬂoats above water line. If one draws the stability (later about this criterion) as a function of the rotation angle will show a sinusoidal function with four picks in a whole rotation. Small amount of tilting of Fig.36 shows a body made of hollow balloon and a heavy sphere connected by a thin and light rod. BUOYANCY AND STABILITY Empty buoyancy center 121 Figure 4. These forces create a moment which wants to return the body to the resting (original) position. If the new immerse volume creates a new center in such way that couple forces (gravity and buoyancy) try to return the body. the body is “stable” in some points more than others in their vicinity.38. The cubic mass (gravity) centroid is in the middle of the cubic. That is. The reason for this local stability of the cubic is that other positions are less stable.4. B’ as shown in Figure 4. . A wooden cubic (made of pine. The stability of the body is divided into three categories. be ﬂoating. However.36. any experiment of this cubic wood shows that it is stable locally. Tilting the body with a small angle from its resting position creates a shift in the forces direction (examine Figure 4. These points are raised from the buoyant force analysis. So.36c. in any of these six positions. the immersed part of the body center changes to a new location. In fact. it results in a ﬂipping into the next stable position. The cubic is stable in six positions (every cubic has six faces). c a b The buoyant center is below the middle of the balloon. Moving bodies from an unstable position is in essence like a potential. 4.
38 is displaced by the same area (really the volume) on left since the weight of the body didn’t change14 so the total immersed section is constant. This deviation of the buoyant center from the old buoyant center location.38. W referred to the weight of the body. The body weight creates opposite moment to balance the moment of the displaced liquid volume. This analysis is based on the diﬀerence of the displaced liquid. BB is the distance between points B and point B’.). The body. β. the moment is calculated as the integration of the small force shown in the Figure 4.38 as ∆F . BB W = M (4. Stability analysis of ﬂoating body. So the perpendicular distance. . the analysis is still correct because the volume and not the area is used.153) 14 It is correct to state: area only when the body is symmetrical. The right green area (volume) in Figure 4. FLUIDS STATICS β M ∆F GM δF δF ∆F G dA B B’ Fig. The displacement of the buoyant center can be calculated by examining the moment these forces creats. 4.122 CHAPTER 4. B. BB . B’. It can be noticed that the distance BB is an approximation for small angles (neglecting the vertical component. should to be calculated. and. should be BB = The moment M can be calculated as δF M W (4.152) M= A g ρl x β dA x = g ρl β dV A x2 dA (4.151) Where M is the moment created by the displaced areas (volumes). shown in Figure 4.38. when the body is not symmetrical. move to a new buoyant center. when given a tilted position. However. For small angle.
153) is referred to as the area moment of inertia and was discussed in Chapter 3. the geometrical quantities can be related as BM GM = ρl Ixx −BG ρs Vbody (4.26: A solid cone ﬂoats in a heavier liquid (that is ρl /ρc > 1).154) with (4. The moment of inertia of the cone is circle shown in Table 3. BB can be written from equation (4. The location of the metacentric point can be obtained from the geometry as BM = BB sin β (4. The relationship between the radius the depth is r = d tan θ (4. Looking at Figure 4.a) Where D is the total height and d is the height of the submerged cone.1.6.155) And combining equations (4.153) as BB = g ρl Ixx ρs Vbody (4.156) lim (4. Analyze this situation. The distance BG 3 BG = D/4 − d/4 (4. M.b) . The distance. BUOYANCY AND STABILITY 123 The integral in the right side of equation (4. For middle range. Solution The ﬂoating cone volume is depent on d as π d r2 and the center of gravity is D/4. The angle of the cone is θ.XXVI. At this condition. 1 > ρc /ρl > 0 there could be a range where the cone is stable.XXVI.38. For a very light cone ρc /ρl ∼ 0.155) yields BM = For small angle (β ∼ 0) β→0 g ρl βIxx ρl Ixx ¡ = g ρs sin β Vbody ρs Vbody ¡ sin β ∼1 β (4. The ratio of the cone density to liquid density is α.157) It is remarkable that the results is independent of the angle.154) The point where the gravity force direction is intersecting with the center line of the cross section is referred as metacentric point.4. the cone is unstable.158) Example 4. the cone has zero depth.
c) Equation (4. ρs = α ρl where ( 0 ≤ α ≤ 1 ) is ﬂoating in a liquid.XXVI.XXVI.e) into (4. Example 4. FLUIDS STATICS Ixx π (d tan θ) 64 GM = 2 − π d (d tan θ) ρs 3 ρl Vbody 4 BG D d − 4 4 (4.XXVI. Solution Equation (4.158) requires that several quantities should be expressed. why? .XXVI.d) The relationship between D and d is determined by the density ratio ( as displaced volume is equal to cone weight)15 ρl d3 = ρc D3 =⇒ D = d 3 ρl ρc (4.27: A solid block of wood of uniform density.XXVI.124 CHAPTER 4. Construct a graph that shows the relationship of the GM as a function of ratio height to width.XXVI. The moment of 3 inertia for a block is given in Table 3. is insigniﬁcant for this analysis.1 and is Ixx = La .f) 0= − − =⇒ = 3 −1 4 ρs 192 4 ρs 48 ρc Since ρl > ρc this never happened.e) Substituting equation (4. End Solution To understand these principles consider the following examples. Where L is the length into the 12 page.c) can be simpliﬁed as GM = ρl d tan2 θ − ρs 192 D d − 4 4 (4. Show that the block’s length.XXVI.d) yield the solution when GM = 0 ρl d3 ρc ρl d tan2 θ d ρl ρl tan2 θ (4. L. The distance BG is obtained from Archimedes’ theorem and can be expressed as immersed volume ρs W = ρs a h L = ρl a h1 L =⇒ h1 = h ρl V 15 Only the dimension is compared.
2 0. This equation leads to the condition where the maximum height above which the body is not stable anymore as a ≥ h 6 (1 − α)α (4.2 α = 0.2 0. 4.6 0.1 1. 2008 Simplifying the above equation provides GM 1 = h 12 α a h 2 Fig.0 a h April 16.4 α = 0.5 α = 0.4.0 α = 0. Cubic body dimensions for stability analysis.160) 2 where α is the density ratio.161) End Solution .0 0. Stability of Square Block 3.5 0.159) 2. − 1 (1 − α) (4.8 0.9 1.0 L a g ρl ¡ 12 − h GM = g ρs a h 2 L ¡ V 3 ρs 1− ρl 0.37) h1 2.6 0.7 0.2 1. Notice that GM /h isn’t a function of the depth. the distance BG is (see Figure 4.5 α = 0.5 0.0 0.4 0.4 α = 0.1 0.9 Ixx 0.0 1.6 1.3 0.3 1.8 0.4 1.0 1.8 1.3 1.0 0.2 Thus.0 0.40.8 2.39. BUOYANCY AND STABILITY 125 h h1 L a Fig. Stability of cubic body inﬁnity long. 4.5 0.1 BG = GM h h ρs 1 h − h = 2 ρl 2 2 1− ρs ρl (4.1 1.2 1.7 α = 0. L.6.
5 moment of inertia is Ixx = π b4 /64. This is not a hypothetical question. the equation is Fig.0 0. And the condition for maximum height for stability is b ≥ h 32 (1 − α) α This kind of analysis can be carried for diﬀerent shapes and the results are shown for these two shapes in Figure 4. This axis is where the main rotation of the body will occur. Principle Main Axises Any body has inﬁnite number of diﬀerent axises around which moment of inertia can be calculated. every geometrical shape has an axis in which the moment of inertia is without the product of inertia. The 0.2 0. this problem is reduced to ﬁnd the stability for principle axis. The diﬀerence between the previous calculation and the moment of inertia around the diagonal is I diagonal axis √ ∆Ixx = 2a √ 3a 2 3 “normal axis 6 − a4 12 a h ∼ 0.0 circle above analysis is that there is a point 2.5 0. For cylinder (circle) the 0.161) 1. but rather practical. 2008 α shape (cubic) (see above (4. Thus. This happens when a ship is overloaded with containers above the maximum height. FLUIDS STATICS Stability of Solid Blocks One of the interesting point for the square 3. there is a diﬀerent moment of inertia. it must be stable at the “diagonal” axis.7 0. Unstable Bodies What happen when one increases the height ratio above the maximum height ratio? The body will ﬂip into the side and turn to the next stable point (angle). For each of these axises. Thus.1 0.41. a square shape body has larger moment of inertia around diagonal.4 0. For stability analysis. With the exception of the circular shape.8 0.9 1. For example.5 drical shape equivalent to equation (4. the fuel is .126 CHAPTER 4.0 body width is not stable anymore.159)). 4.3 0. In cylin1.6 0. it is enough to ﬁnd if the body is stable around the smallest moment of inertia.5 above where the ratio of the height to the 2.41.0 can be expressed. In commercial ships.07 a4 Which show that if the body is stable at main axises.0 0. Some analysis of ﬂoating bodies are done by breaking the rotation of arbitrary axis to rotate around the two main axises. The maximum height reverse as a g GM = h 64 α b h 2 − 1 (1 − α) 2 function of density ratio. It can be noticed that the square body is more stable than the circular body shape.0 distance BG is the same as for the square April 16.
Example 4. Supposed that a/h −→ ˜ the body will be 0 unstable. On the other side if the a/h −→ ∞ the body is very stable. ¯ Solution h The answer to the question is that the limiting case where GM = 0. The point B can be expressed as B= And thus the distance BG is BG = a 2 1− ρs ρl a ρs 2 ρl The limiting condition requires that GM = 0 so that ρl Ixx = BG ρs Vbody . tougher.42.158) have to be found.28: One way to make a ship to be a hydrodynamic is by making the body as narrow as possible. a a Stability of two triangles put The moment of inertia is triangle (see explanation in example (3.7) is Ixx = And the volume is Vbody = a2 h2 − a h3 2 a2 = a2 h 4 1− 1 a2 4 h2 The point B is a function of the density ratio of the solid and liquid. Suppose that two opposite sides triangle (prism) is attached to each other to create a long “ship” see Figure 4.42.6. Denote the liquid density as ρl and solid density as ρs . The Volume of the body is V =2 a2 h 2 = a2 h Fig.4. So. To ﬁnd this ratio equation terms in (4. BUOYANCY AND STABILITY 127 stored at the bottom of the ship and thus the mass center (point G) is changing during the voyage. the ship that was stable (positive GM ) leaving the initial port might became unstable (negative GM ) before reaching the destination port. 4. Assume that density ratio is ρl /ρs = ρ. What is the ˜ minimum ratio of a/h that keep the body stable at half of the volume in liquid (water).
in this analysis. it is used as a limit for the stability analysis. is enough to be ig. For practical purposes.Fig. However.43.6. furniture. account these shifting mass speeds.43).43. FLUIDS STATICS = a 2 1− ρs ρl After rearrangement and using the deﬁnitions of ξ = h/a ρρl /ρs results in ¯ ρ ξ2 ¯ 1− ξ 4 2 = 1− 1 ρ ¯ The solution of the above solution is obtained by squaring both sides and deﬁning a new variable such as x = ξ 2 .128 Or explicitly ρl ρs a2 h a h3 2 1− 1 a 4 h2 2 CHAPTER 4. 4.1. the dynamics are ignored and only the statics is examined (see Figure 4. The eﬀects of liquid movement on nored. a ship that carries Gc wheat grains where the cargo is not propG G′ erly secured to the ship. There are situations where the real case approaches to this extreme. After the above manipulation and selecting the positive value and to keep stability as √ x< 64 ρ4 −64 ρ3 +ρ2 −2 ρ+1 ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ρ ¯ + 2 √ 1 ρ ¯ −1 2ρ ¯ End Solution 4. The movement of the load (grains. For example. here.1 Stability of Body with Shifting Mass Centroid Ships and other ﬂoating bodies carry liquid or have a load which changes the M mass location during tilting of the ﬂoating body. the slow reaction of the load. the extreme case where the load reacts in the same speed as the tilting of the ship/ﬂoating body is examined. When the body is given a tilting position the body displaces the liquid on the . Sometimes. Exact analysis requires taking into the GM . for stability analysis. Moreover. These situations involve liquid with a low viscosity (like water. and/or liquid) B does not occur in the same speed as the B′ body itself or the displaced outside liquid. alcohol) and ship with low natural frequency (later on the frequency of the ships). A body is loaded with liquid “B” and is ﬂoating in a liquid “A” as shown in Figure 4.
X0 g mtotal GG = $mbody + g mf G1 G1 g $$$ ¡ ¡ For more than one tank.163) Equation (4. This point is the intersection of the center line with the vertical line from G . At the same time.166) The distance that was used before GM is replaced by the criterion for stability by Gc M and is expressed as Gc M = g ρA Ixx A 1 Ixx b − BG − ρs Vbody mtotal Vb (4. is similar for all liquid tanks on the ﬂoating body. G Gc = GG sin β (4. This quantity. The moment created by the inside displaced liquid is Min = g ρl B βIxx B (4. it can be written as GG = g Wtotal n (4. the general formula is Gc M = g ρA Ixx A 1 − BG − ρs Vbody mtotal n i=1 Ixx b i Vb i (4.4.163) shows that GG is only a function of the geometry. G1 G1 . the liquid inside is changing its mass centroid.162) Note that IxxB isn’t the same as the moment of inertia of the outside liquid interface.165) A new point can be deﬁned as Gc .168) . The change in the mass centroid of the liquid “A” then is Ixx B g ρl¨βIxx B = G1 G1 = ¡ ¨B g VB ¨B VB ρl¨ ¡ Inside liquid weight (4.164) Gi Gi ρl i Vi = i=1 g Wtotal n i=1 Ixxb i Vb i (4. The total change of the vessel is then calculated similarly to center area calculations. BUOYANCY AND STABILITY 129 outside.6.167) If there are more than one tank partially ﬁlled with liquid.
equation (4.6. can be achieved by having some tanks spanning across the entire body with tanks spanning on parts of the body. The metacentric height is GM new = Td Wtotal θ (4.170) (4.173) (4. GM .171) If the change in the GM can be neglected. 4. The calculation of GM can be improved by taking into account the eﬀect of the measuring weight. Moving the weight.171) results in GM a ctual = GM new T mtotal −h mship mship (4. T a distance. is the total weight of the ﬂoating body including measuring weight. 4. is measured as the diﬀerence in the orientation of the ﬂoating body. of the ship. The engineer could Fig.169) Where. GM . GM .2 Metacentric Height.1. .172) The weight of the ship is obtained from looking at the ship depth. FLUIDS STATICS One way to reduce the eﬀect of the moving mass center due to liqd T uid is done by substituting a single h tank with several tanks. Measurement The metacentric height can be measured by ﬁnding the change in the angle when a weight is moved on the ﬂoating body. Movement of the liquid (mostly the fuel and water) provides way to control the stability. Wtotal . θ. Increasing the number of tanks reduces the moment of inertia.171) provides the solution. d then the moment created is Mweight = T d This moment is balanced by Mrighting = Wtotal GM new θ (4. This control of the stability.44. The change in height of G is g mtotal Gnew = g mship Gactual + g T h ¡ ¡ ¡ Combining equation (4.130 CHAPTER 4. The angle. The moment of inertial of the combine two G tanks is smaller than the moment of inertial of a single tank.172) with equation (4. Measurement of GM of ﬂoating body. design the tanks in such a way that the moment of inertia is operationally changed.
However. the moment to return the body is larger than actually was calculated and the bodies tend to be more stable (also for other reasons). this density change helps to increase the stability of the ﬂoating bodies. Fig. There are two situations that can occur. there are situations where the body has a “strange” ∆F M δβ and/or unsymmetrical body.1. is when b = 3 a. For the case where b < 3 a x some part is under the liquid. When the ﬂoating object is immersed into two layers. Calculations of GM for abrupt The mathematical condition for the border shape body. The center of the moment is needed to be found. the stability analysis must take into account the changes of the displaced liquids of the two liquid layers.45. Thus. When the body is submerged in a single ﬂuid layer. it must be taken into account. This point is the intersection of the liquid line with the brown middle line.3 Stability of Submerged Bodies 131 The analysis of submerged bodied is diﬀerent from the stability when the body lays between two ﬂuid layers with diﬀerent density.45). BUOYANCY AND STABILITY 4. the upper part of the body is above the liquid or part of the body is submerged under the water. The body ∆F GM weight doesn’t change during the rotation that the green area on the left and the B’ B green area on right are the same (see Figb ure 4. 4. The moment created by change in the displaced liquid (area) act in the same fashion as the before.1. .4. However. This analysis is out of the scope of this book (for now).45.6. all ﬂuids have density varied in some degree. The amount of area under the liquid section depends on the tilting angle. The calculations for such cases are a bit more complicated but based on the similar principles. These calculations are done as if none of the body under the liquid. The moment of inertia is calculated around this point (note the body is “ended” at end of the upper body). This point is intersection point liquid with lower body and it is needed to be calculated. the mass centroid must be below than buoyant centroid in order to have stable condition. After the tilting.4 Stability of None Systematical or “Strange” Bodies While most ﬂoating bodies are symmeta rical or semi–symmetrical. 4. Consider the ﬁrst strange body that has an abrupt step G change as shown in Figure 4. In cases where the density changes signiﬁcantly. For the case of b < 3 a the calculation of moment of inertia are similar to the previous case. The moment of inertia should be calculated around this axis. Generally. For an example of such a case is an object ﬂoating in a solar pond where the upper layer is made of water with lower salinity than the bottom layer(change up to 20% of the density). then none of the changes of buoyant centroid occurs.6.6.
FLUIDS STATICS This case is similar to pendulum (or mass attached to spring). etc.176) In general. the body should be accelerate.132 4.6. Thus.6. Similar situation exists in the case of ﬂoating bodies. the frequency of pendulum is 21π g which measured in Hz.175) In the same fashion the frequency of the ﬂoating body is 1 2π and the period time is 2π Ibody V ρs GM (4. The basic diﬀerential equation is used to balance and is rotation rotating moment ¨ Iβ − V ρs GM β =0 (4. Thus. 4. only simpliﬁed topics like constant value will be discussed.1.177) V ρs GM Ibody (4. In this section. If the ﬂoating body is used to transport humans and/or other creatures or sensitive cargo it requires to reduce the GM so that the traveling will be smoother. in this case. Explain why this description is erroneous? Solution The upper layer of the molecules have unbalanced force towards the liquid phase. Increase in GM increases the frequency of the ﬂoating body.174) Where here is length of the rode (or the line/wire) connecting the mass with the rotation point. The governing equation for the pendulum is ¨ β −gβ = 0 (4. coating. Example 4.5 Neutral frequency of Floating Bodies CHAPTER 4.29: In interaction of the molecules shown in Figure ? describe the existence of surface tension. The period of the cycle is 2 π /g. Newton’s law states when there is unbalanced force. the common explanation is wrong. the larger GM the more stable the ﬂoating body is. End Solution . However.2 Surface Tension The surface tension is one of the mathematically complex topic and related to many phenomena like boiling. the liquid is not in motion.
46. This analysis is referred to the case of inﬁnite or very large surface. For example in die casting.4. or water over air(gas–liquid). There are situations where a heavy liquid layer is placed over a lighter ﬂuid layer. heavy ﬂuid that is being placed above a lighter ﬂuid in a gravity ﬁeld perpendicular to interface. This analysis asks the question of what happen when a small amount of liquid from the above layer enter into the lower layer? Whether this liquid continue and will grow or will it return to its original conditions? The surface tension is the opposite mechanism that will returns the liquid to its original place. This disturbance can grow or returned to its original situation. For perfectly straight interface. Example 4. the surface tension between the needle and the liquid hold the needle above the liquid. The simpliﬁed case is the two diﬀerent uniform densities. Supposed that a liquid density is arbitrary function of the height. above lower ﬂuid with lower density. However. A heavy needle is ﬂoating on a liquid. For example. The original Rayleigh’s paper deals with the dynamics and density variations. some of heavy liquid moves down. In poor designs or other situations. This condition is determined by competing .7 Rayleigh–Taylor Instability RayleighTaylor instability (or RT instability) is named after Lord Rayleigh and G. Thus. some air is not evacuated and stay in small cavity on the edges of the shape to be casted. ρL . RAYLEIGH–TAYLOR INSTABILITY 133 Fig. This situation has engineering implications in several industries.3. 4. After certain diameter. Example for such systems are dense water over oil (liquid–liquid). the heavy ﬂuid will stay above the lighter ﬂuid.30: Needle is made of steel and is heavier than water and many other liquids. it can create a situation where the liquid metal is above the air but cannot penetrate into the cavity because of instability. I. the needle cannot be held by the liquid. Taylor. ρG .2) are always stable but unstable of the density is in the reversed order.3. Solution Under Construction End Solution 4. If the surface will be disturbed. For example a heavy ﬂuid density. Calculate the maximum diameter needle that can be inserted into liquid without drowning. density variations according to the bulk modulus (see section 4. This distortion can be as a result of heavy ﬂuid above the lighter liquid. This instability deals with a dense.7. liquid metal is injected in a cavity ﬁlled with air.
182) . On the other hand. the force that acting to get the above ﬂuid down is the buoyancy force of the ﬂuid in the depression. Thus. The conditions that required from this function will be required from all the other functions.180) (4.47. 4.46) the pressure diﬀerence or the pressure jump is due to the surface tension at this point must be PH − PL = 4 hmax σ π 2 L2 (4.178) where hmax is the maximum depression and L is the characteristic length of the depression. In that case. FLUIDS STATICS forces. As usual there is the neutral stable when the forces are equal.181) The pressure diﬀerence due to the gravity at the edge of the disturbance is then PH − PL = g (ρH − ρL ) hmax (4. equation (1. The depression is returned to its h original position if the surface forces are L large enough. example of a cosine function will be examined. the situation is Fig.57) can be approximated as 1 d2 h = 2 R dx For equation (4.47). and the buoyancy forces.57). the surface density. if the center point of the depression can “hold” the intrusive ﬂuid then the whole system is stable. Thus. Thus.178) the radius is 1 4 π 2 hmax =− R L2 (4. The weakest point is at x = 0 because symmetrical reasons the surface tension does not act against the gravity as shown in Figure (4. The disturbance is of the following h = −hmax cos 2πx L (4. Any continues function can be expanded in series of cosines. The ﬁrst derivative of cos around zero is sin which is approaching zero or equal to zero. The depression has diﬀerent radius as a function of distance from the center of the depression. this situation x σ σ is considered to be stable. Thus. x.134 CHAPTER 4. if the surface forces (surface tension) are not suﬃcient.179) According to equation (1. Description of depression to explain unstable and the heavy liquid enters into the Rayleigh–Taylor instability. The radius of any equation is expressed by equation (1. The ﬂuid above the depression is in equilibrium with the sounding pressure since the material is extending to inﬁnity. the liquid ﬂuid zone and vice versa.
the error is not signiﬁcant. considered two control volumes bounded by the blue lines in 2r Figure 4. In this process the heavier liquid “enter” the lighter liquid in one point and creates a depression as shown in Figure 4. the force is the integral around the depression.48. The θ “extra” lines of the depression should be ignored. To analyze it. Thus. The point where the situation is neutral stable Lc = 4 π2 σ g (ρH − ρL ) (4.184) An alternative approach to analyze this instability is suggested here. Additionally when the depression occurs. At the top. they are not part of the control volume. RAYLEIGH–TAYLOR INSTABILITY Comparing equations (4. The lighter liquid needs to move up at the same time but in a diﬀerent place.182) show that if the relationship is 4 σ π2 > g (ρH − ρL ) L2 135 (4. If all the heavy liquid “attempts” to move straight down. the force at the top is the same force at the bottom of the cylinder.185) Fbottom ∼ π r2 (ρL − ρG ) g (4. Description of depression to explain against the gravity force which make the the instability. At the cylinder bottom.48.48.21) This value is exact if the shape is a perfect half sphere. cylinder to be in equilibrium with its surroundings if the pressure at bottom is indeed ρ g h. The heavier liquid needs to move in one side and the lighter liquid in another location. the force is ρ g h × A. The ﬁrst control volume is made of a cylinder with a radius r and the second is the depression below it. 4.7. For the depression. It can be approximated as a ﬂat cylinder that has depth of r π/4 (read the explanation in the example 4. In reality. The horizontal forces around the control volume are canceling each other. Consider the situation described in Figure 4. This acts Fig. the force is atmospheric pressure times the area. At the bottom. the lighter liquid will “prevent” it.4.181) and (4.48. the liquid level is reduced a bit and the lighter liquid is ﬁlling the missing portion.183) It should be noted that hmax is irrelevant for this analysis as it is canceled. the force at the bottom is σ σ Fbottom ∼ π r2 The net force is then πr + h (ρL − ρG ) g + Patmos 4 πr 4 (4.186) .
49).187) The maximum surface tension is when the angle. This radius is limited because the lighter liquid has to enter at the same time into the heavier liquid zone. Since the “exchange” volumes of these two process are the same.190) Fig. For the cylindrical geometry. the total force is then Fσ = 2 π r σ cos θ The forces balance on the depression is then 2 π r σ cos θ ∼ π r2 The radius is obtained by r∼ 2 π σ cos θ (ρL − ρG ) g (4. Thus.49.136 CHAPTER 4.” The maximum possible radius of the depression depends on the geometry of the container. FLUIDS STATICS The force that hold this column is the surface tension. As shown in Figure 4. At that case.188) (4. 4. the maximum depression radius is about half for the container radius (see Figure 4. The cross section of the interface. it can be written that the minimum radius is rmin tube = 2 2πσ g (ρL − ρG ) (4.189) πr 4 (ρL − ρG ) g (4. The purple color represents the maximum heavy liquid raising area.48. the radius is r∼ 2πσ (ρL − ρG ) g (4.191) . θ = π/2. The yellow color represents the maximum lighter liquid that are “going down. the speciﬁc radius is limited.
These two scenarios should be inserting into equation 4. this angle is never can be obtained.191. This analysis introduces a new dimensional number that will be discussed in a greater length in the Dimensionless chapter.191) the angle was assumed to be 90 degrees. RAYLEIGH–TAYLOR INSTABILITY 137 The actual radius will be much larger. σ r∼ 8 π 0. In equation (4. The density of air is negligible as can be seen from the temperature compare to the aluminum density. 4. The heavier liquid can stay on top of the lighter liquid without being turned upside down when the radius is smaller than the equation 4.81 The minimum radius is r ∼ 0. End Solution Z L3 L2 L1 Fig.31: Estimate the minimum radius to insert liquid aluminum into represent tube at temperature of 600[K]. Solution The depression radius is assume to be signiﬁcantly smaller and thus equation (4.4 2400 × 9. .50.4. Assume that the surface tension is 400[mN/m]. The density of the aluminum is 2400kg/m3 .02[m] which demonstrates the assumption of h >> r was appropriate. For example.190) can be used.7. However. In Figure 4. Three liquids layers under rotation with various critical situations. The actual value of this angle is about π/4 to π/3 and in only extreme cases the angle exceed this value (considering dynamics).49.168 by introducing experimental coeﬃcient. it was shown that the depression and the raised area are the same. The actual area of the depression is only a fraction of the interfacial cross section and is a function.the depression is larger for square area. Example 4.
ω. what is the diﬀerence? . Is there any diﬀerence if the ﬂuids are compressible? Where is the maximum pressure points? For the case that the ﬂuids are compressible. You can assume that the process is isothermal. Describe the interface of the ﬂuids consider all the limiting cases.32: A canister shown in Figure 4.S. Use the ideal gas model. Assume that the ﬂuids do not mix.50 has three layers of diﬀerent ﬂuids with diﬀerent densities.138 CHAPTER 4. for known geometries of the ﬂuids. What happen after the canister start to be rotated? Calculated the volume that will enter or leave. The canister is rotate with circular velocity. FLUIDS STATICS Open Question by April 15. 2010 The best solution of the following question will win 18 U. dollars and your name will be associated with the solution in this book. Is there any diﬀerence if the process is isentropic? If so. the canister top center is connected to another tank with equal pressure to the canister before the rotation (the connection point). Example 4.
Part I Integral Analysis 139 .
.
Control volume and system before and after the later part of this book. The main diﬃculty lies in the fact that every particle has to be traced to its original state. This name is in honored J.CHAPTER 5 The Control Volume and Mass Conservation 5. The use of the Eulerian methods leads to a set diﬀerentic control ation equations that is referred to volume as Navier–Stokes equations which are commonly used. When the ﬂuid system moves or changes. The Eulerian method focuses on a deﬁned area or locaa system tion to ﬁnd the needed informab tion.motion. In Euler’s approach the focus is on a deﬁned point or a deﬁned volume. This kind of analysis is reasonable and it referred to in the literature as the Lagrangian Analysis. The main target of such analysis is to ﬁnd the value of certain variables.1. one wants to ﬁnd or predict the velocities in the system. This method applied and used in very few cases. Even though this system looks reasonable. L. Langrange (1736–1813) who formulated the equations of motion for the moving ﬂuid particles.1 Introduction This chapter presents a discussion on the control volume and will be focused on the conservation of the mass. Ad. 5. 141 . the Lagrangian system turned out to be diﬃcult to solve and to analyze. These differential equations will be used in Fig. This methods is referred as Eulerian method. Leonard Euler (1707–1783) suggested an alternative approach.
At the same time.1. Fig. energy. 5. some of the mass in the system exited the control volume which are marked “a” in Figure 5. The control volume is diﬀerentiated into two categories of control volumes. This methods has its limitations and for some cases the Lagrangian is preferred (and sometimes the only possibility). the control volume is a system. The red dotted lines are the control volume. At certain time the system and the control volume are identical location. The green lines in Figure 5. .142 CHAPTER 5. After a certain time. The material that remained in the control volume is marked as “b”. Deformable control volume is a volume having part of all of its boundaries in motion during the process at hand. momentum. the control gains some material which is marked as “c”.1 represent the system. When a piston pushing gases a good choice of control volume is a deformable control volume that is a head the piston inside the cylinder as shown in Figure 5. In the case where no mass crosses the boundaries. The Eulerian method plays well with the physical intuition of most people. mass. Control volume of a moving The control volume chosen is nondeformable con.2. Every control volume is the focus of the certain interest and will be dealt with the basic equations. MASS CONSERVATION ditionally. The control volume should be chosen so that the analysis should be simple and dealt with as less as possible issues which are not in question. entropy etc. The coordinate system could be ﬁxed to the conduit.2 Control Volume The Eulerian method requires to deﬁne a control volume (some time more than one). trol volume. 5. Therefore a limited discussion on the Lagrangian system will be presented (later version). The diﬀerence between the system and the control volume is shown in Figure 5.2. This coordinate system may be in a relative motion to another (almost absolute) coordinate system. The control volume is a deﬁned volume that was discussed earlier.1. Non–deformable control volume is a control volume which is ﬁxed in space relatively to an one coordinate system. non–deformable and deformable. Two examples of control volume are presented to illustrate diﬀerence between a deformable control volume and non–deformable control volume. Flow in conduits can be analyzed by looking in a control volume between two locations. Lagrangian equations are associated with the system while the Eulerian equation are associated with the control volume. the Eulerian system leads to integral equations which are the focus of this part of the book.piston with in and out ﬂow.
The interface of the control volume can move. The mass ﬂow out of the control volume is the system mass that is not included in the control volume.1) The system mass after some time. CONTINUITY EQUATION 143 5.2) The change of the system mass is by deﬁnition is zero. according Figure 5. Thus.7) . The convention of direction ˆ is taken positive if ﬂow out the control volume and negative if the ﬂow is into the control volume.3. The velocity component that velocities at the interface.3 Continuity Equation In this chapter and the next three chapters. is perpendicular to the surface is − → Urn = −ˆ · Ur = Ur cos θ n (5. the ﬂow out is d ma = dt ρs Urn dA Scv (5.v.v. The relative velocity is − → − → − → Ur = Uf − Ub (5.3. the conservation equations will be applied to the control volume. The actual velocity of the ﬂuid leaving the control volume is the relative velocity (see Figure 5. The system mass change is D msys D = Dt Dt ρdV = 0 Vsys (5.3).3) The ﬁrst term in equation (5. The change with time (time derivative of equation (5.5.2)) results in 0= D msys d mc.1.v. + ma − mc (5. 5. Schematics of velocity (see Figure 5. is made of msys = mc. (t) d = dt dt ρ dV Vc.3) is the derivative of the mass in the control volume and at any given time is d mc. the mass conservation will be discussed.4) Control Volume and is a function of the time. d ma d mc = + − Dt dt dt dt (5.3).v. In this chapter. (5.5) Ub n ˆ θ Uf −Ub Uf − Ub Where Uf is the liquid velocity and Ub is the boundary Fig.6) Where n is an unit vector perpendicular to the surface.
Again notice the negative sign in surface integral.v. can be approximated as x 2 t ρ(x.v. Schematics of ﬂow in in pipe with varying density as a function time for example 5.144 CHAPTER 5. Scv ρ Urn dA (5. In the same manner. due to temperature variation and other reasons. Example 5. X dx L Fig. The negative sign is because ﬂow out marked positive which reduces of the mass (negative derivative) in the control volume. the ﬂow rate in is d mb = dt ρs Urn dA Sc.9) into equation (5.3) results in Continuity d dt ρs dV = − c. ρ0 L t0 .10) is essentially accounting of the mass. MASS CONSERVATION It has to be emphasized that the density is taken at the surface thus the subscript s.1: The density changes in a pipe. Substituting equation (5.1.8) It can be noticed that the two equations (5.9) applying negative value to keep the convention. t) = 1− cos .4.8) and (5.7) are similar and can be combined. (5. taking the positive or negative value of Urn with integration of the entire system as d ma d mb − = dt dt ρs Urn dA Scv (5.10) Equation (5. The change of mass change inside the control volume is net ﬂow in or out of the control system. The next example is provided to illustrate this concept. 5.
3.2 Constant Density Fluids Further simpliﬁcations of equations (5. 5. dt c. Solution Here it is very convenient to choose a nondeformable control volume that is inside the conduit dV is chosen as π R2 dx.5.3. Vc.v. Write the expression for the mass change in the pipe. the ﬂow out (or in) is ρ(t) dV d dt d ρdV = dt c. Using equation (5. L t0 which results in A Flow Out = π R2 d dt L ρ0 1 − 0 x L 2 cos t π R2 L ρ0 dx = − sin t0 3 t0 t t0 The ﬂow out is a function of length.3.10) become conservation of the volume.v.v.4 length is L and its area is A. (5.10) can enter the integral since the boundaries are ﬁxed in time and hence. CONTINUITY EQUATION 145 The conduit shown in Figure 5. Express the mass ﬂow in and/or out. r and angle. t.v. and is the change of the mass in the control volume.11) is simpler than equation (5. x 1− L 2 cos t t0 π R2 dx The density is not a function of radius. and the mass in the conduit as function of time. .v.v.c. L. and time. θ and they can be taken out the integral as d d x 2 t ρdV = π R2 ρ0 1 − cos dx dt c. dρ dV = − dt ρ Urn dA Sc.10) can be obtained by assuming constant density and the equation (5.1 Non Deformable Control Volume When the control volume is ﬁxed with time. the derivative in equation (5. Continuity with Fixed b.10).11) Equation (5.10). End Solution 5. ρ0 c.
v. Find the height as a function of the other parameters. c.146 5.10) can be examined further to develop a simpler equation by using the extend Leibniz integral rule for a constant density and result in thus. Sc. dρ dV +ρ dt n · Ub dA = ρ ˆ Sc. Ubn dA (5.2: Liquid ﬁlls a bucket as shown in Figure 5.12) Steady State Continuity Vrn dA = Sin Sout Vrn dA = 0 (5. The average velocity of the liquid at the exit of the ﬁlling pipe is Up and cross section of the pipe is Ap . Urn dA (5.2 Deformable Control Volume The left hand side of question (5. (5. Example 5.v.v.2 illustrates this point. =0 =0 d dt ρ dV = c. This condition can be written mathematically as =0 d −→ dt or in a more explicit form as Vrn dA = 0 Sc. Hence.7 Ap .2.14) where Ub is the boundary velocity and Ubn is the normal component of the boundary velocity.15) is the net growth (or decrease) of the Control volume is by net volume ﬂow into it.v.3. Assume that the density is constant and at the boundary interface Aj = 0.v.3. Sc.1 CHAPTER 5.5. the meaning is that volume ﬂow rate in and the volume ﬂow rate out have to equal. 5.v.v.2. Example 5. Physically. MASS CONSERVATION Non Deformable Control Volume For this case the volume is constant therefore the mass is constant. and hence the mass change of the control volume is zero. And where Aj is the area of jet when touching the . the net ﬂow (in and out) is zero. Steady State Continuity Deformable Ubn dA = Sc.13) Notice that the density does not play a role in this equation since it is canceled out. The liquid ﬁlls a bucket with cross section area of A and instantaneous height is h.15) The meaning of the equation (5.
5.3. The ﬁrst control is around the jet and second is around the liquid in the bucket. In this analysis. this eﬀect can be neglected for this range which this problem. Second. The control volume around the jet is deformable because the length of the jet shrinks with the time.2.v. the air eﬀects are negligible. c. The relationship is function of the distance of the pipe from the boundary of the liquid. Substituting the known values for Urn results in Urn Ub dA = c. The mass conservation of the liquid in the bucket is boundary change Ubn dA c. In reality. no liquid leaves the jet and enters the air. Fourth. CONTINUITY EQUATION 147 Up Ap Ub Aj h Uj A Fig. the ratio is determined by height of the pipe from the liquid surface in the bucket. liquid boundary in bucket. several assumptions must be made. This assumption is a strong assumption for certain conditions but it will be not discussed here since it is advance topic. there are no evaporation or condensation processes. the liquid in the bucket has a straight surface. ﬂow in = c. (Uj + Ub ) dA . First. The last assumption is result of the energy equation (with some inﬂuence of momentum equation).5.v.v. Third.5. Urn dA where Ubn is the perpendicular component of velocity of the boundary. Solution This problem requires two deformable control volumes. However. Calculate the bucket liquid interface velocity.v. Filling of the bucket and choices of the deformable control volumes for example 5.
II. It also interesting to point out that if the ﬁlling was from other surface (not the top surface).II.II.II. c. mi . The ﬁrst limit is when Ap = A/0.7 Ap results Up Ap − Ub A = −0.II. the velocity will be Ub = Up in the limiting case and not inﬁnity. (5.7 Ap Ub (5. Solution The applicable equation is Ubn dA = c.a) To ﬁnd the jet velocity.v. the side.b) and using the ratio of Aj = 0. Urn is Urn = −Up 0 @ the valve every else . The reason for this diﬀerence is that the liquid already ﬁll the bucket and has not to move into bucket.b) The above two equations (5.148 CHAPTER 5.II. The other limit is that and Ap /A −→ 0 then Ap Ub = A which is the result for the “intuitive” solution. When examining solution there are two limits.a) into (5.c) is Ub = Ap A − 0. thus the relative velocity. Urn dA The entrance is ﬁxed.7 which is Ap Ub = =∞ 0 The physical meaning is that surface is ﬁlled instantly.g.II. MASS CONSERVATION The integration can be carried when the area of jet is assumed to be known as Ub A = Aj (Uj + Ub ) (5.7 Ap It is interesting that many individuals intuitively will suggest that the solution is Ub Ap /A.II.3: Balloon is attached to a rigid supply in which is supplied by a constant the mass rate.a) and (5.c) The solution of equation (5. End Solution Example 5. Substituting the ﬁrst equation. e.b) are enough to solve for the two unknowns. the second control volume around the jet is used as the following ﬂow in ﬂow out boundary change Up Ap − Aj (Ub + Uj ) = −Aj Ub (5.v. Calculate the velocity of the balloon boundaries assuming constant density. Uj .
v. The main assumption made in this model is that the proprieties in the across section are only function of x coordinate .v.v. (Ux x) · n dA + ˆ ˆ Sc. CONTINUITY EQUATION 149 Assume equal distribution of the velocity in balloon surface and that the center of the balloon is moving. This assumptions leads d ρ2 U2 dA − ρ1 U1 dA = dt A2 A1 dV ρ(x) A(x) dx V (x) (5. Sc. thus the velocity has the following form Ub = Ux x + Ubr r ˆ ˆ Where x is unit coordinate in x direction and Ux is the velocity of the center and where ˆ r is unit coordinate in radius from the center of the balloon and Ubr is the velocity in ˆ that direction. Ubr = mi ρ 4 π r2 The center velocity is (also) exactly Ubr . End Solution 5.3.2. Substituting into the general equation yields A ρ 4 π r2 Ubr = ρ Up Ap = mi Hence. (Ubr r) · n dA ˆ ˆ The ﬁrst integral is zero because it is like movement of solid body and also yield this value mathematically (excises for mathematical oriented student). The right side of equation (5.v.3 One–Dimensional Control Volume Additional simpliﬁcation of the continuity equation is of one dimensional ﬂow.15) is the net change due to the boundary is center movement net boundary change (Ux x + Ubr r) · n dA = ˆ ˆ ˆ Sc. The total velocity of boundary is Ut = mi (ˆ + r) x ˆ ρ 4 π r2 It can be noticed that the velocity at the opposite to the connection to the rigid pipe which is double of the center velocity. This simpliﬁcation provides very useful description for many ﬂuid ﬂow phenomena.16) .3. The second integral (notice n = r) yields ˆ ˆ (Ubr r) · n dA = 4 π r2 Ubr ˆ ˆ Sc.5.
Example 5. h as function of the time. Assume that the height at time zero is h0 .20) The next example is of semi one–dimensional example to illustrate equation (5. Is there a critical value and then if exist ﬁnd the critical value of the system parameters. For the ﬁrst case.4. The mass ﬂow rate out is √ function of the height. Height of the liquid for example 5. continuity equation is at its minimum form of U1 A1 = A2 U2 (5. min h Fig.4: Liquid ﬂows into tank in a constant mass ﬂow rate of a. MASS CONSERVATION When the density can be considered constant equation (5.16) is reduced to U2 dA − A2 A1 U1 dA = d dt A(x)dx (5.150 CHAPTER 5.18) reduces further to ρ1 A1 U1 = ρ2 A2 U2 (5. First assume that qout = b h second Assume as qout = b h. determine the height. 5. What happen if the h0 = 0? .16).16) to become ρ2 U2 dA = A2 A1 ρ1 U1 dA (5.6.18) For steady state and uniform density and velocity equation (5.19) For incompressible ﬂow (constant density).17) For steady state but with variations of the velocity and variation of the density reduces equation (5.
16) is d L dh ρ h dx = ρ L dt 0 dt Substituting into equation equation (5.3. For second case. the governing equation (5. However.16) is ﬂow out ﬂow in √ dh ρL = b h − mi dt with the general solution of √ hb ln −1 mi √ √ mi hb hb + − 1 = (t + c) ρL mi 2ρL . the height will increase. negative number for height is not possible and the height solution approach zero. If the reverse case appeared. For case one the right hand side term in equation (5.16) is dh ρL = dt solution is h= ﬂow out b1 h ﬂow in − mi private solution homogeneous solution b1 t mi + c1 ρ L b1 The solution has the homogeneous solution (solution without the mi ) and the solution of the mi part. Essentially. If the term hmb1 i i is larger than one then the solution reduced to a negative number. The solution can rearranged to a new form (a discussion why this form is preferred will be provided in dimensional chapter).5. the critical ratio state if the ﬂow in is larger or lower than the ﬂow out determine the condition of the height. CONTINUITY EQUATION Solution 151 The control volume for both cases is the same and it is around the liquid in the tank. b t − ρ1L e e h b1 = m1 e − ρ1L b t +c e b1 t ρL With the initial condition that at h(t = 0) = h0 the constant coeﬃcient can be found as h0 b 1 h0 b1 = 1 − c =⇒ c = 1 − m1 mi which the solution is h b1 = m1 e − ρ1L b t + 1− h0 b1 mi e b1 t ρL 0 0 It can be observed that if 1 = hmb1 is the critical point of this solution. It can be noticed that control volume satisfy the demand of one dimensional since the ﬂow is only function of x coordinate.
4 Reynolds Transport Theorem It can be noticed that the same derivations carried for the density can be carried for other intensive properties such as speciﬁc entropy. y) dα (5.org/details/papersonmechanic01reynrich. speciﬁc enthalpy. material is not necessarily but is added her for completeness. y) − G(x1 . Leibniz integral rule2 is an one dimensional and it is deﬁned as d dy x2 (y) x2 (y) f (x.archive. y) − f (x1 . a proof will be provided and the physical meaning will be explained. MASS CONSERVATION The constant is obtained when the initial condition that at h(t = 0) = h0 and it left as exercise for the reader. For its derivative of equation (5. 3 There was a suggestion to insert arbitrary constant which will be canceled and will a provide rigorous proof. the exact mathematical proof is not the concern here. it will be provided.24) diﬀerentiating (chain rule d uv = u dv + v du) by part of left hand side of the Leibniz integral rule (it can be shown which are identical) is 1 2 3 4 d [G(x2 .25) papers can be read online at http://www. the Reynolds Transport Theorem will be reproofed and discussed.v. y)] ∂G dx2 ∂G ∂G dx1 ∂G = + (x2 . The change of accumulative property will be then D Dt f ρdV = sys d dt f ρdV + c. y) = f (α. y) = ∂G ∂x (5. if there will be a demand for such.23) Notice that lower boundary of the integral is missing and is only the upper limit of the function is present3 . Nevertheless.v f ρ Urn dA (5. The ideas are the similar but extended some what. . c. This author ﬁnd material just given so no questions will be asked. This is engineering book and thus. Suppose that g is intensive property (which can be a scalar or a vector) undergoes change with time. (18421912) which is actually a three dimensional generalization of Leibniz integral rule1 .21) This theorem named after Reynolds.23) is f (x. y) ∂y dy dy (5. Osborne.152 CHAPTER 5. To make the previous derivation clearer.22) Initially. Assume that there is a function that satisfy the following x G(x. y) − − (x1 . End Solution 5. y) dx = x1 (y) x1 (y) dx2 dx1 ∂f dx + f (x2 . y) dy ∂x2 dy ∂y ∂x1 dy ∂y 1 These 2 This (5.
32) . is then F2 dx2 dt (5.27) The same can be said for the third term (3). (5.v. The intensive property. F . y) dx ∂y (5.31) The change with time of the accumulative property. The above “proof” is mathematical in nature and physical explanation is also provided.26) The ﬁrst term (1) in equation (5.4. Suppose that a ﬂuid is ﬂowing in a conduit. The interesting information that commonly needed is the change of the accumulative property. is then F1 dx1 dt Fin = f1 ρ Urn The accumulative ﬂow of the property out. The same can be said for the other side.25) are actually (the x2 is treated as a diﬀerent variable) x2 (y) x1 (y) ∂ f (x. The change with time is DF D = Dt Dt ρ f dV sys (5. This limiting condition is the control volume for which some of the mass will leave or enter. F . between the boundaries is d dt ρ(x) f A(x) dA c. Urn = U1 − Ub .25) is dx2 ∂G dx2 = f (x2 . the mass will be diﬀerent and it will not be a system. f is investigated or the accumulative property. Since the change is very short (diﬀerential). F . with time.28) For one dimensional situation the change with time is DF D = Dt Dt ρ f A(x)dx sys (5. Thus this explanation is a proof the Leibniz rule. y) ∂x2 dy dy (5. F .29) If two limiting points (for the one dimensional) are moving with a diﬀerent coordinate system. The accumulative ﬂow of the property in.5. REYNOLDS TRANSPORT THEOREM 153 The terms 2 and 4 in equation (5. F . the ﬂow in (or out) will be the velocity of ﬂuid minus the boundary at x1 .30) Fout = f2 ρ Urn (5.
Reynolds Transport d f ρdV = f ρ dV + dt c. The magical averaged velocity is obtained using the equation (5.a) The integration of the equation (5. It will be assumed that the velocity at the interface is zero. Reynolds Transport theorem is a generalization of the Leibniz rule and thus the same arguments are used. The only diﬀerence is that the velocity has three components and only the perpendicular component enters into the calculations. Solution The velocity proﬁle is linear with radius. Example 5. is arbitrary and it can be replaced by any letter. The above discussion is one of the physical meaning the Leibniz rule. MASS CONSERVATION When put together it brings back the Leibniz integral rule.V.V.V. Thus. What is the magical averaged velocity at the exit? Assume no–slip condition. Write the equation which describes the velocity at the entrance.b) The solution of equation (b) results in average velocity as Uave = (5. Since the time variable.5 Examples For Mass Conservation Several examples are provided to illustrate the topic.v. later a discussion on relationship between velocity at interface to solid also referred as the (no) slip condition will be provided. Additionally. This assumption is good for most cases with very few exceptions. the velocity became uniform.33) 5. After magical mixing. t. the boundary condition is U (r = R) = 0 and U (r = 0) = Umax Therefore the velocity proﬁle is r U (r) = Umax 1 − R Where R is radius and r is the working radius (for the integration).13). For which R Umax 1 − 0 r R 2 π r dr = Uave π R2 (5.154 CHAPTER 5.c) End Solution .5: Liquid enters a circular pipe with a linear velocity proﬁle as a function of the radius with maximum velocity of Umax .V.a) is Umax π R2 = Uave π R2 6 Umax 6 (5.v sys D DT f ρ Urn dA Sc. (5.
7. The slowed liquid is slowing the layer above it. No mass can cross the lower surface (solid boundary). The boundary layer is growing with x because the boundary eﬀect is penetrating further into ﬂuid.5. 5. and upper. EXAMPLES FOR MASS CONSERVATION (1) (2) 155 U0 ge Ed of B n ou yL dr er ay L Fig. the left. Then assume parabolic velocity proﬁle as Ux (y) = 2 U0 y 1 + δ 2 y δ 2 and calculate the mass transfer across the control volume. In this case. right. The above integrals on the . Solution Assuming the velocity proﬁle is linear thus. For simplicity assume slowed ﬂuid has a linear velocity proﬁle. (to satisfy the boundary condition) it will be U0 y Ux (y) = δ The chosen control volume is rectangular of L × δ. Compare the two diﬀerent velocity proﬁles aﬀecting on the mass transfer. The assumption is that ﬂuid attaches itself to surface.6: Experiments have shown that a layer of liquid that attached itself to the surface and it is referred to as boundary layer. Boundary Layer control mass. calculate the relationship of the mass transfer across the control volume.” The integral simply multiply by negative one. Example 5. A common boundary layer analysis uses the Reynolds transform theorem. Where δ is the height of the boundary layer at exit point of the ﬂow as shown in Figure 5.5.7.13) results in x direction y direction out in δ δ U0 dy − 0 0 U0 y dy = δ L U xdx 0 It can be noticed that the convention used in this chapter of “in” as negative is not “followed. The control volume has three surfaces that mass can cross. The situation is steady state and thus using equation (5.
156 right hand side can be combined as δ CHAPTER 5. However sometime.01 m2 500 m/sec End Solution The mass (volume) ﬂow rate is given by direct quantity like x kg/sec. and 8 hours. Is there a combination of valves that make the tank at steady state? . The tank is 3/4 fulls.1 kg/sec The density is ρ= m ˙ 5.8: The tank is ﬁlled by two valves which one ﬁlled tank in 3 hours and the second by 6 hours. 7 hours. The burned gases leaves at the exhaust which has cross area 0.1 m2 with velocity of 500 m/sec. calculate the time for tank reach empty or full state when all the valves are open.1 kg/sec = = 1.02kg/m3 AU 0. The next example deal with such reversed mass ﬂow rate. The tank also has three emptying valves of 5 hours. Thus. MASS CONSERVATION U0 1 − 0 y δ L dy = 0 U xdx the integration results in U0 δ = 2 or for parabolic proﬁle δ δ L U xdx 0 U0 dy − 0 0 δ U0 y y + δ δ y y − δ δ L 2 L dy = 0 U xdx or 0 U0 1 − the integration results in 2 dy = U0 U0 δ = 2 U xdx 0 End Solution Example 5. the mass (or the volume) is given by indirect quantity such as the eﬀect of ﬂow. Example 5.7: Air ﬂows into a jet engine at 5 kg/sec while fuel ﬂow into the jet is at 0.1 ) 5.13) is used. the ﬂow out is ( 5 + 0. What is the density of the gases at the exhaust? Solution The mass conservation equation (5.1 kg/sec.
For example valve of 3 hours can be converted to 1/3 tank per hour. EXAMPLES FOR MASS CONSERVATION Solution 157 Easier measurement of valve ﬂow rate can be expressed as fraction of the tank per hour. For simplicity. in or out ﬂow rate = Sc. Thus.5. The gas inside the cylinder obeys the ideal gas law.5. Solution The applicable equation is increase pressure Vc.v. The time to completely ﬁlled the tank is 1 70 4 = hour 159 1 131 − 2 280 The rest is under construction. dρ dV dt ρ Ub dV ρUrn dA Every term in the above equation is analyzed but ﬁrst the equation of state and volume to pressure relationship have to be provided. End Solution Example 5. Assume that the cylinder inﬂated uniformly and pressure inside the cylinder is uniform. Calculate the cylinder boundaries velocity. if all the valves are open the tank will be ﬁlled.v boundary velocity + Sc. The pressure inside the cylinder is linearly proportional to the volume. ρ= P RT and relationship between the volume and pressure is P = f π Rc 2 . assume that the process is isothermal. mass ﬂow rate in is min = 1/3 + 1/6 = 1/2tank/hour ˙ The mass ﬂow rate out is mout = 1/5 + 1/7 + 1/8 = ˙ 131 280 Thus. Assume that the gas mass is supplied in uniformed way of mi [kg/m/sec].9: Inﬂated cylinder is supplied in its center with constant mass ﬂow.v.
v 2 f π Rc Ub RT 2 π Rc dRc dV = 4 f π 2 Rc 3 Ub 3RT The integral can be carried when Ub is independent of the Rc 4 The second term is ρ f π Rc 2 ρ Ub dA = Ub 2 πRc = RT Sc. 4 The proof of this idea is based on the chain diﬀerentiation similar to Leibniz rule. A f π 3 Rc 2 RT Ub substituting in the governing equation obtained the form of f π 2 Rc 3 4 f π 2 Rc 3 Ub + Ub = mi RT 3RT The boundary velocity is then Ub = mi 3 mi R T G= 7 f π 2 Rc 3 7 f π 2 Rc 3 3RT End Solution Example 5.v. MASS CONSERVATION Where Rc is the instantaneous cylinder radius. Where fv is a coeﬃcient describing the balloon physical characters. Assume that balloon volume is a linear function of the pressure inside the balloon such as P = fv V .v Vc. When the derivative of the second part is dUb /dRc = 0. .158 CHAPTER 5. mi . Assume that gas obeys the ideal gas law. Combining the above two equations results in f π Rc 2 ρ= RT Where f is a coeﬃcient with the right dimension.10: A balloon is attached to a rigid supply and is supplied by a constant mass rate. Calculate the velocity of the balloon boundaries under the assumption of isothermal process. It also can be noticed that boundary velocity is related to the radius in the following form Ub = dRc dt The ﬁrst term requires to ﬁnd the derivative of density with respect to time which is Ub dρ d = dt dt Thus the ﬁrst term is dρ dV = dt 2 π Rc f π Rc RT 2 = 2 f π Rc dRc RT dt Vc.
5. .v. Sc.v.v.v The right hand side of the above equation is ρUrn dA = mi Sc.5. ρUrn dA Vc.10. The ideal gas law is ρ= P RT 159 The relationship between the pressure and volume is P = fv V = 4 fv π Rb 3 3 The combining of the ideal gas law with the relationship between the pressure and volume results 4 fv π Rb 3 ρ= 3RT The applicable equation is dρ dV + dt ρ (Uc x + Ub r) dA = ˆ ˆ Sc. The density change is Ub dρ 12 fv π Rb dRb = dt RT dt The ﬁrst term is =f (r) Rb 0 2 12 fv π Rb 2 16 fv π 2 Rb 5 Ub 4 π r2 dr = Ub RT 3RT dV The second term is 8 fv π 2 R b 5 4 fv π R b 3 4 fv π R b 3 Ub dA = Ub 4 π Rb 2 = Ub 3RT 3RT 3RT A A Subsisting the two equations of the applicable equation results Ub = 1 mi R T 8 fv π 2 R b 5 Notice that ﬁrst term is used to increase the pressure and second the change of the boundary. EXAMPLES FOR MASS CONSERVATION Solution The question is more complicated than Example 5.
However. . The velocity has three components in each of the coordinates under the assumption that ﬂow is uniform and the surface is straight5 . local averaged velocity in three coordinates. Control volume usage to calculate of this approach.160 CHAPTER 5.8. A similar control volume construction to ﬁnd the velocity of the boundary velocity (height) can be carried out. Sometimes hℓ z y Ae it is desirable to ﬁnd the averaged velocx Ue ity or velocity distribution inside a control volume. dollars and your name will be associated with the solution in this book. there is very little written about the usability of this approach to provide way to calculate the average quantities in the control system. The integral approached is used to calculate the averaged velocity of each to the components. However. To relate the velocity in the z direction with the ﬂow rate out or the exit the velocity mass balance is constructed. What are the units of the coeﬃcient fv in this problem? What are the units of the coeﬃcient in the previous problem? 5. The upper boundary is surface parallel to upper surface but at Z distance from the bottom.10 under the assumption that the process is isentropic.8. The mass balance reads dρ dV + dt Ubn ρ dA + A A Urn ρ dA = 0 (5. under certain conditions it is reasonable to assume straight surface which have been done for this problem.6 The Details Picture – Velocity Area Relationship The integral approach is intended to deal with the “big” picture. Example 5.34) V 5 The liquid surface is not straight for this kind of problem. Consider a container ﬁlled with liquid on which one exit opened and the liquid ﬂows out as shown in Figure 5.S. MASS CONSERVATION End Solution Open Question: Answer must be received by April 15. 2010 The best solution of the following question will win 18 U. The control volume is bounded by the container wall including the exit of the ﬂow.11: Solve example 5. Therefore an example will be provided to demonstrate the use Fig. 5. Indeed the method is used in this part of the book for this A purpose. There is no general way to provide these quantities. Also assume that the relationship between the pressure and the volume is P = fv V 2 .
THE DETAILS PICTURE – VELOCITY AREA RELATIONSHIP For constant density (conservation of volume) equation6 and (h > z) reduces to Urn ρ dA = 0 A 161 (5. If the volumes on the left and the right are symmetrical the averaged velocity will be zero.37) Fig.38) into Ae − Ax Ue + Ux Y (x) h = 0 A Ayz (5.36) It can be noticed that the boundary is not moving and the mass inside does not change this control volume. Ax− X controlpage into the page into the The control volume is shown in Figure 5. One zone is right to the exit with ﬂow to the left and one zone to left with averaged velocity to right. Because averaged velocities and constant density are used transformed equation (5.9.9.35 becomes Uz A = Ue Ae =⇒ Uz = − Ae Ue A (5.35) In the container case for uniform velocity equation 5. 5. Control volume and system before and after the motion. Substituting into (5.38) Ax − Where Ax − is the area shown the Figure under this label. The velocity Uz is the averaged velocity downward.6. The only diﬀerence is that the velocity has two diﬀerent directions.5. The mass conservation for constant density of this control volume is − A Ue Ae Ubn ρ dA + A Urn ρ dA = 0 (5.37) results in Ae Ue ρ dA + A Ux ρ dA = 0 Ayz (5. . The area Ayz referred to area into the page in Figure 5. Ux is generally increasing with x because Ax − increase with x.9. 6 The point where (z = h) the boundary term is substituted the ﬂow in term. The boundary are the container far from Ay − y the ﬂow exit with blue line projection into x page (area) shown in the Figure 5. The calculations for the y directions are similar to the one done for x direction. The x component of velocity is obY control Volume Volume tained by using a diﬀerent control volume. Usage of control volume not included in the previous analysis provides the velocity at the upper boundary which is the same as the velocity at y direction. It can be notice that the velocity.39) Where Y (x) is the length of the (blue) line of the boundary.9 under the blow line.
MASS CONSERVATION Example 5.13: . Circular cross section for ﬁnding Ux and various cross sections.XII.b) Fig.h) (5. The length of the line Y (x) is Y (x) = 2 r 1− 1− x r 2 Ax− Y(x) (r − x) x α y r (5. The value dS is r cos α.XII.e) (5.10.a) Ue Ae This relationship also can be expressed in the term of α as Y (x) = 2 r sin α (5.f) 1 α − . Ux for a cross section of circular shape (cylinder).XII. Solution The relationship for this geometry needed to be expressed.12: Calculate the velocity.XII.XII. 5. Integrating the velocity for the entire container and dividing by the angle.d) Ux = Averaged velocity is deﬁned as Ux = U dS S (5.XII. sin(2α) r2 2 (5.XII. The same way it can be represented for angle calculations.c) The area Ax − is expressed in term of α as Ax − = Thus the velocity.g) Where here S represent some length. Since this expression is simpler it will be adapted. Ux = which results in Ux = 1 2r π 0 Ae r α − 1 sin(2α) 2 Ue r dα A h tan α (π − 1) Ae r Ue 4 A h End Solution (5.i) Example 5.XII. When the relationship between radius angle and x are x = r(1 − sin α) (5. Ux is Ae A α− 1 sin(2α) r2 Ue + Ux 2 r sin α h = 0 2 Ae r α − 1 sin(2α) 2 Ue A h sin α 1 S (5.XII.162 CHAPTER 5. α provides the averaged velocity.
12. State your assumptions and how it similar to the previous example.39) modiﬁed to be Ae − Ax Ue + Ux Y (x) h = 0 A The integral is the same as before but the upper limit is only to π/2 Ux = which results in Ux = (π − 2) Ae r Ue 8 A h End Solution Ayz (5.7. y velocity for a circular shape The ﬂow out in the x direction is zero because symmetrical reasons. Thus. Solution X(y) x 163 y r (r − x) Ay − Ue Ae Fig.a) (5. 5.11.7 More Examples for Mass Conservation Typical question about the relative velocity that appeared in many ﬂuid mechanics exams is the following. The ﬂow in half of the cylinder either the right or the left has non zero averaged velocity. every point has diﬀerent velocity with the same value in the opposite direction.14: . That is the ﬂow ﬁeld is a mirror images.XIII. The calculations are similar to those in the previous to example 5.XIII.5. The main concept that must be recognized is the half of the ﬂow must have come from one side and the other come from the other side.40) 1 2r π/2 0 Ae r α − 1 sin(2α) 2 Ue r dα A h tan α (5. MORE EXAMPLES FOR MASS CONSERVATION Calculate the velocity. Example 5. What is the averaged velocity if only half section is used. equation (5. Uy for a cross section of circular shape (cylinder).b) 5. Thus.
the calculation have to be made in the frame of reference moving with the boat.75m3 /sec The ﬂow rate at entrance is the same as the exit thus.a) Thus in this case.12. The relative jet discharge velocity is Urout = 50 − (10 + 5) = 35[m/sec] The volume ﬂow rate is then Qout = Aout Urout = 35 × 0. since the ﬂow is incompressible ﬂow. Assume incompressible process. The inboard engine uses a pump to suck in water at the front Ain = 0.15[m] ˙ ˙ (5. Schematic of the boat for example 5. The water absolute velocity leaving the back is 50m/sec.05 m2 .05 = 0. the ﬂow is steady state and equation (5.05 [kg/s].1 [kg/s].75m/sec Ain 0. However. Find the average leaving velocity and density of the mixture leaving through the 2O [cm] diameter pipe.2 m2 and eject it through the back of the boat with exist area of Aout = 0.15: Liquid A enters a mixing device depicted in at 0.05 ˙ ˙ ˙ QA + QB = Qmix =⇒= + = + ρA ρA 1000 800 . 5. what Fig.164 CHAPTER 5. If the mixing device volume is decreasing (as a piston pushing into the chamber) at rate of .11) is applicable mA + mB = Qmix ρmix =⇒= 0.XV.1 + 0. In same time liquid B enter the mixing device with a diﬀerent speciﬁc density at 0.002 [m3 /s].14 are the relative velocities entering and leaving the boat and the pumping rate? Us = 5[m/sec] Uo = 50[m/sec] Ub = 10[m/sec] Solution The boat is assumed (implicitly is stated) to be steady state and the density is constant. the total volume ﬂow in is equal to volume ﬂow out as mA ˙ mA ˙ 0. Solution In the ﬁrst scenario. Urin = Aout 0.2 End Solution Example 5. The density of liquid A is 1000[kg/m3 ] and liquid B is 800[kg/m3 ]. MASS CONSERVATION A boat travels at speed of 10m/sec upstream in a river that ﬂows at a speed of 5m/s.10 0. what is the exit velocity? State your assumptions.05 Urout = 35 = 8.05 = 1. The results of the mixing is a homogeneous mixture.
16: A syringe apparatus is being use to withdrawn blood7 .d) (5.0003 [m].7.1 + 0. At that stage air leaks in around the piston at the rate 0. This part of the solution is art. What is the average velocity of blood into syringe (at the tip)? The syringe radios is 0. There are several possible control volumes that can be used to solve the problem.01 [m/s].XV. it can be observed that bioengineering is “cool” today while in 40 years ago is a disgusting ﬁeld.9974[kg/s] End Solution (5. I hope that no one will have teachers like him.012 π (5.b) The averaged velocity is then Qmix Aout mA ˙ mB ˙ + 1. −Qb ρmix in out Ubn A ρb = mA + mB − mmix ˙ ˙ ˙ That is the mixture device is with an uniform density −0.000001 [m3 /s]. and coordinates) since the mass in the control volume (the syringe volume is not constant).v.e) Example 5.07[kg/m3 ] mA ˙ mB ˙ + ρA ρB 165 (5. Yet. . The two “instinctive control volumes” are the blood with the air and the the whole volume between the tip and syringe plunger (piston).XV. However.c) Umix = In the case that a piston is pushing the exit density could be changed and ﬂuctuated depending on the location of the piston.625 ρ ρB = A = [m/s] π 0. The ﬁrst choice seem reasonable 7 The author still remember his elementary teacher that was so appalled by the discussion on blood piping which students in an engineering school were doing. So governing equation is (5.XV. The term that should be added to the governing equation the change of the volume. If the piston is withdrawn at O. Solution The situation is unsteady state (in the instinctive c.15). MORE EXAMPLES FOR MASS CONSERVATION Thus the mixture density is ρmix = mA + mB ˙ ˙ = 923.005[m] and the tip radius is 0.XV. He gave a speech about how inhuman these engineering students are.7[kg/m3 ] = 0.05 − mexit mexit = 1. The chose of the control volume and coordinate system determine the amount of work.002[m/ sec] 923.5. if the assumption of well mixed is still holding the exit density should not aﬀected.
For this case. the water (or another liquid) is pumped throw the inner pipe at high velocity. and two equations.XVI.b) In the case.XVI.c.5[m/s]. the equation (5.XVI. the choice is coordinates moving with the plunger.0[m/s] and U2 = 0.d) Utip ρa Qin As ρb Atip End Solution Example 5. attached to the blood edge. stationary. There several coordinate systems that can used. In this question the what is the mixed stream averaged velocity with U1 = 4.a) . The second part of the control volume is the air. Solution The situation is steady state and which density of the liquid is irrelevant (because it is the same at the inside and outside). there are two unknowns. In this device. In that case.a) and (5.XVI.c) results in Ub = Uplunger − Ub As = = Atip Uplunger − ρa Qin As ρ b As (5.166 CHAPTER 5.XVI. Calculate the mixing averaged velocity. At this stage. attached to plunger. Later the two stream are mixed. U1 A1 + U2 A2 = U3 A3 (5. The air governing equation is blood b. The cross section inside and outside radii ratio is r1 /r2 = 0.XVI. The outside pipe is lower pressure which suck the water (other liquid) into device. velocity in/out ˙ (Uplunger − Ub ) As ρb = ρa Qin (5. Notice that change of the volume do not enter into the calculations because the density of the air is assumed to be constant. In stationary coordinates two boundaries are moving and thus moving b. MASS CONSERVATION since it provides relationship of the total to speciﬁc material.2. control volume is the volume syringe tip to the edge of the blood.17: The apparatus depicted in Figure ?? is referred in the literature sometime as the waterjet pump.c) In the case of coordinates are attached to the blood edge similar equation is obtained. Ub and Utip . in/out ˙ Uplunger As ρa − Ub As ρb = ρa Qin (5.XVII.15) is applicable and can be written as Utip Atip & = Ub As & ρb ρb (5.a) & & In the air side the same equation can used. Using equations (5. the relative plunger velocity is zero while the blood edge boundary velocity is Uplunger − Ub .
XVII.5. MORE EXAMPLES FOR MASS CONSERVATION The velocity is A3 = A1 + A2 and thus U3 = U1 A1 + U2 A2 A1 A1 == U1 + U2 1 − A3 A3 A3 End Solution 167 (5.b) .7.
MASS CONSERVATION .168 CHAPTER 5.
The Reynolds Transport Theorem (RTT) is applicable to any quantity and the discussion here will deal with forces that acting on the control volume.2) into a continuous form of small bodies which results in n Fi = i=1 D Dt element mass U ρ dV sys (6.1 Introduction to Continuous In the previous chapter.1 Momentum Governing Equation 6.CHAPTER 6 Momentum Conservation for Control Volume 6.1) It can be noticed that bold notation for the velocity is U (and not U ) to represent that the velocity has a direction. Mass is a scalar (quantity without magnitude). the Reynolds Transport Theorem (RTT) was applied to mass conservation. Newton’s law becomes n n Fi = i=1 i=1 U d(mU )i dt (6. Newton’s second law for single body is as the following F = U d(mU ) dt (6. For several bodies (n). This chapter deals with momentum conservation which is a vector.3) 169 .1.2) The ﬂuid can be broken into inﬁnitesimal elements which turn the above equation (6.
hence.1. The gravity acts on all the system elements.1. ∼0 Pˆ S n = −P n + Sν (6. 6. only the pressure component is used which is reasonable for most situations. excluding the external forces.2 External Forces First. have to be discussed. it can be written as Fs = c.1. Where the surface “force”. τ dA (6.4) In this book (at least in this discussion). and the surface forces as the following F total = F b + F s (6. After inﬁnitesimal time the gravity force acting on the system is the same for control volume. the terms on the left hand side. the surface forces are with the divided into two categories: one perpendisurface n ˆ perpendicular to cular to the surface and one with the surthe surface face direction (in the surface plain see Figure 6. Sn . is in the surface direction. is made out of two components. and τ are the shear stresses. g ρ dV = sys cv g ρ dV (6. The explaination for the direction relative to surface perpendicular and with the surface. .). The Reynold’s Transport Theorem (RTT) has to be used on the right hand side. The total gravity force is element mass Fb = sys g ρ dV (6. 6. Sn . The surface “force”. Here for simplicity.7) Fig. In this chapter. Sn dA + c.170 CHAPTER 6. n is an unit vector outward ˆ of element area and the negative sign is applied so that the resulting force acts on the body. The forces. Thus. Thus.v.5) which acts through the mass center towards the center of earth. or the forces. the main body force is the gravity.v. are the body forces.6) The integral yields a force trough the center mass which has to be found separately.8) Where Sν is perpendicular stress due to viscosity. Again. one due to viscosity (solid body) and two consequence of the ﬂuid pressure. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION Note that the notation D/Dt is used and not d/dt to signify that it referred to a derivative of the system.
6. friction (nonﬂuid). ρ U U rn dA (6.11) is a vector equation which can be broken into its three components.10) is transformed to Integral Momentum Equation & External Forces F ext + g ρ dV − P · dA + τ · dA = c. according Reynolds Transport Theorem (RTT). U . the components are Fx + c.1. P cos θx dA + c. t dt c. 6.v.v.v. c.v. ρ U Urn dV The external forces. c.v.v. c.v. g · ˆ ρ dV i c. MOMENTUM GOVERNING EQUATION 171 6. where θx is the angle between n and ˆ or (ˆ · ˆ ˆ i n i).v. supporting solid structures. is ρ U dV = sys ρ U dV + c. ducts. Thus.v.12) t dt ρ U x dV + c. c. are the forces resulting from support of the control volume by non–ﬂuid elements.v.11) ρ U dV + c.v.v. t = dt c. τ x · dA = ρ U x · U rn dA (6. (6. c. Equation (6. for example in the x coordinate.1. etc. With external forces equation (6.13) . is measured in the frame of reference and U rn is the liquid relative velocity to boundary of the control volume measured in the same frame of reference. the right hand side has to include the following acceleration r ˙ a acc = ω × (r × ω) + 2 U × ω + r × ω − a 0 (6.v. the general form of the momentum equation without the external forces is Integral Momentum Equation g ρ dV − P dA + τ · dA c.v.9) The liquid velocity. In Cartesian coordinate.3 Momentum Governing Equation D Dt t dt The right hand side. (6. These external forces are commonly associated with pipe.v. Fext .10) ρ U Urn dV ρ U dV + c.1.v. c.v.4 Momentum Equation in Acceleration System For accelerate system.
MOMENTUM CONSERVATION Where r is the distance from the center of the frame of reference and the add force is F add = Vc. the mass ﬂow rate in and out are equal. In this case the resulting force due to the pressure is zero to all directions.5 Momentum For Steady State and Uniform Flow The momentum equation can be simpliﬁed for the steady state condition as it was shown in example 6.1. Integral Steady State Momentum Equation F ext + c. This kind of situations arise when friction (forces) is small compared to kinetic momentum change. a acc ρ dV (6.v. g ρ dV − c. equation (6.14) Integral of Uniform Pressure on Body In this kind of calculations.3. In this situation. Thus.16) In situations where the velocity is provided and known (remember that density is constant) the integral can be replaced by F = mU o − mU i ˙U ˙U The average velocity is related to the velocity proﬁle by the following integral U = 2 (6.v. τ dA = c.5.1 Momentum for For Constant Pressure and Frictionless Flow Another important sub category of simpliﬁcation deals with ﬂow under approximation of the frictionless ﬂow and uniform pressure.18) is applicable to any velocity proﬁle and any geometrical shape. Additionally. 6. ﬂow is exposed to the atmosphere and thus (almost) uniform pressure surrounding the control volume.v.1.6. The unsteady term (where the time derivative) is zero. ρ U Urn dA (6. This situation is a similar idea that was shown in Section 4. it common to obtain a situation where one of the term will be an integral of the pressure over the body surface.17) 1 A [U (r)] dA A 2 (6. . in these situations.15) is further reduced to Urn Urn F = out U U ˆ ρU (U · n) dA − in U U ˆ ρU (U · n) dA (6.18) Equation (6. P dA + c.15) 6.v.v.172 CHAPTER 6.
I. 6.2: A jet is impinging on a stationary surface by changing only the jet direction (see Figure 6.2.18) U = results in U = (Umax ) Thus.a) Substituting equation (6. calculate the force and the angle which the support has to apply to keep the system in equilibrium. Umax U= √ 6 End Solution 2 1 2 π R2 1 0 R 0 [U (r)] 2 π r dr 2 (6.6.I.I. MOMENTUM GOVERNING EQUATION 173 Example 6.2). Neglect the friction.a) into equation (6.1.c) y x Uo Ui F Fig a. Fig.b) 2 2 1 − r2 ¯ 2 rd¯ = ¯ r 1 2 (Umax ) 6 (6. Uo θ Ui F Fig b. What is the angle for which maximum force will be created? . Schematics of area impinged by a jet and angle eﬀects.1: Calculate the average velocity for the given parabolic velocity proﬁle for a circular pipe. Schematics of maximum angle for impinged by a jet.2. Schematics of area impinged by a jet for example 6. Solution The velocity proﬁle is U r R = Umax 1 − r R 2 (6. Example 6.I.
For small angle analysis is important in the calculations of ﬂow around thin wings.174 Solution CHAPTER 6.3 with a mass . The equation for the x coordinate is Fx = m (cos θ Uo − Ui ) ˙ or since Ui = Uo Fx = m Ui (cos θ − 1) ˙ It can be observed that the maximum force. Fx occurs when cos θ = π. because it is a steady state.11) can be reduced. It can be proven by setting dFx /dθ = 0 which yields θ = 0 a minimum and the previous solution.a) can be explicitly written for the two coordinates. Hence Fx max = −2 m Ui ˙ and the force in the y direction is Fy = m Ui sin θ ˙ the combined forces are Ftotal = Which results in Ftotal = m Ui sin (θ/2) ˙ with the force angle of tan φ = π − Fy π θ = − Fx 2 2 Fx 2 + Fy 2 = m Ui ˙ (cos θ − 1) + sin2 θ 2 For angle between 0 < θ < π the maximum occur at θ = π and the minimum at θ ∼ 0. the mass ﬂow rate remains constant. End Solution Example 6. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION Equation (6. to Urn Urn F = out U U ˆ ρU (U · n) dA − in U U ˆ ˙U ˙U ρU (U · n) dA = mUo − mUi (6.a) It can be noticed that even though the velocity change direction. Equation (6.II.II.3: Liquid ﬂows through a symmetrical nozzle as shown in the Figure 6.
v.v.0015 [m3 ].0001 Equation (6. =0 c. ˆ g · k ρ dV + t dt P cos θz dA + c. This situation is a steady state for constant density. ρ U z · U rn dA . Nozzle schematic for the discussion on the forces and for example 6.v.III. What is the exit velocity? What is the force acting the nozzle? Assume that the density is constant ρ = 1000[kg/m3 ] and the volume in the nozzle is 0.v.12) is applicable but should be transformed into the z direction which is Fz + c. The entrance pressure is 3[Bar] and the entrance velocity is 5 [m/sec]. Then A1 U1 = A2 U2 and after rearrangement.a) ρ U z · U rn dA ρ U z dV + c. MOMENTUM GOVERNING EQUATION ﬂow rate of 0. The exit pressure is 1[Bar]. Hence. τ z dA = (6. =0 liquid surface Fz + c. the exit velocity is U2 = A1 0.3. First.v.v. The entrance area is 0. The chosen control volume is shown in Figure 6.v.3. 6. the velocity has to be found.3.v.v. ˆ g · k ρ dV + P cos θz dA + (6.0001[cm2 ].0005[m2 ] and the exit area is 0. forces on the nozzle Fnozzle solid surface P cos θz dA + c. τ z dA = c.III.6. The control volume does not cross any solid body (or surface) there is no external forces.v. The exit velocity is uniform but unknown. Solution U2 =? P2 = 1[Bar] A2 = 10[cm2] 175 z P2 = 3[Bar] A1 = 50[cm2] U1 = 5[m/sec] Fig.0005 U1 = × 5 = 25[m/sec] A2 0.b) c. c.01 [gk/sec].1. c.
4 the ﬂuid ﬂows from the left to the right.III. The propeller analysis of unsteady is complicated due to the diﬃculty in understanding the velocity ﬁeld.c) into Fz = −g ρVnozzle + P A2 − P A1 + ρ U2 2 A2 − U1 2 A1 Fz = 9.2 Momentum Equation Application Momentum Equation Applied to Propellers The propeller is a mechanical devise that is used to increase the ﬂuid momentum.III. . In the Figure 6. this analysis is used for academic purposes.v. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION All the forces that act on the nozzle are combined as Fnozzle + c. Improvements can be made to this analysis.c) is ρ U z · U rn dA = c.v. Either it is assumed that some of the ﬂuid enters into the container and ﬂuid outside is not aﬀected by the propeller.176 CHAPTER 6.8 × 1000× End Solution (6. A2 U2 (U2 ) dA − A1 U1 (U1 ) dA which results in ρ U z · U rn dA = ρ U2 2 A2 − U1 2 A1 c. The part of the pressure which act on the nozzle in the z direction is − c. ρ U z · U rn dA (6. ships and other devices (thrust) as shown in Figure 6.v. This surface is called slip surface.c) The second term or the body force which acts through the center of the nozzle is Fb = − c.4. The propeller can be stationary like in cooling tours.v. fan etc. ˆ g · k ρ dV + c.v. P dA = 1 P dA − 2 P dA = P A1 − P A2 The last term in equation (6.III.v.d) 6. g · n ρ dV = −g ρVnozzle ˆ Notice that in the results the gravity is not bold since only the magnitude is used.v. Many times it is used for propulsion purposes of airplanes. The other common used of propeller is mostly to move ﬂuids as a pump. For a steady state the analysis is simpler and used here to provide an example of steady state. Here. Combining all transform equation (6. Of course it is only approximation but is provided a crude tool.III. P cos θz dA = c. Or there is a line (or surface) in which the ﬂuid outside changes only the ﬂow direction.
Furthermore. the thermal energy is converted to thrust. The inlet area and exit area are diﬀerent for most jets and if the mass of the fuel is neglected then F = ρ A2 U2 2 − A1 U1 2 (6. MOMENTUM EQUATION APPLICATION As ﬁrst approximation. this direct conversion can be. as it will be shown in the Chapter on compressible ﬂow it allows to achieve velocity above speed of sound. Propeller schematic to explain the change of movolume between points 1 and mentum due to velocity.20) This analysis provide way to calculate the work needed to move this propeller. The one dimensional momentum equation is reduced F = ρ U2 2 − U1 2 (6. Jet Propulsion Jet propulsion is a mechanism in which the air planes and other devices are propelled. The analysis of such device in complicated and there is a whole class dedicated for such topic in many universities. In Jet propulsion.6. The propellers are moved by a mechanical work which is converted to thrust. Further increase of the exit area with the increased of the burned gases further increase the thrust.4. a very limited discussion related to the steady state is oﬀered. Thus. pressure drops from the calculation.5 is pushed by liquid jet. Note that in this analysis it was assumed that the ﬂow is horizontal that z1 = z2 and/or the change is insigniﬁcant. in many case more eﬃcient.2.4: A sled toy shown in Figure 6. the pressure around control volume is the same.19) 177 1 U1 3 4 2 U2 Liquid Combining the control Fig. the air is sucked into engine and with addition heating (burning fuel) the velocity is increased. Notice that Example 6. The diﬀerence between the jets propulsion and propellers is based on the energy supplied. a major obstacle in the past. Here. and is.21) An academic example to demonstrate how a steady state calculations are done for a moving control volume. Essentially. Calculate the friction force on the . Hence. 6. 3 with (note that there are no external forces) with points 4 and 2 results in ρ U2 2 − U1 2 = P4 − P3 (6.
IV.v. .v. 2 1 Solution The chosen control volume is attached to the toy and thus steady state is obtained. The dyjet in a steady state for example 6. 6. The applicable mass conservation equation for steady state is A1 U1 = A2 U2 The momentum equation in the x direction is Ff + c. Toy Sled pushed by the liquid relative to the vertical force. τ dA = c. namics friction is µd . MOMENTUM CONSERVATION toy when the toy is at steady state with velocity.v. The same can be said for air friction as τ dA ∼ 0 c.a) The relative velocity into the control volume is U 1j = (Uj − U0 ) x ˆ The relative velocity out the control volume is U 2j = (Uj − U0 ) y ˆ The absolute exit velocity is U 2 = U0 x + (Uj − U0 ) y ˆ ˆ For small volume.v. P dA + c.5. The frame of reference is moving with the toy velocity. The pressure is uniform around the control volume and thus the integral is P dA = 0 c. ρ U U rn dV (6. thus g ρ dV ∼ 0 c.v. The velocity of the jet is uniform. Neglect y the friction between the liquid (jet) and control x volume the toy and between the air and toy. Assume that the jet is horizontal and the reﬂecting jet is vertical. g ρ dV − c.v.4.v. U 0 . U0 Uj Calculate the absolute velocity of the Ff jet exit.178 CHAPTER 6. the gravity can be neglected also because this term is small compared to other terms. U0 . Assume that the friction between the toy and surface (ground) is Fig.
179 (6.6.2. . End Solution 6. One such example of such idea is associated with the Rocket Mechanics which is present here. This method is cumbersome in many cases. FR mf mR UR Ug Fig. Additionally larger toy mass decrease the velocity. MOMENTUM EQUATION APPLICATION The control volume was chosen so that the pressure calculation is minimized.a) yields Ff = A ρ U1j 2 The friction can be obtained from the momentum equation in the y direction mtoy g + A ρ U1j 2 = Fearth According to the statement of question the friction force is Ff = µd mtoy g + A ρ U1j 2 The momentum in the x direction becomes µd mtoy g + A ρ U1j 2 = A ρ U1j 2 = A ρ (Uj − U0 ) The toy velocity is then U0 = Uj − µd mtoy g A ρ (1 − µd ) 2 (6.6.v.IV.c) Increase of the friction reduce the velocity.IV. Alternative method of solution is done by attaching the frame of reference to the accelerating body. 6.10).b) The substituting (6.IV. A rocket with a moving control volume.1 Momentum for Unsteady State and Uniform Flow The main problem in solving the unsteady state situation is that the control volume is accelerating. The momentum ﬂux is ρ Ux Ui rn dA = A ρ U1j 2 Sc.IV.b) into equation (6. A possible way to solve the problem is by expressing the terms in an equation (6.2.
The two components are burned and the gases are ejected through a nozzle. The velocity of the rocket in the rocket frame of reference U is zero. d [(mR + mf ) U ] dt (6. This mechanism is useful for speciﬁc locations because it is independent of the medium though which it travels.v.2 Momentum Application to Unsteady State Rocket Mechanics A rocket is a devise similar to jet propulsion. However.23) The ﬁrst term on the right hand side is the change of the momentum in the rocket volume.25) Combining all the above term results in −FR − (mR + mf ) g + dU (mR + mf ) = m (Ug − UR ) ˙ dt (6. The last term is ρUy Urn dA = m (Ug − UR ) ˙ c. Yet. the ﬁrst term FR . In contrast to other mechanisms such as jet propulsion which obtain the oxygen from the medium which they travel the rockets carry the oxygen with it.v.24) Clearly.v. c.v. The resistance of the medium is Denote as FR . inside the rocket the change in the velocity is due to change in the reduction of the volume of the oxidant and fuel. P dA − d dt ρ a0 dV = ρUy dV + Vc.2.26) . g ρ dV + c. c. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION 6. This change is minimal and for this analysis. The momentum equation is FR 0 τ dA + c. This change is due to the change in the volume of the oxidant and the fuel.v. dU /dt = 0 is not zero. The gravity term is an instantaneous mass times the gravity times the constant and the same can be said for the acceleration term. d dt ρUy dV = Vc. However. it can be neglected. vanishes.180 CHAPTER 6. The diﬀerence is the fact that the oxidant is on board with the fuel. the derivative with respect to time. ρUy Urn dA (6.v. The pressure term vanish because the pressure essentially is the same and the diﬀerence can be neglected. the acceleration is the derivative of the velocity and thus ρ a0 dV = dU (mR + mf ) dt (6.v. The oxidant and fuel ﬂow outside.22) There are no external forces in this control volume thus. the change of the rocket mass can be considered minimal or even neglected. (6. The rocket is accelerating and thus the frame for reference is moving the with the rocket.
This problem was aroused in manufacturing industry.” .5: 1 A variation of this problem has appeared in many books in the literature. for constant fuel consumption (and almost oxidant). As ﬁrst approx˙ imation.28). for constant constant gas consumption equation (6. is a function of the several parameters such the duration. gas ﬂow out is constant as well.26) transformed to −FR − MT g + dU ˙ MT = MT Ue dt (6.6.27) Separating the variables equation (6.27) yields dU = ˙ −MT Ue FR − − g dt MT MT (6. in the past it was not noticed that a slight change in conﬁguration leads to a constant x velocity. the speed (the Reynolds number). This author was called for consultation and to solve a related problem.28) with limits of U (t = 0) = 0 provides U 0 ˙ dU = −MT Ue 0 t dt − MT t g dt 0 (6. it can be noticed that the friction resistance FR .30) The following is an elaborated example which deals with an unsteady two dimensional problem.2. Integrating equation (6. However. Thus.29) ˙ the results of the integration is (notice M = M0 − t M) U = Ue ln M0 ˙ M0 − t M −gt (6. MOMENTUM EQUATION APPLICATION 181 Denoting MT = mR + mf and thus dM/dt = m and Ue = Ug − UR . For simplicity here the part close to Earth (to the atmosphere) is assumed to be small compared to the distance in space. Thus it is assume that FR = 0. material that surface made and the medium it ﬂow in altitude.28) Before integrating equation (6. For which he noticed this “constant velocity. This problem demonstrates the used of control volume to ﬁnd method of approximation for not given velocity proﬁles1 Example 6.
The tank mass with the wheels (the solid parts) is known.v. the ﬂuid has two velocity components verse one component in the rocket mechanics.e) . mt .a) can be transferred to dmc.d) Where B is the coeﬃcient that has the right units to mach equation (6. Schematic of a tank seating on wheel for unsteady state discussion Assume that the exit velocity is a This problem is similar to the rocket mechanics with a twist. Calculate the tank velocity for two cases.V.d) into equation (6. 6. The frame of reference is moving with the tank.7. The tank upper part is opened to the atmosphere.12) for two dimensions is used.182 CHAPTER 6. linear function of the height.b) Where m0 is mass ﬂow rate out. At initial time the valve on the tank is opened and the liquid ﬂows out with an uniform velocity proﬁle.v.c) + U0 A0 = 0 dt It can be noticed that the area of the tank is almost constant (A = constant) thus A dh dh U0 A0 + U0 A0 = 0 =⇒ =− dt dt A (6.7.V.V. the source of the propulsion is the potential energy. = −ρ U0 A0 = −m0 dt (6.c) results in dh B h A0 + =0 dt A (6.7. ρdA = 0 (6.V.31) The relationship between the height and the ﬂow now can be used. The mass conservation equation is d dt ρ dV + Vc.V. Equation (6.V.a) Equation (6. U0 = B h (6. Sc.V.V.v.d) that represent the resistance in the system and substitute the energy equation.V. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION UT y x h A tank with wheels is ﬁlled with liquid is depicted in Figure 6. Solution Uo FR Fig.b) can be further reduced due to constant density to d (A h) (6. The control volume is shown in Figure 6. One the wheels have a constant resistance with the ground and two the resistance linear function of the weight. Substituting equation (6. This situation is unsteady state thus equation (6. Furthermore.V.
Substituting (6.V. the average velocity in the tank is Ux = 1 L L 0 x A0 B L A0 B = A 2A (6.V.f) UT To ﬁnd the average velocity in the L x direction a new control volume is used.V.5.j) It can be noticed that the velocity in the y is a function of time as oppose to the x direction.8.8. .6.Fig. The applicable momentum equation (in the tank frame of reference) is (6.k) 2 The boundaries are the upper (free surface) and tank side with a y distance from the free surface.V. it can be shown that average velocity is a function of cross section (what direction?). 6.2.i) It can be noticed that Ux is not function of height. y The boundary of this control volume are x the tank boundary on the left with the U straight surface as depicted in Figure 6. MOMENTUM EQUATION APPLICATION 183 Equation (6. Using this function.f) into (6. In fact. is not relevant. The mass con.V.1 ) is h(t) = h0 e − t A0 B A (6.h) e Ux (x) = ¨ A Ah ¡ The average x component of the velocity is a linear function of x. A new control volume to ﬁnd the servation for this control volume is velocity in discharge tank for example 6. the average velocity in the y direction is Uy = dh h0 A0 B − =− e dt A t A0 B A (6.2. h x o R w &x dh = −& h Ux w dt (6. The solution (see for details in the Appendix A. R Ubn dA = Urn dA =⇒ Ubn = Urn .11) which is reduced to acceleration F −F R − (mt + mf ) g − a (mt + mf ) = R d [(mt + mf ) U r ] + U0 mo dt (6. h.V.V.V.g) results ¨ t A0¨ B h0 x A0 B − ¨ ¨ A = x A0 B (6. it also can be noticed that Ux (x) is a not function of the time.e) is a ﬁrst order diﬀerential equation which can be solved with the initial condition h(t = 0) = h0 . The tank depth.g) Where here w is the depth or width of the tank. Using a similar control volume2 . F The last boundary is variable surface in a distance x from the tank left part.V. Perhaps surprising.
It .v. The main problem of integral analysis approach is that it does not provide a way to analysis the time derivative since the velocity proﬁle is not given inside the control volume. Here this eﬀect is neglected.m) There is no mass ﬂow in the y direction and Uy is component of the velocity in the y direction.V. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION Where U r is the relative ﬂuid velocity to the tank (if there was no tank movement). mf and mt are the mass of the ﬂuid and the mass of tank respectively.v. The tank movement cause movement of the air which cause momentum change. The mass in the control volume include the mass of the liquid with mass of the solid part (including the wheels). And the additional force for accelerated system ia i is −ˆ · i a ρdV = mc. The momentum equation in the y coordinate it is Fy − (mt + mf ) g = d (mt + mf ) Uy dt (6. The pressure around the control volume is uniform thus P cos θx dA ∼ 0 Sc. The momentum ﬂow rate out of the tank is ρ Ux Urn dA = ρ Uo 2 Ao = mo Uo Sc.v.V. mc.l) Where Fx is the x component of the reaction which is opposite to the movement direction. (6. The acceleration of the tank is a = −ˆ 0 or ˆ · a = −a. hence τ dA ∼ 0 Sc. and the resistance due to air is negligible.v.32) In the x coordinate the momentum equation is −Fx + (mt + mf ) a = d [(mt + mf ) Ux ] + U0 mf ˙ dt (6.184 CHAPTER 6. This momentum is function of the tank volume times the air density times tank velocity (h0 × A × ρa × U ).v. a Vc. This limitation can be partially overcome by assuming some kind of average.v. = mf + mT because the density of the air is very small the change of the air mass is very small as well (ρa << ρ). This eﬀect is known as the add mass/momentum and will be discussed in the Dimensional Analysis and Ideal Flow Chapters.
V.V.6. d d Ux Ux + mc.v.v.V.v. dt dt dt (6.V.V. The velocity in the y direction does not contribute to the momentum in the x direction.n) Noticing that the derivative with time of control volume mass is the ﬂow out in equation (6.v. dt dt L A0 B Ux = −m0 2A (6.o) Combining all the terms results in −Fx + a (mf + mt ) = −m0 L A0 B − U0 m0 2A (6.n) becomes mass rate out ˙ = − m0 d mc.q) A0 If the Fx ≥ m0 L 2 A B + U0 the toy will not move.p) Rearranging and noticing that a = dUT /dt transformed equation (6.v. MOMENTUM EQUATION APPLICATION 185 can be noticed that the velocity in the tank has two components.2. However. if the diﬀerence between the actual and averaged momentum is neglected then ∼0 d dt ρ Ux dV ∼ Vf d mc. Ux Vf Thus.p) into a= Fx − m0 mf + mt L A0 B + 2 A U0 (mf + mt ) 2 A (mf + mt ) (6. Ux = mc.r) .d) the mass ﬂow out is U0 h m0 (t) = B h0 e − t A0 B A A0 ρ (6. d Ux Ux + mc. if it is the opposite the toy start to move.V.V. From equation (6. The average velocity in the tank (because constant density and more about it later section) is Ux = 1 Vt Ux dV Vf Because the integral is replaced by the average it is transferred to ρ Ux dV ∼ mc. The ﬁrst component is downward (y) direction and the second in the exit direction (x).V.v.
This correction factor can be calculated by ﬁnding the relation between the two cases.v U = ρ V c. Here. For example. Rearranging the momentum equation in the y direction transformed m f t A0 B − A g + 2 Fy = mt + ρ A h0 e ρ h0 A0 2 B2 A 2 e − t A0 B A (6.33) The y component of the average velocity is function of the time.V.V.V. relationship between momentum for the average velocity to the actual velocity is presented. The change in the accumulative momentum is d dmf dUy (6.V. the ﬂow proﬁle in example 6.r) and (6.v U dV (6.s) into equation (6.t) (mf ) Uy = mf Uy + dt dt dt The reason that mf is used because the solid parts do not have velocity in the y direction.u) The actual results of the integrations are not provided since the main purpose of this exercise to to learn how to use the integral analysis. Substituting equations (6. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION V mf = ρ A h0 e − t A0 B A (6.V.5 can be estimated even by hand sketching. The momentum for average velocity is Ma = mc.186 The mass in the control volume is CHAPTER 6. For example.35) .V.v. the velocity proﬁle can be estimated using the ideal ﬂuid theory but the actual values are not known.1 relationship between momentum of maximum velocity to average velocity was presented. For these cases a correction factor can be used.34) The actual momentum for control volume is Mc = c.q) transforms it to a diﬀerential equation which is integrated if Rx is constant. There are situations where actual velocity proﬁle is not known but is function can be approximated. ρ Ux dV (6.s) The initial condition is that UT (t = 0) = 0. For the second case where Rx is a function of the Ry as Rx = µ Ry (6. End Solution Average Velocity Estimates In example 6.
9.Fig.3 Conservation Moment Of Momentum The angular momentum can be derived in the same manner as the momentum equation for control volume. applying equation (6. C ρV c.3.v.39) to uniform and steady state ﬂow with neglected pressure gradient is reduced to M = m (r2 × U2 + r2 × U1 ) ˙ Introduction to Turbo Machinery The analysis of many turbomachinary such as centrifugal pump is fundamentally based on the angular momentum. The impeller of the centrifugal pump and the velocities diagram at the exit. The force F = D Dt U ρU dV Vsys (6. ρ Ux dV (6. 6. if the density is not constant.38) Now the left hand side has to be transformed into the control volume as M= d dt r ρ (r × U ) dV + Vc.v 187 U dV = c. A pump impeller is shown in Figure 6.39) The angular momentum equation. Sc. CONSERVATION MOMENT OF MOMENTUM These two have to equal thus. the coeﬃcient is not equal to one.v r ρ (r × U ) U rn dA (6.6. However. the following discussion is provided. 6. ditionally increase of velocity occur.v.36) If the density is constant then the coeﬃcient is one (C ≡ 1). The impeller increases the velocity of the ﬂuid by increasing the radius of the particles. To demonstrate this idea. The inside particle is obtained larger velocity and due to centrifugal forces is moving to outer radius for which ad.9 commonly used in industry. The pressure on the outer side is uniform thus does not create a moment.37) The angular momentum then will be obtained by calculating the change of every element in the system as M = r ×F = D Dt ρ r × U dV Vsys (6. The ﬂow is Um2 Ulr2 U2 Un2 Ut2 (6.40) .
MOMENTUM CONSERVATION assumed to enter the impeller radially with average velocity U1 .7: A design of a rocket is based on the idea that density increase of the leaving jet increases the acceleration of the rocket see Figure . U2 has two components. The height of the impeller is h. It is assumed that required torque is function U2 . and h. The exit liquid velocity. h is 2[cm] and the exit diameter is 0. Ut2 and radial component.188 CHAPTER 6. Ut2 is not equal to the impeller outer edge velocity Um2 . one the tangential velocity. The relative exit velocity is Ulr2 and the velocity of the impeller edge is Um2 . 6.42) (6. Example 6. Estimate what is the minimum energy required by the pump. Assume that angle velocity is leaving the impeller is 125◦ . Un2 .6: A centrifugal pump is pumping 600 2[m3 /hour]. Notice that tangential liquid velocity. ˙ W = m Um2 Ut2 ˙ (6.p. Here it is assumed that ﬂuid is incompressible (ρ = constant). The angular velocity is 1200 r. r.43) The diﬀerence between Um2 to Ut2 is related to the eﬃciency of the pump which will be discussed in the chapter on the turbomachinary.40[m]. M = m r2 Ut2 ˙ Multiplying equation (6.m.4 More Examples on Momentum Conservation Example 6. The thickness of the impeller.41) results in Um2 (6.41) M ω = m r2 ω Ut2 ˙ The shaft work is given by the left side and hence.
The upper part of the rocket tank is ﬁlled with compressed gas. hg Gas Select the control volume in such a way that provides the ability to ﬁnd the rocket Liquid acceleration.4. . Assume that ter rocket for the discussion on the the gas is obeying the perfect gas model. hypotherical volume height Solution Under construction for time being only hints3 In the solution of this problem several assumptions must be made so that the integral system can be employed. The mass conservation is similar to the rocket hence it is dm = −Ue Ae dt (6. No resistance to the rocket (can be added). Once the gas pressure reduced to be equal or below the outside pressure the rocket have no power for propulsion. Additionally. Nozzle schematics wapression for rocket velocity. Assume that this idea has a good enUrocket gineering logic. The following is not the solution but rather the approach how to treat this problem. Several people ask to provide a solution or some hints for the solution. forces for example 6. Develop exFig.7 What are the parameters that eﬀect the problem. The surface remained straight at the times and no liquid residue remains behind.a) 3 This problem appeared in the previous version (0. The mixing between the liquid and gas is negligible. 6. MORE EXAMPLES ON MOMENTUM CONSERVATION 189 6.6. The process is isothermal (can be isentropic process). What is the instantaneous vehℓ locity of the rocket at time zero? Develop Uexit the expression for the pressure (assuming no friction with the walls). The gas mass is negligible in comparison to the liquid mass and/or the rocket. the initial take oﬀ is requires a larger pressure. In this problem the energy source is the pressure of the gas which propels the rocket. The gas obeys the ideal gas law.VII.3) without a solution. Liquid ﬁlls the lower part of the rocket tank. The cross section of the liquid is constant.10.10. No gas leaves the rocket.2.
VII. equation (6. Furthermore. it can be observed that the gas pressure is a direct function of the mass ﬂow out.a) can be written as t mg R T hg0 A mg R T hg A 1 ∆h 1− hg0 (6.e) =A = −A dt dt dt The last identify in the above equation is based on the idea what ever height concede by the liquid is taken by the gas. The change of the gas volume is dVg dhg dh (6.VII. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION The mass conservation on the gas zone is a byproduct of the mass conservation of the liquid.b) becomes P0 = The relationship between the gas volume Vg = h g A (6.VII.f) It must be point out that integral is not function of time since the height as function of time is known at this stage.i) m (t) = m 0 − 0 Ue Ae dt (6.b) Per the assumption the gas mass remain constant and is denoted as mg . The initial pressure now can be expressed as P0 = The pressure at any time is P = Thus the pressure ratio is P hg0 hg0 = = = hg0 P0 hg hg0 − ∆h Equation (6.VII.VII. The gas pressure at the initial point is P0 = ρ0 R T (6.VII.VII.VII. The total change of the gas volume can be obtained by integration as Vg = A (hg0 − ∆h ) (6.h) (6.VII.d) mg R T V0g (6.VII.190 CHAPTER 6.j) .c) The gas geometry is replaced by a virtual constant cross section which cross section of the liquid (probably the same as the base of the gas phase). The minus sign is to account for change of “direction” of the liquid height. Using the above deﬁnition.g) (6.VII.
End Solution (6. Ue = f (P ) + g h rho Where ζ here is a constant which the right units.5 it was mentioned that there are only two velocity components.8: A rocket is ﬁlled with only compressed gas. What is the minimum pressure which make the rocket ﬂy.4.11: .4.a) it also can be written that dh Ue Ae = dt ρe A 191 (6. Example 6.m) Example 6.VII.10: For each following ﬁgures discuss and state force direction and the momentum that act on the control volume due to . Example 6. Develop an expression for the rocket velocity. At a speciﬁc moment the valve is opened and the rocket is allowed to ﬂy.6. The liquid momentum balance is =0 f (P ) = ζ P (6. What are the parameters that eﬀect the rocket velocity.k) According to the assumption the ﬂow out is linear function of the pressure inside thus. 6.l) d −g (mR + m ) − a (mR + m ) = (mR + m ) U +bc + (UR + U ) m dt Where bc is the change of the liquid mass due the boundary movement. What was the assumption that the third velocity component was neglected.VII.9: In Example 6.1 Qualitative Questions Example 6. MORE EXAMPLES ON MOMENTUM CONSERVATION From equation (6.VII.VII.
11 is built with a exit located in uneven distance from the the right and the left and is ﬁlled with liquid. Look at the directions which the unsteady state momentum in the tank change its value. What are the direction of the forces that keep the control volume in the same location? Hints. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION Explanations Uout F U Uin Flow in and out of Angle β θ Flow in and out at angle from a tank A similar tank as shown in Figure 6.11 .192 Situations CHAPTER 6. consider the unsteady eﬀects.11. 6. Fig. Flow out of un symmetrical tank for example 6. The exit is located on the left hand side at the front.
2) is similar to equation (6. here it will be derived. 1 Thermodynamics is the favorite topic of this author since it was his major in high school. Clearly this topic is very important and will be extensively discussed here. which is external force. the above view is wrong when the heat convection.10) for a system is D EU DU Dz ˙ ˙ Q−W = + mU + mg Dt Dt Dt This equation can be rearranged to be D ˙ ˙ Q−W = Dt EU + m U2 + mgz 2 (7.1) Equation (7. the relationship between height and ﬂow rate was assumed previously. For example.2) (7. The ﬂuid. Additionally a discussion on various energy approximation is presented. For example. this law allows to solve problems.CHAPTER 7 Energy Conservation 7. However. It was shown in Chapter 2 that the energy rate equation (2. This simplistic representation is correct only under extreme conditions. as all phases and materials. 193 . The right hand side is very complicated and only some of the eﬀects will be discussed (It is only an introductory material). obeys this law which creates strange and wonderful phenomena such as a shock and choked ﬂow.3) in which the right hand side has to be interpreted and the left hand side interpolated using the Reynold’s Transport Theorem (RTT)2 . 2 Some view the right hand side as external eﬀects while the left side of the equation represents the internal eﬀects. is included on the right hand side. Moreover. during time of the constructing this book only a simple skeleton by Potto standards will be build. which were assumed in the previous chapters.1 The First Law of Thermodynamics This chapter focuses on the energy conservation which is the ﬁrst law of thermodynamics1 .
.6) S (Sn + τ ) U dA − Wshaf t (7. The issues of convection are mostly covered by the terms on the left hand side. There are two kinds of works that the system does on the surroundings.7) are other methods such as magnetic ﬁelds (like microwave) which are not part of this book. the radiation is minimal. the surface forces Fig. The heat derivative is normalized into area direction. dealing with convection.4) System at t Sn The work done on the system is dℓ more complicated to express than the heat transfer. Hence. convection4 and radiation. The ﬁrst kind work is by the friction or the shear System at t + dt stress and the second by normal force. Issues related to radiation are very complicated and considered advance material and hence will be left out. actual mass transfer must occur and thus no convection is possible to a system by the deﬁnition of system. Conduction for most simple cases is governed by Fourier’s Law which is dq = kT ˙ dT dA dn (7.done by two diﬀerent mechanisms pendicular to the surface and one with the surface direction.1) is F dF dV S A S dw = −S dA ·d = − (Sn + τ ) · d dA The change of the work for an inﬁnitesimal time (excluding the shaft work) is U (7.5) dw d S S = − (Sn + τ ) · dA = − (Sn + τ ) · U dA dt dt The total work for the system including the shaft work is ˙ W =− Ac.3) Where dq is heat transfer to an inﬁnitesimal small area per time and kT is the heat ˙ conduction coeﬃcient. conduction. As in the previous chapter. In most problems. The work on the control volume is are divided into two categories: one per. There are three modes of heat transfer. The main heat transfer mode on the left hand side is conduction.v. The total heat transfer to the control volume is ˙ Q= Acv k dT dA dn τ (7. The work done by system on the surroundings (see Figure 7. the discussion here will be restricted to convection and conduction. 7.1. 3 There 4 When (7.194 CHAPTER 7. ENERGY CONSERVATION The energy transfer is carried (mostly3 ) by heat transfer to the system or the control volume.
8) Equation (7.9) the velocity appears twice. Now Reynolds Transport Theorem can be used to transformed the left hand side of equation (7.11) Equation (7.9) ρ Vcv Eu + m Eu + m U2 +gz 2 U2 + g z dV 2 ρ Urn dA From now on the notation of the control volume and system will be dropped since all equations which deals with the control volume.11) can be further manipulated to become work due to the ﬂow work due to boundaries movement P n · U dA = ˆ S S P ρ Urn dA + ρ P Ubn dA S (7.1. Note that U is the velocity in the frame of reference while Urn is the velocity relative to the boundary.8) does not apply any restrictions on the system.10) The ﬁrst term on the right hand side is referred to in the literature as the ﬂow work and is Urn P n · U dA = ˆ S S P (U − Ub ) n dA + ˆ S P Ubn dA (7. THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS The energy equation (7.8) for more details).12) .8) and thus yields kT Acv dT dA+ dn Energy Equation ˙ S (Sn + τ ) dA + Wshaf t = d dt + Acv Acv (7. As it was discussed in the previous chapter the normal stress component is replaced by the pressure (see equation (6. The system can contain solid parts as well several diﬀerent kinds of ﬂuids.2) for system is kT Asys 195 dT dA+ dn S (Sn + τ ) dV D ˙ +Wshaf t = Dt Asys ρ Vsys EU + m U2 + g z dV 2 (7.7. The work rate (excluding the shaft work) is ﬂow work ˙ = W ∼ S P n · U dA − ˆ S τ · U n dA ˆ (7. In the last term in equation (7.
The ﬂow out is related to the height but in a more complicate function and is the focus of this discussion.15) describes the energy conservation for the control volume in stationary coordinates. the temperature is assumed to constant. and exit area is relatively with a small diameter. the ﬂow rate out of a tank or container was assumed to be a linear function of A the height. h. In this analysis several assumptions are made which includes the following: constant density. small. so the velocity can be assumed uniform (not a function of the opening height)5 .13) Substituting all these terms into the governing equation yields d U2 ˙ ˙ ˙ Q − Wshear − Wshaf t = Eu + + g z dV + dt V 2 2 P U Eu + + + g z Urn ρ dA + P Urn dA ρ 2 S S (7. Discharge from a Large Container liquid density.15) Equation (7.196 CHAPTER 7. The enhℓ Ae ergy equation with mass conservation will Ue be utilized for this analysis. the gas density is very small compared to Fig. Flow Out From A Container In the previous chapters of this book. surface tension eﬀects are negligible and the liquid surface is straight6 . Also note that the straight surface assumption is not the same surface tension eﬀects zero. 6 This 5 Later . assumption is appropriated only under certain conditions which include the geometry of the tank or container and the liquid properties. 7. A discussion about this issue will be presented in the Dimensional Chapter and is out of the scope of this chapter. Additionally.2.14) transformed ˙ ˙ Q − Wshear + Simpliﬁed Energy Equation d U2 ˙ Wshaf t = Eu + + g z dV + dt V 2 2 U + g z Urn ρ dA + P Urn dA h+ 2 S S (7. ENERGY CONSERVATION The second term is referred to as the shear work and is deﬁned as ˙ Wshear = − S τ · U dA (7. The example of ﬂow from a tank or container is presented to demonstrate how to treat some of terms in equation (7.15). a discussion about the height opening eﬀects will be discussed.14) The new term P/ρ combined with the internal energy. which was discussed on page 46. Eu is referred to as the enthalpy. With these deﬁnitions equation (7.
16) which also can be written (because = 0) as Urn dA = 0 A Ubn dA + A (7. Hence it requires that velocity proﬁle in x y to be parabolic.17) Equation (7.17) provides the relationship between boundary velocity to the exit velocity as A Ub = Ae Ue (7. However. The averaged velocity in the y direction is zero because the ﬂow is symmetrical7 . .18) Note that the boundary velocity is not the averaged velocity but the actual velocity. for simplicity. the velocity is zero for symmetrical geometry and some other geometries. Second reason for this exercise the surface velocity has only one component is to avoid dealing with BarMeir’s instability. the change of the kinetic Uy 1 Uy 1 energy due to the change in the velocity 2 2 ﬁeld isn’t zero. The kinetic energy of the tank or container is based on the half part Uy = 0 as shown in Figure 7. in this discussion it is assumed that surface has only one component in z direction.21) Also notice that the surface velocity is not zero.7.1. The surface has three velocity components which non have them vanish. Since in this case the geometry is assumed to be symmetrical one side Fig. is suﬃcient as (π − 2)r dh Uy ∼ = 8h dt (7. The averaged velocity in z direction is same as the boundary velocity Ub = Uz = dh Ae = Ue dt A (7.12 to be larger than Ux 2 r Ae 2r 2 r dh Ue =⇒ Ux ∼ Ub = = h A h h dt (7. 7 For the mass conservation analysis. Similar estimate that was done for x direction can be done Ue to every side of the opening if they are not symmetrical. The conservation of the mass is d dt V ρ dV + ¡ dρ dt A ρ Urn dA = 0 ¡ (7.3. for the energy analysis the averaged velocity cannot be considered zero.20) In this analysis.19) The x component of the averaged velocity is a function of the geometry and was calculated in Example 5. However. 7. However. THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 197 The control volume is chosen so that all the liquid is included up to exit of the pipe. this quantity will be used.3. How to compensate and estimate the kinetic energy when averaged Velocity is zero.
A discussion about this eﬀect will be presented in the dimensional analysis chapter. why this approach is correct in most cases is not explained here. the dissipation creates a loss that has temperature component. the shear stresses at the exit are normal to the ﬂow direction hence the shear work is vanished. Ec which is very small. The temperature is constant8 . Additionally.24) Where Ub is the upper boundary velocity. the internal shear work is assumed negligible. E. . this change is a function of Eckert number. At the free surface the velocity has only normal component9 and thus shear work vanishes there as well. Yet.27) V A 8 This approach is a common approximation. In this case. Note that the exit velocity on the upper surface is zero Urn = 0. 9 It is only the same assumption discussed earlier. 10 It is assumed that the pressure in exit across section is uniform and equal surroundings pressure. ENERGY CONSERVATION The energy balance can be expressed by equation (7. Eckert.24) are Pe Ue ρdA − ρ Pa Ub dA = Pe A A Ue dA − Pa A Ub dA (7.R. Pa is the external pressure and Pe is the exit pressure10 .23) Now the energy equation deals with no “external” eﬀects. Furthermore. ˙ ˙ Wshear = Wshaf t = 0 (7.25) A It can be noticed that Pa = Pe hence =0 Pa A Ue dA − A Ub dA =0 (7.15) which is applicable to this case.198 CHAPTER 7. Clearly. The pressure terms in equation (7. the following approximation can be written Eu ˙ = hin − hout = 0 Q= dt (7.22) The boundary shear work is zero because the velocity at tank boundary or walls is zero.24) is reduced to d dt U2 + g z ρ dV − 2 Ue 2 2 Ue ρ dA = 0 (7. The dissipation can be neglected for small Ec number.26) The governing equation (7. Ec number is named after this author’s adviser. Combining all these information results in energy ﬂow out internal energy change energy in and out upper surface work d dt V U + g z ρ dV + 2 2 A Pe Ue + ρ 2 2 Ue ρ dA − A Pa Ub dA = 0 (7. In this light.G.
30) into equation (7.1.28) V V The second integral (in the r. Furthermore. Similarly to the previous chapter which the integral momentum will be replaced by some kind of average. The averaged velocity is Uave = 1 V U dV V (7. A discussion on the correction factor is presented to provide a better “averaged” velocity.33) .30) Substituting the results of equation (7.29) yields d gρ dt V h2 d h dh dA = g ρ hA = g ρAh 2 dt 2 dt (7.s) of equation (7.h. A comparison between the actual kinetic energy and the kinetic energy due to the “averaged” velocity (to be called the averaged kinetic energy) provides a correction coeﬃcient. The ﬁrst integral can be estimated by examining the velocity proﬁle eﬀects.31) A The kinetic energy related to the averaged velocity with a correction factor which depends on the geometry and the velocity proﬁle.7. Even the averaged velocity is zero the kinetic energy is not zero and another method should be used. The terms under the time derivative can be divided into two terms as d dt d U2 + g z ρdV = 2 dt U2 d dV + 2 dt g z ρ dV V (7.28) is d dt d g z ρ dV = g ρ dt h A 0 dV z dz dA (7.32) The total kinetic energy for the averaged velocity is ρ Uave 2 V = ρ 1 V 2 2 U dV V V =ρ V U dV (7.29) V Where h is the height or the distance from the surface to exit. The inside integral can be evaluated as h zdz = 0 h2 2 (7. THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 199 The minus sign is because the ﬂow is out of the control volume.
200
CHAPTER 7. ENERGY CONSERVATION
The general correction factor is the ratio of the above value to the actual kinetic energy as
2
ρ U dV CF =
V
ρ U 2 dV
V
ρ (Uave ) V = ¡ ρ U 2 dV ¡
V
2
(7.34)
Here, CF is the correction coeﬃcient. Note, the inequality sign because the density distribution for compressible ﬂuid. The correction factor for a constant density ﬂuid is
2 2
ρ U dV CF =
V
= ρ U 2 dV
ρ ¡ ρ ¡
U dV
V
= U 2 dV
Uave 2 V U 2 dV
V
(7.35)
V
V
This integral can be evaluated for any given velocity proﬁle. A large family of velocity proﬁles is laminar or parabolic (for one directional ﬂow)11 . For a pipe geometry, the velocity is U r R = U (¯) = Umax 1 − r2 = 2 Uave 1 − r2 r ¯ ¯ (7.36)
It can be noticed that the velocity is presented as a function of the reduced radius12 . The relationship between Umax to the averaged velocity, Uave is obtained by using equation (7.32) which yields 1/2. Substituting equation (7.36) into equation (7.35) results Uave 2 V U 2 dV
V V
=
Uave 2 V 2 Uave 1 − r2 ¯
2
= dV
3 Uave 2 V = 4 4 Uave 2 π L R2 3
(7.37)
The correction factor for many other velocity proﬁles and other geometries can be smaller or larger than this value. For circular shape, a good guess number is about 1.1. In this case, for simplicity reason, it is assumed that the averaged velocity indeed represent the energy in the tank or container. Calculations according to this point can improve the accurately based on the above discussion. The diﬀerence between the “averaged momentum” velocity and the “averaged kinetic” velocity is also due to the fact that energy is added for diﬀerent directions while in the momentum case, diﬀerent directions cancel each other out.
11 Laminar ﬂow is not necessarily implies that the ﬂow velocity proﬁle is parabolic. The ﬂow is parabolic only when the ﬂow is driven by pressure or gravity. More about this issue in the Diﬀerential Analysis Chapter. 12 The advantage is described in the Dimensional Analysis Chapter.
7.1. THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS The unsteady state term then obtains the form 2 U2 d U d gh ∼ρ ρ + g y dV = + dt V 2 dt 2 2
201
V
hA
(7.38)
The relationship between the boundary velocity to the height (by deﬁnition) is Ub = dh dt (7.39)
Therefore, the velocity in the z direction13 is Uz = dh dt (7.40)
Ue =
A dh dh = −Ub Ae dt dt
(7.41)
Combining all the three components of the velocity (Pythagorean Theorem) as
2 2 2 2 U ∼ Ux + Uy + Uz =
(7.42)
2 U ∼ =
(π − 2) r dh 8h dt
2
+
(π − 1) r dh 4h dt
2
+
dh dt
2
(7.43)
f (G)
dh U∼ = dt
(π − 2) r 8h
2
+
(π − 1) r 4h
2
+ 12
(7.44)
It can be noticed that f (G) is a weak function of the height inverse. Analytical solution of the governing equation is possible including this eﬀect of the height. However, the mathematical complication are enormous14 and this eﬀect is assumed neglected and the function to be constant.
13 A similar point was provided in mass conservation Chapter 5. However, it easy can be proved by construction the same control volume. The reader is encouraged to do it to get acquainted with this concept. 14 The solution not the derivation is about one page. It must be remembered that is eﬀect extremely important in the later stages of the emptying of the tank. But in the same vain, some other eﬀects have to be taken into account which were neglected in construction of this model such as upper surface shape.
202 The last term is
CHAPTER 7. ENERGY CONSERVATION
A
Ue 2 Ue 2 Ue ρ dA = Ue ρ Ae = 2 2
dh A dt Ae
2
Ue ρ Ae
(7.45)
Combining all the terms into equation (7.27) results in V 2 2 2 d U gh 1 dh A ρ + hA − Ue ρ Ae = 0 ¡ dt ¡ 2 2 2 dt Ae taking the derivative of ﬁrst term on l.h.s. results in d U gh + dt 2 2
2
(7.46)
hA +
U gh + 2 2
2
A
dh 1 − dt 2
dh dt
2
A Ae
2
Ue Ae = 0
(7.47)
Equation (7.47) can be rearranged and simpliﬁed and combined with mass conservation 15 .
Advance material can be skipped
Dividing equation (7.46) by Ue Ae and utilizing equation (7.40)
A
Ae A
Ue
d U gh + dt 2 2
2
hA U gh + + Ue Ae 2 2
2
dh 1 A − dt 2
dh dt
2
A Ae
2
$ Ue A $$ e = 0 (7.48)
Notice that U = Ub f (G) and thus
f (G) Ub
U
dU h A g dh h A U gh 1 + + + − dt Ue Ae 2 dt Ue Ae 2 2 2
2
dh dt
2
A Ae
2
=0
(7.49)
Further rearranging to eliminate the “ﬂow rate” transforms to 1 U dh 1 A B ¨ gh dU Ub A¨ f (G)2 dt ¨ + f (G) h + ¨ dt ¨Ue Ae 2 e Ae U 2
dh dt
2
+
gh 1 − 2 2
dh dt
2
A Ae
2
=0 (7.50)
f (G)2 h
15 This
d2 h g h f (G)2 + + dt2 2 2
dh dt
2
+
gh 1 − 2 2
dh dt
2
A Ae
2
=0
(7.51)
part can be skipped to end of ”advanced material”.
7.1. THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS
203
End Advance material
Combining the gh terms into one yields
f (G)2 h
d2 h 1 +gh+ dt2 2
dh dt
2
f (G)2 −
A Ae
2
=0
(7.52)
Deﬁning a new tank emptying parameter, Te , as Te = A f (G) Ae
2
(7.53)
This parameter represents the characteristics of the tank which controls the emptying process. Dividing equation (7.52) by f (G)2 and using this parameter, equation (7.52) after minor rearrangement transformed to h d2 h g Ae 2 + dt2 Te A2 + 1 2 dh dt
2
[1 − Te ] = 0
(7.54)
The solution can either of these equations16 dh − = t + k2 (k1 Te − 2 k1 ) eln(h) T e + 2 g h2 h (T e − 2) f (G) or

(7.55)
dh (k1 Te − 2 k1 ) eln(h) T e + 2 g h2 h (T e − 2) f (G)
= t + k2
(7.56)
The solution with the positive solution has no physical meaning because the height cannot increase with time. Thus deﬁne function of the height as dh f (h) = − (7.57) (k1 Te − 2 k1 ) eln(h) T e + 2 g h2 h (T e − 2) f (G) 16 A
discussion about this equation appear in the mathematical appendix.
204
CHAPTER 7. ENERGY CONSERVATION
The initial condition for this case are: one the height initial is h(0) = h0 The initial boundary velocity is dh =0 dt (7.59) (7.58)
This condition pose a physical limitation17 which will be ignored. The ﬁrst condition yields k2 = −f (h0 ) The second condition provides dh =0= dt (k1 Te − 2 k1 ) eln(h0 ) T e + 2 g h0 2 h0 (T e − 2) f (G) (7.61) (7.60)
The complication of the above solution suggest a simpliﬁcation in which d2 h g Ae 2 << dt2 Te A2 which reduces equation (7.54) into h g Ae 2 Te A2 + 1 2 dh dt
2
(7.62)
[1 − Te ] = 0
(7.63)
While equation (7.63) is still non linear equation, the non linear element can be removed by taking negative branch (height reduction) of the equation as dh dt
2
=
2gh −1 +
A Ae 2
(7.64)
It can be noticed that Te “disappeared” from the equation. And taking the “positive” branch √ dh 2gh = (7.65) 2 dt A 1 − Ae The nature of ﬁrst order Ordinary Diﬀerential Equation that they allow only one initial condition. This initial condition is the initial height of the liquid. The initial velocity
17 For the initial condition speed of sound has to be taken into account. Thus for a very short time, the information about opening of the valve did not reached to the surface. This information travel in characteristic sound speed which is over 1000 m/sec. However, if this phenomenon is ignored this solution is correct.
7.2. LIMITATION OF INTEGRAL APPROACH
205
ﬁeld was eliminated by the approximation (remove the acceleration term). Thus it is assumed that the initial velocity is not relevant at the core of the process at hand. It is correct only for large ratio of h/r and the error became very substantial for small value of h/r. Equation (7.65) integrated to yield 1− A Ae
2 h h0
dh √ = 2gh
t
dt
0
(7.66)
The initial condition has been inserted into the integral which its solution is 1− A Ae √
2
h − h0 √ =t 2gh A = 2 Ae √ 2gh
Ae 2 A
(7.67)
dh A Ue = = dt Ae If the area ratio Ae /A << 1 then
2gh
A Ae
(7.68)
1−
1−
U∼ =
2gh
(7.69)
Equation (7.69) is referred in the literature as Torricelli’s equation18 This analysis has several drawbacks which limits the accuracy of the calculations. Yet, this analysis demonstrates the usefulness of the integral analysis to provide a reasonable solution. This analysis can be improved by experimental investigating the phenomenon. The experimental coeﬃcient can be added to account for the dissipation and other eﬀects such dh ∼ =C dt 2gh (7.70)
7.2 Limitation of Integral Approach
Some of accuracy issues to enhance the quality and improvements of the integral method were suggested in the analysis of the emptying tank. There are problems that the integral methods even with these enhancements simply cannot tackle. The improvements to the integral methods are the corrections to the estimates of the energy or other quantities in the conservation equations. In the calculations
18 Evangelista Torricelli (October 15, 1608 October 25, 1647) was an Italian physicist and mathematician. He derived this equation based on similar principle to Bernoulli equation (which later leads to Bernoulli’s equation). Today the exact reference to his work is lost only “sketches” of his lecture elude work. He was student (not formal) and follower of Galileo Galilei. It seems that Torricelli was an honest man who gave to others and he died at young age of 39 while in his prime.
206
CHAPTER 7. ENERGY CONSERVATION
of the exit velocity of a tank, two such corrections were presented. The ﬁrst type is the prediction of the velocities proﬁle (or the concentration proﬁle). The second type of corrections is the understanding that averaged of the total ﬁeld is diﬀerent from the averaged of diﬀerent zooms. In the case of the tank, the averaged velocity in x direction is zero yet the averaged velocity in the two zooms (two halves) is not zero. In fact, the averaged energy in the x direction contributes or eﬀects the energy equation. The accuracy issues that integral methods intrinsically suﬀers from no ability to exact ﬂow ﬁeld and thus lost the accuracy as was discussed in the example. The integral method does not handle the problems such as the free surface with reasonable accuracy. Furthermore, the knowledge of whether the ﬂow is laminar or turbulent (later on this issue) has to come from diﬀerent techniques. Hence the prediction can skew the actual predictions. In the analysis of the tank it was assumed that the dissipation can be igD nored. In cases that dissipation play major air air role, the integral does not provide a sufH equilibrioum level ﬁcient tool to analyze the issue at hand. H For example, the analysis of the oscillating manometer cannot be carried by the intelowest level for the liquid gral methods. A liquid in manometer is disturbed from a rest by a distance of H0 . The description H(t) as a function of time requires exact knowledge of the velocity ﬁeld. Additionally, the integral methods is Fig. 7.4. Flow in an oscillating manometer. too crude to handle issues of free interface. These problem were minor for the emptying the tank but for the oscillating manometer it is the core of the problem. Hence diﬀerent techniques are required. The discussion on the limitations was not provided to discard usage of this method but rather to provide a guidance of use with caution. The integral method is a powerful and yet simple method but has has to be used with the limitations of the method in mind.
7.3 Approximation of Energy Equation
The emptying the tank problem was complicated even with all the simpliﬁcations that were carried. Engineers in order to reduce the work further simplify the energy equation. It turn out that these simpliﬁcations can provide reasonable results and key understanding of the physical phenomena and yet with less work, the problems can be solved. The following sections provides further explanation.
72) U2 + g z Urn ρAin + P Ubn Aout − P Ubn Ain 2 It can be noticed that last term in equation (7.21) which can be written as dqrev = T ds = dEu + P dv (7. The second low is the core of “no losses” and can be employed when calculations of this sort information is needed.2 Energy Equation in Frictionless Flow and Steady State In cases where the ﬂow can be estimated without friction or where a quick solution is needed the friction and other losses are illuminated from the calculations.7. APPROXIMATION OF ENERGY EQUATION 207 7.74) in 7.3. This imaginary ﬂuid reduces the amount of work in the calculations and Ideal Flow Chapter is dedicated in this book. Equation (2. Fix m & uniform ˙ q − wshear − wshaf t = ˙ ˙ ˙ h+ U2 +gz 2 − out h+ U2 +gz 2 (7. Hence the energy equation is reduced to Steady State Equation ˙ ˙ ˙ Q − Wshear − Wshaf t = S h+ U2 + g z Urn ρ dA + 2 P Ubn dA S (7. The reason is that while the velocity is constant. under this simpliﬁcation transformed to ˙ ˙ ˙ Q − Wshear − Wshaf t = h+ U2 + g z Urn ρAout − 2 U2 + g z Urn ρAin h+ 2 (7.73) Dividing equation the mass ﬂow rate provides Steady State Equation.72) for nondeformable control volume does not vanished. The acceleration term must be eliminated for the obvious reason. equation (7.3.71) is reduced to Steady State Equation & uniform ˙ ˙ ˙ Q − Wshear − Wshaf t = h+ h+ U2 + g z Urn ρAout − 2 (7. For a stationary ﬁx control volume the energy equation.71) If the ﬂow is uniform or can be estimated as uniform.3. the pressure is different.1 Energy Equation in Steady State The steady state situation provides several ways to reduce the complexity. The time derivative term can be eliminated since the time derivative is zero.75) .
ENERGY CONSERVATION Using the multiplication rule change equation (7.84) .76) qrev = Eu + P ρ − dP ρ (7.76) yields dqrev = dEu + d P ρ − v dP (7.83) in Subtracting equation (7.82) in (7.75) dqrev = dEu + d (P v) − v dP = dEu + d integrating equation (7.79) Taking time derivative of the equation (7.208 CHAPTER 7.79) becomes h D ˙ Qrev = Dt Eu + V P ρ ρ dV − D Dt V dP ρ ρ dV (7.74) results in change in pressure energy change in kinetic energy change in potential energy 0 = wshaf t + dP ρ − 2 dP ρ + 1 U2 2 − U1 2 + g (z2 − z1 ) 2 (7.81) As before equation (7.80) Using the Reynolds Transport Theorem to transport equation to control volume results in d ˙ Qrev = dt h ρ dV + V A h Urn ρ dA + D Dt V dP ρ ρ dV (7.78) Integration over the entire system results in h Qrev = V Eu + P ρ ρ dV − V dP ρ ρ dV (7.83) from equation (7.80) can be simpliﬁed for uniform ﬂow as ˙ Qrev = m (hout − hin ) − ˙ or qrev = (hout − hin ) − ˙ dP ρ − out dP ρ − out dP ρ dP ρ (7.77) P ρ − v dP (7.
88) r2 Where G is the gravity coeﬃcient and M is the mass of the Earth. for the gravity force is GM m (7.89) The reference was set to inﬁnity.4.85) reduced to 0= U2 2 − U1 2 P2 − P1 + + g (z2 − z1 ) ρ 2 (7. It was pointed earlier in this book that accelerated forces can be translated to potential force. is the gravity that was compensated by the gravity potential. The work this element moving from point 1 to point 2 is 2 g dz dm = g (z2 − z1 ) dm 1 (7. The gravity force for ﬂuid element in small distance then is g dz dm. . 7. the control volume is moving in accelerated coordinates. The only acceptation to the above statement.4. In many cases. There is no conceptional diﬀerence between these two accelerations. In building the gravity potential it was assumed that the gravity is a conservative force.E.84) for constant density is 0 = wshaf t + P2 − P1 U2 2 − U1 2 + + g (z2 − z1 ) ρ 2 209 (7. it was assumed that the control volume is at rest.90) The total work or potential is the integral over the whole mass. = − ref F ·d (7. the mathematical treatment is somewhat diﬀerent which is the reason for the separation.86) 7.85) For no shaft work equation (7. The gravity potential is then F =− r P Egravity = − ∞ − GM m dr r2 (7. However. For example. These accelerations will be translated to potential energy. The accelerations are referring to two kinds of acceleration. General Acceleration can be broken into a linear acceleration and a rotating acceleration. r and m are the distance and mass respectively.4 Energy Equation in Accelerated System In the discussion so far.1 Energy in Linear Acceleration Coordinate 2 The potential is deﬁned as P.87) In Chapter 3 a discussion about gravitational energy potential was presented. ENERGY EQUATION IN ACCELERATED SYSTEM Equation (7.7. linear and rotational.
95) The Reynolds Transport Theorem is used to transferred the calculations to control volume as Energy Equation in Linear Accelerated Coordinate d ˙ ˙ Q−W = dt + cv Eu + cv U2 + ax x + ay y + (az + g)z ρ dV 2 (7.3 Energy Equation in Rotating Coordinate System The coordinate system rotating around ﬁx axis creates similar conservative potential as the linear system.210 CHAPTER 7. The “potential” of moving the mass in the ﬁeld provides the energy. The same can be done for the other two coordinates. There are two kinds of acceleration due this rotation one is the . The Force due to the acceleration of the ﬁeld can be broken into three coordinates. The linear acceleration “creates” a conservative force of constant force and direction. and z = 0. ENERGY CONSERVATION 7. Using this trick the notion of the ax (x1 − x0 ) can be replaced by ax x.4.94) Equation can be added to the energy equation as D ˙ ˙ Q−W = Dt Eu + sys U2 + ax x + ay y + (az + g)z ρ dV 2 (7. Thus.93) The change of the potential with time is D D P Ea total = Dt Dt (ax x + ay y + az z) dm sys (7. the element of the potential is d P Ea = a · d dm The total potential for element material (1) (7.96) h+ U2 + ax x + ay y + (az + g)z Urn ρ dA 2 + cv P Ubn dA 7.91) P Ea = (0) a · d dm = (ax (x1 − x0 ) ay (y1 − y0 ) az (z1 − z0 )) dm (7.4. y = 0.2 Linear Accelerated System The acceleration can be employed in similar fashion as the gravity force.92) At the origin (of the coordinates) x = 0. The potential of unit material is P Ea total = (ax x + ay y + az z) ρ dV sys (7.
The cross product is zero of U ×ω×U =U ×ω×ω = 0 because the ﬁrst multiplication is perpendicular to the last multiplication.103) P Ubn dA .97) (7. consider a particle which moves with the our rotating system. To understand it better.7. From physical point of view.99) ˆ where r. ENERGY EQUATION IN ACCELERATED SYSTEM 211 centrifugal and second the Coriolis force. this term canceled and does not contribute to the potential. However. the ﬂux of this property is important only in the direction of the velocity.100) The ﬁrst term results in ω 2 r2 (see for explanation in the appendix 293 for vector explanation). Hence. The ˆ ˆ potential is then ˆ ˆ P E = ω 2 r r + 2 U × ω · drˆ + r dθ θ + dz k dm ˆ r (7. The net change of the potential energy due the centrifugal motion is 2 P Ecentrif ugal = − 1 ω 2 r2 dr dm = ω 2 r1 2 − r2 2 dm 2 (7.4. This multiplication creates lines (surfaces ) of constant values. and k are units vector in the coordinates r. The second part is (2 U × ω) · d dm (7.102) Inserting the potential energy due to the centrifugal forces into the energy equation yields Energy Equation in Accelerated Coordinate d ˙ ˙ Q−W = dt + cv U2 ω 2 r2 + ax x + ay y + (az + g)z − ρ dV 2 2 cv ω2 r2 U2 + ax x + ay y + (az + g) − z Urn ρ dA h+ 2 2 Eu + + cv (7. θ and z respectively. the most important direction is the direction of the velocity. The forces acting on particles are centrifugal Coriolis F = ω 2 r r + 2 U × ω dm ˆ The work or the potential then is P E = ω 2 r r + 2 U × ω · d dm ˆ The cylindrical coordinate are ˆ ˆ d = drˆ + r dθ θ + dz k r (7.101) This multiplication does not vanish with the exception of the direction of U . θ.98) (7.
.4 Energy Equation in Accelerated Coordinate with Uniform Flow One of the way to simplify the general equation (7.212 CHAPTER 7.103) is to assume uniform ﬂow. ENERGY CONSERVATION 7.4.
Part II Diﬀerential Analysis 213 .
.
the solution is not unique. which leads to a diﬀerent approach of differential analysis. Barr´ de e Saint Venant (1843) and George Gabriel Stokes (1845) derived these equation based on the relationship between stress and rate–of–strain (this approach is presented in this book). Later in the Chapters on Real Fluid and Turbulence. 215 . The diﬀerential analysis allows the investigation of the ﬂow ﬁeld in greater detail. First these equations were derived by Claude– Louis–Marie Navier as it is known in 1827. These equations are named after Claude–Louis Navier–Marie and George Gabriel Stokes.1 Introduction The integral analysis has limited accuracy.CHAPTER 8 Diﬀerential Analysis 8. As usual SimonDenis Poisson independently. In diﬀerential analysis. The concepts of Add Mass and 1 Which can be view as complementary analysis to the integral analysis. However even for the “regular” solution the mathematics is very complex. derived these equations in 1831 for the same arguments as Navier. NavierStokes equations are non–linear and there are more than one possible solution in many cases (if not most cases) e. This analysis leads to partial diﬀerential equations which are referred to as the NavierStokes equations. The equations without the viscosity eﬀects are referred to as the ideal ﬂow equations (Euler Equations) which will be discussed in the next chapter. as he done to many other equations or conditions.g. the emphasis is on inﬁnitesimal scale and thus the analysis provides better accuracy1 . One of the approaches is to reduce the equations by eliminating the viscosity eﬀects. A discussion about the “regular” solution is present and a brief discussion about limitations when the solution is applicable. The foundations for their arguments or motivations are based on a molecular view of how stresses are exerted between ﬂuid layers. Like many equations they were independently derived by several people. with a presentation of the “non–regular” solutions will be presented with the associated issues of stability.
Even for simple situations. At a speciﬁc time this control volume can be viewed as a system. 8. leads to approximations and consequently to ideal ﬂow approximation (equations) and on the other hand experimental solutions of Navier–Stokes equations. the complexity of the equations.1. 8.1.3) .1) x A ρ Ux dy dz ρ+ dρ dz Uz + dUz dz dx dy E F dρ y ρ+ d U dU + dy y y dx dz B ρ+ dρ dx Ux + dUx dx dy dz G dx dz H ρU y C ρ Uz dx dy D However for a control volume using Reynolds Transport Theorem (RTT). The connection between these two ideas or ﬁelds was done via introduction of the boundary layer theory by Prandtl which will be discussed in a separate chapter.216 CHAPTER 8. It has to be pointed out that the Add Mass and Add Force appear regardless to the viscosity.2 Mass Conservation Fluid ﬂows into and from a three dimensional inﬁnitesimal control volume depicted in Figure 8. and will be presented in the Ideal Flow chapter. the boundary conditions create instability which alters the boundary conditions itself which is known as Interfacial instability. These equations cannot satisfy the boundary conditions in other cases and in way the ﬂuid pushes the boundary condition(s) further downstream (choked ﬂow). The mass conservation for this inﬁnitesimal small system is zero thus D Dt ρdV = 0 (8. Sometimes. This phenomenon is presented in Multi–phase chapter and in this chapter. the following can be written D Dt ρdV = d dt ρdV + Urn ρ dA = 0 Fig.2) For a constant control volume the derivative can enter into the integral (see also for the divergence theorem in the appendix A. The mass balance on the inﬁnitesimal control volume. The choked ﬂow is associated with single phase ﬂow (even the double choked ﬂow) while the Interfacial instability associated with the Multi–Phase ﬂow. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS Add Force.1. on one hand. (8.2) and hence dρ dt dV dρ dV + dt Urn ρ dA = 0 (8. Historically. These issues are discussed in Open Channel Flow and Compressible Flow chapters. there are cases when the complying with the boundary conditions leads to a discontinuity (shock or choked ﬂow). which are easier to discuss when the viscosity is ignored.
7) Combining the ﬁrst term with the second term results in the continuity equation in Cartesian coordinates as Continuity in Cartesian Coordinates ∂ρ ∂ρ Ux ∂ρ Uy ∂ρ Uz + + + =0 ∂t ∂x ∂y ∂z Cylindrical Coordinates The same equation can be derived in cylindrical coordinates. The net mass change.6) The same can be said for the y and z coordinates.8. MASS CONSERVATION 217 The ﬁrst term in equation (8.2) is expressed2 as dAyz Urn ρ dA = dy dz (ρ Ux )x − (ρ Ux )x+dx + dAxz dAxz (8. .4) The second term in the LHS of equation (8.9) that some time the notation dAyz also refers to dAx . The combination can be divided by dx dy dz and simpliﬁed by using the deﬁnition of the partial derivative in the regular process to be Urn ρ dA = − ∂(ρ Ux ) ∂(ρ Uy ) ∂(ρ Uz ) + + ∂x ∂y ∂z (8.5) dx dz (ρ Uy )y − (ρ Uy )y+dy + dx dy (ρ Uz )z − (ρ Uz )z+dz The diﬀerence between point x and x + dx can be obtained by developing Taylor series as (ρ Ux )x+dx = (ρ Ux )x + ∂ (ρ Ux ) ∂x dx x (8. produces additional dx thus a inﬁnitesimal volume element dV is obtained for all directions.2.3) for the inﬁnitesimal volume is expressed. in the control volume is ∂ρ dr dz r dθ dm = ˙ ∂t 2 Note (8. the operation.2. as ∼0 dρ dρ dV = dx dy dz + f dt dt dV d ρ dt2 2 + ··· (8. as depicted in Figure 8. neglecting higher order derivatives.8) dv (8. It also can be noticed that. in the x coordinate. for example.
Expansion to Taylor serious ρ U r dθ dz r r r+dr is obtained by the regular procedure.2. 8. dr r dθ dz results in total net ﬂux =− 1 ∂ (ρ Ur r) ∂ρ Uz r ∂ρ Uθ + + r ∂r ∂z ∂θ (8. This change creates a diﬀerent diﬀerential equation with additional complications.12) Combining equations (8.g. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS + ∂ (ρ Ur r) dz dθ dr ∂z ρ U θ ∂ (ρ Uθ ) + dθ dr dz ∂θ dz ρ Uz r) d r r ρU ∂ ( ∂z r+ dθ dz ρU r rd θd z rd z θ dr ρ Uθ dr dθ y θ x ρ Uz r dr dθ Fig. The change is ﬂux in r direction = dθ dz r ρ U r − r ρ Ur + ∂ρ Ur r dr ∂r (8.14) 3 The mass ﬂow is ρ U r dθ dz at r point. the r is “trapped” in the derivative. e. The mass ﬂow at r + dr is ρ Ur r dθ dzr + d/dr (ρ Ur r dθ dz) dr + · · · . In a similar fashion the net ﬂux in the z coordinate be written as net ﬂux in z direction = r dθ dr The net change in the θ direction is then net ﬂux in θ direction = dr dz ∂ρ Uθ dθ ∂θ (8.11) Note3 that the r is still inside the derivative since it is a function of r.13) and dividing by inﬁnitesimal control volume. r .10) The net ﬂux in the r direction is then ∂ρ Ur r net ﬂux in the = dθ dz dr ∂r r direction (8.218 ρ U r z CHAPTER 8.11)–(8. The net mass ﬂow out or in the r direction has an additional term which is the area change compared to the Cartesian coordinates. The mass conservation in cylindrical coordinates.13) ∂ (ρ Uz ) dz ∂z (8. Hence. the change of r with r.
the continuity equation becomes Continuity in Spherical Coordinates ∂ρ 1 ∂ r 2 ρ Ur 1 ∂ (ρ Uθ sin θ) 1 ∂ρ Uφ + 2 + + =0 ∂t r ∂r r sin θ ∂θ r sin θ ∂z (8. 8.8). There are very few cases where this equation is used on its own merit.8.2 page 296). The mass equation (see in the appendix for more information on the index notation) written as ∂ρ ∂ (ρ U )i + =0 ∂t ∂xi (8. Again remember that the meaning of repeated index is summation. At time. the upper surface is exposed to temperature T1 .8). this writing reduce the amount of writing and potentially can help think about the problem or situation in more conceptional way. Hence. . For academic purposes. However.18) Compare to equation (8.1. the continuity equation can be written in a general vector form as Continuity Equation ∂ρ (8. The index notation really does not add much to the scientiﬁc understanding.15) Carrying similar operations for the spherical coordinates.16) The continuity equations (8.15) and (8.1 Mass Conservation Examples Example 8.17) + · (ρ U ) = 0 ∂t Advance material can be skipped The mass equation can be written in index notation for Cartesian coordinates. MASS CONSERVATION 219 Combining equation (8.16) can be expressed in diﬀerent coordinates.9) divided by inﬁnitesimal control volume. It can be noticed that the second part of these equations is the divergence (see the Appendix A. several examples are constructed here. t0 .2.1: A layer of liquid has an initial height of H0 with an uniform temperature of T0 . dr r dθ dz yields Continuity in Cylindrical Coordinates ∂ρ Uz ∂ρ 1 ∂ (r ρ Ur ) 1 ∂ρ Uθ + + + =0 ∂t r ∂r r ∂θ ∂z (8.14) with the change in the control volume (8. (8.2. End Advance material The use of these equations is normally combined with other equations (momentum and or energy equations).
H0(t) The density is a function of the temperT0 y ature according to ρ 1 0 T − T0 =α T1 − T0 ρ − ρ0 ρ1 − ρ0 (8. Assume that the velocity at the lower boundary is zero at all times. as a function of time into the governing equation (8. Neglect the mutual dependency of the temperature and the height.I.a)) is ρ − ρ0 H0 − y =α 1 − e−β t (8. 8. Assume that the velocity is only a diﬀerence for example 8.c) The exponential decay is 1 − e−β t and thus the combination (with equation (8.f) .e) =0 e−β t + ∂y Equation (8.a) T(t = 0) T(t > 0) T(t = ∞) where ρ1 is the density at the surface and where ρ0 is the density at the botFig. The expression that connects the temperature with the space for the ﬁnal temperature as T − T0 H0 − y =α T1 − T0 H0 (8.I.b) results in ∂ρ ∂t ∂ρ Uy ∂y 0 ∂ Uy α HH−y 1 − e−β t 0 αβ H0 − y H0 (8. It can be noticed that the height H0 is a function of time.d) relates the temperature with the time and the location was given in the question (it is not the solution of any model).I. Calculates the velocity of the liquid. Solution The situation is unsteady state thus the unsteady state and one dimensional continuity equation has to be used which is ∂ρ ∂ (ρUy ) + =0 ∂t ∂y (8. Mass ﬂow due to temperature tom.b) with the boundary condition of zero velocity at the lower surface Uy (y = 0) = 0.I.I. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS Assume that the actual temperature is ρ T1 exponentially approaches to a linear temperature proﬁle as depicted in Figure 8.I.I.I. Substituting the density. ρ.220 CHAPTER 8.I. it is treated as a constant.I.e) is ﬁrst order ODE with the boundary condition Uy (y = 0) = 0 which can be arranged as 0 ∂ Uy α HH−y 1 − e−β t 0 ∂y = −α β H0 − y H0 e−β t (8.1 function of the y coordinate.d) ρ1 − ρ0 H0 Equation (8.3. For this question.3.
4. Equation (8.f) as a constant4 .19) If the ﬂuid is incompressible then the governing equation is a volume conservation as ·U = 0 Note that this equation appropriate only for a single phase case. 4 Since (8.4. Assume that the ﬁlm temFig.2: In many coating processes a thin ﬁlm is created by a continuous process in which liquid injected into a moving belt that carries the material out as exhibited in Figure 8.8. it can be treated for the solution of equation (8. The temperature and mass transfer takT0 ing place which reduces (or increases) the thickness of the ﬁlm. asH0 T0 T(x) T∞ sume that no mass transfer occurs or can x be neglected and the main mechanism is x heat transfer.g) Utilizing the boundary condition Uy (y = 0) = 0 yields Uy α H0 − y 1 − e−β t H0 = −α β 2 H0 − y 2 H0 e−β t (y − 1) (8.2.h) It can be noticed that indeed the velocity is a function of the time and space y. End Solution 8.I.20) the time can be treated as constant for y integration. from the extraction point. The relationship between the density and the temperature is linear as T − T∞ ρ − ρ∞ =α (8. the integration with respect to y yields Uy α H0 − y 1 − e−β t H0 = −α β 2 H0 − y 2 H0 e−β t y + c (8.2.2. .a) ρ0 − ρ∞ T0 − T∞ State your assumptions. Mass ﬂow in coating process perature is only a function of the distance for example 8.I. For this example.II. MASS CONSERVATION 221 Uy is a function of the time but not y. 8. Example 8.2 Simpliﬁed Continuity Equation A simpliﬁed equation can be obtained for a steady state in which the transient term is eliminated as · (ρ U ) = 0 (8. Calculate the ﬁlm velocity ﬁeld if the density is a function of the temperature.I.f) holds for any time and thus.I. Hence.
15 .b) + =0 ∂x ∂y At ﬁrst. the discussion about this point is beyond the scope of this section. however it can be considered as steady state.g) 5 The presentation of one dimension time dependent problem to two dimensions problems can be traced to heat and mass transfer problems.II.II. The solution is similar to the previous Example 8.II.d) into the governing equation results in α ∂F (x) ∂Uy ρ = (ρ0 − ρ∞ ) ∂y Ux ∂x The density is expressed by equation (8. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS This problem is somewhat similar to Example 8. . 6 In reality this assumption is correct only in a certain range. Hence equation (8.II.I.II. this author Master thesis is extension Higbie’s equation. He spend the rest of his life to proof it and ending only to suicide. This assumption is consistent with the ﬁrst solution (no stability issues). One of the early pioneers who suggest this idea is Higbie which Higbie’s equation named after him.II. However. it can be assumed that the material moves with at the belt in the x direction in the same velocity.a) and thus Uy = α ∂F (x) (ρ0 − ρ∞ ) y + c ρ Ux ∂x (8.b).222 Solution CHAPTER 8.b) can be written as Ux ∂ (ρ Uy ) ∂ρ =− ∂x ∂y (8. If the frame of reference was moving with the belt then there is only velocity component in the y direction6 . On personal note.c) Where Ux is the belt velocity.II.e) Notice that ρ could “come” out of the derivative (why?) and move into the RHS.f) (8. Applying the boundary condition Uy (t = 0) = 0 results in Uy = α ∂F (x) (ρ0 − ρ∞ ) y ρ(x) Ux ∂x End Solution (8.II.1 for the general function T = F (x). ∂ρ α ∂F (x) = (ρ0 − ρ∞ ) ∂x Ux ∂x (8.d) Substituting this relationship in equation (8. See the resembles to equation (8. Higbie suggested this idea which was rejected by the scientiﬁc establishment. At any point the governing equation in coordinate system that moving with the belt is ∂ (ρ Ux ) ∂ (ρ Uy ) (8.II.
assume the density is also a function of the location as ρ = m ex+y Where m is constant. Ux has also arbitrary function in the y component.g) ∂y a Equation (8. It can be noted that x should be treated as a constant parameter for the y coordinate. Uy = − 2 a x + f (x) = −2 x y + f (x) (8.a) Equation (8.3: The velocity in a two dimensional ﬁeld is assumed to be in a steady state.III.d) The integration constant in this case is not really a constant but rather an arbitrary function of x. The velocity.III. Notice the symmetry of the situation.20) thus 2ax + ∂Uy =0 ∂y (8.III.19) is applicable and used as ∂ a x2 + b y 2 (m ex+y ) ∂ Uy (m ex+y ) + =0 ∂x ∂y (8.III. Calculate the velocity ﬁeld in this case.b) (8. Ux = a x2 + b y 2 Next. MASS CONSERVATION 223 Example 8.III.e) Taking the derivative of the ﬁrst term and second part move the other side results in a 2 x + x2 + b 2 y a ex+y = − ex+y ∂ Uy + Uy ∂y (8. For the second part equation (8. The homogeneous equation is ∂ Uy + Uy = 0 (8.2.III.g) is ﬁrst order ODE that can be solved by combination of the homogeneous solution with the private solution (see for explanation in the Appendix).III.c) (8.III.8.III. Thus.III. Assume that the density is constant and calculate the vertical velocity (y component) for the following x velocity component.c) is an ODE with constant coeﬃcients.f) and switching sides to be ∂ Uy b + Uy = −a 2 x + x2 + y 2 (8.h) ∂y .III. Solution The ﬂow ﬁeld must comply with the mass conservation (8.f) The exponent can be canceled to simplify further the equation (8.
However physically there are velocity components in y and z directions.III. ∂Ux ∂x = t2 z ∂Uy ∂y =t ∂Uz ∂z =t (8.4: Can the following velocities coexist.IV.5: Find the density as a function of the time for a given one dimensional ﬂow of Ux = x e5 α y (cos (α t)).III. the mass conservation is reduced only for one dimensional form as ∂ρ ∂ (Ux ρ) + =0 ∂t ∂x (8. Thus. End Solution Example 8. Check if the ﬂow is incompressible for this continuity equation should be used for constant density.V. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS The solution for (8. this kind of presentation is possible. it can be observed that the velocity contains time component.III.i) End Solution Example 8. Ux = (x t) z 2 Uy = (x t) + (y t) + (z t) Uz = (x t) + (y t) + (z t) (8.IV.224 CHAPTER 8. This ﬂow can exist only for a limit time since over time the divergence is unbounded.IV. Solution This problem is one dimensional unsteady state and for a compressible substance. Hence.c) The divergence isn’t zero thus this ﬂow. if it exist. must be compressible ﬂow.h) is Uy = c e−y (see for explanation in the appendix).j) (8.b) Or the combination of these derivatives is U = t2 z + 2 t (8. The initial density is ρ(t = 0) = ρ0 . In this problem these physical . The private solution is Uy private = −b y 2 − 2 y + 2 − a x2 − 2 a x The total solution is Uy = c e−y + −b y 2 − 2 y + 2 − a x2 − 2 a x (8.a) Is the ﬂow is incompressible? Is the ﬂow in a steady state condition? Solution To check whether the solution is in a steady state.a) Mathematically speaking. this ﬂow ﬁeld is not steady state.
and independent of x thus ρx + ∂ρ c1 = 5 α y = c3 ∂x e (8.e) The same can be done for the right hand side as ρ x e5 α y + (8.V.V. MASS CONSERVATION 225 components are ignored for academic reasons.c) Possible solution is when the left and the right hand sides are equal to a constant. Hence.h) Equation (8. c1 vanishes as well and the solution contain only the homogeneous part and the private solution is dropped ρ = c2 e− x2 2 (8.V.f) (8. The solution of (8.2. is substituted.a) is ﬁrst order partial diﬀerential equation which can be converted to ordinary diﬀerential equation when the velocity component.V.c) can be separated to yield 1 ∂ρ ∂ρ 5 α y = −ρ x e5 α y − e cos (α t) ∂t ∂x (8. is a function of x results in ∂ρ ∂ρ 5 α y = −ρ x e5 α y (cos (α t)) − e (cos (α t)) ∂t ∂x Equation (8.j) .h) is given by impossible solution ρ=e −x 2 2 √ π i c3 erf √ c − 2 ix √ 2 (8.h) is constant coeﬃcients ﬁrst order ODE which its solution discussed extensively in the appendix.8.V.V.V.V.b) Substituting equation (8.V. c3 .V.V.g) The term e5 α y is always positive.i) which indicates that the solution is a complex number thus the constant. real value.V. Equation (8. ρ. must be zero and thus the constant. Ux .e) is reduced to ODE and its solution is ρ= c1 sin (α t) + c2 α ∂ρ 5 α y e = c1 ∂x (8.d) (8. ∂Ux = e5 α y (cos (α t)) ∂x (8.V. In that case the left hand side is 1 ∂ρ = c1 cos (α t) ∂t The solution of equation (8.V.b) into equation (8.V.V.a) and noticing that the density.
j) by (8. the derivative can enter into the integral and thus combining the two integral on the RHS results in D Dt φ ρ dV = sys cv d (φ ρ) + dt · (ρ φ U ) dV (8.25) Since the volume of the control volume remains independent. are presented.f) is ρ = c2 e− x2 2 c1 sin (α t) + c2 α End Solution (8. c2 is arbitrary function of the y coordinate.24) Substituting equation (8.k) Where the constant.3 Conservation of General Quantity 8. t). the volume integral can be changed to the surface integral) as ρ φ U · dA = A V · (ρ φ U ) dV (8. The total amount of quantity that exist in arbitrary system is Φ= sys φ ρ dV (8.23) yields D Dt φ ρ dV = sys d dt φ ρ dV + cv cv · (ρ φ U ) dV (8. z. 8. Suppose that the property φ is under a study which is a function of the time and location as φ(x.24) into equation (8.23) The last term on the RHS can be converted using the divergence theorem (see the appendix7 ) from a surface integral into a volume integral (alternatively. vector or tensor. scalar.21) Where Φ is the total quantity of the system has a volume V and a surface area of A which are a function of time. y.226 CHAPTER 8.26) 7 These integrals are related to RTT. .22) Using RTT to change the system to control volume (see equation (??)) yields D Dt φ ρ dV = sys d dt φ ρ dV + cv A ρ φ U · dA (8.V. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS The solution is the multiplication of equation (8.3.V. A change with time is DΦ D = Dt Dt φ ρ dV sys (8.1 Generalization of Mathematical Approach for Derivations In this section a general approach for the derivations for conservation of any quantity e.g. Basically the divergence theorem relates the ﬂow out (or) in and the sum of the all the changes inside the control volume.V.
t) = Ux (x. y.27) 8. For an inﬁnitesimal control volume the change is DΦ ∼ = Dt d (φ ρ) + dt dV · (ρ φ U ) dx dy dz (8. t) k (8.8.29) Equation (8. it can be written that U (x. y. z.31) relates the density rate of change or the volumetric change to the velocity divergence of the ﬂow ﬁeld. The substantial derivative represents the change rate of the density at a point which moves with the ﬂuid. Therefore. t) j + Uz (x. z. The term in the bracket LHS is referred in the literature as substantial derivative. for the last derivations using φ = 1 which is the same for mass conservation.32) .2. y.21) LHS can be change to simply to derivative of Φ. y. z.31) Equation (8. In that case D Φ = D ρ and hence equal to zero as Dt Dt φ d dV 1 ρ φ (8. CONSERVATION OF GENERAL QUANTITY 227 By the deﬁnition of equation (8. t) i + Uy (x. A ﬂuid particle velocity is a function of the location and time.30) can be further rearranged so derivative of the density is equal the divergence of velocity as 1 ρ ∂ρ +U ∂t ·ρ =− ·U (8.1 Examples of Generalized of Quantities The General Mass Time Derivative For example.28) dx dy dz = 0 + · ρ 1 U dt  The integral is over arbitrary volume which mean that integrand is zero as ∂ρ + ∂t Equation (8.3.3. The integral is carried over arbitrary system. x.30) · (ρ U ) = 0 (8.29) can be rearranged as ∂ρ +U ∂t ·ρ+ρ ·U = 0 (8.3. Acceleration Direct Derivations One of the important points is to ﬁnd the particles acceleration of the ﬂuid.2 8.
The area has a direction or orientation which control the results of this division.38) It was shown that in static case (or in better words. The ﬂow in a nozzle is an example to ﬂow at steady state but yet has acceleration which ﬂow with low velocity can achieve a supersonic ﬂow.34) (8.4 Momentum Conservation The relationship among the shear stress various components have to be established.37) The time derivative referred in the literature as the local acceleration which disappear when the ﬂow is steady state. The stress is relationship between the force and area it is acting on or force divided by the area (division of vector by a vector). 8.39) . So it can be written that F τ = f (F .36) ∂U ∂U dU ∂U ∂U = + U +U +U dt ∂t ∂x ∂y ∂z (8. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS U dU d Ux d Uy d Uz = i+ j+ k dt dt dt dt The velocity components are a function of four variables and hence =1 Ux Uy Uz (8. While the ﬂow is in a steady state there is acceleration of the ﬂow. when the shear stresses are absent) it was written τ = −P n (8.228 The acceleration will be CHAPTER 8.33) ∂ Ux d t ∂ U x d x ∂ U x d y ∂ U x d z d Ux = + + + dt ∂t d t ∂x d t ∂y d t ∂z d t The acceleration in the x can be written as ∂ Ux ∂ Ux d Ux ∂ Ux ∂ Ux ∂ Ux U = + Ux + Uy + Uz = + (U · dt ∂t ∂x ∂y ∂z ∂t ) Ux (8. This division creates a tensor which the physical meaning will be explained here (the mathematical explanation can be found in the mathematical appendix of the book).35) The same can be developed to the other two coordinates and when combined to be (in a vector form) ∂U dU U = + (U · dt ∂t or in more explicit form as local acceleration convective acceleration )U (8. A ) (8.
A common approach is to collect the stress in a “standard” orientation and then if needed the stresses can be reorientated to a new direction. The transformation is available because the “standard” surface can be transformed using trigonometrical functions. In Cartesian coordinates on surface in the x direction the stresses are τ (x) = τxx τxy τxz (8.8. δAx is the surface area of the tetrahedron in the x diFig. 8. The transformation n·i n·j n·k ·i ·j ·k ℵ·i ℵ·j ℵ·k When the tetrahedron is shrunk to a point relationship of the stress on the two sides can be expended by Taylor series and a diﬀerence is related to the ﬁrst derivative. Stress diagram on a tetrahedron rection and δAz is the surface area of the shape. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION 229 It also was shown that the pressure has to be continuous.41) τzx τzy τzz Suppose that a straight angle tetrahedron is under stress as shown in Figure 8.5. It can be noticed that no mathematical symbols are written between the components.5.44) .43) and n are the local unit coordinates on n surface. The opposing forces which acting on the slanted surface in the x are Fx = δAn τnn n · i − τn Where here ℵ. Similar “vectors” exist for the y and z coordinates which can be written in matrix forms τxx τxy τxz τ = τyx τyy τyz (8. The reason for this omission is that there is no physical meaning for it. tetrahedron in the z direction.42) T0 Z τnn where δAy is the surface area of the tetrahedron in the y direction. matrix is then · i − τzℵℵ · i (8. similarly for τxz . However.40) where τxx is the stress acting on surface x in the x direction. and τxy is the stress acting on surface x in the y direction. The forces balance in the x direction excluding the slanted surface is Fx = −τyx δAy − τxx δAx − τzx δAz (8. If Y τn ℵ τnℓ X τ τ xx xy τxz τ yx τy y τyz (8.4. these stresses that act on every point and have three components on every surface and depend on the surface orientation. The notation τ (xi ) is used to denote the stresses on xi surface.
This matrix is referred to as stress tensor and as it can be observed has nine terms. A ﬁnite angular distortion of inﬁnitesimal cube requires requires an inﬁnite shear. uniform and hence act not through the mass center. Hence.5 for moment of inertia. The momentum can be accessed by the shear stresses that act on it. . The clarity of this analysis can y τyx be improved if additional terms are taken but the results will be the same. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS the ﬁrst derivative is neglected (tetrahedron is without acceleration) the two sides are related as −τyx δAy − τxx δAx − τzx δAz = δAn τnn n · i − τn · i − τzℵℵ · i (8.6. The Symmetry of the Stress Tensor A small liquid cubical has three possible rotation axes and here only one will be discussed. The cubical rotation can involve two parts one distortion and one rotation.47) The same can be said for τyx for y τyy direction. for cases that body force. the rotation of the inﬁnitesimal ﬂuid cube can be viewed as it is done almost as a solid body. 8. dx For simplicity and generality. The shear stress at point x is τxy .230 CHAPTER 8. The body force can exert torque is Fig. Diagram to analysis the shear stress due to the fact that the body force is not tensor.45) The same can be done for y and z directions.46) Where Mz is the cubic moment around the cubic center and Izz 8 is the moment of inertia around that center. Advance material can be skipped 8 See for derivation in Example 3. the shear stress at point x + dx is τxy x+dx = τxy + dτxy dx dx (8. The τxy τxx dy τ normal body force (gravity) acts through τxx xy the cubic center of gravity and can be neglected (the changes are insigniﬁcant). Balance of momentum around the z direction shown in Figure 8. τyx τ However. such yy as the magnetic ﬁelds. However. These relationships provide the transformation for the diﬀerent orientations which depends only angles of the orientations. The areas are related to each other through angles.6 is Mz = Izz dθ dt (8. can create torque. it is assumed x that the external body force exert a torque GT per unit volume at the speciﬁc location.
54) 9 This point bother this author in the completeness of the proof.4.51) 2 2 dθ dt dx dy dz 2 = ρ dx dy dz (dx) + (dy) The actual components that contribute to the moment are =0 (dx)2 + (dy)2 =0 GT + τxy − τxy + ∂ (τyx − τxy ) =ρ ∂y 12 dθ dt (8.49) Substituting (8.48) where η is the local coordinate in the y direction stating at y and mostly used between y < η < y + dy.50) isn’t zero (non symmetrical function around the center of integration). End Advance material The net torque in the zdirection around the particle’s center would then be (τyx ) dx dy dz − 2 τxy + τyx + ∂τxy ∂x ∂τxy ∂x dx dy dz 2 + (τxy ) dx dy dz − 2 Izz (8. This point is for self convincing since it deals with a “strange” and problematic “animals” of integral of inﬁnitesimal length. but provided to those who wonder why body forces can contribute to the torque while pressure does not.8. τxx at x can be expended as a linear function τxx = τxx y + dτxx dy η y (8. MOMENTUM CONSERVATION 231 The torque due to the shear stress in the surface direction results in a change due to the shear stress9 .53) This analysis can be done on the other two directions and hence the general conclusion is that GT + τij = τji (8. The reason that this term neglected because the other face of the cubic contributes an identical term but in the opposing direction. The moment that results from this shear force (clockwise positive) is y+dy τxx (η) y η− dy 2 dη (8.49) results y+dy y τxx y + dτxx dy η y η− dy 2 dη (8. It can be ignored.52) which means since that dx −→ 0 and dy −→ 0 that GT + τxy = τyx (8. . For example.50) The integral of (8.48) into (8.
z 10 .232 CHAPTER 8. gravitation forces. for almost all practical purposes. For surface forces that acting on the cubic are surface forces.55) 8. The gravity is a body force that is considered in many kind of calculations and this force cause a change in symmetry of the stress tensor. Equation (6.56) 10 The index notation is not the main mode of presentation in this book. If the body forces eﬀect is neglected or do not exist in the problem then regardless the coordinate system τij = τji (i = j) (8.5 Derivations of the Momentum Equation τzz + ∂τzz dz ∂z ∂τ y y + ∂ y dy τ yy Z τxz τxx τxy τxx + ∂τxz dx ∂x ∂τxx dx ∂x τxz + τxy + τyy ∂τxy dx ∂x y τzz x Fig. z and the j is any of the other x. For the case of GT = 0 the stress tensor become symmetrical.11) is equivalent to Newton second law for ﬂuids. However. y. and internal forces.” 11 In the Dimensional Analysis a discussion about this eﬀect hopefully will be presented. One direction of the vector equation will be derived for x Cartesian coordinate (see Figure 8. can be neglected11 . All shear stress shown in surface x and x + dx.11) is also applicable for the small inﬁnitesimal cubic. It is believed that this notation should and can be used only after the physical meaning was “digested. y. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS where i is one of x. since Potto Project books are used extensively and numerous people asked to include this notation it was added.7. Previously it was shown that equation (6. Later it will be used and generalized. this change. The shear stress at diﬀerent surfaces. . 8. The body force that acting on inﬁnitesimal cubic is i · f B = f B x dx dy dz (8.7). The magnetic body forces on the other hand is signiﬁcant and has to be included in the calculations. However.
DERIVATIONS OF THE MOMENTUM EQUATION 233 Where B is in the body force direction and f B is the body force per unit mass.57) fxy = τyx y+dy × dx dz − τyx y × dx dz (8. The advantage of the vector from allows the usage of the diﬀerent coordinates.5.60) after rearrangement equations such as (8.63) can be written in a vector form which combined all three components into one equation.62) The same can be obtained for the z component and generally it is as ρ DUi = Dt ∂τii ∂τji ∂τki + + ∂i ∂j ∂j + ρ fG i (8.59) where i in this case is x. Hence.63) Advance material can be skipped Where i is the balance direction and j and k are two other coordinates.8.58) The same can be written for z direction.57) and (8.64) . or z. y.61) for y coordinate is ρ DUy = Dt ∂τxy ∂τyy ∂τzy + + ∂x ∂y ∂z + ρ fG y (8. The surface forces in x direction on the x surface on are dAx dAx fxx = τxx x+dx × dy dz − τxx x × dy dz The surface forces in x direction on the y surface on are dAy dAy (8. the total net force results from the shear stress in the x direction is fx = ∂τxx ∂τyx ∂τzx + + ∂x ∂y ∂z dx dy dz (8. Equation (8. The dot product yields the force in the directing of x. The shear stresses can be expanded into Taylor series as τix i+di = τix + ∂ (τix ) di + · · · ∂i i (8. The vector form is ρ U DU = Dt · τ (i) + ρ fG (8.58) becomes internal forces surface forces body forces DUx & & ρ& & = dx dy dz Dt ∂τxx ∂τyx ∂τzx + + ∂x ∂y ∂z & & & & dx dy dz dx dy dz & & + fG x ρ & & (8.61) equation (8.
when applying the shear stress in ﬂuids. There is no preference in the orientation (also call isentropic ﬂuid). The relationship between the stress tensor and deformation depends on the classes of materials the stresses acts on.8 (by the blue color). Thus this “solid” model is a tions: = y B + + ∂Uy U + dt y ∂y D @ t + dt Uy dt A A @t Uxdt Uy + ∂Uy dt ∂x C x y’ linear relationship with three main assump Fig. reduction of the shear stress does not return the material to its original state as in solids. At time t + dt the control volume undergoes three diﬀerent changes. The similarity to solids the increase shear stress in ﬂuids yields larger deformations. the deformation can be viewed as a function of the velocity ﬁeld. y.64) requires that stress tensor be deﬁned. The rotation is the second movement that referred to change in of the relative orientation inside the control x’ 45◦ . and c. b. In solid material the shear stress yields a ﬁx amount of deformation. Furthermore. At time t. a linear relationship between the shear stress to the rate of shear strain. 8. a.234 where here CHAPTER 8. Notice the three combinations of the deformation shown by purple color relative to blue color.8)). Control volume at t and t + dt under continuous angle deformation. the result is a continuous deformation. As engineers do in general. In contrast.8. Or in index (Einstein) notation as ρ DUi ∂τji = + ρ fG i Dt ∂xi (8. The translational movement is referred to a movement of body without change of the body and without rotation. there is no left over stresses (In over words when the “no shear stress” situation exist the rate of deformation or strain is zero). The control volume moves to a new location. the control volume is at a square shape and location as depicted in Figure 8. In this model the (shear) stresses and rate of strains are assumed to be linearly related. rotates and changes the shape (the blow color in in Figure (8. the simplest model is assumed which referred as the solid continuum model.65) or (8. or z. Additionally. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS τ (i) = τix i + τiy j + τiz k is part of the shear stress tensor and i can be any of the x.65) End Advance material Equations (8.
Shear stress at two coordinates in 45◦ orientations.68) where. the relationship between the two of stress tensor are found.70) Note that the viscosity coeﬃcient (the linear coeﬃcient13 ) is assumed to be the same regardless of the direction. The only missing thing. The third change is the misconﬁguration or control volume deformation. . It can be noticed at this stage.68) can be written as τij = µ where i = j and i = x or y or z.9. µ is the “normal” or “ordinary” viscosity coeﬃcient which the linear coeﬃcient of proportionality the shear and it is assumed to be a property of the ﬂuid. is the diagonal component which dealt below. at this stage. 8. ﬁrst assumption is mentioned above.67) In these derivatives.69) D y τxx τxy A τx y ’ ’ τx x ’ ’ C τyx τyy x y’ τyz = µ Dγyz =µ Dt dUz dUy + dy dz (8.66) The total angle deformation (two sides x and y) is dUy dUx Dγxy = + Dt dx dy dU (8.8. For the assumption of linear ﬂuid12 τxy = µ Dγxy =µ Dt dUy dUx + dx dy B (8. The deformation of the control volume has several components. 12 While 13 The Fig.71) not marked as important equation this equation is is source of the derivation. The shear stress is related to the change in angle of the control volume lower left corner.5. under isentropic material it is assumed that the contribution of all the shear stresses contribute equally. In a similar fashion it can be written to other directions for x z as τxz = µ Dγxz =µ Dt dUz dUx + dx dz (8. the symmetry dxy = dUx was not assumed and or required because dy rotation of the control volume. In general equation (8. The angle between x to the new location of the control volume can be approximate for a small angle as dγx = tan dt Uy + dUy dx dx − Uy dx = tan dUy dx ∼ dUy = dx (8. Dγij =µ Dt dUj dUi + di dj x’ and for the directions of y z as 45◦ (8. However. DERIVATIONS OF THE MOMENTUM EQUATION 235 volume. This assumption is referred as isotropic viscosity.
9. y) is frame related to the strain rates in the (x’ . The small deformations a .75) (8. The angular strain rate in the (x. y coordinates).10(a) depicts the deformations of the triangular particles between time t and t + dt.75) becomes τyx = 1 (τx x − τy’ y’ ) 2 ’’ (8. c.77) d x= dx .73) results in 2 τyx = τx’ x’ − τy’ y’ or dividing by 2 equation (8.74) from (8. The diagonal lines (line BC and line AD in Figure 8.8) in the control volume move to the new locations.72) dividing by dx and some rearrangements utilizing the identity τxy = τyx results in τxx + τyy + τyx = τx’ x’ 2 Setting the similar analysis in the y’ results in τxx + τyy − τyx = τy’ y’ 2 Subtracting (8. y’ ) frame. The linear deformations in the x’ and y’ directions which are rotated 45◦ relative to the x and y axes can be expressed in both coordinates system. The forces acting in the direction of x ’ are combination several terms. Figure 8. For example.74) (8. The force balance in the x’ is Ax cos θx dy τxx √ 1 1 1 1 √ + dx τyy √ + dx τyx √ + dy τxy √ = dx 2 τx’ x’ 2 2 2 2 Ay cos θy Ay cos θy Ax cos θy Ax’ (8. To ﬁnd the main (on the diagonal) stress the coordinates are rotate by 45◦ . In addition. The relationship can be obtained by changing the coordinates orientation as depicted by Figure 8.x. b. The normal shear stress relates to the change in the diagonal line length change. y. on the “x” surface (lower surface) and the “y” (left) surface. y’ coordinates) and the angular strain rate in the regular (x.76) (8.236 CHAPTER 8. τii (where i is either . The dx is construct so it equals to dy. It can be noticed that “dx’ ” surface is 2 times larger than dx and dy surfaces. the sides AB and AC rotate in unequal amount which make one diagonal line longer and one diagonal line shorter. The rate of strain in the x direction is c (8. z) appears in shear matrix diagonal. and d in the Figure are related to the incremental linear strains.73) Equation (8. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS Normal Stress The normal stress.75) relates the diﬀerence between the normal shear stress and the shear stresses in x’ . √ shear the stresses are acting in this direction.
and (8. x (b) Deformation of the straight angle triangle.80) Equation (8. The original length of the √ 2 2 hypotenuse 2dx. cos 45◦ or sin 45◦ times the change contribute as ﬁrst approximation to change.80) can be interpreted as (using equations (8.8. Hence. the ratio strain in the x direction is 2 2 d x’ = (c + b) + (a + d) √ 2dx (c + b) (c + b) √ + √ + f (dx’ ) 2 √ 2 2dx ∼0 (8.5. d x is the linear strain (increase in length divided by length) of the particle in the x direction.78) The total change in the deformation angle is related to tan θ. It ◦ can be approximated that the change is about 45 because changes are inﬁnitesimally small. The change in the hypotenuse length is (c + b) + (a + d) . Deformation of the diﬀerent triangles for the calculations of the normal stress. The hypotenuse of the triangle is oriented in the x’ direction (again observe Figure 8. (8. 8. Thus.10(b)). The linear angular deformation in xy direction is dγxy = b+d dx (8.77).81) . The rate of the strain in y direction is d y = a dx (8. The linear strain in the x direction can be computed by observing Figure 8.10. Fig. and d y is its linear strain in the ydirection.10(b).78).79)) d x’ = 1 2 a+b+c+d dx = 1 (d 2 y +d y + dγxy ) (8.79) Here. DERIVATIONS OF THE MOMENTUM EQUATION b 237 b y’ y x’ a 45◦ y a d+a c+b d c 45◦ y’ x’ x (a) Deformations of the isosceles triangular. in both sides (d/dx+b/dy) which in turn is related to combination of the two sides angles.
(8.81) with equation (8.84) From (8.238 CHAPTER 8.83) into D x’ D y’ Dγxy − = Dt Dt Dt D x’ D y’ τxy − = Dt Dt µ (8. 8.88) changes into τx’ x’ − τy’ y’ = 2µ ∂Ux’ ∂Uy’ − ∂x’ ∂y’ Fig.87) and (8.11 depicts the approximate linear deformation of the element. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS In the same fashion the strain in y’ coordinate can be interpreted to be d y’ = 1 (d 2 y +d y − dγxy ) (8.11.75) τxy be substituted and equation (8. Dashed squares denotes the movement without the linear change. For example in y’ –z’ plain one can obtained τx’ x’ − τz’ z’ = 2µ ∂Ux’ ∂Uz’ − ∂x’ ∂z’ (8.82) Combining equation (8.89) Similar two equations can be obtained in the other two plains.87) can be written in the y’ and is similar by substituting the coordinates. The linear deformation is the diﬀerence between the two sides as D x’ ∂Ux’ = Dt ∂x’ (8.86) Uy’ + ∂Uy ’ ’ dy dt ∂y ’ Uy’dt The same way it can written for the y’ coordinate. (8. Linear strain of the element purple denotes t and blue is for t + dt. The rate of strain relations can be substituted by the velocity and equations (8.83) describing in Lagrangian coordinates a single particle.83) Equation (8.82) results in d x’ −d y’ = dγxy (8.68) it can be observed that the right hand side can be replaced by τxy /µ. Changing it to the Eulerian coordinates and location diﬀerential transform equation (8.87) y’ (8.88) ∂Ux ’ ’ Ux ’ + dx dt ∂x ’ x’ Equation (8.90) .85) can be continue and replaced as D x’ D y’ 1 − = (τx x − τy’ y’ ) Dt Dt 2µ ’ ’ Figure 8. ∂Uy’ D y’ = Dt ∂y’ (8.85) From equation (8.
5. An Introduction to Fluid Mechanics. 1967. . The mechanical pressure can be deﬁned as averaging of the normal stress acting on a inﬁnitesimal sphere.91) rearranging equation (8. p. In situations where the main diagonal terms of the stress tensor are not the same in all directions (in some viscous ﬂows) this property can be served as a measure of the local normal stress. This pressure is a true scalar value of the ﬂow ﬁeld since the propriety is averaged or almost14 invariant to the coordinate transformation.96) Advance material can be skipped 14 It 15 G.91) transforms it into 3 τx’ x’ = τx’ x’ + τy’ y’ + τz’ z’ + 6 µ ∂Ux’ − 2µ ∂x’ ∂Uy’ ∂Uz’ ∂Ux’ + + ∂x’ ∂y’ ∂z’ (8. DERIVATIONS OF THE MOMENTUM EQUATION Adding equations (8. With this deﬁnition and noticing that the coordinate system x’ –y’ has no special signiﬁcance and hence equation (8.93) must be valid in any coordinate system thus equation (8.71). Cambridge University Press. identical only in the limits not in mechanical measurements.89) and (8. It can be shown that this two deﬁnitions are “identical” in the limits15 . Commonality engineers like to combined the two diﬀerence expressions into one as 2 τij = − Pm + µ 3 ·U δij + µ ∂Ui ∂Uj + ∂xj ∂xi (8.8.92) The further rearranging the results by dividing by 3 so that “mechanical pressure τx’ x’ = τx’ x’ + τy’ y’ + τz’ z’ ∂Ux’ 2 +2 µ − µ 3 ∂x’ 3 ∂Ux’ ∂Uy’ ∂Uz’ + + ∂x’ ∂y’ ∂z’ (8.95) It can be observed that the non main (diagonal) terms of the stress tensor are represented by an equation like (8.94) Where Pm is the mechanical pressure and is deﬁned as Pm = − τxx + τyy + τzz 3 (8. Batchelor.93) can be written as τxx = −Pm + 2 µ ∂Ux 2 + µ ∂x 3 ·U (8.141.93) The “mechanical” pressure is the (negative) average value of pressure in directions of x’ –y’ –z’ .90) results in 2 4 239 (3 − 1) τx’ x’ − τy’ y’ − τz’ z’ = (6 − 2) µ ∂Ux’ − 2µ ∂x’ ∂Uy’ ∂Uz’ + ∂y’ ∂z’ (8. K.
61) the relationship between the stress tensor and the velocity were to be established. as τij = − P + 2 µ−λ 3 ·U δij + µ ∂Ui ∂Uj + ∂xj ∂xi (8. This expression suggests a new deﬁnition of the thermodynamical pressure is 2 P = Pm + µ 3 Summary of The Stress Tensor The above derivations were provided as a long mathematical explanation16 .2. The thermodynamic pressure always tends to follow the mechanical pressure during a change.240 or index notation 2 τij = − Pm + µ 3 CHAPTER 8. this association was established. However.” Here the term bulk viscosity will be adapted. connection between τxy and the deformation was built.3 . if the derivations before were to include additional terms.100) 16 Since the publishing the version 0. it will be provide before version 0. λ. With God help. Equation (8.98) The value of λ is obtained experimentally. According to second law of thermodynamic derivations (not shown here and are under construction) demonstrate that λ must be positive.99) can be written in terms of the thermodynamic pressure P .97) End Advance material where δij is the Kronecker delta what is δij = 1 when i = j and δij = 0 otherwise. an additional correction will be needed. First. it does not add any additional information. This correction results in P = Pm + λ ·U (8.0 several people ask me to summarize conceptually the issues. While this expression has the advantage of compact writing. Then the association between normal stress and perpendicular stress was constructed. are similar to the viscosity µ.9. Second Viscosity Coeﬃcient The coeﬃcient 2/3µ is experimental and relates to viscosity. To reduced one unknown (the shear stress) equation (8. The linkage was established between the stress int he rotated coordinates to the deformation.99) ·U (8. The expansion rate of change and the ﬂuid molecular structure through λ control the diﬀerence. Using the coordinates transformation. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS ·U δij + µ ∂Ui ∂Uj + ∂xj ∂xi (8. The dimension of the bulk viscosity. This coeﬃcient is referred in the literature by several terms such as the “expansion viscosity” “second coeﬃcient of viscosity” and “bulk viscosity.
Clearly for incompressible ﬂow. λ.8.105) or in a vector form as ρ U DU =− P + Dt 1 µ+λ 3 ( ·U) + µ 2 U +fB (8. for the τxx it can be written that τxx = −P + 2 and the y coordinate the equation is τyy = −P + 2 however the mix stress. For simple gas (dilute monatomic gases) it can be shown that λ vanishes.102) For the total eﬀect. τxy . it can be written for spesiﬁc coordinates. Thus. can be over 100 times larger than µ. is τxy = τyx = ∂Uy ∂Ux + ∂x ∂y (8. Only in micro ﬂuids and small and molecular scale such as in shock waves this eﬀect has some signiﬁcance. For example.61) which results in ρ DUx Dt =− ∂ P+ 2 3µ −λ ∂x ·U +µ ∂ 2 Ux ∂ 2 Ux ∂ 2 Ux + + ∂x2 ∂y 2 ∂z 2 f +f B x (8.103) ∂Ux ∂x (8. λ is large (3 times µ) but the net eﬀect is small because in that cases · U −→ 0. The physical meaning of · U represents the relative volume rate of change.101).104) ∂Uy ∂y (8. . neglecting this eﬀect results in τij = −P δij + µ ∂Ui ∂Uj + ∂xj ∂xi (8.101) To explain equation (8. the total eﬀect of the dilation on the ﬂow is very small. In fact this eﬀect is so insigniﬁcant that there is diﬃculty in to construct experiments so this eﬀect can be measured. In most cases. For complex liquids this coeﬃcient.106) Por in index form as ρ D Ui ∂ =− Dt ∂xi P+ 2 µ−λ 3 ·U + ∂ ∂xj µ ∂Ui ∂Uj + ∂xj ∂xi + f Bi (8. DERIVATIONS OF THE MOMENTUM EQUATION 241 The signiﬁcance of the diﬀerence between the thermodynamic pressure and the mechanical pressure associated with ﬂuid dilation which connected by · U .5. substitute equation (8. this coeﬃcient or the whole eﬀect is vanished17 . In material such as water.100) into equation (8.107) 17 The reason that the eﬀect vanish is because · U = 0.
A common velocity condition is that the liquid has the same value as the solid interface velocity.108) or in the index notation it is written ρ ∂P ∂ 2U D Ui =− +µ + f Bi Dt ∂xi ∂xi ∂xj (8.242 For incompressible ﬂow the term ρ CHAPTER 8. For this discussion. thus equation (8. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS · U vanishes.109) The momentum equation in Cartesian coordinate can be written explicitly for x coordinate as ρ ∂Ux + ∂t ∂Ux ∂Uy ∂Uz + Uy + Uz = ∂x ∂y ∂z 2 2 ∂P ∂ Ux ∂ Ux ∂ 2 Ux − +µ + + ∂x ∂x2 ∂y 2 ∂z 2 Ux (8. These conditions described physical situations that are believed or should exist or approximated. In the literature. the shear tensor will be separated into two categories.112) + ρgz 8. The solid surface is rough thus the liquid participles (or molecules) are slowed to be at the solid surface velocity.1 Boundary Conditions Categories The governing equations that were developed earlier requires some boundary conditions and initial conditions.111) in z coordinate is ρ ∂Uz + ∂t ∂Uz ∂Uz ∂Uz + Uy + Uz = ∂x ∂y ∂z ∂P ∂ 2 Uz ∂ 2 Uz ∂ 2 Uz − +µ + + ∂z ∂x2 ∂y 2 ∂z 2 Ux (8. pressure (at the interface direction) and shear stress (perpendicular to the area). pressure.6 Boundary Conditions and Driving Forces 8.6. These conditions can be categorized by the velocity. this condition is referred as the “no slip” condition. or in more general terms as the shear stress conditions (mostly at the interface).106) is reduced to 2 U DU =− P + Dt U +fB (8. In y coordinate the momentum equation is ρ ∂Uy + ∂t ∂Uy ∂Uy ∂Uz + Uy + Uz = ∂x ∂y ∂z ∂P ∂2v ∂2v ∂2v − +µ + 2 + 2 + ρgy 2 ∂y ∂x ∂y ∂z Ux (8.110) + ρgx g Where gx is the the body force in the x direction (i ·g ). .
y). x. The condition (8. The perpendicular relative velocity at the surface must be zero and therefore f (x) y Df r = 0 on the surface f (r . the free surface in the two dimensional case is represented as f (t.114) Note. The slip condition is dealing with a diﬀerence in the velocity between the solid (or other material) and the ﬂuid media.116) Dt This condition is called the kinematic boundary condition. it is more common to write this condition as a given velocity at a certain point U( ) = U (8.115) As oppose to a given velocity at particular point. a requiret n ment on the acceleration (velocity) is given in unknown posiflow tion. 8. BOUNDARY CONDITIONS AND DRIVING FORCES 243 This boundary condition was experimentally observed under many conditions yet it is not universal true. 1–Dimensional free surface describing n and b.117) . when the ﬂow is with a strong velocity ﬂuctuations. t) = 0 as the equation which describes the bounding surface. The slip condition cannot be ignored in some regions.113) where n is referred to the area direction (perpendicular to the area). The diﬀerence between the small scale and the large scale is that the slip can be neglected in the large scale while the slip cannot be neglected in the small scale.12.113) can be mathematically represented in direction another way for free surface conditions. For example. The ”slip” condition is written in similar fashion to equation (8.Fig. the “no slip” condition is applicable to the ideal ﬂuid (“inviscid ﬂows”) because this kind of ﬂow normally deals with large scales. the diﬀerence in the velocities vanishes as the scale increases. While this condition (8. etc) (8. The location of the (free) moving boundary can be given as r f (r . The slip condition (as oppose to “no slip” condition) exist in situations where the scale is very small and the velocity is relatively very small.8. t pendicular velocity at the interface must be zero.6. Another condition which aﬀects whether the slip condition exist is who rapidly of the velocity change.113) as U t · (U f luid − U boundary ) = f (Q.113) is given in a vector form. Mathematically the “no slip” condition is written as U t · (U f luid − U boundary ) = 0 (8. scale. To make sure that all the x material is accounted for in the control volume (does not cross b the free surface) the relative per. t) = 0 (8. In another view. The condition becomes as 0= ∂f ∂f ∂f + Ux + Uy ∂t ∂x ∂y (8.
In same instances. In this book. the jump in a shear stress (without a jump in density) does break a physical law. .120) t · τ (t) = −t · where n is the unit normal and t is a unit tangent to the surface (notice that direction pointed out of the “center” see Figure 8. One of results of the free surface condition (or in general. If the surface is straight there is no jump in the shear stress. The jump in the density (between the two ﬂuids) creates a surface tension which oﬀset the jump in the shear stress. The jump in shear stress can appear when the density has a jump in density. The free surface is a special case of moving surfaces where the surface between two distinct ﬂuids. The shear stress diﬀerence is ∆τ (n) = 0 = ∆τ (n) upper − ∆τ (n) lower surface surface (8.119) (8. Furthermore. it just for completeness and can be ignored for most purposes. In these cases the assumptions are that transition occurs in a sharp line. A jump in the shear stress creates inﬁnite force on the adjoin thin layer. this constant is determined from the volume conservation. this condition will not be discussed (at least not plane to be written). there situations where the ﬂuid (above one of the sides) should be considered as weightless material. In other cases. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS The solution of this condition sometime is extremely hard to handle because the location is not given but the derivative on unknown location. In reality the interface between these two ﬂuids is not a sharp transition but only approximation (see for the surface theory). n · τ (n) = σ 1 1 + R1 R2 σ (8. the moving surface condition) is that integration constant is unknown). Oﬀ course.119) is written18 as τij nj + σ ni (1) 1 1 + R1 R2 = τij nj (2) (8. In index notation equation (8.118) where the index (n) indicate that shear stress are normal (in the surface area). There are situations where the transition should be analyzed as a continuous transition between two phases. While a jump in density does not break any physical laws (at least those present in the solution). this condition cannot be tolerated since inﬁnite velocity (acceleration) is impossible. the transition is idealized an almost jump (a few molecules thickness). This condition is expressed mathematically equating the shear stress diﬀerence to the forces results due the surface tension.244 CHAPTER 8. The condition with curved surface are out the scope of this book yet mathematically the condition is given as without explanation.121) 18 There is no additional beneﬁt in this writing.12) and R1 and R2 are principal radii. and the density has a jump while the shear stress are continuous (in some case continuously approach zero value).
8. 74 (1980). Rational Mech. 3. Jean. The static pressure is measured perpendicular to the ﬂow ﬂow direction. In ﬂuid (mostly liquid) shear stress pulling side (surface) will have limited eﬀect and but sometime is signiﬁcant and more rarely dominate.6. material. The last condition is similar the pressure condition is of prescribed shear stress or some relationship to it. shear stress (including the surface tension) and the pressure. 197–217. 1) 1 + (f (x)) (1. The gravity can be considered as a constant force in most case (see for dimensional analysis for the reasons). The gravity is a common body force which is considered in many ﬂuid mechanics problems.13. . For example in one dimensional19 n= t= (−f (x). Consider for example the case shown in Figure 8. Gravity as Driving Force The body forces in general and gravity as a particular body force driving the ﬂow beside the velocity. no. in the kerosene lamp the burning occur at the surface of the lamp and the liquid is at the bottom.57). The shear stress carry the material as if part of it was a solid Fig.13. 8. In this category include the boundary conditions with issue of surface tension which were discussed earlier. Arch. M.123) The Pressure Condition The second condition that commonality prescribed at the interface is that the static pressure at speciﬁc value. Free surface of the steady ﬂow of a Newtonian ﬂuid in a ﬁnite channel. BOUNDARY CONDITIONS AND DRIVING FORCES 245 where 1 is the upper surface and 2 is the lower surface. 19 A one example of a reference not in particularly important or signiﬁcant just a random example. Anal.122) 2 the unit vector is given as two vector in x and y and the radius is given by equation (1. For example. pulling the side will pull all the material. The liquid does not move up due the gravity (actually it is against the gravity) but because the surface tension move the liquid up. Kerosene lamp. Shear Stress and Surface Tension as Driving Force If the ﬂuid was solid material. f (x)) 1 + (f (x)) 2 (8. It can be noticed that the boundary conditions that involve the surface tension are of the kind that where the something is given on boundary but no at speciﬁc location. The equation is given by ∂f ∂f + Ux = Uy ∂t ∂x (8.
U which is deﬁned as positive when it move with the ﬂow. The ﬂuid surrounds the rode temperature and ﬂows upwards. somewhere downstream the temperature gradient is insigniﬁcant. examples with two phase are presented. The boundary condition at outer surface given by a jump of the shear ∂U ∂σ constant = µ T ∂r ∂h stress. One radius toward the center of the rode while the other is inﬁnite (approximated). Flow between two plates top moving at U to the right (as positive). this eﬀect is not discussed. Schematic of kerosene lamp. 8.15). the contribution due to the curvature is zero in the direction of the ﬂow.13 can be used and idealized as a ﬂow around an inner rode. The control volume shown in darker colors. Even in that case. 8. In that case. the surface tension gradient remains. In the case. Example 8. the velocity at the gradent surface of the inner rode is zero. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS To understand how to apply the surface tension boundary condition. The upper surface is moving in Velocity. First. The velocity at U(ri) = 0 mix zone the outer surface is unknown. Later. However.7 Examples for Diﬀerential Equation (NavierStokes) Examples of an onedimensional ﬂow driven by the shear stress and pressure are presented. } } } 8. However the diameter at the depend on the surface tension.246 CHAPTER 8. For further enhance the understanding some of the derivations are repeated. example dealing won one phase are present.15. 20 The diﬀerence is measured at the bottom point of the plate. Uℓ y flow direction dy x z Fig. book. The surface tension is a function of the temperature therefor the gradient in surface tension is results of temperature gradient. The static pressure per length is given as ∆P 20 . The only (almost) propelling source of the ﬂow is the surface gradient. . In this Fig. the physical condition in Figure 8. The distance between the plates is . It can be notice that under the assumption here there are two principal radii.14.6: Incompressible liquid ﬂows between two inﬁnite plates from the left to the right (as shown in Figure 8.
124) The momentum is not accumulated (steady state and constant density). the velocity in and out are the same (constant density). EXAMPLES FOR DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION (NAVIERSTOKES) Solution In this example. The momentum conservation is − cv P dA + cv τ xy dA = 0 (8. the ﬂow in and the ﬂow out are equal. Further because no change of the thus ρ Ux Urn dA = 0 A (8.126) The shear stress on the lower surface based on Newtonian ﬂuid is τ xy = −µ dU dy (8.128) (8.8. The only diﬀerence in the pressure is in the x direction and thus P− P+ dP dx dx =− dP dx dx (8.129) The assumptions is that there is no pressure diﬀerence in the z direction.130) The momentum equation in the x direction then results (no gravity eﬀects) in − dP d2 U =µ 2 dx dy (8.131) . the mass conservation yields =0 247 d dt ρdV = − cv cv ρ Urn dA = 0 (8.127) On the upper surface is diﬀerent by Taylor explanation as ∼ =0 dU d2 U d3 U 2 τ xy = µ + dy + dy + · · · dy 2 3 dy dy The net eﬀect of these two will be diﬀerence between them µ dU d2 U dU ∼ d2 U + dy − µ = µ 2 dy dy dy 2 dy dy (8. Furthermore.125) Thus.7.
Equation (8. The problem is still one dimensional because the ﬂow velocity is a function 21 A discussion about the boundary will be presented.25 Ψ = 0.tween 1.8 Ux Uℓ 0.75 Ψ = 1.0 0.4 0. One dimensional ﬂow with a shear both.1 0.7 0. .2 0.25 1.2 0.6 0. The boundaries conditions are 1. No assumption was imposed on the pressure distribution.75 Ψ = 2.2 Ψ = −1. if the plates or the boundary conditions do not move the solution is Ux (y) = dP y 1− U0 2µ dx End Solution 2 + y (8. It is common to assume that the between two plates when Ψ change value be“no slip” condition on the boundaries con.8 0.135) Cylindrical Coordinates Similarly the problem of one dimensional ﬂow can be constructed for cylindrical coordinates.25 Ψ = 1.9 1.25 Ψ = 2.75 Ψ = 0.131) is a partial diﬀerential equation but can be treated as ordinary diﬀerential equation in the z direction of the pressure diﬀerence is uniform. However.131) is Ux = − 1 dP 2 y + c2 y + c3 2 dx (8.75 Ψ = −1. The “standard” boundary conditions is non–vanishing pressure gradient (that is the pressure exist) and velocity of the upper or lower surface or Fig. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS Equation (8. In that case.131) was constructed under Velocity distributions in one dimensional ﬂow several assumptions which include the direction of the ﬂow. 8. dition21 .248 CHAPTER 8.75 green line to 3 the blue line.134) (8.0 0.25 Ψ = −0.6 0.3 0. the left hand side is equal to constant.16. Newtonian ﬂuid.5 0.4 0.0 y ℓ October 4.0 0.132) Applying the boundary conditions results in =Ψ Ux (y) = y y y 2 dP 1− + U0 2µ dx For the case where the pressure gradient is zero the velocity is linear as was discussed earlier in Chapter 1.75 Ψ = −0. 2010 Ux (y = 0) = 0 Ux (y = ) = U The solution of the “ordinary” diﬀerential equation (8.133) (8.
8. Poiseuille study ﬂow in a small diameters (he was not familiar with the concept of Reynolds numbers). Hence. The control volume of liquid element in cylindrical coordinates. the last term is ρ Uz Urn dA = 0 (8.136) The shear stress in the front and back surfaces do no act in the z direction. The shear stress on the circumferential part small dark blue shown in Figure 8. Fig. The full analysis will be presented to review the the previous analysis of building the equation.137) Pz + ∂P dz − Pz ∂z π r2 = ∂P dz π r2 ∂z (8. The control volume of liquid element in “short cut” Fig b.138) Uz Urn dA = − z Uz+dz 2 dA Uz 2 dA =ρ z Uz+dz 2 − Uz 2 dA (8. The momentum equation for the control volume shown in the Figure 8. The analysis can be carried out by two diﬀerent approaches: one is a kind of short cut and one for the full analysis. The control volume of liquid element in cylindrical coordinates.7.17. of (only) radius.8.140) . This ﬂow referred as Poiseuille ﬂow after Jean Louis Poiseuille a French Physician who investigated ﬂow of blood in veins. Thus.17a is − P dA + τ dA = ρ Uz Urn dA (8. EXAMPLES FOR DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION (NAVIERSTOKES) 249 r θ dz r θ dz r θ flow Directi o r z n r θ flow Directi o z n dr Fig a.17a is dUz τ dA = µ 2 π r dz dr The pressure integral is P dA = (Pzd z − Pz ) π r2 = The last term is ρ Uz Urn dA = ρ ρ z+dz 2 2 dA (8.139) The term Uz+dz − Uz is zero because Uz+dz − Uz as can be shown by conservation of the mass for any element.
this chapter deals with construction of diﬀerential analysis more general analysis is provided.147) The shear stress can be expressed in a Taylor series as τ (z + dz) = µ 22 Asymmetrical dU dr + r d2 U dr2 dr + · · · r (8.17a. The governing equation can be constructed by this smaller control volume for various boundary condition. However. The shear stress in the z direction can be on the control volume (again the front and the back do not contribute here) is expressed τ dA = µ dU dA dr (8.141) Equation (8. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS Substituting equation (8. The “no slip” condition is assumed Uz (r = R) = 0 (8.148) element or function is −f (x) = f (−x) .250 CHAPTER 8.142) is a ﬁrst order diﬀerential equation for which only one boundary condition is needed. in this analysis the control volume that will be used is of Figure 8.145) (8. However. Integrating equation (8. The integration constant obtained via the application of the boundary condition which is c1 = − The solution is Uz = 1 ∂P 2 r R 1− µ ∂z R 2 1 ∂P 2 R µ ∂z (8.138) into equation (8.136) since the condition did not change. it has several deﬁciencies which include the ability to incorporate diﬀerent boundary conditions such as pipe within a pipe. While the above analysis provides a solution.143) Where R is the outer radius of pipe or cylinder.136) results in µ Which shrinks to 2 µ dUz ∂P =− r dr ∂z (8.146) The trick in the construction of control volumes such as the above can shorten the solution of problems.142) results in Uz = − 1 ∂P 2 r + c1 µ ∂z (8.144) It can be noticed that asymmetrical element22 was eliminated due to the smart short cut.137) and (8.142) dUz ∂P & & 2&¡ & = − π r dz dz π 2 & &r £ dr ∂z (8. The applicable equation is still (8.
The boundary conditions “no slip” at the outer radius and symmetry at the center which are Uz (r = 0) = 0 dU dr (r = 0) = 0 (8.150) Substituting equation (8.136) results in µ Or µ d2 U ∂P =− dr2 dz (8.154) The symmetry requirement (derivative at r = 0 is equal zero force the coeﬃcient c1 to be zero.152) can be integrated since the left right side is a function of r and right is a function of x. EXAMPLES FOR DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION (NAVIERSTOKES) The net change in the shear stress is d2 U τ dA = µ 2 2 π r dz dr dr The pressure diﬀerence P dA = ∂P dz 2 π r dr dz dA A 251 (8.7: .8. the governing equation (8.152) or its solution (8.153) Equation (8.150) and equation (8.7.7. The same result is obtained.151) Equation (8.152) d2 U ∂P 2 π r dz dr = − dz 2 π r dr dr2 dz (8. Example 8. The only diﬀerence is the boundary conditions for demonstration of this point see the following example 8.149) (8.154) can be used to solve problem that are not symmetrical. However.148) remembering that velocity is canceled into (8. The double integration results in Uz = − 1 ∂P 2 r + c1 r + c2 2 µ dz (8.152) is the governing equation only the z direction.
c) 0 0 (8.VII. Build the velocity proﬁle when the ﬂow is one directional and viscosity is Newtonian. it is possible to satisfy the boundary conditions.VII. That is. It turn out that the “simple” solution is the ﬂow ﬁrst mode that appear in reality. In fact there is no physical reason why the ﬂow should be only one dimensional.155) The steady state governing equation is ρ ¡ =0=− 0 ∂P +µ ∂z 1 ∂ r ∂r r ∂Uz ∂r =0 + ··· ρ gz + $$ (8. the velocity isn’t a function of the angle. In this solution will be discussing the ﬂow ﬁrst mode. Assume that the velocity at the surface of the cylinders is zero calculate the velocity proﬁle. However. or z coordinate. Flow of liquid between concentric cylinders for example 8.a) required boundary conditions which are Uz (r = ri ) = Uz (r = ro ) = Integrating equation (8. One of the solution of this problems is one dimensional.VII. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS r θ θ r Fig.VII.VII. 8.a) The PDE above (8.c) and second integration results in ∂Uz 1 ∂P c1 = r+ ∂r 2 µ ∂z r (8.VII.252 A liquid with constant density is ﬂowing between two cylinders as shown in Figure 8. The situation is best suitable to solved in cylindrical coordinates.18.VII. It can be noticed that it this case the change with time is zero but also the there is no acceleration (convective acceleration) is zero =f (t) =0 ∂U ∂Uz Uφ z ρ + Ur + ∂r r ∂t =0 Uz =f (φ) =0 ∂Uz ∂Uz +Uz =0 ∂φ ∂z ro flow Directi o ut r in z n (8. After the previous example.b) Dividing equation (8. Calculate the ﬂow rate for a given pressure gradient.a) once results in r ∂Uz 1 ∂P 2 = r + c1 ∂r 2 µ ∂z (8.18.d) . Thus only equation in z coordinate is needed. For this mode the ﬂow is assumed to be one dimensional. Solution CHAPTER 8.7. the appropriate version of the Navier–Stokes equation will be used.
This problem study by Nusselt23 which developed the basics equations.e) Applying the ﬁrst boundary condition results in 0= 1 ∂P 2 ri + c1 ln ri + c2 4 µ ∂z (8.d) results in Uz = 1 ∂P 2 r + c1 ln r + c2 4 µ ∂z 253 (8.VII. 1882 September 1. EXAMPLES FOR DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION (NAVIERSTOKES) Integration of equation (8.g) = The solution is then Uz (r) = 1 ∂P 2 1 r + ln 4 µ ∂z 4µ 1 + ln 4µ The ﬂow rate is then Q= ri End Solution ro ri ∂P ro 2 − ri 2 ln r dz (8.i) ro ri ∂P ln(ri ) ro 2 − ln(ro ) ri 2 dz ro Uz (r)dA (8.VII.h) ∂P ln(ri ) ro 2 − ln(ro ) ri 2 dz 1 ∂P 2 ro + c1 ln ro + c2 4 µ ∂z (8.j) The next example deals with the gravity as body force in two dimensional ﬂow. 1957 in Munchen 24 Extensive discussion can be found in this author master thesis. Ernst Kraft Wilhelm Nusselt born November 25.f) with the second boundary condition yields 0= The solution is c1 c2 = 1 ln 4µ 1 ln 4µ ro ri ro ri ∂P ro 2 − ri 2 dz (8. Example 8. This problem is related to many industrial process and is fundamental in understanding many industrial processes.VII.VII.7. Comprehensive discussion about this problem can be found this author Master thesis.8. .VII.VII.8: In many situations in nature and many industrial processes liquid ﬂows downstream 23 German mechanical engineer.VII. Furthermore. this analysis is a building bloc for heat and mass transfer understanding24 .
assume that the ﬂow is two dimenθ g cos θ g θ sional. pump Solution This problem is satiable to Cartesian coordinates in which x coordinate is pointed in the ﬂow direction and y perpendicular to ﬂow direction (depicted in Figure 8.19). the pressure loss in the gas phase (mostly air) is negligible. assume that the y gas density is zero (located outside the liqx uid domain). For simplicg sin θ ity.VIII.a) − g sin θ ∂ 2 Ux ∂ 2 Ux ∂P ∂ 2 Ux + ρ gx +µ + + ∂x2 ∂x ∂y 2 ∂z 2 The ﬁrst term of the acceleration is zero because the ﬂow is in a steady state. Mass ﬂow due to temperature diﬀerence for example 8.1 dimensional in the x direction. Assume that the ﬂow obtains a steady state after some length (and the acceleration vanished).19. The governing in the x direction is =f (t) ∂U x ρ + ∂t =0 −0 ∂Ux ∂Uy ∂Uz Ux + Uy + Uz = ∂x ∂y ∂z =0 ∼0 =0 =0 (8. As it will be shown later. The last term of the velocity Laplacian is zero because no velocity in ∂x the z direction. Assume that “scale” is large h enough so that the “no slip” condition prevail at the plate (bottom). The pressure is almost constant along the x coordinate. Assume that the ﬂow is one Fig. Write the governing equations for this situation. the gravity in the x direction is g sin θ while the direction of y the gravity is g cos θ. . For this system. For this example. Fully developed ﬂow means that the ﬁrst term of the velocity Laplacian is zero ( ∂Ux ≡ 0). The surface has no curvature and hence the pressure at liquid side similar to the gas phase and the only change in liquid is in the y direction. The second and the third terms in the convective acceleration are zero because the velocity at that direction is zero (Uy = Uz = 0).19. Hence the pressure at the gas phase is almost constant hence the pressure at the interface in the liquid is constant. Calculate the velocity proﬁle.254 CHAPTER 8. The ﬁrst term of the convective acceleration is zero under the assumption of this example ﬂow is fully developed and hence not a function of x (nothing to be “improved”). 8. The dominate force is the gravity. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS on inclined plate at θ as shown in Figure 8.
f) τair 1 g sin θ h + µ ν µ ρ (8. equation (8. the velocity proﬁle is Ux = The ﬂow rate per unit width is Q = W h g sin θ 2 h y − y2 ν (8.b) With boundary condition of “no slip” at the bottom because the large scale and steady state Ux (y = 0) = 0 (8.VIII.j) Where W here is the width into the page of the ﬂow.h) ν µ When the shear stress caused by the air is neglected.VIII.VIII.a) is reduced to 0=µ ∂ 2 Ux + ρ g sin θ ∂y 2 255 (8.d) If there is additional requirement.e) ∂y µ The integration constant can be obtain by applying the condition (8. the governing equation can not be suﬃcient from the mathematical point of view. Integration of equation (8.VIII. such a speciﬁc velocity at the surface.8.c) The boundary at the interface is simpliﬁed to be ∂Ux ∂y = τair (∼ 0) y=0 (8.g) The second integration applying the second boundary condition yields c2 = 0 results in τair g sin θ 2 y h − y2 − Ux = (8.VIII. EXAMPLES FOR DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION (NAVIERSTOKES) Thus.VIII. Which results in Q g sin θ 2 h3 τair h = − W ν 3 µ (8.VIII.i) Ux dA = A 0 g sin θ τair 2 h y − y2 − ν µ dy (8.VIII.d) as τair Solving for c1 results in c1 = ∂Ux =µ ∂y y = −ρ g sin θ h +c1 µ h (8.VIII.VIII.k) .VIII.VIII.7.b) yields ρ ∂Ux = g sin θ y + c1 (8.VIII.
solution to the diﬀerential governing equations provides only two constants. The ﬂow surface is curved and thus pressure is not equal on both sides of the interface. The second domain (the gas phase) provides another equation with two constants but again three boundary conditions need to satisﬁed. Flow of liquid in partially ﬁlled duct. The Fig. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS Q 2 W = g sin θ 2 h − τair Ux = h ν 3 µ (8. Assume that radios of the liquid and solid core are given and the ﬂow is at steady state. Thus. the maximum height).9: A simpliﬁed ﬂow version the kerosene lump is of liquid moving up on a solid core. For the liquid. .8 no requirement was made sa as for the velocity at the interface (the upm e air so ve (g lu loc per boundary). two of the boundary conditions for these equations are the identical and thus the six boundary conditions are really only 4 boundary conditions. 25 The author was hired to do experiments on thin ﬁlm (gravity ﬂow).l) Note the shear stress at the interface can be positive or negative and hence can increase or decrease the ﬂow rate and the averaged velocity. Example 8.7. 8.1 Interfacial Instability In Example 8.256 The average velocity is then CHAPTER 8. However. The vanishing shear stress as tio it ) n y y at the interface was the only requirement x w ate was applied. The phenomenon is explained by the fact that there is somewhere instability which is transferred into the ﬂow. This explanation bothered this author. 8. Two boundary conditions must be satisﬁed at the interface. The ﬂow in the kerosene lamp is depends on the surface tension. End Solution In the following following example the issue of driving force of the ﬂow through curved interface is examined. the boundary condition of “no slip” at the bottom surface of liquid must be satisﬁed. If the air is considered two r( liq uid governing equations must be solved one ) ah for the air (gas) phase and one for water h (liquid) phase. Calculate the minimum shear stress that required to operate the lump (alternatively. thus current explanation was developed to explain the wavy phenomenon occurs. The experiments were conducted on a solid concrete laboratory and the ﬂow was in a very stable system. These experiments were to study the formation of small and big waves at the interface. there is total of three boundary conditions25 to be satisﬁed.20.VIII. No matter how low ﬂow rate was small and big occurred.
165) equation results from double integrating of equation (8.163) µg µ g sin θ h + c1 µg = g sin θ h + c3 µ νg ν Combining boundary conditions equation(8.161) which leads c4 = 0 Applying equation (8.159) (8. the shear stress must be continuous µg ∂Uxg ∂Ux =µ ∂y ∂y (8.161) The same can be said for boundary condition (8. EXAMPLES FOR DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION (NAVIERSTOKES) The governing equation solution26 for the gas phase (h ≥ y ≥ a h) is Ux g = g sin θ 2 y + c1 y + c2 2 νg 257 (8.160) yields ρg ρ (8.159) with (8.162) (8.7. .162) results in g sin θ 2 g sin θ 2 h + c1 h + c2 = h + c3 h 2 νg 2ν 26 This (8.158) results in 0= g sin θ 2 h (1 + a)2 + c1 h (1 + a) + c2 2 νg (8.b) and subtitling ν = µ/ρ.160) (8.164) (8.VIII.156) Note.157) The gas velocity at the upper interface is vanished thus Ux g [(1 + a) h] = 0 At the interface the “no slip” condition is regularly applied and thus Ux g (h) = Ux (h) Also at the interface (a straight surface).158) Assuming “no slip” for the liquid at the bottom boundary as Ux (0) = 0 The boundary condition (8. the constants c1 and c2 are dimensional which mean that they have physical units (c1 −→ [1/sec] The governing equation in the liquid phase (0 ≥ y ≥ h) is Ux = g sin θ 2 y + c3 y + c4 2ν (8.8.
170) This presentation provide similarity and it will be shown in the Dimensional analysis chapter better physical understanding of the situation.258 CHAPTER 8.166) c1 = − c2 = sin θ g h2 ρg (2 ρg ν ρ + 1) − g h2 ν 2 ρg ν sin θ (g h ρg (2 a ρg ν ρ − 1) − a g h ν ) ρg (2 a ν + 2 ν ) End Advance material c3 = When solving this kinds of mathematical problem the engineers reduce it to minimum amount of parameters to reduce the labor involve.169) Or rearranging equation (8.171) .168) 2 νg h c1 ¡ 2 h£ g sin θ + 2 νg c2 νg 2 νg h c3 ¡ = + 2 sin θ h2 g sin θ ν g h£ (8.165) 1+ νg c1 ρ µ νg c3 = + g h sin θ ρg µg g h sin θ (8. (8.167) can be written as (1 + a) = C1 + C2 2 (8.164) 1 2 2 2 νg c1 2 c2 νg + g h sin θ g h2 sin θ (8.169) C1 C2 C3 νg 2 νg c1 2 νg c2 2 νg c3 −1= + 2 − ν h g sin θ h g sin θ g h sin θ (8. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS Advance material can be skipped The solution of equation (8.164) and (8. So equation (8.167) C1 1 µ 2 µg C3 1+ and equation (8.165) is obtained by computer algebra (see in the code) to be sin θ (g h ρg (2 ρg ν ρ + 1) + a g h ν ) ρg (2 a ν + 2 ν ) (8.162) transformed by some simple rearrangement to be C1 C2 (1 + a) = And equation (8.162). Equation (8.
There is no way obtain one dimensional solution for such case and there is a component in the y direction. mostly the gas. The ratio of the dynamics viscosity can be eliminated from equation (8.168) ρ C1 µ C3 −1= − ρg 2 µg 2 and equation (8. The point here the understanding issue related to boundary condition not per se solution of the problem.7. Combining inﬁnite size domain of one ﬂuid with ﬁnite size on the other one side results in unstable interface.176) C3 = − µg ρ + a2 + 2 a + 2 µ ρg (8.8.175) − C2 = µg ρ +a µ ρg 2 (8. is inﬁnite long. 28 This 27 Later . ﬂow at inﬁnite is zero. What happen when the lighter ﬂuid. The boundary conditions of ﬂow with inﬁnite depth is that ﬂow at the interface is zero.170) νg − 1 = C1 + C2 − C3 ν 259 (8.173) This process that was shown here is referred as non–dimensionalization27 . EXAMPLES FOR DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION (NAVIERSTOKES) Further rearranging equation (8. The requirement of the shear stress in the inﬁnite is zero as well.174) The set of equation can be solved for the any ratio of the density and dynamic viscosity.177) The two diﬀerent ﬂuids28 have ﬂow have a solution as long as the distance is ﬁnite reasonable similar. This is one of the source of the instability at the interface. it will be move to the Dimensional Chapter topic will be covered in dimensional analysis in more extensively.173) to be µg ρ − 1 = C1 + C2 − C3 µ ρg (8.172) (8. The solution for the constant is C1 = ρg µg µg − 2 + a2 + 2 a +2 ρ µ µ µg µg −2 +3 + a2 µ µ µg µ µg −1 −2 µ (8.
DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS .260 CHAPTER 8.
Here. Calculations of many kinds of ﬂow deals with more than one phase or material ﬂow1 . working for the government who analyzed ﬁling cavity with liquid metal (aluminum).there are two possibilities (1) the ﬂuids/materials are ﬂowing in well homogeneous mixed (where the main problem 1 An example. it is believed that the interactions/calculations requires a full year class and hence. books on multiphase ﬂow were written more as a literature review or heavy on the mathematics.1 Introduction Traditionally. his analysis is in the twilight zone not in the real world. is required for many engineering problems. the topic of multi–phase ﬂow is ignored in an introductory class on ﬂuid mechanics. who did not consider the ﬂow as two–phase ﬂow and ignoring the air. the nature of multiphase ﬂow requires solving many equations. only the trends and simple calculations are described. this class will be the only opportunity to be exposed to this topic. 261 . Thus. For many engineers. This book attempts to describe these issues as a fundamentals of physical aspects and less as a literature review. The knowledge in this topic without any doubts.CHAPTER 9 Multi–Phase Flow 9. The author believes that the trends and eﬀects of multiphase ﬂow could and should be introduced and considered by engineers. Additionally. In the past. For simple models.2 History The study of multi–phase ﬂow started for practical purposes after World War II. 2 Or when the scientiﬁc principles simply dictate. It is recognized that multiphase ﬂow is still evolving. As result. Initially the models were using simple assumptions. This chapter provides information that is more or less in consensus2 . there is not a consensus to the exact map of many ﬂow regimes.D. In fact. there was a Ph. in many books the representations is by writing the whole set governing equations. 9.
partial discussion on speed of sound of diﬀerent regimes. For example. Under this assumption the total is not linear and experimental correlation was made. MULTI–PHASE FLOW to ﬁnd the viscosity). . and calculation of pressure drop of simple homogeneous model. ﬂow parameters eﬀects on the ﬂow regimes. will know and understand the trends. 9. multi–phase ﬂow parameters deﬁnitions. When it became apparent that speciﬁc models were needed for diﬀerent situations. (2) the ﬂuids/materials are ﬂowing separately where the actual total loss pressure can be correlated based on the separate pressure loss of each of the material. This was suggested by Lockhart and Martinelli who use a model where the ﬂow of the two ﬂuids are independent of each other. Researchers that followed Lockhart and Martinelli looked for a diﬀerent map for diﬀerent combination of phases. a description of what to expect in this chapter is provided. However. However. this chapter will explain the core concepts of the multiphase ﬂow and their relationship. They postulate that there is a relationship between the pressure loss of a single phase and combine phases pressure loss as a function of the pressure loss of the other phase. If the pressure loss was linear then the total loss will be the summation of the two pressure losses (of the lighter liquid (gas) and the heavy liquid). Also the researchers looked at the situation when the diﬀerent regimes are applicable. Taitle–Duckler’s map is not applicable for microgravity. It is an attempt to explain and convince all the readers that the multi–phase ﬂow must be included in introductory class on ﬂuid mechanics3 . This chapter will provide: a category of combination of phases. and actual calculation of pressure of the diﬀerent regimes. Taitle and Duckler’s map is not universal and it is only applied to certain liquid–gas conditions. This chapter will introduce these concepts so that the engineer not only be able to understand a conversation on multiphase but also. Which leads to the concept of ﬂow regime maps.3 What to Expect From This Chapter As oppose to the tradition of the other chapters in this book and all other Potto project books. and more importantly. The ﬂow patterns or regimes were not considered. this chapter will not provide a discussion of transient problems. It turned out this idea provides a good crude results in some cases. the concept of ﬂow regimes. researchers started to look for diﬀerent ﬂow regimes and provided diﬀerent models.262 CHAPTER 9. Taitle and Duckler suggested a map based on ﬁve nondimensional groups which are considered as the most useful today. and importance to real world. phase change or transfer processes during ﬂow. double choking phenomenon (hopefully). Hence.
It also provides an opportunity to bring the latest advances in the ﬁelds since this author does not need to “sell” the book to a publisher or convince a “committee. The number of the downloads of the book on Fundamental of compressible ﬂow has exceed more than 100. Air is not a pure material but a mixture of many gases. For example. 9. In our calculation. there are situations when air ﬂow has to be considered as multiphase ﬂow and this eﬀect has to be taken into account. consider air ﬂow that was discussed and presented earlier as a single phase ﬂow. While the diﬀerence of the concentration between the top to button is insigniﬁcant. many layers (inﬁnite) of diﬀerent materials).1. Adopting this assumption might lead to a larger error. The creation 3 This author feels that he is in an unique position to inﬂuence many in the ﬁeld of ﬂuid mechanics. In fact. The discussion in the previous chapters is only as approximation when multiphase can be “reduced” into a single phase ﬂow.9.4 Kind of MultiPhase Flow All the ﬂows are a form of multiphase ﬂow. However.4. this assumption will not be appropriate when the air is stratiﬁed because of large body forces.000 in about two and half years. the homogeneous assumption is enough and suitable. or a large acceleration. 9. nonetheless it exists. KIND OF MULTIPHASE FLOW Gas Liquid Liquid Solid Gas Liquid Liquid Liquid Liquid 263 Gas Solid soid Liquid Solid Solid Soid Fig. it is assumed that air is made of only gases.” 4 Diﬀerent concentration of oxygen as a function of the height. . The results of the calculations of a mixture do not change much if it is assumed that the air ﬂow as stratiﬁed ﬂow 4 of many concentration layers (thus. This fact is due to the shear number of the downloaded Potto books. Practically for many cases. Hence. many proprieties of air are calculated as if the air is made of well mixed gases of Nitrogen and Oxygen. Diﬀerent ﬁelds of multi phase ﬂow.
There are many more categories. it is more common to categorize the ﬂow by the distinct phases that ﬂow in the tube. Generally. the cleanness of the air or the fact that air is a mixture is ignored. This category should include any distinction of phase/material. the cleanness of air can reduce the speed of sound. paint spray. The multiphase is an important part of many processes. hydraulic with two or more kind of liquids. The engineering accuracy is enough to totally ignore it. there are two possibilities for two diﬀerent materials to ﬂow (it is also correct for solid–liquid and any other combination). Gas–solid can be found in sand storms. Thus. there are situations where cleanness of the air can aﬀect the ﬂow. Flow of air is actually the ﬂow of several light liquids (gases). The materials can ﬂow in the same direction and it is referred as co–current ﬂow. plasma and river ﬂow with live creatures (small organisms to large ﬁsh) ﬂow of ice berg. solid–gas. Jr. the ﬂow of oil and water in one pipe is a multiphase ﬂow. solid propellant rocket. For example. 360070 issued to George Westinghouse. and river ﬂow. a 10% change of the speed of sound due to dust particles in air could reduce the stopping time by 2 seconds (50 meter diﬀerence in stopping) and can cause an accident. 1887). they can be solid–liquid. In the past. Liquid–liquid ﬂow is probably the most common ﬂow in the nature. 9. In a four (4) miles long train. in nature can be blood ﬂow. the breaks would started to work after about 20 seconds in the last wagon. is only an extreme case of liquidgas ﬂow and is a sub category of the multiphase ﬂow. This notion eliminates many other ﬂow categories that can and should be included in multiphase ﬂow. The water ﬂow is the source of the friction. Many natural phenomenon are multiphase ﬂow. Many industrial process also include liquidliquid such as painting. The liquid–solid. The “average” viscosity is meaningless since in many cases the water follows around the oil. For the gas. Yet.5 Classiﬁcation of LiquidLiquid Flow Regimes The general discussion on liquid–liquid will be provided and the gas–liquid ﬂow will be discussed as a special case. for example. For example. The multiphase can be found in nature. Many industries are involved with this ﬂow category such as dust collection. sand and grain (which are “solids”) ﬂow with rocks and is referred to solid–solid ﬂow. liquid–gas and solid–liquid–gas ﬂow. This ﬂow is used by engineers to reduce the cost of moving crude oil through a long pipes system. The body inhales solid particle with breathing air. March 29. the density is a strong function of the temperature and pressure. and avalanches. When the . Open Channel ﬂow is. One way to categorize the multiphase is by the materials ﬂows. However. The category of liquid–gas should be really viewed as the extreme case of liquidliquid where the density ratio is extremely large. rain. for an example. living bodies (bio–ﬂuids).. spray casting. MULTI–PHASE FLOW of clean room is a proof that air contains small particles. Since there are three phases. ﬂuidized bed.264 CHAPTER 9. and industries. the breaks in long trains were activated by reduction of the compressed line (a patent no. mud ﬂow etc. In almost all situations. This ﬂow also appears in any industrial process that are involved in solidiﬁcation (for example die casting) and in moving solid particles. The same can be said for gas–gas ﬂow. although important.
Open channel ﬂow appears in many nature (river) as well in industrial process such as the die casting process where liquid metal is injected into a cylinder (tube) shape. water and air ﬂow as oppose to water and oil ﬂow.1 Horizontal Flow The typical regimes for horizontal ﬂow are stratiﬁed ﬂow (open channel ﬂow. The channel ﬂow will be discussed in a greater detail in Open Channel Flow chapter.2. 9. For example. the limits between the ﬂow regimes are considerably diﬀerent. 5 With the exception of the extremely smaller diameter where Rayleigh–Taylor instability is an important issue. The ﬂow regimes are referred to the arrangement of the ﬂuids. 9. The other characteristic that is diﬀerent between the gas ﬂow and the liquid ﬂow is the variation of the density.1. CLASSIFICATION OF LIQUIDLIQUID FLOW REGIMES 265 materials ﬂow in the opposite direction. the counter–current ﬂow must have special conﬁgurations of long length of ﬂow. When the ﬂow rate of the lighter liquid is almost zero.1 Co–Current Flow In Co–Current ﬂow. 5 top as depicted in Figure 9. a reduction of the pressure by half will double the gas volumetric ﬂow rate while the change in the liquid is negligible. dispersed Heavy Liquid bubble ﬂow. it is referred as counter–current. This kind of ﬂow regime is referred to as horizontal ﬂow. Additionally. For low velocity (low ﬂow rate) of the two liquids. In general. Light Liquid and non open channel ﬂow). Yet.5. For example. 9. and annular ﬂow. plug ﬂow. The vertical conﬁguration has two cases.9. The geometries (even the boundaries) of open channel ﬂow are very diverse. This issue of incline ﬂow will not be covered in this chapter. There is no exact meaning to the word “near vertical” or “near horizontal” and there is no consensus on the limiting angles (not to mention to have limits as a function with any parameter that determine the limiting angle). The main diﬀerence between the liquid–liquid ﬂow to gasliquid ﬂow is that gas density is extremely lighter than the liquid density. the ﬂow is referred to as open channel ﬂow. . the cocurrent is the more common. This deﬁnition (open channel ﬂow) continues for small amount of lighter liquid as long as the heavier ﬂow can be calculated as open channel ﬂow (ignoring the lighter liquid). and what ever between them. Thus. the heavy liquid ﬂows on the Fig.5. the ﬂow of gas–liquid can have several ﬂow regimes in one situation while the ﬂow of liquid–liquid will (probably) have only one ﬂow regime. two liquids can have three main categories: vertical. The ﬂow in inclined angle (that not covered by the word “near”) exhibits ﬂow regimes not much diﬀerent from the other two. Stratiﬁed ﬂow in horizontal tubes when bottom and lighter liquid ﬂows on the the liquids ﬂow is very slow.2. It is common to diﬀerentiate between the vertical (and near vertical) and horizontal (and near horizontal). Generally. horizontal. up or down. the counter–current ﬂow has a limited length window of possibility in a vertical ﬂow in conduits with the exception of magnetohydrodynamics.5.
266
CHAPTER 9. MULTI–PHASE FLOW
As the lighter liquid (or the gas phase) ﬂow rate increases (superﬁcial velocity), the friction between the phases increase. The superﬁcial velocity is referred to as the velocity that any phase will have if the other phase was not exist. This friction is one of the cause for the instability which manifested itself as waves and changing the surface from straight line to a diﬀerent conﬁguration (see Figure 9.3). The wave shape is created to keep the gas and the liquid velocity equal and at the same time to have shear stress to be balance by surface tension. The conﬁguration of the cross section not only depend on the surface tension, and other physical properties of the ﬂuids but also on the material of the conduit. As the lighter liquid velocity increases two things can happen (1) wave size increase and (2) the shape of cross section continue to deform. Light Liquid Light Liquid Some referred to this regime as wavy stratiﬁed ﬂow Heavy Liquid Heavy Liquid but this deﬁnition is not accepted by all as a category by itself. In fact, all the two phase ﬂow are categorized by wavy ﬂow which will proven later. Fig. 9.3. Kind of Stratiﬁed ﬂow in There are two paths that can occur on the heavier horizontal tubes. liquid ﬂow rate. If the heavier ﬂow rate is small, then the wave cannot reach to the crown and the shape is deformed to the point that all the heavier liquid is around the periphery. This kind of ﬂow regime is referred to as annular ﬂow. If the heavier liquid ﬂow rate is larger6 than the distance, for the wave to reach the conduit crown is smaller. At some point, when the lighter liquid ﬂow increases, the heavier liquid wave reaches to the crown of the pipe. At this stage, the ﬂow pattern is referred to as slug ﬂow or plug ﬂow. Plug ﬂow is characterized by regions of lighter liquid ﬁlled with drops of the heavier liquid with Plug (or Slug) of the heavier liquid (with bubble of the lighter liquid). These plugs are separated by large “chunks” that almost ﬁll the entire tube. The plugs are ﬂowing in a succession (see Figure 9.4). The pressure drop of this kind of regime is signiﬁcantly larger than the stratiﬁed ﬂow. The slug ﬂow cannot be assumed to be as homogeneous ﬂow nor it can exhibit some average viscosity. The “average” viscosity depends on the ﬂow and thus making it as insigniﬁcant way to do the calculations. Further increase of the lighter liquid ﬂow rate move the ﬂow regime into annular ﬂow. Thus, the possibility to go through slug ﬂow regime depends on if there is enough liquid ﬂow rate. Choking occurs in compressible Light Liquid ﬂow when the ﬂow rate is above a certain point. All liquids are compressible Heavy Liquid to some degree. For liquid which the density is a strong and primary function of the pressure, choking occurs relatively Fig. 9.4. Plug ﬂow in horizontal tubes when the closer/sooner. Thus, the ﬂow that starts liquids ﬂow is faster. as a stratiﬁed ﬂow will turned into a slug ﬂow or stratiﬁed wavy7 ﬂow after a certain distance depends on the heavy ﬂow rate (if
6 The 7 Well,
liquid level is higher. all the ﬂow is wavy, thus it is arbitrary deﬁnition.
9.5. CLASSIFICATION OF LIQUIDLIQUID FLOW REGIMES
267
this category is accepted). After a certain distance, the ﬂow become annular or the ﬂow will choke. The choking can occur before the annular ﬂow regime is obtained depending on the velocity and compressibility of the lighter liquid. Hence, as in compressible ﬂow, liquid–liquid ﬂow has a maximum combined of the ﬂow rate (both phases). This maximum is known as double choking phenomenon. The reverse way is referred to the process where the starting point is high ﬂow rate and the ﬂow rate is decreasing. As in many ﬂuid mechanics and magnetic ﬁelds, the return path is not move the exact same way. There is even a possibility to return on diﬀerent ﬂow regime. For example, ﬂow that had slug ﬂow in its path can be returned as stratiﬁed wavy ﬂow. This phenomenon is refer to as hysteresis. Flow that is under small angle from the horizontal will be similar to the horizontal ﬂow. However, there is no consensus how far is the “near” means. Qualitatively, the “near” angle depends on the length of the pipe. The angle decreases with the length of the pipe. Besides the length, other parameters can aﬀect the “near.”
Dispersed Bubble
Liquid Superficial Velocity
Elongated Bubble
Slug Flow Annular Flow
Stratified Flow Wavy Stratified Open Channel Flow Gas Superficial Velocity
Fig. 9.5. Modiﬁed Mandhane map for ﬂow regime in horizontal tubes.
The results of the above discussion are depicted in Figure 9.5. As many things in multiphase, this map is only characteristics of the “normal” conditions, e.g. in normal gravitation, weak to strong surface tension eﬀects (air/water in “normal” gravity), etc. 9.5.1.2 Vertical Flow
The vertical ﬂow has two possibilities, with the gravity or against it. In engineering application, the vertical ﬂow against the gravity is more common used. There is a difference between ﬂowing with the gravity and ﬂowing against the gravity. The buoyancy
268
CHAPTER 9. MULTI–PHASE FLOW
Bubble Flow
Slug or Plug Flow
Churn Flow
Annular Flow
Dispersed Flow
Fig. 9.6. Gas and liquid in Flow in verstical tube against the gravity.
is acting in two diﬀerent directions for these two ﬂow regimes. For the ﬂow against gravity, the lighter liquid has a buoyancy that acts as an “extra force” to move it faster and this eﬀect is opposite for the heavier liquid. The opposite is for the ﬂow with gravity. Thus, there are diﬀerent ﬂow regimes for these two situations. The main reason that causes the diﬀerence is that the heavier liquid is more dominated by gravity (body forces) while the lighter liquid is dominated by the pressure driving forces. Flow Against Gravity For vertical ﬂow against gravity, the ﬂow cannot start as a stratiﬁed ﬂow. The heavier liquid has to occupy almost the entire cross section before it can ﬂow because of the gravity forces. Thus, the ﬂow starts as a bubble ﬂow. The increase of the lighter liquid ﬂow rate will increase the number of bubbles until some bubbles start to collide. When many bubbles collide, they create a large bubble and the ﬂow is referred to as slug ﬂow or plug ﬂow (see Figure 9.6). Notice, the diﬀerent mechanism in creating the plug ﬂow in horizontal ﬂow compared to the vertical ﬂow. Further increase of lighter liquid ﬂow rate will increase the slug size as more bubbles collide to create “super slug”; the ﬂow regime is referred as elongated bubble ﬂow. The ﬂow is less stable as more turbulent ﬂow and several “super slug” or churn ﬂow appears in more chaotic way, see Figure 9.6. After additional increase of “super slug” , all these “elongated slug” unite to become an annular ﬂow. Again, it can be noted the diﬀerence in the mechanism that create annular ﬂow for vertical and horizontal ﬂow. Any further increase transforms the outer liquid layer into bubbles in the inner liquid. Flow of near vertical against the gravity in two–phase does not deviate from vertical. The choking can occur at any point depends on the ﬂuids and temperature and pressure.
9.6. MULTI–PHASE FLOW VARIABLES DEFINITIONS 9.5.1.3 Vertical Flow Under Micro Gravity
269
The above discussion mostly explained the Dispersed Dispersed ﬂow in a vertical conﬁguration when the Bubble Bubble surface tension can be neglected. In cases where the surface tension is very important. Pulsing For example, out in space between gas and liquid (large density diﬀerence) the situaPulsing & Bubbling tion is diﬀerent. The ﬂow starts as disTrickling persed bubble (some call it as “gas conFlow Spray or tinuous”) because the gas phase occupies Mist Flow most of column. The liquid ﬂows through Gas Flow Rage a trickle or channeled ﬂow that only partially wets part of the tube. The interaction between the phases is minimal and can be Fig. 9.7. A dimensional vertical ﬂow map considered as the “open channel ﬂow” of under very low gravity against the gravity. the vertical conﬁguration. As the gas ﬂow increases, the liquid becomes more turbulent and some parts enter into the gas phase as drops. When the ﬂow rate of the gas increases further, all the gas phase change into tiny drops of liquid and this kind of regime referred to as mist ﬂow. At a higher rate of liquid ﬂow and a low ﬂow rate of gas, the regime liquid ﬁlls the entire void and the gas is in small bubble and this ﬂow referred to as bubbly ﬂow. In the medium range of the ﬂow rate of gas and liquid, there is pulse ﬂow in which liquid is moving in frequent pulses. The common map is based on dimensionless parameters. Here, it is presented in a dimension form to explain the trends (see Figure 9.7). In the literature, Figure 9.7 presented in dimensionless coordinates. The abscissa is a function of combination of Froude ,Reynolds, and Weber numbers. The ordinate is a combination of ﬂow rate ratio and density ratio. Flow With The Gravity As opposed to the ﬂow against gravity, this ﬂow can starts with stratiﬁed ﬂow. A good example for this ﬂow regime is a water fall. The initial part for this ﬂow is more signiﬁcant. Since the heavy liquid can be supplied from the “wrong” point/side, the initial part has a larger section compared to the ﬂow against the gravity ﬂow. After the ﬂow has settled, the ﬂow continues in a stratiﬁed conﬁguration. The transitions between the ﬂow regimes is similar to stratiﬁed ﬂow. However, the points where these transitions occur are diﬀerent from the horizontal ﬂow. While this author is not aware of an actual model, it must be possible to construct a model that connects this conﬁguration with the stratiﬁed ﬂow where the transitions will be dependent on the angle of inclinations.
Liquid Flow Rate
9.6 Multi–Phase Flow Variables Deﬁnitions
Since the gas–liquid system is a speciﬁc case of the liquid–liquid system, both will be united in this discussion. However, for the convenience of the terms “gas and liquid” will be used to signify the lighter and heavier liquid, respectively. The liquid–liquid (also
270
CHAPTER 9. MULTI–PHASE FLOW
gas–liquid) ﬂow is an extremely complex three–dimensional transient problem since the ﬂow conditions in a pipe may vary along its length, over its cross section, and with time. To simplify the descriptions of the problem and yet to retain the important features of the ﬂow, some variables are deﬁned so that the ﬂow can be described as a onedimensional ﬂow. This method is the most common and important to analyze twophase ﬂow pressure drop and other parameters. Perhaps, the only serious missing point in this discussion is the change of the ﬂow along the distance of the tube.
9.6.1
Multi–Phase Averaged Variables Deﬁnitions
The total mass ﬂow rate through the tube is the sum of the mass ﬂow rates of the two phases m = mG + mL ˙ ˙ ˙ (9.1)
It is common to deﬁne the mass velocity instead of the regular velocity because the “regular” velocity changes along the length of the pipe. The gas mass velocity is GG = mG ˙ A (9.2)
Where A is the entire area of the tube. It has to be noted that this mass velocity does not exist in reality. The liquid mass velocity is GL = The mass ﬂow of the tube is then G= m ˙ A (9.4) mL ˙ A (9.3)
It has to be emphasized that this mass velocity is the actual velocity. The volumetric ﬂow rate is not constant (since the density is not constant) along the ﬂow rate and it is deﬁned as QG = and for the liquid QL = GL ρL (9.6) GG = UsG ρG (9.5)
For liquid with very high bulk modulus (almost constant density), the volumetric ﬂow rate can be considered as constant. The total volumetric volume vary along the tube length and is Q = QL + QG (9.7)
9.6. MULTI–PHASE FLOW VARIABLES DEFINITIONS
271
Ratio of the gas ﬂow rate to the total ﬂow rate is called the ’quality’ or the “dryness fraction” and is given by X= GG mG ˙ = m ˙ G (9.8)
In a similar fashion, the value of (1 − X) is referred to as the “wetness fraction.” The last two factions remain constant along the tube length as long the gas and liquid masses remain constant. The ratio of the gas ﬂow cross sectional area to the total cross sectional area is referred as the void fraction and deﬁned as α= AG A (9.9)
This fraction is vary along tube length since the gas density is not constant along the tube length. The liquid fraction or liquid holdup is LH = 1 − α = AL A (9.10)
It must be noted that Liquid holdup, LH is not constant for the same reasons the void fraction is not constant. The actual velocities depend on the other phase since the actual cross section the phase ﬂows is dependent on the other phase. Thus, a superﬁcial velocity is commonly deﬁned in which if only one phase is using the entire tube. The gas superﬁcial velocity is therefore deﬁned as UsG = The liquid superﬁcial velocity is UsL = GL (1 − X) m ˙ = = QL ρL ρL A (9.12) GG Xm ˙ = = QG ρG ρG A (9.11)
Since UsL = QL and similarly for the gas then Um = UsG + UsL (9.13)
Where Um is the averaged velocity. It can be noticed that Um is not constant along the tube. The average superﬁcial velocity of the gas and liquid are diﬀerent. Thus, the ratio of these velocities is referred to as the slip velocity and is deﬁned as the following SLP = UG UL (9.14)
Slip ratio is usually greater than unity. Also, it can be noted that the slip velocity is not constant along the tube.
272
CHAPTER 9. MULTI–PHASE FLOW For the same velocity of phases (SLP = 1), the mixture density is deﬁned as ρm = α ρG + (1 − α) ρL (9.15)
This density represents the density taken at the “frozen” cross section (assume the volume is the cross section times inﬁnitesimal thickness of dx). The average density of the material ﬂowing in the tube can be evaluated by looking at the deﬁnition of density. The density of any material is deﬁned as ρ = m/V and thus, for the ﬂowing material it is ρ= m ˙ Q (9.16)
Where Q is the volumetric ﬂow rate. Substituting equations (9.1) and (9.7) into equation (9.16) results in
mG ˙ mL ˙
ρaverage =
˙ X m + (1 − X) m ˙ ˙ X m + (1 − X) m ˙ = ˙ X m (1 − X) m ˙ QG + QL + ρG ρL
QG QL
(9.17)
Equation (9.17) can be simpliﬁed by canceling the m and noticing the (1−X)+X = 1 ˙ to become
+ (1−X) ρL The average speciﬁc volume of the ﬂow is then
X ρG
ρaverage =
1
(9.18)
vaverage =
1 ρaverage
=
X (1 − X) + = X vG + (1 − X) vL ρG ρL
(9.19)
The relationship between X and α is
AG
X=
mG ˙ ρG UG A α ρG UG α = = (9.20) mG + mL ˙ ˙ ρL UL A(1 − α) +ρG UG A α ρL UL (1 − α) + ρG UG α
AL
If the slip is one SLP = 1, thus equation (9.20) becomes X= ρG α ρL (1 − α) + ρG α (9.21)
The single phase was studied earlier in this book and there is a considerable amount of information about it.24) or modifying equation (9. these segments are not deﬁned but results of the conditions imposed on the ﬂow. it is worthwhile to appreciate the complexity of the ﬂow.9. HOMOGENEOUS MODELS 273 9. The average velocity (see also equation (9.7 Homogeneous Models Before discussing the homogeneous models. Thus. the simplest is to used it for approximation. it was assumed that the diﬀerent ﬂow regimes can be neglected at least for the pressure loss (not correct for the heat transfer). it was assumed that the ﬂow is continuous. For the construction of ﬂuid basic equations.1: Under what conditions equation (9.22) It can be noted that the continuity equation is satisﬁed as m = ρm Um A ˙ (9. this assumption has to be broken. Initially.7. In fact.13)) is Um = QL + QG = UsL + UsG = Um A (9.23) Example 9. and the ﬂow is continuous only in many chunks (small segments). the diﬀerent ﬂow regimes are examples of typical conﬁguration of segments of continuous ﬂow.26) .24) as − dP S m dUm ˙ = − τw − + ρm g sin θ dx A A dx (9.23) is correct? Solution Under construction End Solution The governing momentum equation can be approximated as m ˙ dUm dP = −A − S τw − A ρm g sin θ dx dx (9.25) The energy equation can be approximated as dw d dq − =m ˙ dx dx dx hm + Um 2 + g x sin θ 2 (9. Now. Furthermore.
acceleration.7. this dependency can be neglected. the pressure loss is aﬀected by friction loss. for small distances (dx) and some situations.7. MULTI–PHASE FLOW 9. the experimental data that was developed and measured for single ﬂow is used. the total pressure loss can be written as f riction acceleration gravity dP dP dP dP + + = (9. For example. There is not available experimental data for the relationship of the averaged velocity of the two (or more) phases and wall shear stress.079 and n = 0.31) Where C and n are constants which depend on the ﬂow regimes (turbulent or laminar ﬂow).25).29) The wall shear stress can be estimated by τw = f ρm Um 2 2 (9. since there isn’t anything better. In that case. For laminar ﬂow C = 16 and n = 1. acceleration must occur. For turbulent ﬂow C = 0. the gravitation pressure loss reduce the pressure and thus the density must change and hence. . 9. Yet. from equation (9. For calculating the frictional pressure loss in the pipe is − dP dx = f 4 τw D (9. this friction factor was not measured for the “averaged” viscosity of the two phase ﬂow.25. However.28) Where S is the perimeter of the ﬂuid. In fact.30) The friction factor is measured for a single phase ﬂow where the average velocity is directly related to the wall shear stress.1 Pressure Loss Components In a tube ﬂowing upward in incline angle θ. The friction factor is obtained by using the correlation f =C ρm Um D µm −n (9.1 Friction Pressure Loss The frictional pressure loss for a conduit can be calculated as − dP dx = f S τw A (9. and body force(gravitation).1. These losses are nonlinear and depend on each other.274 CHAPTER 9.27) dx dx f dx a dx g Every part of the total pressure loss will be discussed in the following section.
37) a There are several special cases. the private case is where densities are constant for both phases. HOMOGENEOUS MODELS 275 There are several suggestions for the average viscosity. The third special case is for constant density of one phase only. For example. . dX/ dx = 0.36) Or in an explicit way equation (9.33) Or simply make the average viscosity depends on the mass fraction as µm = X µG + (1 − X) µL Using this formula.35) can be written as − dP dx =m ˙ a d dx m ˙ A ρm (9. dA/ dx = 0.36) becomes pressure loss due to pressure loss due to density change area change 2 =m ˙ 1 1 d 1 dA + 2 dx A dx ρm ρm A − dP dx (9.7. 9. dρL / dx = 0. The ﬁrst case where the cross section is constant. For the last point. the friction loss can be estimated.2 Acceleration Pressure Loss (9. Duckler suggest the following µm = µG QG µL QL + QG + QL QG + QL (9. Equation (9.9.34) The acceleration pressure loss can be estimated by − dP dx =m ˙ a dUm dx (9.32) Duckler linear formula does not provide always good approximation and Cichilli suggest similar to equation (9.7.35) The acceleration pressure loss (can be positive or negative) results from change of density and the change of cross section.18) average viscosity as µaverage = 1 X µG (1−X) µL + (9.1. In second case is where the mass ﬂow rates of gas and liquid is constant in which the derivative of X is zero.
1. MULTI–PHASE FLOW Gravity was discussed in Chapter 4 and is dP dx = g ρm sin θ g (9.38) The density change during the ﬂow can be represented as a function of density.276 9.41) SG f TP Where the T P denotes the two phases and SG denotes the pressure loss for the single gas phase. private communication with Y.. Equivalent deﬁnition for the liquid side is φL = dP dx dP dx (9. Lockhart and Martinelli built model based on the assumption that the separated pressure loss are independent from each other. Taitle .7.7.4 Total Pressure Loss The total pressure between two points.3 Gravity Pressure Loss CHAPTER 9. φG = dP dx dP dx (9. (a and b) can be calculated with integration as b ∆Pab = a dP dx dx (9. 9.1. The density in equation (9.38) is the density without the “movement” (the “static” density). 8 This method was considered a military secret.39) and therefore f riction acceleration gravity ∆Pab = ∆Pab f + ∆Pab a + ∆Pab g (9.7.2 Lockhart Martinelli Model The second method is by assumption that every phase ﬂow separately One such popular model by Lockhart and Martinelli8 . Lockhart Martinelli parameters are deﬁned as the ratio of the pressure loss of two phases and pressure of a single phase.40) 9.42) SL f TP Where the SL denotes the pressure loss for the single liquid phase. Thus. there are two parameters as shown below.
Thus. It is assumed that the pressure loss for both phases are equal. To insert the Diagram. In that case there are four possibilities for vertical ﬂow: 1. analysis of small coal particles in water is diﬀerent from large coal particles in water. cubic. Consider the case where the solid is heavier than the liquid phase.9.8 Solid–Liquid Flow Solid–liquid system is simpler to analyze than the liquidliquid system.43) SG f SL where Ξ is Martinelli parameter. etc). Diﬀerent combination of solid particle creates diﬀerent “liquid. The ﬂow with the gravity and heavier density solid particles. .” Therefor. it is assumed that the surface tension is insigniﬁcant compared to the gravity forces. The ﬂow with the gravity and lighter density solid particles. The density of the solid can be above or below the liquid.45) For the gas phase.there will be a discussion about diﬀerent particle size and diﬀerent geometry (round. SOLID–LIQUID FLOW 277 The ratio of the pressure loss for a single liquid phase and the pressure loss for a single gas phase is Ξ= dP dx dP dx (9. distribution. the eﬀect of the surface tension are very minimal and can be ignored. dP dx = SG dP dx (9. For example.46) Simpliﬁed model is when there is no interaction between the two phases. In solid–liquid. 3. and geometry. It is also assumed that the “liquids” density does not change signiﬁcantly and it is far from the choking point. in this discussion. 9. The word “solid” is not really mean solid but a combination of many solid particles. The uniformity is categorizing the particle sizes. 2.8.44) SL The pressure loss for the liquid phase is dP dx = L 2 fL UL 2 ρl DL (9. The ﬂow against the gravity and lighter density solid particles. the pressure loss is dP dx = G 2 fG UG 2 ρl DG (9.
CD ∞ is complicated function of the Reynolds number.51) 24 Re (9. the liquid cannot carry the solid particles because there is not enough resistance to lift up the solid particles.48) into equation (9. CD ∞ . 9. is nearly constant as CD ∞ = 0. the Newton’s Law region.47) become CD ∞ (UL ) f (Re) UL 2 = 4 D g (ρS − ρL ) 3 ρL (9.49) relates the liquid velocity that needed to maintain the particle “ﬂoating” to the liquid and particles properties.47) Where CD ∞ is the drag coeﬃcient and is a function of Reynolds number. The Reynolds number deﬁned as Re = UL D ρL µL (9.49) Equation (9. there are two sets of similar characteristics.50) For larger Reynolds numbers. All these possibilities are diﬀerent.48) Inserting equating (9. However. it can be approximated for several regimes.44 (9.52) . The ﬁrst regime is for Re < 1 where Stokes’ Law can be approximated as CD ∞ = In transitional region 1 < Re < 1000 CD ∞ = 24 Re 1+ 1 Re2/3 6 (9. However. The ﬂow against the gravity and heavier density solid particles. 1 and 4 and the second set is 2 and 3. and D is the equivalent radius of the particles. The discussion here is about the last case (4) because very little is known about the other cases.1 Solid Particles with Heavier Density ρS > ρL Solid–liquid ﬂow has several combination ﬂow regimes. A particle in a middle of the vertical liquid ﬂow experience several forces.8. The ﬁrst set is similar because the solid particles are moving faster than the liquid velocity and vice versa for the second set (slower than the liquid). When the liquid velocity is very small. The force balance of spherical particle in ﬁeld viscous ﬂuid (creeping ﬂow) is gravity and buoyancy forces π D g (ρS − ρL ) 6 3 drag forces = CD ∞ π D2 ρL UL 2 8 (9. Re.278 CHAPTER 9. possibility. The drag coeﬃcient. MULTI–PHASE FLOW 4.
the velocity is small to lift the particle unless the density diﬀerence is very small (that very small force can lift the particles). The simplest assumption that the change of the cross section of the ﬂuid create a parameter that multiply the single particle as CD ∞ α = CD ∞ f (α) (9. the particle will sink into the liquid. the only velocity that can be applied is Trasiton the ﬂuid velocity.8. Thus. the solid particles Packed can be supplied at diﬀerent rate. It has to remember that not all the particle are uniform in size or shape. then the actual velocity that every particle experience depends on the void fraction. If the velocity is larger. USavarge . further increase will create a slug ﬂow. partialy Fully the discussion will be focus on the ﬂuid solid fluidized velocity. For the case of gas. the minimum velocity is a range of velocity rather than a sharp transition point. the particle will drift with the liquid. For particles. For the ﬁrst region. As the solid particles are not pushed by a pump but moved by the forces the ﬂuid applies to them. This regimes is referred to as Pneumatic conveying (see Figure 9. So far the discussion was about single particle. For small gas/liquid velocity. Thus. 9 It be wonderful if ﬂow was in the last range? The critical velocity could be found immediately. the function f (α) is not a linear function. the Reynolds number is in the second range9 . additional increase create “tunnels” of empty almost from solid particles. particles flow the particles are what some call ﬁxed ﬂuidized bed. SOLID–LIQUID FLOW 279 In most cases of solidliquid system. Additional increase of the ﬂuid velocity will move all the particles and this Fig. Additional increase in the ﬂuid velocity causes large turbulence and the ordinary domes are replaced by churn type ﬂow or large bubbles that are almost empty of the solid particles. Further increase of the ﬂuid ﬂow increases the empty spots to the whole ﬂow. The terminal velocity that left the solid is referred to as fully ﬂuidized bed.9). When there are more than one particle in the cross section. Thus. In very large range (especially for gas) the choking might be approached. Increasing the ﬂuid velocity beyond a minimum will move the parti∆Ptube cles and it is referred to as mix ﬂuidized bed. Minimum velocity is the velocity when the particle is “ﬂoating”. When the velocity of liquid is higher than the minimum velocity many particles will be ﬂoating.8. When the velocity is lower. This slug ﬂow is when slug shape (domes) are almost empty of the solid particle. 9. Yet. the sparse solid particles are dispersed all over. Consequently. the case of liquid. in many cases the middle region is applicable.9. In the literature there are many functions for various conditions.53) When the subscript α is indicating the void. In that case.
9.2 Solid With Lighter Density ρS < ρ and With Gravity This situation is minimal and very few cases exist. The buoyancy is accelerating the particle . several conclusions and/or expectations can be drawn. Furthermore.280 CHAPTER 9. this limitation does not (eﬀectively) exist for most cases of solid–liquid ﬂow. Nevertheless. The ﬂow is fully ﬂuidized for any liquid ﬂow rate. The issue of minimum terminal velocity is not exist and therefor there is no ﬁxed or mixed ﬂuidized bed. it must be pointed out that even in solid–gas.8. There is no known ﬂow map for this kind of ﬂow that this author is aware of. The forces that act on the spherical particle are the buoyancy force and drag force. However. There was very little investigations and known about the solid–liquid ﬂowing down (with the gravity). the speed of sound is reduced dramatically with increase of the solid particles concentration (further reading Fundamentals of Compressible Flow” chapter on Fanno Flow by this author is recommended). the ﬂuid density can be higher than the solid (especially with micro gravity). 9. In the gas phase. there is very little knowledge about the solid–liquid when the solid density is smaller than the liquid density. The speed of sound of the liquid does not change much. the velocity √ of gas is limited when reaching the Mach somewhere between 1/ k and 1 since the gas will be choked (neglecting the double choking phenomenon). MULTI–PHASE FLOW Fixed Bed Mixed Bed Slug or Plug Flow Turbulent Regimes Fast Fluidization Pneumatic Conveying Fig. Hence. One of the main diﬀerence between the liquid and gas ﬂow in this category is the speed of sound. The ﬂow patterns in solidliquid ﬂow. the length of conduit is very limited. Thus. Hence. 9. The ﬂow can have slug ﬂow but more likely will be in fast Fluidization regime.
In only certain conﬁgurations of the inﬁnite long pipes the counter–current ﬂow can exist. COUNTER–CURRENT FLOW and drag force are reducing the speed as 2 281 π D3 g(ρS − ρL ) CD ∞ π D2 ρL (US − UL ) = (9. the pressure diﬀerence and Open Channel gravity (body forces) dominates the ﬂow. when cavity is ﬁlled or emptied with a liquid. In most cases. Most people know that two holes are needed to empty the can easily and continuously.54) 6 8 From equation 9. the counter–current ﬂow can have opposite pressure gradient for short conduit. Counter–ﬂow in vertical tubes map.54. Liquid Body Foreces . Further increase of the liquid velocity appear as somewhat similar to slug ﬂow. Flow The inertia components of the ﬂow. it can observed that increase of the liquid velocity will increase the solid particle velocity at the same amount. The aﬀective body force “seems” by the particles can be in some cases larger than the gravity. 9. For example. For example. Thus. However. UL /US → 0. physical properties) positive while the pressure diﬀerence in the other phase can be negative. Annular Extented Flow In that case.9. for large velocity of the ﬂuid it can be observed that UL /US → 1. for a small ﬂuid velocity the velocity ratio is very large. some of the particles enter into the liquid core. the possibility to have counter–current ﬂow is limited to having short length of tubes. Otherwise. cannot compensate for the Flow pressure gradient. the ﬂow will be in a pulse regime. be ﬁnite. The solid–liquid horizontal ﬂow has some similarity to horizontal gas–liquid ﬂow. Typically if only one hole is opened on the top of the can. However. The countercurrent ﬂow occurs. This kind of ﬂow is probably the most common to be realized by the masses. for example. the heavy phase (liquid) is pushed by the gravity and lighter phase (gas) is driven by the pressure diﬀerence. In short tube. The ﬂow regimes will be similar but the transition will be in diﬀerent points. the liquid will ﬂow in pulse regime. Initially the solid particles will be carried by the liquid to the top. 9. opening a can of milk or juice. But in most cases. for Pulse Flow Inpossible long tubes.9. The two phase regimes “occurs” mainly in entrance to the cavity. Hence. The pressure diﬀerence in the interface must Fig. When the liquid velocity increase and became turbulent. this author have not seen any evidence that show the annular ﬂow does not appear in solid–liquid ﬂow.9 Counter–Current Flow This discussion will be only on liquid–liquid systems (which also includes liquidgas systems). the or Dripping Flow pressure diﬀerence in one phase can be f (D/L.10.
There are more things to be examined and to be studied. It also can be noticed that if there is one hole (oriﬁce) and a long and narrow tube. Then. If there are two holes.). 9. . This is opposed to counter–current solid–gas ﬂow when almost no pulse was observed. The upper compartment is ﬁlled with the heavy phase (liquid. elongated pulse ﬂow was observed but measured. it can be noticed that the solid–gas is faster than the liquid–gas ﬂow. liquid ﬂows through one hole and the air through the second hole and the ﬂow will be continuous. There must be other ﬂow regimes that were not observed or deﬁned. the heavy liquid is leaving the can. Figure 9. Counter–current ﬂow in a can (the left ﬁgure) has only one hole thus pulse ﬂow and a ﬂow with two holes (right picture). the phases ﬂow turns into diﬀerent direction (see Figure 9. There are three ﬂow regimes10 that have been observed. the pressure in the can increase. Then the pressure in the can is reduced compared to the outside and some lighter liquid (gas)entered into the can. The ﬁrst ﬂow pattern is pulse ﬂow regime. Initially. in some cases. 9.282 CHAPTER 9. MULTI–PHASE FLOW Fig. water solution. due to the gravity. In this ﬂow regime.11. Picture of Countercurrent ﬂow in liquid–gas and solid–gas conﬁgurations. or small wood particles) by rotating the container. The container is made of two compartments. The name pulse ﬂow is used to signify that the ﬂow is ﬂowing in pulses that occurs in a certain frequency. This ﬁeld hasn’t been well explored. Even though the solid–gas ratio is smaller.12). 10 Caution! this statement should be considered as “so far found”. Fig. The air is “attempting” to enter the cavity to ﬁll the vacuum created thus forcing pulse ﬂow.11 depicts emptying of can ﬁlled with liquid.12. For example. the liquid will stay in the cavity (neglecting other phenomena such as dripping ﬂow.
9. However. there are someFlow one who claims that heavy liquid will be inside). In horizontal tubes. This situation is unstable for large diameter but as in static (see section (4. In very small Steam Flow diameters of tubes the counter–current ﬂow is not possible because of the surface tension (see section 4. In many situations. When the driving (body) force is very small. The analysis of the frequency is much more complex issue and will not be dealt here. The heavy liquid will ﬂow with the body forces (gravity).7). Annular Flow in Counter–current ﬂow The other ﬂow regime is annular ﬂow in which the heavier phase is on the periphery of Water the conduit (In the literature. Flood in vertical pipe. the discussion was focused on the vertical tubes. ﬂow with gravity or against it. 9. Probably.7) page 133) it can be considered stable for small diameters. At this point. Horizontal ﬂow is diﬀerent from vertical ﬂow from the stability issues. This process continue until almost the liquid is evacuated (some liquid stay due the surface tension). As opposed to the co–current ﬂow. Extended open channel ﬂow retains the characteristic of open channel that the lighter liquid (almost) does not eﬀect the heavier liquid ﬂow. no counter–current ﬂow possible. 9. COUNTER–CURRENT FLOW 283 and some heavy liquid will starts to ﬂow. . the counter–current ﬂow has no possibility for these two cases. if the can was on the sun (ignoring the heat transfer issue). but somehow it contradicts with the experimental evidence. the volume ﬂow rate of the two phase is almost equal. Additional increase of the diameter will change the ﬂow regime into extended open channel ﬂow. The cycle duration can be replaced by frequency. Thus it should be considered as non existent ﬂow.” In the vertical co–current ﬂow there are two possibilities. the pulsing ﬂow will start and larger diameter will increase the ﬂow and turn the ﬂow into annular ﬂow. Example of such ﬂow in the nature is water falls in which water ﬂows down and air (wind) ﬂows up. The driving force is the second parameter which eﬀects the ﬂow existence. A heavier liquid layer can ﬂow above a lighter liquid.9. there is an additional ﬂow regime which is stratiﬁed .13. Further increase of the body force will move the ﬂow to be in the extended “open channel ﬂow. one or more of the assumptions that the analysis based is erroneous). Consider the can in zero gravity ﬁeld.1 Horizontal Counter–Current Flow Up to this point.9. The duration the cycle depends on several factors. The analysis is provided. the ﬂow regime in the can moves from pulse to annular ﬂow. A ﬂow in a very narrow tube with heavy ﬂuid above the lighter ﬂuid should be considered as a separate issue. length with some combinations of the physical properties (surface tension etc) determines the point where the counter ﬂow can start. The ratio of the diameter to the Fig. no counter–current ﬂow is possible.
This problem appears in nuclear engineering (or boiler engineering) where there is a need to make sure that liquid (water) inserted into the pipe reaching the heating zone. horizontal counter–current ﬂow. QL . Additionally. coexist. mass transfer. When there is no water (in liquid phase). Additional increase of the gas velocity will bring it to a point where the liquid will ﬂow in a reverse direction and/or disappear (dried out). The ﬂow map of the horizontal ﬂow is diﬀerent f (D/L.2 Flooding and Reversal Flow The limits of one kind the counter–current ﬂow regimes. The liquid velocity at very low gas velocity is constant but not uniform.14. To analyze this situation consider a two dimensional conduit with a liquid inserted in the left side as depicted in Figure 9. . Fig. The ﬂow will change to pulse ﬂow when the heavy liquid ﬂow rate increases. the ﬂow will be stratiﬁed counter–current ﬂow. etc11 . this increase terminates the two phase ﬂow possibility. A simpliﬁed model for this situation is for a two dimensional conﬁguration where the liquid is D ﬂowing down and the gas is ﬂowing up as shown h in Figure 9. The change to pulse ﬂow increases the pressure loss dramatically. However. It is assumed that both ﬂuids are W ξ x y ﬂowing in a laminar regime and steady state. physical properties) from the vertical ﬂow and is shown in Figure 9. that is stratiﬁed ﬂow are discussed here.15. the pressure diﬀerence in the (x direction) is known and equal to zero. 9.15. A ﬂow map to explain the cal ﬂow unless the angle of inclination is very small. is unknown. The boundLiquid Gas Flow ary conditions for the liquid is that velocity at the Flow wall is zero and the velocity at the interface is the same for both phases UG = UL or τi G = τi L . closing the window of this kind of ﬂow. The stratiﬁed counter ﬂow has a lower pressure loss (for the liquid side). A diagram to explain the As it will be shown later. The steam will ﬂow in the opposite direction.284 CHAPTER 9. the ﬁre can be too large or/and the water supply failed below a critical value the water turn into steam. the ﬁre could melt or damage the boiler. 11 The circular conﬁguration is under construction and will be appeared as a separated article momentarily. A ﬂow in an angle of inclination is closer to verti. wavy interface. both conditions cannot ﬂood in a two dimension geometry. In some situations. 9. Further increase of the ﬂow will result in a single phase ﬂow regime.13. MULTI–PHASE FLOW Single phase Flow or Dripping Flow When the ﬂow rate of both ﬂuids is very small. The model can be improved by considering turbulence. The liquid ﬂow rate.14.Fig. Liquid Flow Rate Pulse Flow Straitified Flow 9. Further increase of the gas velocity will reduce the average liquid velocity. Thus.9. it is assumed that the entrance eﬀects L can be neglected. Thus.
9. It is assumed that the last assumption does not contribute or change signiﬁcantly the results.56) (9. the gravitational force has to be balanced by the shear forces as dτxy = ρL g dx The integration of equation (9.58) to obtained µL or in a simpliﬁed form as dUy ρL g (x − h) τi = + dx µL µL Equation (9.).63) . The liquid ﬁlm thickness is unknown and can be expressed as a function of the above boundary conditions. C1 .58) (9.60) dUy = ρL g (x − h) + τi dx (9. τi = ρL g h + C1 The integration constant is then Ci = τi − ρL g h which leads to τxy = ρL g (x − h) + τi Substituting the newtonian ﬂuid relationship into equation (9. COUNTER–CURRENT FLOW 285 This model is presented to exhibits the trends and the special features of countercurrent ﬂow. The underline rational for this assumption is that gas density does not change signiﬁcantly for short pipes (for more information look for the book “Fundamentals of Compressible Flow” in Potto book series in the Fanno ﬂow chapter.60) can be integrate to yield Uy = ρL g µL x2 τi x − hx + + C2 2 µL (9.55) results in τxy = ρL g x + C1 (9. Hence. is zero and the integration coeﬃcient can be found to be C2 = 0 The liquid velocity proﬁle is then ρL g µL x2 τi x − hx + 2 µL (9.61) (9. can be found from the boundary condition where τxy (x = h) = τi . Thus. Assuming the pressure diﬀerence in the ﬂow direction for the gas is constant and uniform. On the liquid side. [U (x = 0) = 0].57) The liquid velocity at the wall.59) (9.62) Uy = (9.55) The integration constant.9. the liquid ﬂow rate is a function of the boundary conditions.
65) The solution for equation (9. also. But. There are three solutions for equation (9.69) is equated to zero.67) If the shear stress is below this critical shear stress τi0 then no part of the liquid will have a reversed velocity.68) results in Q h2 (3 τi − 2 g h ρL ) = w 6 µL (9.66) The maximum x value is limited by the liquid ﬁlm thickness. The notation of τi 0 denotes the special value at which a starting shear stress value is obtained to have reversed ﬂow.68) Where w is the thickness of the conduit (see Figure 9. the ﬂow rate is zero when 3 τi = 2 g h ρL . This request is identical to the demand in which 2 g h ρL 3 τi critical = (9. h. The ﬁrst two solutions are identical in which the ﬁlm height is h = 0 and the liquid ﬂow rate is zero.69).15).64) The velocity can vanish (zero) inside the ﬁlm in another point which can be obtained from 0= ρL g µL τi x x2 − hx + 2 µL (9.286 The velocity at the liquid–gas interface is Uy (x = h) = CHAPTER 9.69) It is interesting to ﬁnd the point where the liquid mass ﬂow rate is zero. This point can be obtained when equation (9. The point where the liquid ﬂow rate is zero is important and it is referred to as initial ﬂashing point. Q = w h h Uy dx = 0 0 ρL g µL x2 τi x − hx + dx 2 µL (9. MULTI–PHASE FLOW τi h ρL g h2 − µL 2 µL (9. The ﬂow rate can be calculated by integrating the velocity across the entire liquid thickness of the ﬁlm.70) . Integration equation (9. The minimum shear stress that start to create reversible velocity is obtained when x = h which is 0= ρL g µL h2 τi h − hh + 2 µL h g ρL → τi0 = 2 (9.65) is x@UL =0 = 2 h − 2 τi µL g ρL (9.
72) Simplifying equation (9. .75) Where ∆y = L is the entire length of the ﬂow and ∆P is the pressure diﬀerence of the entire length. the gas is assumed to be in a laminar ﬂow as well. for simplicity reasons. the critical upward interface velocity is (2−1) 3 2 1 ρL g h2 (9. The wall shear stress is τi Ucritical interf ace = τL @wall = µL dU dx x=0 ρL g 2 g h ρL 1 B0 = µL 2¨ x µL ¨ − h + 3 µL x=0 (9. In reality the logarithmic equation should be used ( a discussion can be found in “Fundamentals of Compressible Flow” a Potto project book). For this shear stress.74) can be rewritten as dτxy G ∆P ∆P = = dx ∆y L (9. If the gas was compressible with an ideal gas equation of state then the pressure gradient is logarithmic. it is assumed that pressure gradient is linear.73) Again. the linear equation is used.72) the direction) 12 becomes (notice the change of the sign accounting for g h ρL 3 τL @wall = (9. for a given ﬁlm thickness. This assumption means or implies that the gas is incompressible ﬂow. the diﬀerential equation is ∆P d2 UG = dx2 µG L 12 Also (9. For simplicity.9. The shear stress on gas side is balanced by the pressure gradient in the y direction. The momentum balance on element in the gas side is dτxy G dP = dx dy (9.74) The pressure gradient is a function of the gas compressibility. Utilizing the Newtonian relationship.76) noticing that equation (9.9. equation (9. Here.67)). reduces the ﬂow rate to zero or eﬀectively “drying” the liquid (which is diﬀerent then equation (9. Thus.71) 6 µL The wall shear stress is the last thing that will be done on the liquid side.70) has to be equal g h ρL to support the weight of the liquid. COUNTER–CURRENT FLOW 287 This critical shear stress.
The velocity at the interface is the same as the liquid phase velocity or the shear stress are equal.80) (a) (b) or (9. equation (9.84) The velocity in Equation (9. cause this assumption to be not physical.76) can be integrated twice to yield UG = ∆P 2 x + C1 x + C2 µG L (9. becomes ρL g h2 ∆P = h2 − D2 + C1 (h − D) 6 µL µG L The last integration constant. in that case.77) This velocity proﬁle must satisfy zero velocity at the right wall. of the equal velocities.79) (9. However.288 CHAPTER 9.79)(a). Mathematically these boundary conditions are UG (x = D) = 0 and UG (x = h) = UL (x = h) τG (x = h) = τL (x = h) Applying B.77) results in UG = 0 = ∆P D2 + C1 D + C2 µG L ∆P → C2 = − D 2 + C1 D µG L (9. it is easy to show that the gas shear stress is not equal to the liquid shear stress at the interface (when the velocities are assumed to be the equal). C1 can be evaluated as C1 = ρL g h 2 ∆P (h + D) − 6 µL (h − D) µG L (9. MULTI–PHASE FLOW Equation (9.84) is equal to the velocity equation (9.78) Which leads to UG = ∆P x2 − D2 + C1 (x − D) µG L (9. .81) At the other boundary condition. the gas velocity proﬁle is UG = ∆P ρL g h2 (x − D) ∆P (h + D) (x − D) x2 − D2 + − µG L 6 µL (h − D) µG L (9. (9.78) into equation (9.64) when (x = h).82) With the integration constants evaluated.C.83) (9. The diﬀerence in shear stresses at the interface due to this assumption.
The shear stress at the interface must be equal.87) (9. the two conditions can co–exist. The wall shear stress is τG @wall = µG dUG dx = µG x=D ∆P 2 x + µG L 2 g h ρL 2 h ∆P − 3 µG µG L (9.91) The Required Pressure Diﬀerence . Then if the interface becomes wavy.88) The gas velocity at the interface is then UG @x=h = ∆P h2 − D 2 + µG L 2 g h ρL 2 h ∆P − 3 µG µG L (h − D) (9.89) This gas interface velocity is diﬀerent than the velocity of the liquid side. COUNTER–CURRENT FLOW 289 The second choice is to use the equal shear stresses at the interface. condition (9.79)(b). Since there no possibility to have both the shear stress and velocity on both sides of the interface. This condition requires that µG dUG dUL = µL dx dx (9. It was assumed that the interface is straight but is impossible.9. The velocity at interface can have a “slip” in very low density and for short distances. diﬀerent thing(s) must happen.85) The expressions for the derivatives are gas side liquid side 2 h ∆P 2 g h ρL + µG C1 = L 3 As result.9.90) x=D or in a simpliﬁed form as τG @wall = 2 ∆P (D − h) 2 g h ρL + L 3 (9. if no special eﬀects occurs. the integration constant is C1 = The gas velocity proﬁle is then UG = ∆P x2 − D2 + µG L 2 g h ρL 2 h ∆P − 3 µG µG L (x − D) 2 g h ρL 2 h ∆P − 3 µG µG L (9.86) (9.
However. the total balance is needed.93) =L g h ρL + D ∆P 3 (9. The gravity force on the gas can be neglected in most cases. There are two forces that act against the gravity and two forces with the gravity. To calculate the required pressure that cause the liquid to dry.16 describes the general forces that acts on the control volume. However. MULTI–PHASE FLOW The pressure diﬀerence to D create the ﬂooding (drying) has to take into account the fact that h W x y the surface is wavy.96) (9. as ρgLh L ﬁrst estimate the waviness of the Lτw L Lτw G surface can be neglected.94) results in 4ρgLh = (2 h − D) ∆P 3 or ∆P = 4ρgLh 3 (2 h − D) (9. The control volume include the gas and liquid volumes.92) The total momentum balance is (see Figure 9. General forces diagram to calculated the in a The actual pressure diﬀerence can two dimension geometry. The gravity force on the liquid is the liquid volume times the liquid volume as V olme/w FgL = ρ g hL (9. be between these two assumptions but not must be between them. The estimation of the pressure diﬀerence under the assumption of equal shear stress can be applied.94) Simplifying equation (9.16. 9. Fig.290 CHAPTER 9. Figure 9. In D ∆P the same fashion the pressure difference under the assumption the equal velocity can be calculated.95) .16) A/w G A/w L f orce due to pressure FgL + L τw = L τw + Substituting the diﬀerent terms into (9. This model and its assumptions are too simplistic and the actual pressure diﬀerence is larger. this explanation is to show magnitudes and trends and hence it provided here.93) result in ρgLh + L 2 ∆P (D − h) 2 g h ρL + L 3 D ∆P (9.
the appropriate model for the ﬂow regime should be employed.96) indicates that when D > 2 h is a special case (extend open channel ﬂow). MULTI–PHASE CONCLUSION 291 This analysis shows far more reaching conclusion that initial anticipation expected. Perhaps as a side conclusion but important. There are many ﬂow regimes in multi–phase ﬂow that “regular” ﬂuid cannot be used to solve it such as ﬂooding. In other case where more accurate measurement are needed a speciﬁc model is required. Unless the derivations or assumptions are wrong.10. the assumption of straight line is not appropriate when two liquid with diﬀerent viscosity are ﬂowing.9. In that case. this analysis equation (9.10 Multi–Phase Conclusion For the ﬁrst time multi–phase is included in a standard introductory textbook on ﬂuid mechanics. . The interface between the two liquid ﬂowing together is wavy. 9. There are several points that should be noticed in this chapter. The homogeneous models or combined models like Lockhart–Martinelli can be employed in some cases.
MULTI–PHASE FLOW .292 CHAPTER 9.
1 Vectors Vector is a quantity with direction as oppose to scalar. and Uz is the vector component in the z direction.1.1 where Ux is the vector component in the x direction. this book on ﬂuid mechanics issues could be read by most readers. some of the material appears in specialty books such as third order diﬀerential equations (and thus it is expected that the student is not familiar with this material. Vector in Cartesian coor .). A. These topics are present so that one with some minimal background could deal with the mathematics that encompass within basic ﬂuid mechanics. This appendix condenses material that spread in many various textbooks some of which are advance. There is very minimal original material which appears without proofs.1) z U Ux Uy y Uz x Vector can be normalized and in Cartesian coordi. Thus. The material is not presented in “educational” order but in importance order. Furthermore. Uy is the vector component in the y direction. A. Hence without additional reading. the 293 Fig. The length of the vector in Cartesian coordinates (the coordinates system is relevant) is U = Ux 2 + Uy 2 + Uz 2 (A.dinates system. nates depicted in Figure A.APPENDIX A The Mathematics Backgrounds for Fluid Mechanics In this appendix a review of selected topics in mathematics related to ﬂuid mechanics is presented.
Then the following can be said U U V 1. U ·V = U V U U  · V  cos (∠(U . a (b U ) = a b U The multiplications and the divisions have somewhat diﬀerent meaning in a scalar operations. The following are vectors.2. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS U Ux ˆ Uy ˆ Uz ˆ = i+ j+ k U U U U U = (A. and h3 ) as angle U V U U × V = U  · V  sin (∠(U .2) and general orthogonal coordinates U = U U1 U2 U3 = h1 + h2 + h3 U U U U (A. regular scalar multiplication angle between vectors W V U Fig.4) The second multiplication is the “cross” product which in vector as opposed to a scalar as in the “dot” product. The ﬁrst multiplication is the “dot” product which is deﬁned by equation (A.294 unit vector is APPENDIX A. A. The right hand rule. V )) (A. a (U + V ) = a U + a V 6.1. and W and for in this discussion a and b are scalars. Zero vector is such that U + 0 = U 4.3) Vectors have some what similar rules to scalars which will be discussed in the next section. U + V = V + U 3.1 Vector Algebra Vectors obey several standard mathematical operations which are applicable to scalars. h2 .4). multiplication of U × V results in W . The “cross” product is deﬁned in an orthogonal coordinate (h1 . The results of this multiplication is scalar but has no negative value as in regular scalar multiplication. (U + V ) + W = (U + V + W ) = U + (V + W ) 2. U . There are two kinds of multiplications for vectors. A. Additive inverse U − U = 0 U 5.5) . V )) n (A. V .
10) (A. The multiplication in vector world have two deﬁnition one which results in a scalar and one which results in a vector.A. This multiplication has a negative value which means that it is a change of the direction. One of the consequence of this deﬁnitions in Cartesian coordinates is i =j =k =0 In general for orthogonal coordinates this condition is written as h1 × h1 = h1 = h2 = h3 = 0 where hi is the unit vector in the orthogonal system.8) The most complex of all these algebraic operations is the division. The number of the possible combinations of the division is very large. Additionally note that order of multiplication is signiﬁcant. It turn out that these combinations have very little1 physical meaning. The right hand rule is referred to the direction of resulting vector. and n is a unit vector perpendicular to both U and V which obeys the right hand rule.6) (A.9) h2 × h1 = −h3 h3 × h2 = −h1 h1 × h3 = −h2 2 2 2 2 2 2 (A. etc.9) in matrix form as h1 U × V = U2 V2 h2 U2 V2 h3 U3 V3 (A. The reason that these current combinations. . is that these combinations have physical meaning.1. For example. However. or vector with the angle.7) (A. these above four combinations are not the only possibilities (not including the left hand system). The previous experience is that help to deﬁne multiplication help to deﬁnition the division. Additional possibility is that every combination of one vector element 1 This author did ﬁnd any physical meaning these combinations but there could be and those the word “little” is used. that is scalar associated with cos θ vectors is associated with sin θ. Multiplication combinations shows that there are at least four possibilities of combining the angle with scalar and vector. Note that U and V are not necessarily orthogonal. the result of the division can be a scalar combined or associated with the angle (with cos or sin). In right hand orthogonal coordinate system h1 × h2 = h3 h2 × h3 = h1 h3 × h1 = h2 The “cross” product can be written as U × V = (U2 V3 − U3 V2 ) h1 + (U3 V1 − U1 V3 ) h2 + (U1 V2 − U2 V1 ) h3 Equation (A. VECTORS 295 where θ is the angle between U and V .
Since every vector element has three possible elements the total combination is 9 = 3 × 3. The three vectors have a need for additional notation such of vector of vector which is referred to as a tensor.” This operator is a diﬀerential vector. There at least are two possibilities how to treat these elements. For example.296 APPENDIX A. One of these operations is nabla operator sometimes also called the “del operator. It turned out that combination of three vectors has a physical meaning.12) ˆ Where ˆ ˆ and k are denoting unit vectors in the x. and z directions. the gradient. For example. A compact presentation is a common way to handle the mathematics which simplify the calculations and explanations. j. =ˆ i ∂T ˆ ∂T ˆ ∂T +j +k ∂x ∂y ∂z (A. This tenser or the matrix can undergo regular linear algebra operations such as ﬁnding the eigenvalue values and the eigen “vectors. y. The following combination is commonly suggested U2 U3 U1 V V1 V1 1 U U1 U2 U3 = (A. respectively. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS is divided by the other vector element. and the Laplacian are based or could be constructed from this single operator.y. A scalar function is a function that provide a valued based on the coordinates (in Cartesian coordinates x. In multivariate calculus.z).13) . such as.” Also note the multiplying matrices and inverse matrix are also available operation to these tensors. divergence. the temperature of the domain might be expressed as a scalar ﬁeld.2 Diﬀerential Operators of Vectors Diﬀerential operations can act on scalar functions as well on vector and vector functions. the curl. Gradient This operation acts on a scalar function and results in a vector whose components are derivatives in the principle directions of a coordinate system. Many of the operations of vector world.1. in Cartesian coordinates the operation is =ˆ i ∂ ∂ ˆ ∂ +ˆ j +k ∂x ∂y ∂z (A. More diﬀerential operations can on scalar function can results in vector or vector function.11) V2 V V2 V2 U2 U3 U1 V3 V3 V3 One such example of this division is the pressure which the explanation is commonality avoided or eliminated from the ﬂuid mechanics books including the direct approach in this book. A. derivatives of diﬀerent directions can represented as a vector or vector function. i.
y.1. Applying a divergence on the result creates a scalar ﬁeld again. z) = Nx (x. Laplacian The new operation can be constructed from “dot” multiplication of the nabla. d‘Alembertian As a super–set for four coordinates (very minimal used in ﬂuid mechanics) and it reﬀed to as d’Alembertian or the wave operator. in honor of PierreSimon Laplace (23 March 1749 – 5 March 1827). z)ˆ + Ny (x. The divergence is the similar to “dot” product which results in scalar. y.A. in Cartesian coordinate is results in div N = ·N= ∂Nx ∂Ny ∂Nz + + ∂x ∂y ∂z (A.15) (A.18) . This operator also referred as the Laplacian operator. N . Curl Similar to the “cross product” a similar operation can be deﬁned for the nabla (note the “right hand rule” notation) for Cartesian coordinate as curl N = ×N = ∂Nz ∂Ny − ∂y ∂z ∂Nx ∂Nz − ∂z ∂x ˆ i+ ˆ+ j ∂Ny ∂Nx − ∂x ∂y ˆ k (A. for Cartesian coordinates is ˆ N (x.16) Note that the result is a vector. A vector domain (function) assigns a vector to each point such as velocity for example. A gradient acting on a scalar ﬁeld creates a vector ﬁeld. This combined operations is known as the “div grad” which is given in Cartesian coordinates by · = ∂2 ∂2 ∂2 + 2+ 2 2 ∂x ∂y ∂z (A. y. and it deﬁned as 2 = 2 − 1 ∂2 c2 ∂ 2 t (A. z)k i j The dot product of these two vectors. VECTORS 297 Divergence The same idea that was discussed in vector section there are two kinds of multiplication in the vector world and two will be for the diﬀerential operators. y.17) This combination is commonality denoted as 2 .14) The divergence results in a scalar function which similar to the concept of the vectors multiplication of the vectors magnitude by the cosine of the angle between the vectors. z)ˆ + Nz (x.
edu/mathews/c2003/HarmonicFunctionMod. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS Divergence Theorem Mathematicians call to or refer to a subset of The Reynolds Transport Theorem as the Divergence Theorem. For example. · · · )e3 + · · · (A. The cross and dot products when the come under diﬀerentiation can be look as scalar.20) V Note the strange notation of “Σ” which refers to the area. or called it Gauss’ Theorem (Carl Friedrich Gauss 30 April 1777 23 February 1855). x2 . y. x3 . If N is a gradient of a scalar ﬁeld Π(x. the dot product of operation 2 for more information http://math. This results reduces equation.1. In Gauss notation it is written as ( V · N ) dV = A N · n dA (A. · · · )e2 + f3 (x1 . This theorem is applicable for a ﬁx control volume and the derivative can enters into the integral.html . x2 . to a balance of the ﬂuxes through the surface.21) for harmonic function (solutions Laplace equation see2 Harminic functions) then the left side vanishes which is useful identity for ideal ﬂow analysis.19) In GaussOstrogradsky Theorem (Mikhail Vasilievich Ostrogradsky (September 24. This subset can further produces several interesting identities. the harmonic functions can be added or subtracted because inside the volume these functions contributions is eliminated throughout the volume. Many engineering class present this theorem as a theorem on its merit without realizing that it is a subset of Reynolds Transport Theorem.22) where e i is the unit vector in the i direction.3 Diﬀerentiation of the Vector Operations The vector operation sometime fell under (time or other) derivative. z) then it can insert into identity to produce ( V · ( Φ)) dV = V 2 Φ dV = A Φ · n dA (A. x2 . · · · )e1 + f2 (x1 . A vector is made of the several scalar functions such as R = f1 (x1 . A.298 APPENDIX A. x3 . 1801 – January 1. Thus. Special case of equation (A.fullerton. 1862).21) Since the deﬁnition of Φ = N . x3 . The notation is a bit diﬀerent from Gauss and it is written in Ostrogradsky notation as ∂Q ∂R ∂P + + ∂x ∂y ∂z dx dy dz = Σ (P p + Qq + Rr) dΣ (A. normally for steady state. The basic of these relationships is explored.
There are several orthogonal coordinates which appears in ﬂuid mechanics operation which include this list: Cartesian coordinates. the chain role is applicable.24) (A. Prolate spheroidal coordinates. Cylindrical coordinates.23) The ﬁrst part is zero because the cross product with itself is zero. As in operation on scalar time derivative of dot or cross of constant velocity is zero. Ellipsoidal coordinates. The second part is zero because Newton law (acceleration is along the path of R).1. The results of operations of two vectors is similar to regular multiplication since the vectors operation obey “regular” addition and multiplication roles. velocity. Elliptic .25) (A. Yet. Parabolic coordinates. VECTORS R · S = (xˆ + y 2 ˆ · (sin xˆ + exp(y)ˆ can be written as i j) i j) R d (R · S ) d = dt dt It can be noticed that d x sin x + y 2 exp(y) R d (R · S ) = = dt dt dx d sin x d y 2 d y2 sin x + + exp(y) + exp(y) dt dt dt dt xˆ + y 2 ˆ · sin xˆ + exp(y)ˆ i j i j 299 It can be noticed that the manipulation of the simple above example obeys the regular chain role. Hence the chain role apply for dot operation. and acceleration. Oblate spheroidal coordinates. Parabolic cylindrical coordinates Paraboloidal coordinates. Spherical coordinates.1 Orthogonal Coordinates These vectors operations can appear in diﬀerent orthogonal coordinates system. it can done for the cross product. the most interesting is U d dU R (R × U ) = U × U + R × dt dt (A. A.1.3.A. R S d dR dS R (R · S ) = ·S + ·R dt dt dt And the the chain role for the cross operation is R S d dR dS R (R × S ) = ×S + ×R dt dt dt It follows that derivative (notice the similarity to scalar operations) of d dR R (R · R ) = 2 R dt at There are several identities that related to location. Similarly.
Historically.mcs. in most cases. These three diﬀerent rs are some what similar to any of the Cartesian coordinate. Because there are so many coordinates system is reasonable to develop these operations for any for any coordinates system. Note the advantage of cylindrical (polar) coordinates in description of geometry or location relative to a center point.27) The line element and volume element are ds = dr2 + (r dθ) + dz 2 2 dr r dθ dz (A. Cylindrical Coordinates The cylindrical coordinates are commonz ality used in situations where there is line of e1 symmetry or kind of symmetry. Julian (1952). ”The Origin of Polar Coordinates”. Bicyclide coordinates and Capcyclide coordinates. Cylindrical Coordinate System. x these coordinate were introduced for geometrical problems about 2000 years ago3 . the ﬁgure shows that the coordinates are r. The conversion between the Cartesian coordinate and the Cylindrical is r= x2 + y 2 θ = arctan y x y z=z (A. The ﬁrst one represents the vector that is the direction of r while the second is the unit vector in the direction of the coordinate r. The cylindrical coordinates are shown in Figure A. These coordinates rer θ r duced the work. in this case.28) The gradient in cylindrical coordinates is given by =r ∂ 1 ∂ ∂ +θ +z ∂r r ∂θ ∂z (A.3. θ. The new concept here is the length factor. This kind sity uations occur in pipe ﬂow even if the pipe is not exactly symmetrical. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS cylindrical coordinates. The coordinate θ is angle. http://wwwhistory. The meaning of − r and r are diﬀerent. Flatdisk cyclide coordinates. The second coordinate θ has unite coordinate θ. Bipolar cylindrical coordinates Conical coordinates. Flatring cyclide coordinates.uk/Extras/Coolidge Polars. and z. In Fig. Conversation of the angel to units of length is done by length factor which is. American Mathematical Monthly 59: 7885.html.26) The reverse transformation is x = r cos θ y = r sin θ z=z (A. θ. because probθ x lem is reduced a two dimensions. r. A. Note that unite coordinates are denoted as r. → and z. . Bispherical coordinates. Toroidal coordinates.3.29) 3 Coolidge.ac.stand.300 APPENDIX A. Three common systems typical to ﬂuid mechanics will be presented and followed by a table and methods to present all the above equations. In this book the dimensional chapter shows that in physics that derivatives have to have same units in order to compare them or use them.
0 < θ < 2 π while the second angle (colatitude) is only 0 < φ < π.1.34) y = r sin φ sin θ z = r cos φ (A.32) Spherical Coordinates z The spherical coordinates system is a φ r threedimensional coordinates which is imθ provement or further modiﬁcations of the cylinφ r drical coordinates.31) (A. The second angle is between the positive y–axis and the vector as shown in Figure A. In ﬂuid y mechanics such situations exist in bubble dynamics.4. Note that the ﬁrst angle (azimuth or longitude) θ range is between Fig. VECTORS The curl is written ×N = 1 ∂Nz ∂Nθ − r ∂θ ∂z 1 r The Laplacian is deﬁned by · = 1 ∂ r ∂r r ∂ ∂r + 1 ∂2 ∂2 + 2 2 ∂θ 2 r ∂z r+ ∂Nr ∂Nz − ∂z ∂r ∂ (r Nθ ) ∂Nθ − ∂r ∂θ θ+ z 301 (A. boom explosion. A location is represented by a radius and two angles.36) The divergence in spherical coordinate is ·N = 1 ∂ r2 Nr 1 ∂ (Nθ sin θ) 1 ∂Nφ + + r2 ∂r r sin θ ∂θ r sin θ ∂φ (A. A.33) Line element and element volume are ds = dr2 + (r cos θ dθ) + (r sin θ dφ) 2 2 dV = r2 sin θ dr dθ dφ (A. Spherical system used for z y x θ cases where spherical symmetry exist. sound wave propagax tion etc. The ﬁrst angle between projection on x − y plane and the positive x–axis.37) .30) (A. Spherical Coordinate System. The conversion between Cartesian coordinates to Spherical coordinates x = r sin φ cos θ The reversed transformation is r= x2 + y 2 + z 2 φ = arccos z r (A.35) The gradient is =r ∂ ∂ ˆ1 ∂ + φ 1 +θ ∂r r ∂θ r sin θ ∂φ (A. The radius is the distance between the origin and the location.4.A.
In mathematics it is denoted as q while in engineering is denotes h.42) . The general Orthogonal is r. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS The curl in spherical coordinates is ×N = 1 r sin θ 1 r 1 ∂ r2 ∂r ∂ (Nφ sin θ) ∂Nθ − ∂θ ∂φ 1 ∂Nr ∂ (rNφ ) − sin θ ∂φ ∂r ∂ ∂r 1 ∂ 2 sin θ ∂θ r r+ ˆ 1 ˆ θ + r ∂ ∂θ ∂ (rNθ ) ∂Nr − ∂r ∂θ 1 ∂2 r2 sin2 θ ∂φ2 (A.302 APPENDIX A. the proper notation for these coeﬃcients. and z . While the θ is the same the meaning is diﬀerent and diﬀerent notations need. The coordinates distance coeﬃcient is in ase cre in e2 the change the diﬀerential to the actual distance. the unit vectors are: r. As in almost all cases.3. Also note that the derivative of the coordinate in the case of cylindrical coordinate is ∂θ and unit ˆ vector is θ.39) General Orthogonal Coordinates There are several orthogonal system and general form is needed. Since it is engineering book the h is adapted. there is dispute what with unit vectors.2. θ. The notation for the presentation is required general notation of the units vectors is ei and coordinates distance coeﬃcient is hi where 1 e1 q i is 1. The derivative quantity will be denoted by q superscript. However. For example in cylindrical coordinates. The units r and z are units ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ with length. θ is lengthens unit vector and the coordinate distance coeﬃcient in this case Fig.41) Gradient The gradient in general coordinate for a scalar function T is the nabla operator in general orthogonal coordinates as T = T T T e1 ∂T e2 ∂T e3 ∂T + + h1 ∂q 1 h2 ∂q 2 h3 ∂q 3 (A.5.38) ˆ φ The Laplacian in spherical coordinates is 2 = r2 + sin θ + (A. A. The length of d d 2 = i=1 hk dq k 2 (A.40) The nabla operator in general orthogonal coordinates is = e1 ∂ e2 ∂ e3 ∂ + + 1 2 h1 ∂q h2 ∂q h3 ∂q 3 (A.
43) For general orthogonal coordinate system the curl is ∂ e1 ∂ (h3 N3 ) − 3 (h2 N2 ) + 2 h2 h3 ∂q ∂q ∂ ∂ e3 ∂ ∂ (h1 N1 ) − 1 (h3 N3 ) + (h2 N2 ) − 2 (h1 N1 ) 3 1 ∂q ∂q h1 h2 ∂q ∂q ×N = e2 h3 h1 (A.45) The following table showing the diﬀerent values for selected orthogonal system.6.1.44) The Laplacian of a scalar equals 1 ∂ h1 h2 h3 ∂q 1 h2 h3 ∂φ h1 ∂q 1 ∂ ∂q 2 h3 h1 ∂φ h2 ∂q 2 ∂ ∂q 3 h1 h2 ∂φ h3 ∂q 3 (A. VECTORS The divergence of a vector equals ·N = 1 ∂ ∂ ∂ (N1 h2 h3 ) + 2 (N2 h3 h1 ) + 3 (N3 h1 h2 ) . Parabolic coordinates by user WillowW using Blender. A. .A. 2 φ= + + Fig. 1 h1 h2 h3 ∂q ∂q ∂q 303 (A.
2 Ordinary Diﬀerential Equations (ODE) In this section a brief summary of ODE is presented. the ﬁrst ODEs are easier to solve and they are the base for equations of higher order equation. second derivative etc4 . . Ordinary diﬀerential equations are deﬁned by the order of the highest derivative.47) 4 Note that mathematically. du . The most general form is f u.g. The meaning of linear equation is that the operation is such that a L (u1 ) + b L (u2 ) = L (a u1 + b u2 ) (A.2. However. it is possible to deﬁne fraction of derivative. ODE are categorized into linear and nonlinear equations.1. If the highest derivative is ﬁrst order the equation is referred as ﬁrst order diﬀerential equation etc. It is suggested that the reader interested in depth information should read “Diﬀerential Equations and Boundary Value Problems” by Boyce de–Prima or any other book in this area. Or this dt dy2 operation on y2 is dt + y2 and the summation of operation the sum operation of +y L(y1 + y2 ) = y1dt 2 + y1 + y2 . Orthogonal coordinates systems (under construction please ignore) Orthogonal coordinates systems name Cartesian Cylindrical Spherical Paraboloidal Ellipsoidal Remarks 1 standard common common ? ? √ 1 1 1 u2 + v 2 √ h 2 1 r r u2 + v 2 3 1 1 r cos θ uv 1 x r r u λ q 2 y θ θ v µ 3 z z ϕ θ ν A.t dt =0 (A. The ﬁrst order equations have several forms and there is no one solution ﬁt all but families of solutions. there is no physical meaning to such a product according to this author believe. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS Table A. It is not intent to be a replacement to a standard textbook but as a quick reference.304 APPENDIX A.46) d An example of such linear operation L = dt + 1 acting on y is dy1 + y1 . Note that the derivatives are integers e. A. ﬁrst derivative.1 First Order Diﬀerential Equations As expect.
Example A.I.2.49) Equation can be integrated either analytically or numerically and the solution is du = U (u) X(t)dt (A.e) .48) can be written as F (t. u) = X(t) U (u). In that case it is said that F is spreadable and then equation (A. The initial condition is the value the function has at some points.48) can be written as du = X(t)dt U (u) (A.I.A.1: Solve the following equation du = ut dt with the initial condition u(t = 0) = u0 .2 Variables Separation or Segregation In some cases equation (A.b) (1. The name initial condition is used because the values are given commonly at initial time.50) The limits of the integral is (are) the initial condition(s).c) can be transferred to u = c et For the initial condition of u(0) = u0 then u = u0 et End Solution 2 2 (1. ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (ODE) Sometimes equation (A.I.I.b) becomes du = u t dt =⇒ ln (u) + ln (c) = t2 2 (1.47) can be simpliﬁed to the ﬁrst form as du = F (t.2. The separation yields du = t dt u The integration of equation (1.d) (1. (1.I. u) dt 305 (A.48) A.c) Equation (1.I.a) Solution The solution can be obtained by the variable separation method.I.
56) which indeed satisfy equation (A.2. .51) What is needed from N (x) is to provide a full diﬀerential such as N (x) dy d [N (x) g(x) y] + N (x) g(x) y = dx dx (A.55) (A.2.51) by unknown function N (x) transformed it to N (x) dy + N (x) g(x) y = N (x)m(x) dx (A.57) by dx and integrating results in N (x) g(x) y = The solution is then N (x) m(x) dx y= g(x) N (x) m(x) dx (A.54) is integrated to be ln (N (x)) = g(x)dx =⇒ N (x) = e g(x)dx (A. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS The Integral Factor Equations Another method is referred to as integration factor which deals with a limited but very important class of equations. This family is part of a linear equations.1 APPENDIX A.53) This condition (note that the previous methods is employed here) requires that d N (x) d N (x) = N (x) g(x) =⇒ = g(x) dx dx N (x) Equation (A.58) (A.306 A. The general form of the equation is dy + g(x) y = m(x) dx Multiplying equation (A.52) (A.57) e R g(x)dx (A.59) N (x) A special case of g(t) = constant is shown next.52) becomes d [N (x) g(x) y] = N (x) m(x) dx Multiplying equation (A.54) Using the diﬀerentiation chain rule provides dv du du dx d N (x) =e dx g(x)dx g(x) (A. Thus equation (A.53).
a) to be confused with the Bernoulli equation without the s that referred to the energy equation. ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (ODE) 307 Example A.59) provides y = e−x (ex + c) = 1 + c e−x End Solution A. This equation is non–linear part du + m(t)u = n(t) dt up (A. One such equation family is referred in the literature as the Bernoulli Equations5 .62) Example A. The actual solution is obtained by reversed equation which transferred solution to u = v (p−1) (A.3: Solve the following Bernoulli equation du + t2 u = sin(t) u3 dt 5 Not (1.61) The linearized equation can be solved using the linear methods.60) into a linear equation which is dv + (1 − p) m(t) v = (1 − p) n(t) dt (A.A.III.60) The transformation v = u1−p turns equation (A.3 Non–Linear Equations NonLinear equations are equations that the power of the function or the function derivative is not equal to one or their combination. .2: Find the solution for a typical problem in ﬂuid mechanics (the problem of Stoke ﬂow or the parachute problem) of dy +y =1 dx Solution Substituting m(x) = 1 and g(x) = 1 into equation (A. Many non linear equations can be transformed into linear equations and then solved with the linear equation techniques.2.2.
308 Solution The transformation is APPENDIX A. a t) dt (A.d) (1.4: Solve the equation du u = sin + dt t u4 − t4 t4 (1.1 Homogeneous Equations Homogeneous function is given as du = f (u.a) becomes dv −2 t2 v = −2 sin(t) dt The homogeneous solution of equation (1.III.III. The solution is then ln t = dv +c f (1.a) .63) for any real positive a.64) In another words if the substitution u = v t is inserted the function f become a function of only v it is homogeneous function.3.65) Example A. t) = f (a u.III.c) (1.c) is u(t) = ce And the general solution is t3 − 3 −t3 3 1−p 1−p (1.III.III. For this case.III. v) dt (A. v) − v (A. the transformation of u = v t transforms equation (A.63) into t dv + v = f (1.e) private solution u= e e t3 3 sin (t) dt +c End Solution A. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS v = u2 (1.IV.b) Using the deﬁnition (1. Example of such case u = u3 − t3 /t3 becomes u = v 3 + 1 .III.b) equation (1.2.
d) (1.2 Variables Separable Equations In ﬂuid mechanics and many other ﬁelds there are diﬀerential equations that referred to variables separable equations.c) can be solved by variable separation as t dv = t dt sin (v) + v 4 − 1 − v Integrating equation (1.b) (1. ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (ODE) Solution Substituting u = v T yields du = sin (v) + v 4 − 1 dt or dv dv + v = sin (v) + v 4 − 1 =⇒ t = sin (v) + v 4 − 1 − v dt dt Now equation (1.b) .2.IV. The solution of this kind of equation is du = f (t) dt (A.V.66) The main point is that f (t) and be segregated from g(u). In fact.c) (1.IV.d) results in dv t2 = +c sin (v) + v 4 − 1 − v 2 The initial condition can be inserted via the boundary of the integral.a) Solution Segregating the variables to be du = u2 t2 dt (1.V. this kind of class of equations appears all over this book.A. For this sort equations.3.IV.IV.67) g(u) Example A.2.e) A. End Solution 309 (1.5: Solve the following ODE du = −u2 t2 dt (1.IV.IV. it can be written that du = f (t)g(u) dt (A.
There are additional methods such numerical analysis.3.4 Second Order Diﬀerential Equations The general idea of solving second order ODE is by converting them into ﬁrst order ODE.3 Other Equations There are equations or methods that were not covered by the above methods.V.68) In a way. the second order ODE is transferred to ﬁrst order by substituting the one linear operator to two ﬁrst linear operators.c) becomes u= t3 −3 +c (1.V. The simplest equations are with constant coeﬃcients such as a d2 u du +b + cu = 0 dt2 dt (A.71) (A.2.V. it is done by substituting est where s is characteristic constant and results in the quadratic equation a s2 + b s + s = 0 (A.69) If b2 > 4 a c then there are two unique solutions for the quadratic equation and the general solution form is u = c1 es1 t + c2 es2 t For the case of b2 = 4 a c the general solution is u = c1 es1 t + c2 t es1 t (A. and perturbation methods.2.310 APPENDIX A. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS Integrating equation (1. the solution of the quadratic equation is a complex number which means that the solution has exponential and trigonometric functions as u = c1 eα t cos(βt) + c2 eα t sin(βt) (A. One such case is the second order ODE with constant coeﬃcients. A. variable substitutions.70) In the case of b2 > 4 a c.d) End Solution A. Many of these methods will be eventually covered by this appendix.V.c) Rearranging equation (1. Practically.72) .b) transformed into − 1 t3 = + c1 u 3 (1. transformation (like Laplace transform).
4. Equations that not equal to zero in this form d2 u du (A. The additional solution of L(up ) is the total solution as a =0 L (utotal ) = L (uh ) +L (up ) =⇒ utotal = uh + up (A. .1 Non–Homogeneous Second ODE Homogeneous equation are equations that equal to zero.6: Solve the following ODE d2 u du +7 + 10 u = 0 dt2 dt (1.2.VI. ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (ODE) Where the real part is α= and the imaginary number is β= √ −b 2a 311 (A. Thus.77) The linearity of the operation creates the possibility of adding the solutions.VI.b) are −2.a) Solution The characteristic equation is s2 + 7 s + 10 = 0 The solution of equation (1.A.VI.76) Where the solution uh is the solution of the homogeneous solution and up is the solution of the particular function l(x). the solution is u = k1 e−2 t + k2 e−5 t End Solution (1.c) A. and −5.74) Example A. where L is Linear operator.73) 4 a c − b2 2a (A.VI. This fact can be used to solve nonhomogeneous equation.2. If the function on the right hand side is polynomial than the solution is will n utotal = uh + i=1 up i (A.b) (1.75) +b + c u = l(x) dt2 dt The solution of the homogeneous equation is zero that is the operation L(uh ) = 0.
312 APPENDIX A.a) (1.1 Segregation of Derivatives If the second order equation f (u.78) then the equation (A. u) = 0 ˙ ¨ can be written or presented in the form f1 (u)u = f2 (u) u ˙ ˙ ¨ (A.VII.b) 6t + 5 36 18 t2 + 30 t + 19 108 9 t2 + 24 t + 17 54 (1.VII. A.79) .5 Non–Linear Second Order Equations Some of the techniques that were discussed in the previous section (ﬁrst order ODE) can be used for the second order ODE such as the variable separation.78) can be integrated u u ˙ v f1 (u)u = ˙ u0 u0 ˙ f2 (u) u = ˙ ¨ v0 f2 (u) v ˙ (A. The derivative of u can be treated as a new function v and v = u.5.VII.2.2. ˙ ˙ ¨ equation (A.VII.78) is referred to as a separable equation (some called it segregated equations).7: Solve the nonhomogeneous equation d2 u du −5 + 6 u = t + t2 dt2 dt Solution The homogeneous solution is u(t) = c1 e2 t + c1 e3 t the particular solution for t is u(t) = and the particular solution of the t2 is u(t) = The total solution is u(t) = c1 e2 t + c1 e3 t + End Solution (1.d) A. Hence.c) (1. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS Example A. u.
a) du dt du dt d2 u =0 dt2 (t = 0) = 0 What happen to the extra Thus the extra dt is disappeared and equation (1.2.b) After the integration equation (1. This equation family is not well discussed in mathematical textbooks6 .d) can be rearranged as du = arcsin dt t u 3 3 2 u0 2 − u 2 + cos (v0 ) 3 (A.VIII. Example A.c) du dt d dt & du dt du dt du dt (1. It can be noticed that the function initial condition is used twice. The papers are still his drawer and waiting to a spare time.A.8: Solve the equation √ du u − sin dt With the initial condition of u(0) = 0 and “dt”? Solution Rearranging the ODE to be √ du u = sin dt & √ and transformation to v is √ u du = sin (v) dv (1.c) becomes 3 3 2 u 2 − u0 2 3 = cos (v0 ) − cos (v) = cos du0 dt − cos du dt (1.VIII. 6 This . ﬁrst with initial integration and second with the second integration.VIII. Note that the derivative initial condition is used once.a) becomes u du = sin d (1.80) Using the ﬁrst order separation method yields dt = 0 u0 du 2 3 3 arcsin u0 2 −u 2 + cos (v0 ) 3 =0 =1 (A.VIII.81) author worked (better word toyed) in (with) this area during his master but to his shame he did not produce any papers on this issue.VIII.VIII. ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (ODE) 313 The integration results in a ﬁrst order diﬀerential equation which should be dealt with the previous methods. The physical reason is that the equation represents a strong eﬀect of the function at a certain point such surface tension problems.d) Equation (1.VIII.
u d2 u d t2 + du dt 2 =0 (A.5.2.86) A.87) It can be noticed that that c2 is actually two diﬀerent constants because the plus minus signs.81) shows that initial condition of the function is used twice while the initial of the derivative is used only once.5. End Solution A. One solution is u = k1 and the second solution is obtained by solving 1 = a The transform of v = du dt du dt d2u d t2 (A.85) + c2 (A.84) which can be solved with the previous methods.3 Energy Equation ODE It is non–linear because the second derivative is square and the function multiply the second derivative. Bifurcation to two solutions leads t 1 du + c = v 2 =⇒ =± a 2 dt which can be integrated as u= ± a 2t + c1 dt = ± a 3 2t + c1 a 3 2 2t + c1 a (A.2.314 APPENDIX A. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS The solution (A.88) . d dt u du dt =0 (A.82) where a is constant.2 Full Derivative Case Equations Another example of special case or families of second order diﬀerential equations which is results of the energy integral equation derivations as u − au du dt d2u d t2 =0 (A.83) results in 1 dv dt =v =⇒ = v dv a dt a (A.
90) +u=0 (1. The solution to constant coeﬃcients is relatively simple and will be presented here. The general form for constant coeﬃcient is d3 u d2 u du +a 2 +b + cu = 0 3 dt dt dt (A. 1999. ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (ODE) after integration u du = k1 dt 315 (A.2. Third unsteady energy equation in accelerated coordinate leads to a third order diﬀerential equation. Example A.IX.9: Show that the solution of u is − √ 3 d2 u d t2 + du dt 2 (A. Solving Third Order Linear Diﬀerential Equations in Terms of Second Order Equations Mark van Hoeij 8 “On 7 The .2. the general solution is depend on the solution of third order polonium. This kind of diﬀerential equation has been studied in the last 30 years to some degree. Thus.IX.A. the linear thirdorder diﬀerential equation” Springer Berlin Heidelberg.b) (1.91) The solution is assumed to be of the form of est which general third order polonium.c) A.IX.a) √ 3 u √ du 3 k1 − u3 √ = t + k2 2 u √ du 3 k − u3 √1 = t + k2 2 (1.89) Further rearrangement and integration leads to the solution which is u2 = t + k2 2 k1 For non–homogeneous equation they can be integrated as well. Solution to more complicate linear equations with non constant coeﬃcient (function of t) can be solved sometimes by Laplace transform or reduction of the equation to second order Olivier Vallee8 .6 Third Order Diﬀerential Equation There are situations where ﬂuid mechanics7 leads to third order diﬀerential equation.
94) (A.100) Only three roots can exist for the Mach angle. one root is real and two roots are complex. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS order polonium has always one real solution. For the case D = 0. (A.316 APPENDIX A.92) (A. derivation of the leading equation (results of the ode) is reduced into quadratic equation and thus the same situation exist. all the roots are real and unequal. θ.98) (A. if D > 0.97) D = Q3 + R 2 and where the deﬁnitions of Q and R are Q= and R= 9a1 a2 − 27a3 − 2a1 3 54 3a2 − a1 2 9 (A. Thus. In the last case where D < 0. s3 + a1 s2 + a2 s + a3 = 0 The solution is 1 s1 = − a1 + (S + T ) 3 1 1 1 √ s2 = − a1 − (S + T ) + i 3(S − T ) 3 2 2 and 1 1 √ 1 s3 = − a1 − (S + T ) − i 3(S − T ) 3 2 2 Where S= 3 (A.95) R+ √ D.99) (A. When the characteristic equation solution has three diﬀerent real roots the solution of the diﬀerential equation is u = c1 es1 t + c2 es2 t + c3 es3 t (A.96) T = and where the D is deﬁned as 3 R− √ D (A.101) . From a mathematical point of view. all the roots are real and at least two are identical.93) (A.
104). For the case of only one real root.2.7 Forth and Higher Order ODE The ODE and partial diﬀerential equations (PDE) can be of any integer order.106) and equation (A. Inserting es t into the ODE an u(n) + an−1 u(n−1) + an−2 u(n−2) + · · · + a1 u + a0 u = 0 yields characteristic equation an sn + an−1 sn−1 + an−2 sn−2 + · · · + a1 s + a0 = 0 (A.107) was discussed earlier. The general procedure is based on the above concept but is some what simpler.105). The solution of equation (A.104) The order of operation is irrelevant as shown in equation (A.2. for constant coeﬃcients ODE can be transformed into multiplication of smaller order linear operations. ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (ODE) In the case the solution to the characteristic has two identical real roots u = (c1 + c2 t) es1 t + c3 es2 t 317 (A. the equation d4 u − u = 0 =⇒ dt4 can be written as combination of d2 −1 dt2 d2 +1 u=0 dt2 or d2 +1 dt2 d2 −1 u=0 dt2 (A.A.102) Similarly derivations for the case of three identical real roots. Sometimes the ODE is fourth order or higher the general solution is based in idea that equation is reduced into a lower order.107) (A. For example.105) d4 −1 u=0 dt4 (A. Thus the solution of d2 +1 u=0 dt2 with the solution of d2 −1 u=0 dt2 (A.106) are the solutions of (A.103) Where a1 is the real part of the complex root and b1 imaginary part of the root. A.109) (A.108) . the solution is u = (c1 sin b1 + c2 cos b1 ) ea1 t + c3 es3 t (A. Generally.
318 APPENDIX A.X.g. are pairs of conjugate complex numbers of si = ai ± bi and some real and diﬀerent e.X.g. roots are similar and some real and diﬀerent e. Thus the solution is u = c1 et + e2 t (c2 sin (t) + c3 cos (t)) + e3 t (c4 sin (3 t) + c5 cos (3 t)) End Solution (1.d) .X.b) With the roots of the equation (1.g. are pairs of conjugate complex numbers of si = ai ± bi .g.b) (these roots can be found using numerical methods or Descartes’ Rule) are s1.4 s5 = = = 3 ± 3i 2±i 1 (1. sk+1 = sk+2 = sk+3 · · · = sn The Solution of Diﬀerential Equation Is u = c1 es1 t + c2 es2 t + · · · + cn esn t u = c1 + c2 t + · · · + ck tk−1 es1 t + ck+1 esk+1 t + ck+2 esk+2 t + · · · + cn esn t u = (cos(b1 t) + sin(b1 t)) ea1 t + · · · + (cos(bi t) + sin(bi t)) eai t + · · · + (cos(bk t) + sin(bk t)) eak t + ck+1 esk+1 t + ck+2 esk+2 t + · · · + cn esn t u = (cos(b1 t) + sin(b1 t)) ea1 t + · · · + (cos(bi t) + sin(bi t)) eai t + · · · + (cos(bk t) + sin(bk t)) eak t + ck+1 + ck+2 t + · · · + ck+ t −1 esk+1 t + ck+2 esk+2 t + ck+3 esk+3 t + · · · + cn esn t Example A.X.g. s1 = s2 = s3 = s4 · · · = sn all roots are real but some are identical e.c) The roots are two pairs of complex numbers and one real number.10: Solve the ﬁfth order ODE d5 u d4 u d3 u d2 u du − 11 4 + 57 3 − 149 2 + 192 − 90 u = 0 5 dt dt dt dt dt Solution The characteristic equation is s5 − 11 s4 + 57 s3 − 149 s2 + 192 s − 90 = 0 (1.a) (1.2 s3. sk+1 = sk+2 = sk+3 · · · = sn k/2 roots. s1 = s2 = · · · = sk and some diﬀerent e. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS If The Solution of Characteristic Equation all roots are real and diﬀerent e.X. sk+1 = sk+2 = sk+3 · · · = sn k/2 roots.
When the discriminant . Normally. . The solution of elliptic equations depends on the boundary conditions The solution of parabolic equations depends on the boundary conditions but as well on the initial conditions. when the discriminant is zero the equation are called parabolic. Generally. Note that ∂x partial derivative also include mix of derivatives such as ux y. As one might expect PDE are harder to solve.111) Where subscripts refers to derivative based on it. this characterization is done for for second order. the same can be done for a secondorder PDE. . The meaning for initial conditions is that of solution depends on some early points of the ﬂow (the solution). The physical meaning of the these deﬁnition is that these equations have diﬀerent characterizations. the PDE solution is done by transforming the PDE to one or more ODE. Generally. Many situations in ﬂuid mechanics can be described by PDE equations. The nature of the solution is based whether the equation is elliptic parabolic and hyperbolic. Equation (A.A.113) In the same manner that conic geometry equations are classiﬁed are based on the discriminant a2 − 4 axx ayy . One example of such equation is heat equation.3. . sometimes similar deﬁnition can be applied for other order. ux = ∂u .2. However. ayy might depend upon ”x” and ”y”. PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 319 A. The hyperbolic equations are associated with method of characteristics because physical situations depends only on the initial conditions. For example.8 A general Form of the Homogeneous Equation dn u dn−1 u du + k1 tn−1 n−1 + · · · + kn−1 t + kn u = a x dtn dt dt The homogeneous equation can be generalized to k0 tn (A.110) To be continue A. axy .112) is similar to the equations for a conic geometry: axx x2 + axy x y + ayy y 2 + · · · = 0 (A. ux . The general secondorder PDE in two independent variables has the form axx uxx + 2axy uxy + ayy uyy + · · · = 0 (A.112) The coeﬃcients axx . Example of such equation is F (ut . Partial diﬀerential equations are categorized by the order of highest derivative.) = 0 (A.3 Partial Diﬀerential Equations Partial Diﬀerential Equations (PDE) are diﬀerential equations which include function includes the partial derivatives of two or more variables. The disxy criminant can be function of the x and y and thus can change sign and thus the characteristic of the equation.
However. The equations that not mentioned above are elliptic which appear in ideal ﬂow and subsonic ﬂow and sub critical open channel ﬂow.114) The interpretation the equation characteristic is complicated.. If it turned that assumption is wrong the ratio is not constant.118) Equations (A. the constant is denoted as λ and with this deﬁnition the PDE is reduced into two ODE. In ﬂuid mechanics this kind equation appear in supersonic ﬂow or in supper critical ﬂow in open channel ﬂow.118) are ODE that can be solved with the methods described before for certain boundary condition. the physics dictates this character and will be used in the book. .119) (A. A. The ﬁrst equation is X function 1 ∂X(x) =λ X(x) ∂x The second ODE is for Y 1 ∂Y (y) = −λ Y (y) ∂y (A.1 Firstorder equations First order equation can be written as u = ax ∂u ∂u + ay + .115) results in Y (y) ∂X(x) ∂Y (y) + X(x) =0 ∂x ∂y (A.. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS is larger then zero the equation is referred as hyperbolic equations.115) The solution is assume to be u = Y (y) X(x) and substitute into the (A.116) yields 1 ∂X(x) 1 ∂Y (y) + =0 X(x) ∂x Y (y) ∂y (A.320 APPENDIX A.117) A possible way the equation (A.119) and (A. An example of ﬁrst order equation is ∂u ∂u + =0 ∂x ∂y (A.117) can exist is that these two term equal to a constant. ∂x ∂x (A.116) Rearranging equation (A. Is it possible that these terms not equal to a constant? The answer is no if the assumption of the solution is correct. Hence.3.
and opposite angles α.by ﬁnding the quadrant 2 2 α that lies in) 2 α 1 + cos α =± (same as above) 2 2 α 1 − cos α sin α 6. tan 2α = 1 − tan2 α 4.4. tan(α − β) = tan α + tan β 1 − tan α tan β tan α − tan β 1 + tan α tan β 1. consider the triangle with sides of length a. TRIGONOMETRY 321 A. a+b+c (Heron’s Formula) where s = 2 β a c γ b α Fig. c2 = a2 + b2 − 2 a b cos γ (Law of Cosines) 5. tan = = 2 sin α 1 + cos α for formulas 36. cos(α − β) = cos α cos β + sin α sin β 5. Area of triangle = s(s − a)(s − b)(s − c). tan(α + β) = 6. b. Area of triangle = 1 a b sin γ 2 6. cos 2α = cos2 x − sin2 x = 2 cos2 x − 1 = 1 − 2 sin2 x 2 tan α 3.7.4 Trigonometry These trigonometrical identities were set up by Keone Hon with slight modiﬁcation 1. cos(α + β) = cos α cos β − sin α sin β 4. . sin 2α = 2 sin α cos α 2. The tringle angles sides. respectively 5. cos2 α = 2 sin α sin β sin γ 3. sin2 α = 4. and c. sin α 1 − cos α =± (determine whether it is + or . cos 1 − 2 cos(2α) 2 1 + 2 cos(2α) 2. and γ. = = (Law of Sines) a b c 1. sin(α − β) = sin α cos β − sin β cos α 3.A. β. A. sin(α + β) = sin α cos β + sin β cos α 2.
MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS .322 APPENDIX A.
265. 228 Correction factor. 33 Conduction. 209 Linear accelerate System. 184. 262 Flow regimes in one pipe. 142 Density ratio. 252 Flow out tank. 266 Fluid Statics Geological system. 3 Atmospheric pressure. 184 Arc shape. 215 External forces. 216 Add mass. 217 D D’Alembert paradox. 111. 264 GaussOstrogradsky Theorem. 209 Rotating Coordinate System. 82 Correction factor for averaged velocity. 215 dilettante. 209 Convection. 3. 90 Add Force. 3 d‘Alembertian Operator. 267 E Energy conservation. 11 Divergence Theorem. 113 buoyant force. 85 eﬀective. 283 Extended Open channel ﬂow. 92 Forces Curved surfaces. 83. 11. 298 Double choking phenomenon. 24 Bulk modulus of mixtures. 73 Average Momentum. 210 Energy equation Frictionless Flow. 298 . 105 Cylindrical Coordinates. 87 Concentrating surfaces raise. 194 Convective acceleration. 107 Archimedes. 68. 170 B Bingham’s model. 83. 8. 186 Averaged kinetic energy. 199 Counter–current Pulse ﬂow. 207 Steady State. 173 Average Velocity Integral Analysis. 199 Averaged momentum energy. 83–85 Fully ﬂuidized bed. 125 Diﬀerential analysis. 265 Compressibility factor. 216 Add momentum.SUBJECTS INDEX 323 Subjects Index A absolute viscosity. 199 Cut–out shapes. 196 Flow regime map. 184. 88 Acceleration. 282 Counter–current ﬂow. 121 C Co–current ﬂow. 207 Euler equations. 11 Body force. 279 G Gas–gas ﬂow. 279 Flow ﬁrst mode. 28 buoyancy. 194 Conservative force. 283 F First Law of Thermodynamics. 69 Boundary Layer. 12 Accelerated system. 77. 7. 281 Annular ﬂow. 155 bulk modulus. 297 Deformable control volume. 67. 82. 70. 193 Fixed ﬂuidized bed. 23. 193 Energy Equation Accelerated System. 104 Free expansion. angular.
11 O Open channel ﬂow. 142 Non–Linear Equations. 134. 279 Poiseuille ﬂow. 85. 169 R Radiation. 305 Integral analysis big picture. 171 index notation. 265 Real gas. 283 Horizontal ﬂow. 11 Pulse ﬂow. 67. 109 Pressure center. constant of integration. 265 Hydrostatic pressure. 242 Non–deformable control volume. 152 Limitation of the integral approach. 252 Polynomial function. 160 small picture. 121. 268 H Harmonic function. 160 Integral equation. 282 purely viscous ﬂuids. 228 Lockhart martinelli model. 76 Initial condition. 194 Rayleigh–Taylor instability. 206 L Lapse rate. 304 Liquid phase. 264 Local acceleration. 133. 243 Moving surface Free surface. 261 Multiphase ﬂow against the gravity. 244 Moving surface. 244 Multi–phase ﬂow. 249 Concentric cylinders.324 Gravity varying Ideal gas. 236 K Kinematic boundary condition. 265 Orthogonal Coordinates. 77 Return path for ﬂow regimes. 86 APPENDIX A. 88 Linear operations. 270 Metacentric point. 1. 26 Interfacial instability. 241 Minimum velocity solid–liquid ﬂow. 77 Inclined manometer. 85 Real gas. 276 P Pendulum action. 79 Liquid–Liquid Regimes. 77 Isotropic viscosity. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS Momentum conservation. 228 Momentum equation Accelerated system. 216 Inverted manometer. 307 Normal stress. 215 Neutral moment Zero moment. 11 M “Magniﬁcation factor”. 205 Linear acceleration. 100. 121 Neutral stable. 85 Leibniz integral rule. 101 pseudoplastic. 279 Momentum Conservation. 123 Micro ﬂuids. 299 Oscillating manometer. 135 Newtonian ﬂuids. 8 No–slip condition. 267 . 108 I Ideal gas. 235 N NavierStokes equations. 76 Mass velocity. 278 Mixed ﬂuidized bed. 70 Pneumatic conveying. 298 horizontal counter–current ﬂow. 243 kinematic viscosity. 233 Moving boundary. 132 Piezometric pressure.
309 Vectors. 114 Turbomachinary. 240 Segregated equations. 152 Divergence Theorem. 277 Solid–solid ﬂow. 294 Vertical counter–current ﬂow. 12 U Unstable condition. 271 325 S Scalar function. 83. 232 transformation. 73 Variables Separation 1st equation. 119 Stability analysis. 277 Solid–liquid ﬂow. 271 Void Fraction. 104 Second Law of Thermodynamics. 207 Second viscosity coeﬃcient. 284 Slip velocity. 11 Torricelli’s equation. 95 Transition to continuous. 107. 278 Thermal pressure. 243 Solid–ﬂuid ﬂow Gas dynamics aspects. 121 Stability in counter–current ﬂow. 180 Liquid holdup. 264 T Tank emptying parameters. 240 thixotropic. 87 Spherical volume. 111 cubic. 187 Two–Phase Gas superﬁcial velocity. 179 V Vapor pressure. 271 . 227 Superﬁcial velocity. 298 Rocket mechanics. 68. 169 Triangle shape. 271 Reversal ﬂow.SUBJECTS INDEX Reynolds Transport Theorem. 312 shear stress. 83 stability analysis. 293 Vectors Algebra. 264 Spherical coordinates. 6 Slip condition range. 283 Stable condition. 230 Cartesian coordinates. 240 Thermodynamical pressure. 84. 230. 265 Stress tensor. 205 Total moment. 265 W Watson’s method. 297 Westinghouse patent. 83 Unsteady State Momentum. 282 Vertical ﬂow. 203 Terminal velocity. 19 Wave Operator. 131 stratiﬁed ﬂow. 280 Solid–ﬂuid ﬂow. 229 substantial derivative. 229 symmetry. 271 Wetness fraction. 271 Quality of dryness. 266 Sutherland’s equation.
326 APPENDIX A. 4 Stokes.. 4 E Evangelista Torricelli. Osborne. 4 Martinelli. 152 Lockhart. 262 M Manning. 298 T Taitle. 4 W Weisbach. 215 Prandtl. 4 K KuttaJoukowski. Ernst Kraft Wilhelm. 298 N Navier. 4 Nusselt. Jean Louis. 215 G Ganguillet. 298 Poiseuille. Hermann von. 4 Mikhail Vasilievich Ostrogradsky. 4 Blasius. 4 V von Karman. 4 Westinghouse. 275 P PierreSimon Laplace. 4. MATHEMATICS FOR FLUID MECHANICS Authors Index B Bhuckingham. 4 de Saint Venant. Barr´. 315 C Cichilli. 133 Reynolds. 253 O Olivier Vallee. 275 R Rayleigh. 4 S Stanton. 4 Gauss. 262 Taylor. 262.I. 4 Blasiu. Carl Friedrich. 264 L Leibniz. Claude–Louis. SimonDenis. 249 Poisson. 4 . 215 e Duckler. 4 Froude. 152 Rose. 4 D Darcy. G. 133 H Helmholtz. 262 Meye. George Gabriel. 215 Nikuradse. 205 F Fanning.